Home

2 - Sony

Contents

1. Buttons used when the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled Button DELAY Operation Press this button turning it on to enter a delay value from the Flexi Pad STB standby OFF Press this button to switch to standby off mode This button cannot be used for frame memory clip operations REC record Press this button at the same time as the PLAY button to start recording This button cannot be used for frame memory clip operations STOP Press this button to stop the tape disk or frame memory clip START TC start Press these buttons to set the timecode timecode of the start and stop points STOP TC stop to the current time at those points timecode When the device the operation applies to is a VTR disk recorder the start stop point updated by the setting of the MENU button is as follows e When the MENU button is On Point on the timeline e When the MENU button is Off Point for cue up and play Button Operation VAR variable speed Press this button and turn the Z ring play to play or rewind the tape disk or frame memory clip at a variable speed 1 to 3 times normal playback speed and direction proportional to the rota
2. Memory recall section EDIT ENBL button In effect editing mode the memory recall section is composed of two pages You use the buttons displayed on each page to create and edit keyframes Creating and Editing Keyframes soueAey sa deyp 153 Page 1 button display e When the PAGE 1 2 button is pressed the display switches to page 2 Page 2 button display EFF DUR KF DUR PAGE EXIT 2 2 saeweiyAoy 1 Ja deyo 154 KF LOOP CNST DUR STOR GOTO GOTO RE TC KF WIND FROM lt lt gt gt TO PREV NEXT RUN rhe X 74 When the PAGE 2 2 button is pressed the display switches to page 1 Creation Creating new keyframes To create new keyframes recall an empty register and then use the following procedure to create and insert each new keyframe 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to effect editing mode 2 Create the image you want to be the first keyframe 3 Press the INS button This takes the current image as the first keyframe You can make a setting in the Setup menu so that when you reca
3. Menu Disabled operation setting Number Path 7321 6 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config e Selection of items related to M E 2 gt External Bus Link gt Link Bus Adjust e Selection of items related to Key5 to 8 7321 7 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config M E 2 DME selection gt Region Button Assign 7321 9 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config e KEY5 to KEY8 KEY1 5 to KEY 4 8 selection gt Transition Module ADD SHIFT selection 7321 18 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config e M E 2 settings gt Util Bus Key Inhibit e Key5 to Key8 selection 7321 19 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config All menu operations gt Menu Panel 7321 27 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config All menu operations gt TB Module DME Ch Inhibit 7322 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt e Setting of items related to M E 2 DME Assign e Audio Follow settings 7322 5 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Primary33 to Primary48 DME Monitor Video DME Monitor Key M E2 Assign gt Main V K Pair Assign OUT1 to M E2 OUT4 selection 7322 6 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Primary 33 to 48 DME Monitor Video DME Monitor Key M E 2 Out1 to Assign gt Src Name Src Color M E 2 Out4 settings 7322 11 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt All menu operations Assign gt Mixer Xpt Assign 7324 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Prefs e Selection of following utility commands Utility DME Monitor Video ST DME Monito
4. Transition rate display AUTO TRANS CUR T e _ Name Description Fader status e Displays the transition progress as a display bar transition indicator e In anon sync state Non Sync and Sync appear at the top and bottom Fader lever e Move this up or down to carry out the transition e When you press the transition type selection button to which the KF button function has been assigned and turn it on you can use this as a keyframe fader Transition rate This shows the transition rate the time display from the beginning of a transition to its completion set for an auto transition in frames AUTO TRANS Pressing this button carries out an auto transition transition of the set transition rate button duration The transition starts immediately and the button lights amber e When the transition completes the button goes off CUT button Pressing this button carries out the transition as a cut i e instantaneously Wipe direction selection buttons When a wipe or DME wipe is selected as the transition type you can press to light these buttons to select the wipe direction Name NORM normal Description The wipe proceeds in the direction from black to white or in the direction of the arrows as shown in Wipe Pattern List p 264 Name REV rever
5. Cross point control block p 22 Transition control block p 24 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 21 Sued JO suonouny pue sewen z 13 deyo Sued JO suolouny pue sowen Zz Jeldeup 22 Cross Point Control Block In the cross point control block you can select the signals to be used in the M E bank or PGM PST bank gt R OUOUUUUUU ist row Source name displays Cross point buttons Cross point buttons These select the signals used for video processing on this M E bank or PGM PST bank Each row of buttons corresponds to one or more signal buses within the switcher OOO UE mo TOOTS mwanao J QO QO Q Kom Background B row Name Description 2nd row e Use this to select the cross point of the bus that is specified with the 1st row buttons e f the utility shotbox function is selected with the 1st row buttons use this to recall the register or to execute the function Background A Use this to select the signal as the row current background video on this M E bank or PGM PST bank Background B Use this to select the signal as the row background video after the transition on this M E bank or PGM PST bank Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel a You can sel
6. Command name Function Button status Lit amber Off SWR RemoteS1 Enbl Switcher Remote S1 enabled disabled Enabled Disabled SWR RemoteS2 Enbl Switcher Remote S2 enabled disabled ME1 PGM1 ST M E 1 PGM1 output safe title on off On Off ve PGM4 ST MES PGM4 output safe title on off ME1 PVW ST M E 1 preview output safe title on off On Off ME1 Clean ST M E 1 clean output safe title on off On Off ME1 K PVW ST eT key preview output safe title on On Off 0 PP PGM1 ST P P PGM1 output safe title on off On Off e PGM4 ST a PGM4 output safe title on off PP PVW ST P P preview output safe title on off On Off PP Clean ST P P clean output safe title on off On Off PP K PVW ST P P key preview output safe title on off On Off Edit PVW ST Edit preview output safe title on off On Off Preset ST Preset output safe title on off On Off AUX1 ST AUX1 output safe title on off On Off o ST EA output safe title on off FM Src1 Frame Freeze Frame freeze of frame memory source 1 During frame freeze Either of the other two states FM Src1 Filed Freeze Field freeze of frame memory source 1 During field freeze Either of the other two states FM Src1 Freeze Off Release freeze of frame memory source 1 While freeze being released Either of the other two states FM Src2 Frame Freeze Frame freeze of frame memory source 2 During frame freeze Either of the other two states FM Src2 Field Fre
7. 1 All replications in the same orientation 2 Even numbered rows staggered 3 Even numbered columns and rows inverted 4 Even numbered columns and rows inverted and even numbered rows staggered 1 Open the M E 1 gt Wipe gt Main Modify menu 1155 2 Press Multi turning it on 3 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout Possible combinations of wipe patterns and modifiers Modifier Wipe pattern pattern number Available Not available Direction 1 to 24 Edge 1 to 24 Positioner 17 18 21 to 24 1 to 16 19 20 Rotation 1 to 24 Aspect ratio 9 to 16 19t024 1to 8 17 18 Multiplication 1 to 24 Wipe Modify Clear Press Default Recall at the lower left of the menu screen turning it on then press the Wipe VF5 button to return the wipe settings to their initial status For details about initial status amp Saving User Defined Settings p 214 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions You carry out independent key transition wipe setting operations using the Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer This section describes an example using key 1 on the M E 1 bank Open the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition menu 1116 select Wipe Adjust and di
8. VF1 Key1 HF1 Type 1111 Yes ae ie Chroma Adjust 1111 1 Yes VF4 Key4 Matte Adjust 1111 2 5 Yes Pattern Select 1116 2 Yes Wipe Adjust 1116 1 Yes Pattern Select 1116 2 Yes Signal Select 1111 3 Yes Key Priority 1173 No HF2 Edge 1112 Yes Matte Adjust 1112 1 Yes Mix Ptn Select 1112 2 Yes Zabton Adjust 1112 3 Yes Pattern Select 1116 2 Yes Mix Ptn Select 1112 2 Yes Main Mask 1113 Yes Matte Adjust 1112 1 Yes Wipe Adjust 1116 1 Yes Key Delay Mode 1112 4 Yes HF3 Main Mask 1113 Yes Mask Ptn Select 1113 1 Yes HF5 Processed Key 1115 Yes gt Monitor 1115 1 Yes 8 Border Crop 1115 2 9 Yes x Resizer Process 1115 3 Yes Enhanced Effect 1115 4 Yes HF6 Transition 1116 Yes Wipe Adjust 1116 1 Yes Pattern Select 1116 2 Yes DME Wipe Adjust 1116 3 Yes 1ch Pattern Select 1116 4 Yes 2ch Pattern Select 1116 5 Yes Remove From Begin 1116 7 Yes VF5 Wipe HF 1 Main Pattern 1151 Yes HF4 Edge Direction 1154 Yes Matte Adjust 1154 1 Yes Mix Ptn Select 1154 2 Yes HF5 Main Modify 1155 Yes HF7 Wipe Snapshot 1157 No DME Wipe Snapshot 1167 No Menu Tree 267 xlpueddy 268 Menu Page No Default Recall VF6 DME Wipe HF1 1ch 1161 Yes HF2 2ch 1162 Yes HF4 Edge Direction 1164 Yes HF5 Modify 1165 Yes Remove From Begin 1
9. 4 Modify keyframe 2 a Changing the position of Se background B in the horizontal direction Select keyframes 1 to 3 and modify simultaneously d Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution Result Background B of keyframes 1 and 3 is moved in the horizontal direction by the same amount as in keyframe 2 Creating and Editing Keyframes Deletion Deleting keyframes 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect at the desired edit point When the edit point is on a keyframe this is what you delete If the edit point is between two keyframes the previous keyframe is what you delete 3 To delete a number of keyframes in a single operation y P press the FROM TO button or the ALL button If you press the FROM TO button specify the keyframe range For details about how to specify a range of keyframes Modifying more than one keyframe simultaneously p 155 4 Press the DEL button This deletes the keyframe Deleting a keyframe reduces the total duration of the effect In constant duration mode amp p 146 however the duration does not change For details Changes in the effect duration caused by deleting a keyframe p 147 Movement Moving keyframes 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it
10. Snapshot Menu Status 6300 Menu Page No Default Recall No Menu Tree Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 Master Snapshot HF 1 Store 6311 No Edit 6311 1 No HF2 Lock 6312 No HF3 Copy 6313 No HF4 Move 6314 No HF5 Swap 6315 No HF6 Delete 6316 No HF7 Rename 6317 No VF2 Snapshot HF 1 Attribute 6321 No Xpt Hold 6321 1 No Clip Event 6321 2 No Play 2522 No HF2 Lock 6322 No HF3 Copy 6323 No HF4 Move 6324 No HF5 Swap 6325 No HF6 Delete 6326 No HF7 Rename 6327 No VF3 Wipe Snapshot HF2 Lock 6332 No HF3 Copy 6333 No HF4 Move 6334 No et HF5 Swap 6335 No gt HF6 Delete 6336 No HF7 Rename 6337 No a VF4 DME Snapshot HF2 Lock 6342 No a HF3 Copy 6343 No HF4 Move 6344 No HF5 Swap 6345 No HF6 Delete 6346 No HF7 Rename 6347 No VF5 Key Snapshot HF1 Attribute 6351 No HF2 Lock 6352 No HF3 Copy 6353 No HF4 Move 6354 No HF5 Swap 6355 No HF6 Delete 6356 No HF7 Rename 6357 No Menu Tree 275 Shotbox Menu VF1 Register Menu Page No Default Recall HF1 Store Recall 6411 No Edit 6411 1 No HF2 Lock 6412 No HF8 Copy 6413 No HF4 Move 6414 No HF5 Swap 6415 No HF6 Delete 6416 No HF7 Rename
11. Menu Macro Register Editing You can display the current state of a menu macro register using the Menu Macro Register menu For details about the display Effect Status Display p 164 However region names are not displayed In the Menu Macro Register menu you can do the following editing operations on menu macro registers e Lock Write protect the contents of the menu macro register e Copy Copy the contents of one menu macro register to another menu macro register e Delete Delete the contents of a menu macro register e Name Attach a name to a menu macro register The operations for menu macro register editing are the same as those for effect register editing p 164 However it is not necessary to select a region in macro register editing Macro Timeline By recording macro recall and execute action on a timeline in the same way as for key frames in an effect you can automatically execute them in a sequence This timeline is called a macro timeline and one macro timeline can have up to 99 macros being executed simultaneously in parallel There are 99 registers in the Macro region that can be recorded on the macro timeline numbered to 99 These Macro Timeline registers are distinct from the registers where individual macros are stored If you use a macro timeline to superimpose more than one macro the macros may not be executed according to the timing information registere
12. 5 M 23 zs 2 mi x A 5 OU TRNS DEV SEL 2 Inthe region selection buttons select the switcher bank 3 Press the TRNS SEL button in the memory recall section The button displays in the memory recall section change as shown in the following illustration and you can select the type of transition for which to set the rate TRNS TRNS SEL 4 Press the TRNS button You can now set the M E 1 bank background transition rate 5 while viewing the alphanumeric display enter the transition rate you want to set with the memory recall section button If required press the TC button to toggle the input mode frame input or timecode input e Enter a value of up to three digits e To cancel the input press any of the mode selection buttons 6 Press the ENTR button Setting the transition rate by a menu operation d When operating from the M E 1 bank for example open the M E 1 gt Misc gt Transition menu 1171 2 Select any transition type in the lt Transition Type gt group 3 Set the transition rate No Parameter Adjustment 1 Trans
13. 5 Press Set to confirm the setting To cancel an assignment Select the corresponding button then press Clear To return all button assignments to the factory default state Press Default Cross Point Settings Creating Cross Point Assign Tables AS cross point assign tables you can create a main table and up to 14 other tables table 1 to table 14 However you can only carry out assignment of the video and key combinations in the main table Creating the main table In the main table a pair consisting of a video signal and a key signal is assigned to each button number You can also assign the same signal to another button number at the same time Further you can delete currently assigned signals from the main table 1 In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign menu 7322 or Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Table Button Assign menu 7322 1 press Main V K Pair Assign The Main V K Pair Assign menu 7322 5 appears The left of the status area shows the video and key signal names and source number currently assigned in the main table On the right is a list of the source numbers and signals that can be assigned When the shift button is pressed the number column is distinguished by color Select the button number When assigning a video signal press Video in the lt Assign gt group When assigning a key signal press Key You can select a video signal and
14. On each switcher bank each cross point button has two button numbers and you use the shift button to switch between these numbers In the case of a 24 button layout the button numbers are as follows Cross point control block button numbers Button Number when Number when the shift button the shift button is not pressed is pressed From the left end to 1 to 23 24 to 46 the 23rd button You can use the rightmost 24th button as a SIDE FLAG button In this case the shift button moves one to the left to the 23rd and the button numbers are offset by one For details about the SIDE FLAG button amp Assigning a Cross Point Button to Enable Disable Side Flags p 226 Switching button numbers The rightmost 24th button functions as a shift button The shift button function can be disabled in the Setup menu When selecting the signals of button numbers 1 to 23 press the cross point button for the desired signal To select button numbers 24 to 46 hold down the shift button and press the cross point button for the desired signal Inhibiting Cross Point Button Operations For each cross point button you can temporarily inhibit operations This setting is cleared when you reset the control panel Signal Selection Buses for which operations can be inhibited This setting applies to the cross point buttons in each switcher bank If you make the setting for one cross po
15. Files that can be manipulated p 200 e The frame memory is not selected when you press All Select To apply the setting to frame memory press Frame Memory turning it on When frame memory is selected it is not possible to apply settings to the lt Category gt group data e You cannot select User Setup when Src Patch Link is lit on the menu screen p 262 4 Press Load 5 Check the message then press Yes To execute the load after clearing the data in the destination regions Before pressing Load press CLR Before Load turning it on The following categories of data can be cleared before execution of the load Effect Snapshot Wipe Snapshot DME Wipe Snapshot Key Snapshot Shotbox and Macro When frame memory is selected for the setting the data is always deleted before execution of the load Batch Copying Files To copy files between a local disk and removable disk use the following procedure 1 Open the File gt All External File gt All menu 7161 2 Inthe operating device selection section select the storage location Local Disk or Removable Disk and directory of the source files 3 Inthe operating device selection section select the destination storage location Local Disk or Removable Disk and directory of the source files 4 ifthere are files you do not want to copy remove them from the selection in the lt Category gt group To select all files
16. Keyframe duration and effect duration The effect duration may also be changed by inserting or deleting keyframes Changes in the effect duration caused by inserting a keyframe e When the effect is stopped on a keyframe inserting a keyframe increases the effect duration by the duration of the inserted keyframe e When the effect is stopped between two keyframes inserting a keyframe does not change the effect duration In constant duration mode p 146 the duration of the current keyframe is reduced to zero and the new keyframe is inserted with the previous duration of the current keyframe Thus the effect duration does not change Insertion Change in effect duration position Insertion 0 1 2 3 4 before the p77777777 ne first 2 J keyframe 2 3 4 5 Insertion 1 2 3 4 between two keyframes 1 2 4 5 Insertion at 1 2 3 4 an existing e Eeo keyframe 1 2 3 4 5 Insertion at 1 2 3 4 the last keyframe 1 2 3 4 5 Keyframe insertion position and the change in effect duration Changes in the effect duration caused by deleting a keyframe e When the effect is stopped on a keyframe a delete operation deletes the keyframe and reduces the effect duration by the duration of the deleted keyframe e When the effect is stopped between two keyframes a delete operation deletes the preceding keyframe and reduces the effect duration by the duration o
17. 2 In the device selection area on the left select Register 3 Inthe device selection area on the right select Local Disk or Removable Disk then select a directory Operations on Individual Files Soll4 9 saydeyo 203 sellq 9 seideyo 204 4 Select the data to be saved and the file in which to save it You can select more than one file 5 Press gt Save This saves the selected register data in the specified location If there is already data in the specified location a confirmation message appears Select Yes to overwrite the data Saving frame memory files Between steps 3 and 4 of the procedure in Saving Files above do as follows 1 To select the frame memory folder press Default in the device selection in the list on the left 2 Press the required folder name in the pull down menu 3 Carry out the same operations as in steps 1 and 2 on the list on the right 4 Select the type of data to be displayed e To display still image files press Still e To display clip files press Clip e To display all types of file press AI Loading Files As an example to load a snapshot file from a local disk or removable disk to a register use the following procedure 1 Open the File gt Snapshot gt Snapshot menu 7131 2 In the device selection area on the left select Register 3 In the device selection area on the right select where the file is held
18. Enter the register number as required and press Enter The current macro is stored in the register The menu screen switches to the menu that was on the screen immediately before the offline editing Macro Attachment Assigning To delete an event T Inthe macro listing select the event you want to delete 2 Press Delete This deletes the selected event If a deleted Event statement is followed by a Continue statement the Continue statement is converted to an Event statement 3 Press Store To create a new macro T From the list in any of the following menus select an empty register or file and press Off Line Edit e Macro gt Register gt Lock menu 5412 e Macro gt Register gt Delete menu 5416 e Macro gt Register gt Rename menu 5417 e File gt Shotbox Macro gt Macro gt File Edit menu 7142 1 The Off Line Edit menu 7142 3 appears 2 Carry out steps 2 to 7 of the procedure in To insert an event p 189 to create an event To close the Off Line Edit menu without saving the editing results Press Exit Macro Attachment Assigning Macro attachment is a function whereby a macro register is assigned to a control panel button or a particular position of a fader lever linking the execution of the button function or a fader lever operation with a macro execution Setting a macro attachment to a button Select one of the following three linking modes to make the macro a
19. Format operation failed 10 Format operation failed 11 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore When Backup was pressed in the above menu formatting of the HDD failed Cannot access the partition 12 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Backup but the logical drives of the external HDD could not be accessed Check that the external HDD is correctly formatted Cannot access the directory 20 Cannot access the directory 21 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Backup but the directory of the external HDD could not be accessed The external HDD is busy 22 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Backup to the external HDD which was busy and could not be accessed Try again after you check that the access lamp of the HDD or the indicator of the menu is turned off The external HDD is full 32 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Backup to the external HDD which does not have enough capacity Backup operation failed 33 Backup operation failed 34 Backup operation failed 36 2562 Frame Memory gt External
20. 2 When Pair is off press a target FM selection button to select the target 3 Toset loop playback press Loop turning it on 4 Press Play To stop playback press Stop To cue up Press Cue To play the image at the beginning of the clip Clip Begin Press Rewind To play the image at the end of the clip Clip End Press FF To specify the playback start point To set the current position as the playback start point press Set in the lt Start TC gt group To set to any position press the Start status button and enter a timecode value from the numeric keypad window To specify the playback stop point Start playback press the STOP button to stop playback at the desired position then press Set in the lt Stop TC gt group To set to any position press the Stop status button and enter a timecode value from the numeric keypad window To change the current position Press the Current status button and enter a timecode value from the numeric keypad window To delete the parts of a clip file other than the playback part trimming Set the playback start point and stop point 2 Press Trim 3 Check the message then press Yes Using the device control block to play back clips A frame memory clip must first be recalled with a menu operation 1 Press the DEV button and select the frame memory clip for playback FM1 CLIP to FM8 CLIP If the pair mode is on both main an
21. Effect duration 4 Display end time Timeline Region Prev Assign Select 6115 Keyframe status This shows the region name register number register name number of remaining keyframes current position and timecode with regard to the reference region Region name and register number This shows the region name and the number of the register recalled in this region The display color indicates the region selection as follows Blue Reference region White Selected region Gray Not selected region Delay numerical display This shows the delay between carrying out an effect operation and the start of the actual effect Keyframe number total This shows the number of the keyframe at the cursor position and the total number of keyframes in the register Display start time This shows the timecode value for the timeline display start point Display end time This shows the timecode value for the timeline display end point Delay display on timeline When a delay is set the interval is shown by a blue line Pause point A P appears where a pause is set Total timeline length The total time of delays and effect duration appears in white O Effect duration The total duration of the effect appears in orange Scrollable parameter setting button This button is used when scrolling the screen When the target region timeline is not displayed on the screen place the cursor
22. No Parameter 1 Inner Soft Adjustment Border inner softness 2 Bound Soft Border boundary softness To apply a beveled color edge T Inthe lt Border Mode gt group of the Border Crop menu press Beveled Color Edge 2 Inthe lt Color Adjust gt group select the edges for J P adjustment among the Top Left Right and Bottom edges To select all the four edges press All 3 Set the color parameters For details amp To apply color to a border p 79 4 Press Border Soft 5 Set the following parameters No Parameter 1 Inner Soft Adjustment Border inner softness Resizer No Parameter 2 Bound Soft Adjustment Border boundary softness Applying Resizer Effects For example to make the effect settings for key 1 of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key menu 1115 press Resizer turning it on 2 Press Enhanced Effect The Enhanced Effect 1115 4 menu appears Edge Main Mask Matte D 100 00 i 8H Mode Source Proc Key On Trans Off Trans Priority 1 K4 3 K2 4 Ki 01 00 cB Off Key Bus Auto Select Resizer Resizer Effect Resizer Process Border Crop Mosaic Defocus Mode Applying a mosaic 1 In the Enhanced Effect menu press Mosaic turning it on 2 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Siz
23. Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad SNAPSHOT button Alphanumeric display Cro G O Memory recall section Region selection buttons Banks and Registers In order to support 99 registers the Flexi Pad handles the registers in groups These groups are called banks and there are ten banks numbered from 0 to 9 The correspondence between banks and registers is shown in the following table Bank number Register numbers Bank 0 1to10 Bank 1 11 to 20 Bank 2 21 to 30 Bank 3 31 to 40 Bank 4 41 to 50 Bank 5 51 to 60 Bank 6 61 to 70 Bank 7 71 to 80 Bank 8 81 to 90 Bank 9 91 to 99 Selecting banks in the Flexi Pad You press buttons in the memory recall section to select banks Pressing the BANK SEL button changes the memory recall section display as follows and then press a button in the range 0 to 9 T 8 9 EXIT gt _ lt 4 5 6 gt _ lt 1 2 3 o This selects the bank and the buttons in the memory recall section show the register states as follows Lit yellow Last recalled register Lit orange
24. 1 Open the Frame Memory gt File gt Rename menu 2546 In the status area regardless of whether pair mode is on or off all of the saved files appear as thumbnails 2 Select the file to be renamed 3 if necessary check the contents of the frame memory clip in the thumbnail display No Parameter Adjustment 3 Viewer For a movie the current frame position For a still image no effect 4 Press Rename 5 Enter the new file name and press Enter The following names cannot be used CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 Using an External HDD You can connect an HDD to the USB port of the switcher processor to carry out the following operations Format Format the HDD Backup Batch save files from frame memory to the HDD Restore Restore frame memory from files saved on the HDD Since image data saved in memory is lost when the system is powered off using an external HDD allows required data to be preserved Only one HDD can be connected to a single switcher processor While the HDD is being accessed frame memory operations are not possible This applies to all operations for frame memory including frame memory recall by a snapshot operation During frame memory clip playback p 112 of the pair assigned to either of the target FM selection buttons frame memory op
25. 1 Open the M E 1 gt Wipe gt Main Modify menu 1155 2 Press Position in the lt Position gt group turning it on 3 Set the following parameters No Parameter 1 Position H Adjustment Horizontal position e Negative values move to the left e Positive values move to the right 2 Position V Vertical position e Negative values move down e Positive values move up To return the pattern position to the center of the screen In the lt Position gt group press Center To move the pattern from its current position to the center through the course of a transition In the lt Position gt group press Auto Center turning it on To set the wipe position using the trackball You can also set the wipe position using the trackball in the device control block 1 Press the M E1 button in the device control block turning it on The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position setting as follows Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings s d M g Je deyp 85 Table 1 Buttons and assigned settings 2 In the lt Rotation gt group select the rotation type Button _ Setting 3 Depending on the selection in step 2 set the following name parameters WIPE Wipe position for common transition A i When Angle is selected Table 2 Buttons assigned to functions No Parameter Adjustment Button Function 1 Angle Angle of pattern ro
26. 10 Specify the register numbers to recall the keyframe effects for each region that you want to save in the shotbox register For details about the procedure for recalling a keyframe effect Recalling a register from the Flexi Pad p 151 11 Referring to steps 3 to 6 carry out the procedure to save the recalled keyframe effect data In step 5 however press the EFF button instead of SNAPSHOT button lighting it on 12 Enter the shotbox register number specified in step 7 using the numeric keypad buttons 13 Press the ENTR button This saves the snapshot data followed by the keyframe effect data in the specified shotbox register and the STOR button changes color to orange At the same time the RCLL button lights yellow To change the contents of a shotbox register After recalling the shotbox register you want to change refer to Creating a Shotbox Register in the Flexi Pad p 177 and change the contents of the shotbox register and save To check the region saved in a shotbox register After step 5 in Creating a Shotbox Register in the Flexi Pad p 177 press the following buttons to continue To check the snapshot region SNAPSHOT button To check the keyframe effect region EFF button The buttons in the memory recall section change as follows For buttons corresponding to regions with stored data region select buttons are lit amber and memory recall section butt
27. Local Disk or Removable Disk and then specify a directory 4 Select the register to which you want to load and the file to be loaded 5 Press 4 Load This loads the contents of the selected file from the specified location Setup data is first loaded Loading frame memory files Between steps 3 and 4 of the procedure in Loading Files above do as follows Operations on Individual Files 1 To select the frame memory folder press Default in the device selection in the list on the left 2 Press the required folder name in the pull down menu 3 Carry out the same operations as in steps 1 and 2 on the list on the right 4 Select the type of data to be displayed e To display still image files press Still e To display clip files press Clip e To display all types of file press AlI Copying Files You can copy files either within a directory or between directories on a local disk or removable disk As an example to copy a snapshot file from a removable disk to a local disk use the following procedure 1 Open the File gt Snapshot gt Snapshot menu 7131 2 Inthe device selection area on the left specify the location of the file to be copied in this case Removable Disk and a directory 3 Inthe device selection area on the right select the destination of the copied file in this case Local Disk and a directory 4 Select the source and destination files 5 Press Co
28. NORM ES NORM IREV Transition type selection buttons Transition rate display 1 Transition control block M E bank In the background A row of the cross point control block select the background video Select the way in which the transition will affect the image using the next transition selection buttons in the transition control block To change the background Press the BKGD button turning it on To insert or delete a key Press one of the KEY 1 to KEY4 buttons or DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank turning it on To enable the key priority setting which determines the key overlay order after the transition Press the KEY PRIOR button turning it on You can press more than one button at the same time To change preset keys and backgrounds simultaneously Press the ALL button For details about allocating a particular next transition button to the ALL button function Setting the Operation Mode of the ALL Button in the Transition Control Block p 237 Procedure for Basic Transition Operation 3 For the transition to change the key priority set the priority for after the transition For details about operations amp Key Priority Setting p 49 Select the new video used for the transition e In the background B row of cross point buttons select the new background video e When inserting a key select the key signal
29. No Parameter Adjustment 2 Source Addr Source address selection 5 Press Source Address Set Clearing a source address setting To clear a source address setting for a particular bit In the Source Assign menu select the serial tally port and bit number see steps 2 and 3 in the previous item then press Clear To clear all source address settings In the Source Assign menu select the serial tally port then press All Clear Check the message then press Yes Serial Tally Settings User Setup Source Patch The source patch is a function whereby signal pairs recorded in applicable data are automatically converted to use key snapshots snapshots and keyframes in different switcher systems as is Sequence of Source Patch Operations In the following description two different switcher systems are referred to as Switcher A and Switcher B In Switcher A assign a name user source name to each signal pair l Export the user source name file to a removable disk l In Switcher B import the user source names from a removable disk l Create a signal pairs conversion correspondence table patch table l In Switcher B recall the snapshot key snapshot or keyframe file created in Switcher A Signal pairs are replaced according to the patch table Exporting a User Source Name File to a Removable Disk In Switcher A use the followin
30. Off Release the freeze and delete the recorded freeze image To return to the state immediately before the freeze after carrying out the freeze In the lt Freeze gt group press Undo e When the system is powered off any freeze images written to temporary memory are lost If you change the frame memory to use as in step 2 without saving all the freeze images in temporary memory will be lost However if the auto store function is set to on in the Setup menu freeze images will be automatically saved whenever you change the selected target frame memory e For the following signal formats a field freeze is not possible 1080PsF 23 976 1080PsF 24 720P 50 720P 59 94 Saving a freeze image Store You can use the freeze function to save an image that has been written to temporary memory as a file You can save a single image to a single file A name of up to eight characters can be applied to a file When the system is powered off all the files saved in memory are lost To save a captured image as a still image file use the following procedure in the Frame Memory gt Still gt Freeze Store menu 2512 1 Press Store 2 Enter a file name The following names cannot be used CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COMS COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 3 Press Enter This saves the still image file in memory The destination folder i
31. Powerful tally system The complete system including the routing switcher provides an all inclusive tally system The system can be adapted to different applications and settings using multiple tally outputs including both on air and recording tallies Format converter board mounting support An optional MKS 6550 format converter can be installed in the switcher to provide up conversion down conversion and cross conversion functions when importing exporting signals 8 input O output or 4 input 2 output groupings are supported Large capacity data storage The control panel is equipped with a flash memory drive called local disk as standard for storing parameter data switcher frame memory static images and other material USB compatible storage devices called removable disks can also be connected to the control panel for storing data Comprehensive video manipulation M E banks Each M E mix effects bank and PGM PST program preset bank is equipped with four keyers and each keyer is capable not only of chroma keying but also independent key transitions separate from the background transitions Powerful frame memory functions The frame memory can hold approximately 1000 frames in an HDTV system approximately 2000 frames in 720P 59 94 format approximately 5000 frames in an SDTV system in 4801 59 94 format or approximately 4000 frames in 5761 50 format and allows eight frames to be recalled simultan
32. Sync 50 1080PsF 24 48 1080PsF 23 976 47 952 720P 59 94 59 94 Black Burst Sync 59 94 59 94 720P 50 Black Burst 50 Sync 50 Setting Conversion Formats The format conversion is valid only when BB is selected in the lt Ref Input Format gt group The format conversion is assigned to primary inputs and outputs in advance For details about the assignment Selecting the Primary Input to be Used in the Format Converter p 243 and Selecting the Output to be Used as the Format Converter p 248 Format converter The following video signal conversion formats are supported by the format converter e Up conversion SD 4 3 to HD 16 9 e Down conversion HD 16 9 to SD 4 3 e Cross conversion HD 720P to HD 10801 or HD 10801 to HD 720P The number of format converter inputs and outputs can be set to one of the following in FC Config p 2 6 e 8 inputs no outputs e 4 inputs 2 outputs After format conversion input and output signals have one frame delays with respect to the reference signals To Setting the Signal Format synchronize converted input signals and unconverted input signals it is possible to delay the unconverted input signal For details amp To delay unconverted input signals frame delay function p 213 Conversion format combinations The combinations of switcher signal formats and supported format converter forma
33. The status area shows a list of snapshot registers 1 to 99 For details about lock copy delete and rename operations amp Displaying a List of Effect Registers for Editing p 166 Register name display For the same number the register name for the M E 1 region takes precedence If there is no data for the M E 1 region then the register name appears in the sequence P P gt User 1 to 8 gt RTR Operations in the Misc gt Snapshot Menu To limit the snapshot setting to the M E or PGM PST bank use the Misc menu for each bank This section describes an example on the M E 1 bank Recalling a snapshot 1 Open the M E 1 gt Misc gt Snapshot menu 1177 Snapshot Operations in the Menus Attribute Xpt Hold Key 4 DME 2nd Video 4 Attribute Effect Auto Dissolve Transition Delete Rename Bank Sel 2 As required press Bank Sel to change the bank 3 Press the button for the number or name you want to recall This recalls the snapshot and the button you pressed lights green Saving a snapshot 1 Open the M E 1 gt Misc gt Snapshot menu 1177 2 Set the state you want to save as a snapshot 3 Press Store 4 As required press Bank Sel to change the bank 5 Press the button for the number or name you want to save Applying attributes To apply an attribute to the snapshot represented by a lit green memory recall button use the following procedure 1 To apply the cross p
34. p 155 Differences in the changes when a number of keyframes are modified When you select a number of keyframes to modify and press the MOD button alone or in combination with the SHFT button the result of the operation differs as shown below Modifying the keyframes by pressing the MOD button alone The modified parameter values are taken as absolute values and applied to all of the selected keyframes Creating and Editing Keyframes soueiyAey sa deyo 155 Background A Background B e e Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution v 0 Modify keyframe 2 Changing the position of background B in the horizontal direction Select keyframes 1 to 3 and modify simultaneously Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution seweyhoy 1 Ja deyo 156 Result The horizontal position of background B in keyframes 1 and 3 is now the same as that in keyframe 2 In all keyframes the vertical position remains unchanged as the parameter is not changed Modifying the keyframes by holding down the SHFT button and pressing the MOD button The modified parameter values are taken as relative values which modify all of the selected keyframes Background A Background B lim Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution
35. 3000 inputs and outputs can be selected R SET ROUTE Since when using the simple connection the switcher and router cannot be connected in cascade no route setting is required and this is unset Y SET DISPLAY MODES The DISPLAY MODES PANEL FUNCTION setting is set to NORMAL The TALLY GROUP setting is set to be the same as the setting in Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Group Tally menu 7362 on the MVS 3000 Z SET PANEL STATUS The various settings are the same as the factory default settings Macro File Editing Rules When editing a macro file follow the rules described below Macro File Syntax The macro file syntax is as follows File format The file is in CSV comma separated value format Newline code CR ASCII code 0D LF ASCII code 0A or CRLF may be used Statement syntax There are four types of statement each terminated by a newline code File header This must always appear as the first line of the file It comprises 28 characters as follows Example PNL space 0001 PNL_rrrr PMRonnnnnnn rrr Macro register number 0001 to 0099 nnnnnnnn In a file created on the switcher this is a register name automatically set by the switcher When creating a new file it is recommended to set this to be the same as the file name p 290 The name is limited to eight characters The following characters may not be used space 3 comma dot lt gt Comment
36. 4 Press Execute 5 Check the message then press Yes Saving User Defined Settings 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt System gt Start Up menu 7314 2 Select the target device and then select one of the following e To save the Setup settings press Setup Define e To save the Initial Status settings press Init Status Define For details about the settings which will be saved Data Saved by Setup Define and Initial Status Define p 297 3 Check the message then press Yes Setting Automatic Loading of Register Data at Power On Autoload Function To have specified data read in at power on press Power On File Load in the Engineering Setup gt System gt Start Up menu 7314 turning it on This enables the autoload function When the autoload function is enabled a directory PWON_LD appears in the corresponding File menu For details about saving data which can be loaded by the autoload function amp Saving data recalled by autoload p 202 Reset and Initialization You can carry out a reset or memory initialization for a device e Reset Resets state after powering on e All Clear Clears the memory and restores the factory default settings The Network Config Format and Start Up setup values are set by reference to data stored in non volatile memory and the system automatically starts up It is not necessary to reset the Date Time settings For detail
37. Creating and Editing Keyframes p 153 Registering a keyframe The register operations use the Macro gt Timeline gt Timeline menu 5441 and the INS button in the Flexi Pad T Inthe Flexi Pad press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button This switches the memory recall section to effect editing mode 2 Open the Macro gt Timeline gt Timeline menu 5441 3 Select one of the actions Recall Take Take All No Action that appear on the right If you selected Recall or Take select the number of the macro register No Parameter 3 Reg No Adjustment Selection of macro register 4 Press the Set button The selected action appears in the Action column on the left 5 Press the INS button in the Flexi Pad This creates keyframe on the macro timeline To set the action for a rewind operation On the macro timeline when the REWIND button in the Flexi Pad is pressed the action set for the first keyframe is not executed when the RUN button is pressed then the first keyframe action is executed To execute an action when the REWIND button is pressed it is necessary to set this action Rewind Action To carry out this setting press Rewind Action in the Macro gt Timeline gt Timeline menu 5441 to recall the Rewind Action menu 5441 1 In this setting screen use the same setting method as in the screen for setting an action on the macro timeline Alternat
38. Executing a Transition 51 suonsues pue uonoajas euis Ja deyo suolisues pue uonoajas euis Je deyp 52 Transition Indicator Function In each of the switcher banks to the left of the fader lever is a transition indicator This indicator shows the state of the transition whether auto or manual A bar appears in the transition _ indicator For example in the previous illustration it can be seen that the transition is more than half completed When the transition is completed the indicator turns off Setting the Transition Rate There are two ways of setting the transition rate using the Flexi Pad to enter a numeric value or using the Misc menu to access the Transition menu for each switcher bank You can also display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate for each bank and change the settings p 126 When a clip transition is selected as the transition type it is not possible to set the transition rate Frame input mode and timecode input mode For numeric input of the transition rate value there are two modes frame input mode and timecode input mode You select one of these modes using the Flexi Pad Frame input mode The entered value is a number of frames Example Entering 123 constitutes an entry of 123 frames Timecode input mode The entered value is a timecode value Example Entering 123 constitut
39. Saving data recalled by autoload At power on you can automatically recall data previously stored on the local disk Autoload function The following data can be loaded by the autoload function e Keyframe effect setting data e Snapshot setting data e Wipe snapshot setting data e DME wipe snapshot setting data e Key snapshot setting data e Shotbox setting data e Macro setting data e Macro attachment data e Frame memory image data To use the autoload function the data required must first be saved p 209 For details amp Setting Automatic Loading of Register Data at Power On Autoload Function p 214 Locking file recall operations For each of the following categories in setup you can apply a lock on recalling files p 2 8 Setup Initial Status Key Memory Effect Snapshot Wipe Snapshot DME Wipe Snapshot Key Snapshot Shotbox Macro Macro Attachment Menu Macro User Setup A locked file cannot be downloaded from the File menu Errors when transferring files If an error occurs when transferring files an error message appears in the Error Information menu 9900 In that case save the data or recall the file again If the error message persists contact your Sony dealer Operations on Individual Files Operations on Individual Files You can save or load the contents of an individual file or register The following description refers to the example of carrying out operations o
40. Two lists appear in the status area The upper list shows the device number register number keyframe number and action type start point stop point and variable speed set for the keyframe The lower list is used for setting the action for the 8 if setting a stop point in the lt Stop TC gt group press device selected above The list shows the port name the Set button current file current time status information start point stop point variable speed and file name for a disk recorder or Extended VTR 9 If not setting a stop point skip to step 11 Set the stop point as a timecode value 2 Select the device 1 0 Press Enter 3 To set the name of a file when using an Extended VTR or disk recorder recall the file using the Device 11 tr setting a variable speed in the lt Variable Speed gt gt DDR VTR gt File List menu 5333 group carry out either of the following e Press Fit Notes Without setting a speed value this automatically catries out playback according to automatically calculated values for the duration and keyframe duration to fit the set start point and stop point e There is a limit of eight disk recorder files that can set on a single timeline If you have not set the file name when using an Q Extended VTR the file recalled in the Extended Press the Set button and adjust the parameter 8 VTR when the keyframe point is passed is the No Parameter Adjustmen
41. When no key is selected When a key is selected as the next transition Key fades in By means of a Setup menu setting it is possible to preserve the key state while carrying out the color matte mix When a key is selected for the next transition while a key is inserted Key state preserved Key fades out Setting the color matte d When operating from the M E 1 bank for example open the M E 1 gt Misc gt Transition menu 1171 2 Select Preset Color Mix in the lt Transition Type gt group 3 In the lt Preset Color Mix Fill gt group select one of the following Flat Color Monochrome color matte Utility 1 Bus Signal selected on the utility bus 4 When Flat Color is selected adjust the color matte No Parameter Adjustment 2 Luminance Luminance Saturation Saturation 4 Hue Hue Executing a Transition There are two modes of executing a transition an auto transition by button operation or a manual transition using the fader lever It is also possible to combine both methods taking control with the fader lever of an auto transition which has partly completed or complete a transition started with the fader lever as an auto transition By combining common transitions with independent key transitions different transition types can be applied to the background and keys for example allowing a key wipe combined with a background dissolve
42. 2 Press the region names you do not want to select turning them off ME2 and DME Ich to DME 8ch regions are disabled even if selected 3 Press OK Selecting a Device for Operations To carry out file operations you need to specify the device holding the data or file as one of the following register local disk removable disk and so on You can then further select a directory Files saved on a local disk may be lost if the local disk fails Always keep separate backup copies of important files on a removable disk Format a removable disk before using it for the first time p 216 As an example to select a removable disk use the following procedure 1 Inthe File menu press the device selection indication above the file list A pull down menu appears 2 Press Removable Disk A list of directories on the removable disk appears Maximum 40 per page The maximum number of directories is 120 on a removable disk or 200 on a local disk 3 As required press the lt or gt button to switch directory pages 4 Press the name of the directory you want to use Saving Files As an example to save snapshot register data on a local disk or removable disk use the following procedure For key snapshots snapshots and effects you cannot perform the following operation when Src Patch Link is lit on the menu screen p 262 1 Open the File gt Snapshot gt Snapshot menu 7131
43. 5311 Control of GPI Devices s 49q Jeuse Xy QO 13 dey49 133 SedINEg JeUeIXy OQ Jeldeup 134 Two lists appear in the status area The GPI Output list on the left shows the relation between ports to 8 for the GPI timeline and the trigger pulse output destination ports The settings in this list will be saved as keyframe point data The GPI Port list on the right is for selecting the GPI trigger pulse output destination 2 Select the GPI timeline port 3 Select the trigger pulse output destination You can select 2 SCU gt Set the port number No Parameter 3 SCU Port No Adjustment SCU GPI port number a Switcher GPI output port configured in the Setup menu for control from the control panel For the output port you have set here be sure to set the trigger type to Rising Edge Falling Edge or Any Edge For details Making Control Panel GPI Output Settings p 231 5 Press Set Repeat steps 2 to 5 if setting other GPI timeline ports Test firing the trigger Press Test Fire This outputs a pulse from the selected output port Clearing output port settings To clear the setting for each port 1 In the list on the left of the status area select the GPI output port 2 Inthe list on the right select Off 3 Press Set To clear the settings for all ports Press All Off Setting the action for a rew
44. 7123 1 File gt Effect gt User DME Wipe Effect All menu operations 201 299 gt File Edit 7131 File gt Snapshot gt Snapshot M E 2 DME region selection 7131 1 File gt Snapshot gt Snapshot gt File Edit M E 2 DME region selection 5 Kej 7132 File gt Snapshot gt Wipe Snapshot M E 2 region selection 8 7132 1 File gt Snapshot gt Wipe Snapshot M E 2 region selection a gt File Edit 7133 File gt Snapshot gt DME Snapshot M E 2 region selection 7133 1 File gt Snapshot gt DME Snapshot gt File M E 2 region selection Edit 7134 File gt Snapshot gt Key Snapshot e M E 2 region selection e P P Key5 to 8 selection 7134 1 File gt Snapshot gt Key Snapshot gt File e M E 2 region selection Edit e P P Key5 to 8 selection 7313 2 Engineering Setup gt System gt Format M E 2 settings gt Aspect gt Switcher Aspect 7313 3 Engineering Setup gt System gt Format All menu operations gt Aspect gt DME Aspect 7317 1 Engineering Setup gt System Selection of items related to DME DCU MPE gt Maintenance gt Setup Operation Lock 7321 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config e M E2 selection e 1st row settings 7321 2 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config e M E 2 settings gt Key Trans Link e P P DSK5 to 8 settings e Key5 to Key8 selection 7321 3 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config e Selection of items related to M E 2 gt External Bus Link e Selection of items related to Key5 to 8 Menus of Disabled Operations and Settings 283
45. 7221 the new video appears then on the second transition the new video goes out and the old video returns to 1224 to 7224 Picture in picture Completes in two transitions In the first transition the old video shrinks and the new video appears behind it In the second transition the old video expands again until it is its original size 1251 Overview s d M IWA 9 Jeideuo 93 sedim AWC 9 Je deyo 94 Pattern group Effect Mosaic Pattern numbers Used in backgrounds Used in keys In the first half of the transition a mosaic is gradually 1701 applied to the old video then at the 50 point the inner image changes to the new video In the second half the mosaic effect on the new video is gradually reduced returning to the original image at 100 Defocus In the first half of the transition the old video is gradually defocused then at the 50 point the inner image changes to the new video In the second half the defocusing effect on the new video is gradually reduced returning to the original image at 100 1702 DME Wipe Pattern Variations and Modifiers You can modify the selected DME wipe pattern in the same way as an ordinary wipe pattern as follows For details about the method of operation amp Setting DME Wipe Modifiers p 95 Direction You can set the DME wipe direction to normal reverse or alternating nor
46. 7316 10 No HF7 Maintenance 7317 No Setup Operation Lock 7317 1 No File Load Lock 7317 2 No VF2 Panel HF1 Config 7321 No Key Trans Link 7321 2 No External Bus Link 7321 3 No Link Matrix Adjust 7321 4 No Link Table Adjust 7321 5 No Link Bus Adjust 7321 6 No Region Button Assign 7321 7 No Transition Module 7321 9 No Trackball Module 7321 17 No Util Bus Key Inhibit 7321 18 No Menu Panel 7321 19 No Multi Function Module 7321 20 No Mode Sel Assign 7321 21 No Eff Edit Assign 7321 22 No Macro Edit Assign 7321 23 No TB Module DME Ch Inhibit 7321 27 No Trackball User Setting 7321 31 No Menu Tree VF2 Panel Menu Page No Default Recall HF2 Xpt Assign 7322 No Table Button Assign 7322 1 No Main V K Pair Assign 7322 5 No Src Name Src Color 7322 6 No Main V K Pair Assign 7322 5 No Src Name Src Color 7322 6 No User Color Select 7322 12 No Table Copy 7322 8 No Name Export 7322 9 No Side Flags Button Assign 7322 10 No Mixer Xpt Assign 7322 11 No Main V K Pair Assign 7322 5 No HF3 Router Remote 7323 No RTR Mode Setting 7323 1 No Table Assign 7323 3 No Level Button Assign 7323 4 No HF4 Prefs Utility 7324 No Xpt Module Src Reg Btn Assign 7324 2 No HF5 Device Interface 7325 No GPI Input 73
47. Add Favorite The menu selected in step 2 is automatically registered to an open button in the group selected in step 1 Customizing the shortcut menu To customize buttons 1 In the Home gt Favorites gt Shortcut menu 0021 press Button Edit The Home gt Favorites gt Button Edit menu 0023 appears Use the following procedures To rename the button Select the button you want to change press Rename enter a new button name up to 24 characters and then press Enter To change the button color Select the button you want to change press Color Set and then select the desired color To copy button settings Select the button you want to copy press Copy and then select the target button and press Paste To delete button settings Select the button you want to delete then press Clear To customize groups 1 In the Home gt Favorites gt Shortcut menu 0021 press Group Edit The Home gt Favorites gt Group Edit menu 0022 appears Use the following procedures To rename a group Select the group you want to change press Rename enter anew group name up to 24 characters and then press Enter To copy group settings Select the group you want to copy and press Copy and then select the target group and press Paste To delete group settings Select the group button you want to delete press Clear Check the message then press Yes Power Supply and Connector
48. Find The Find window appears Next gt 2 Press Find 3 Enter the string you want to search and press Enter This starts the search and the indicator lights When the search ends the found files are selected 4 To move through the selected files press the lt Prev or Next gt button 5 Press outside the Find window on the menu screen Image Output There are two functions related to image output the reposition function for moving the output image and the lock function for fixing the output image Moving the output image reposition function For up to two channels of FM1 to FM8 one from FM1 FM3 FMS and FM7 and the other from FM2 FM4 FM6 and FM8 you can move the output image with respect to the screen The area of the screen around the image that has been moved is filled with black There are two ways of carrying out this repositioning Normal mode Movement in the horizontal direction in two pixel increments Black and white mode Movement in the horizontal direction in one pixel increments and for each pixel moved the color is inverted e It is not possible to save an image moved with the reposition function directly to frame memory e If the frame memory save mode is set to Save with ancillary data on an HD system then the reposition function cannot be used 1 Open the Frame Memory gt Reposition Lock gt Reposition menu 2531 In this menu you can also enable t
49. No Parameter Adjustment 1 Blink Rate Length of blink cycle 2 Duty Proportion of cycle for which key inserted Key Adjustments Flexi Pad EDIT ENBL button Alphanumeric display Mode selection buttons Adjustment knobs Cd Q 9 ae omoge Adjustment knob displays Region selection buttons Memory recall section Selecting the bank and keyer Before carrying out key adjustment first select the key adjust mode then select the switcher bank and keyer For example to adjust key 1 on M E 1 proceed as follows 1 In the Flexi Pad mode selection buttons press KEY ADJ 2 Press the M E1 region selection button 3 Inthe memory recall section press the KEY 1 button The button displays in the memory recall section now appear as shown in the following illustration Pressing the PAGE 1 3 gt PAGE 2 3 gt PAGE 3 3 buttons further changes the display as follows then pressing PAGE 3 3 returns to the original display shown in the illustration PAGE 1 3 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 LIN CRK SPLT SHOW KEY
50. OK to restart the system Success But some partitions cannot be created because the capacity of the local disk is not enough 7317 Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance In the above menu the local disk formatting procedure completed successfully However because of insufficient local disk capacity only the possible number of partitions were created Password Password Incorrect 7317 1 Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance gt Setup Operation Lock In the above menu the wrong password was entered Enter the correct password Record Cannot be executed Maximum number of clips are created 2523 Frame Memory gt Clip gt Record In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Rec Start but the number of recorded clips had already reached its upper limit Refresh Status No external HDD was found 2 2561 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Format 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menus an attempt was made to execute Refresh Status but the external HDD could not be recognized Check that the external HDD is correctly connected xlpueddy Cannot access the partition 12 2561 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Format 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menus an attempt was made to execute Refresh Status but the logical drives of the e
51. Register containing a snapshot Off Register in which nothing is saved If you press the SNAPSHOT or EFF button on the Flexi Pad you can change the memory recall button indicators to the register names using the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Flexi Pad Mode menu 7326 3 Saving and Recalling Snapshots Saving a snapshot As an example to save a snapshot on the M E 1 bank proceed as follows inthe ME 1 bank make the settings for the state you want to save as a snapshot 2 In the Flexi Pad press the SNAPSHOT button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to snapshot operation mode The alphanumeric display shows the number of the last recalled register on the bank 3 Press the region selection button corresponding to the region for which you want to save turning it on You can select more than one button For details about the method of region selection Selecting regions in the Flexi Pad p 150 The regions that can be selected simultaneously are those assigned to the region selection buttons and the memory recall section buttons p 220 The first button pressed is lit green as the reference region Subsequently pressed buttons are lit amber for the region select buttons and yellow for the memory recall section buttons Pressing one of the amber or yellow lit buttons while holding down the SNAPSHOT button turns the button green to indicate its correspo
52. Selecting a DME wipe pattern by a menu operation 1 Open the M E 1 gt DME Wipe gt 1ch menu 1161 2 Select the desired DME wipe pattern group with one of the following buttons e Slide Squeeze Slide and squeeze e Door Door e Flip Tumble Flip tumble e Frame I O P in P Frame in out and picture in picture e Mosaic Defocus Mosaic and defocus The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen 3 Press the button to select the desired pattern number Setting DME Wipe Modifiers You can apply various modifiers to the DME wipe pattern setting the DME wipe direction pattern position etc For an overview of modifiers amp DME Wipe Pattern Variations and Modifiers p 94 Specifying the DME wipe direction Direction You can specify the DME wipe direction normal reverse To specify the DME wipe direction in a menu 1 Open the M E 1 gt DME Wipe gt Edge Direction menu 1164 2 Inthe lt Direction gt group specify the DME wipe direction Normal Regular direction Normal Reverse Alternate between regular and reverse for each transition Reverse Opposite direction of normal To specify the DME wipe direction with a button in the transition control block In the transition control block of each switcher bank press the following direction selection buttons NORM Normal NORM REV Normal reverse REV Reverse Modifying the DME wipe pattern edge 1 Open the M E 1 gt DME
53. Yes 3 User6 6113 10 Yes User7 6113 11 Yes User8 6113 12 Yes DME 3D Trans Local 6113 13 Yes DME 3D Trans Global 6113 14 Yes DME Effect 6113 15 Yes DME Global Effect 6113 16 Yes HF4 DME User PGM 6114 No HF5 Timeline Assign 6115 No HF7 Region Select 6117 No Region Button Assign 7321 7 No Menu Page No Default Recall No Menu Tree 273 xlpueddy 274 Menu Page No Default Recall VF 1 Master Timeline HF1 Store 6211 No Edit 6211 1 No HF2 Lock 6212 No HF3 Copy 6213 No HF4 Move 6214 No HF5 Swap 6215 No HF6 Delete 6216 No HF7 Rename 6217 No VF2 Effect 1 99 HF1 Attribute 6221 No HF2 Lock 6222 No HF8 Copy Merge 6223 No HF4 Move 6224 No HF5 Swap 6225 No HF6 Delete 6226 No HF7 Rename 6227 No VF3 User DME Wipe HF1 Attribute 6231 No Erect 101 199 HF2 Lock 6232 No HF8 Copy Merge 6233 No HF4 Move 6234 No HF5 Swap 6235 No HF6 Delete 6236 No HF7 Rename 6237 No VF4 User DME Wipe HF1 Attribute 6241 No Eiloch20s e0 HF2 Lock 6242 No HF8 Copy Merge 6243 No HF4 Move 6244 No HF5 Swap 6245 No HF6 Delete 6246 No HF7 Rename 6247 No VF6 DEV PBUS Effect HF2 Lock 6262 No 17230 HF3 Copy Merge 6263 No HF4 Move 6264 No HF5 Swap 6265 No HF6 Delete 6266 No HF7 Rename 6267 No
54. appears if an attempt is made to extract a pair clip Clip id not enough 50 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if there are 100 clips or more Still frame on FM 2nd board 51 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if a still image was extracted from an external clip fo Clip frame number can t be ODD in 720P format 9 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if an odd number of clips are extracted 720P format only File Frame Memory Some requests are skipped Loading that will cause duplicate register name Following operation is not permitted 7151 File gt Frame Memory 7162 File gt All External File gt Import Export In the above menus an attempt was made to load a file of a name already existing in the register File Open Status ERROR 01 ERROR 02 ERROR FF No target device has been assigned 533X Device gt DDR VTR When an error is returned from the DDR VTR one of these messages appears depending on the error number Use the following menus to check the device settings 7325 4 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt Device Assign 7325 5 Engineering Setup gt Panel
55. are shown On the right the content of the clip of the current frame memory is shown 3 Press Clip Event turning it on The clip event attribute is applied 4 Toselect the clip of the current frame memory press Set 5 To play the clip as soon as it is recalled press Auto Play turning it on Snapshot Status Display The Snapshot gt Snapshot gt Attribute menu 6321 displays the following information Region name The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list Register number Register name Write protected status When the register is write protected a letter L appears Empty status When the register is empty an E for empty appears Attribute settings The attributes set for a register are shown by the following character codes e When the cross point hold is set Setting Key Snapshot Attributes Applying key snapshot attributes 1 Open the Snapshot gt Key Snapshot gt Attribute menu 6351 The status area shows the region names register numbers and whether the registers are locked or not 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the list and in the selection window select the region You can select more than one region 3 Press OK 4 Select a register e When an effect dissolve is set Displayed Attributes set character string The effect dissolve attribute is set with the displayed duration D
56. button This executes the transition at the preset transition rate p 52 While the transition is executing the AUTO TRANS button lights amber When it completes the button turns off To complete a partially executed transition instantaneously Press the CUT button The AUTO TRANS button turns off Executing a Transition with the Fader Lever Manual Transition Using the fader lever you can manually control the progress of transition from the current video to the new video using the transition effect selected as the transition type Moving the fader lever from one end of its travel to the other completes the transition To execute a manual transition with the transition control block fader lever use the following procedure To carry out the transition completely Move the lever over the full range of its travel To pause a partly executed transition Stop moving the fader lever Executing a Transition suolisues pue uonoajas jeubis g Je deyp 55 suolisues pue uonoajas euis Je deyp 56 To resume a paused transition Resume moving the fader lever Combining Auto and Manual Transitions Using the AUTO TRANS button the CUT button and the fader lever use the following procedures Moving the fader lever during an auto transition During an auto transition started by pressing the AUTO TRANS button operating the fader lever immediately enables the fader lever and the AUTO T
57. category 1 inthe Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance menu 7317 press File Load Lock The File Load Lock menu 7317 2 appears 2 Select the category as the candidate for the locking operation 3 Press Lock System Maintenance This makes the selected categories candidates for locking The category name display color changes to yellow and the indication Lock is displayed in yellow in the Lock box To deselect a lock candidate After selecting a category press Clear to clear the indication Lock in the Lock box 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select all of the lock candidates 5 Press Execute 6 Enter the password with a maximum of 16 characters in the keyboard window and press Enter If the password is correct the categories selected in the list of candidates are all locked The category name display color and the Lock indication color in the Lock box both change to white Releasing the lock 1 In the File Load Lock menu 7317 2 press Lock 2 Enter the password in the keyboard window Changing the lock password T In the File Load Lock menu 7317 2 press Change Password 2 Press Yes 3 Enter the old password and new password when prompted Control Panel Setup Overall Control Panel Settings In panel setup you carry out settings particular to the control panel Interchanging the Bank Order or Disabling Operation You can set the assignments f
58. confirmation message appears Select Yes to overwrite the data Saving Files Recalled by Autoload System Setup Setup for the Whole System Carry out operations relating to setup for the whole system in the Engineering Setup menu Here the whole system refers to all devices connected on the system switcher LAN Setting the unit ID In addition the switcher processor and control panel are all tied to unit ID of 1 For more details of how to make the unit ID settings refer to the installation manual for the particular device Network Settings This provides automatic configuration of all devices connected to the switcher system LAN and displays a list of them Setting the Group ID 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt System gt Network Config menu 7311 press Group ID 2 Enter a number 1 to 8 in the pop up menu and press Enter 3 Check the message then press Yes Authenticating the IP Address Automatically 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt System gt Network Config menu 7311 press Auto Config Chapter Devices with the same group ID within the network are detected and displayed 2 Check the message then press Yes 3 To register the list of detected devices as the setting values at power on press Define 4 Check the message then press Yes Setting the Signal Format After changing any of the following settings be sure to press Execute or FC Format Ex
59. e Switcher GPI port parallel 25 pin 2 Inthe lt Switcher gt group press on the name of the port for which you want to disable control from an external device turning it off To re enable control for the port press on its name again For AUX bus operations from the Remote S1 to Remote S2 ports of the switcher the setting Enable Disable Manual in the Setup menu takes precedence The settings made in the Port Enable menu only apply when the setting is set to Manual For details Enabling or Disabling AUX Bus Control p 256 Safe Title Settings Turning the safe title function on off 1 Open the Misc gt Safe Title menu 3221 2 Select the signal to set You can select from Outputs 1 to 12 e Outputs 13 to 32 cannot be set e Itis not possible to change the setting for the output for which the safe title is set off in a Setup menu e The safe title function cannot be used for output signals for which through mode is set to Enable in a Setup menu For details amp Signal Output Settings p 246 3 Press Safe Title turning it on or off Misc Menu Operations sBumes 1410 pue dems pue Adog spunos6yoeg 10 09 8 seydeyy 125 sBulyes 19410 pue dems pue Adoa spunosbyoeg 10109 g sajdeuD 126 Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings In the Misc gt Transition gt Key ME FTB menu 3231 for each bank you can display a list of the M E
60. eee 238 Setting the Touch Operation Beep OUI ere nai ane vonn dees 239 Calibrating the Touch Panel 239 Setting the Menu to be Shown When the Menus Are Started eee 239 Setting the Mouse Wheel Scrolling Direction for Parameter Setting cee 239 Selecting the Mouse Button for the Parameter Setting Buttons cee eeeeeeeeteeeeeee 239 Chapter 18 Switcher Setup Settings for Switcher Configuration 240 Adjusting the Reference Phase 240 Specifying the Video Switching TIMING eea a 240 Setting the Operation Mode 240 Switching Backgrounds using DME WIPS mareen aia 241 Setting User Regions ssseeeseeeseeseseeesee 241 Setting the Side Flag Video Material and Operations san betateaaeend 241 Signal Input Settings ceeeeeeeeee 242 Making Through Mode Settings 242 Configuring the Color Corrector 242 Enabling the Illegal Color Limiter 243 Selecting the Primary Input to be Used in the Format Converter 243 Selecting the Input to which the Frame Delay Function Applies ceeseeesteeeeee 243 Selecting the Format Converter CONVERSION se nka aieas 244 Signal Output Settings ccesseee 246 Assigning Output Signals eee 246 Adjusting the Video Clip eee 247 Table of Contents 9 10 Making Vertical Blanking Interval Adjustment and Through Mode Setting Sede ie ngeeaiddaer ness 247 Making Safe T
61. group press 4 3 Crop turning it on To set the action when a DME wipe crop transition is executed 1 Open the M E 1 gt DME Wipe gt Modify menu 1165 2 Inthe lt Crop Mode gt group press Crop or 4 3 Crop to crop from 16 9 to 4 3 aspect ratio turning it on 3 Inthe lt Crop Mode gt group press Remove From Begin The Remove From Begin menu 1165 1 appears 4 inthe lt Crop Transition gt group select the execution mode for the DME wipe crop transition Cut Cut mode The cropping does not change during the transition but at the end point of the transition the cropping is removed enlarges Last 5 The cropping is maintained for the first 95 of the transition and is progressively removed during the last 5 of the transition enlarges Linear The cropping is removed linearly through the whole course of the transition enlarges t 95 100 Last 5 t 100 Cut 100 ransitions Cropping t Transition execution time y Change in transition and cropping amount t 100 Linear To set the timing of transition completion When the execution mode for a DME wipe crop transition is set to Last 5 you can select the timing of transition completion from 70 Last 30 95 Last 5 and 100 Off 1 Open the M E 1 gt DME Wipe gt Modify menu 1165 2 Inthe lt Crop Mode gt group press Remove From Begin The Remove From Begin menu 1165 1
62. gt Key Delay Mode menu 1112 4 press Key Drop On Key drop on mode Key Adjustments Menus 71 s y yp Jaydeyo shay y1 dey9 72 Off Key drop off mode In key drop off mode an edge can only be set below the key if drop border or shadow is selected for the edge type To switch between 4H mode and 8H mode In the Edge gt Key Delay Mode menu 1112 4 press 8H Mode On 8H mode Off 4H mode e 4H mode The edge width is 0 00 to 4 00 excluding when key wipe pattern key is selected for key type and border or outline is selected for the edge type 8H mode The edge width varies depending on the edge type Border or outline excluding when key wipe pattern is selected for key type The edge width is 0 00 to 8 00 However if fine key is turned on the edge width is 0 00 to 4 00 Drop border or shadow The edge width is 0 00 to 8 00 However if the fine key is on the edge width is 0 00 to 4 00 Emboss The edge width is 0 00 to 4 00 To fix key fill key source in key drop OFF mode 1 Open the Edge gt Key Delay Mode menu 1112 4 2 Press Frame Delay setting it to On This function uses the resizer and therefore the expected result of the setting may not be obtained if conditions do not allow the resizer to be used Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte When you select Matte for the edge fill of a border drop border or shadow you can create a combinatio
63. image Left value is displayed 2 V Crop the top and bottom of the image Top value is displayed 3 All Crop the top bottom left and right of the image Left value is displayed Parameter group 2 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 Top Crop the top of the image 2 Left Crop the left of the image 3 Right Crop the right of the image 4 Bottom Crop the bottom of the image To crop to 4 3 aspect ratio in 16 9 mode In the lt Crop Mode gt group press 4 3 Crop turning it on To set the operation for DME wipe crop transition execution 1 Inthe lt Crop Mode gt group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu press Crop turning it on 2 In the lt Crop Mode gt group press Crop or 4 3 Crop to crop from 16 9 to 4 3 aspect ratio turning it on 3 Inthe lt Crop Mode gt group press Remove From Begin The Remove From Begin menu 1116 7 appears For subsequent operations see step 4 in To set the action when a DME wipe crop transition is executed p 96 To set the timing of transition completion 1 Inthe lt Crop Mode gt group of the Keyl DME Wipe Adjust menu press Crop turning it on 2 Inthe lt Crop Mode gt group press Remove From Begin The Remove From Begin menu 1116 7 appears For subsequent operations see step 3 in To set the timing of transition completion p 97 Applying a border to a DME wipe In the lt Edge gt group of the Key1 DME Wipe A
64. in the pop up window in step 4 to delay input signals For the format of the format converter input signal the same format as the signal format is shown You can set the delay amount in units of frames up to eight frames For details amp Selecting the Input to which the Frame Delay Function Applies p 243 Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio Switches the screen aspect ratio to 16 9 or 4 3 Setting the screen aspect ratio 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt System gt Format menu 7313 press Aspect The Aspect menu 7313 1 appears 2 Inthe lt Screen Aspect gt group select one of the following e 16 9 4 3 e Independ Set the screen aspect ratio separately for M E P P and USER 3 if you selected Independ in step 2 select the following Switcher Aspect Make the setting for the switcher DME Aspect is disabled even if selected 4 In each of the lt M E 1 gt lt P P gt and lt USER gt groups select either 16 9 or 4 3 5 Press Aspect Execute 6 Select Yes Selecting the State After Power on Sets the initial state of the devices when the system is powered on For each device you can select Resume mode or Custom mode Resume mode This resumes the setting state at the previous power off operation This setting is only available for the switcher processor and control panel Custom mode This uses the settings saved in non volatile memory or ROM within the d
65. in this state another menu appears Example Chroma Adjust button in the Type menu Chroma Adjust Parameter group button This displays parameter group names for adjustments the current parameter setting page number and the total number of the parameter setting pages Example Color Vector 1 2 When there are more than five parameters within the same parameter group press this button to display the sixth and subsequent parameters which can then be controlled Parameter setting buttons These show the parameters and their values Pressing one of these buttons displays the numeric keypad window p 34 and you can then enter a new value for the corresponding parameter with the numeric keypad Names and Functions of Parts of the Menu Previous page button This shows the page number of the previously displayed menu screen Press it to go back to that page When the Parent indication appears this displays the parent directory menu level O Keyframe status This shows the keyframe status of the reference region Pressing this button switches the menu screen as follows When a menu other than the Key Frame menu is currently shown The menu screen switches to the Key Frame menu When the Key Frame menu is currently shown The menu screen switches to the menu that was on the screen immediately before the Key Frame menu In some menus such as the File menu this functions as a Region selection area
66. press the INS button to insert the pause event Undoing a macro edit operation To undo an event insert modify delete or paste operation immediately after execution press the UNDO button Editing Macros using Menus Using any of the menus in the following table you can edit macro registers and macro events Menu Function Operations Off Line Edit Edit events ina e Inserting an menu macro register event offline editing of local disk or e Adding an event macro events removable disk Deleting an event using the menus e Creating a new macro Menu Register menu Function Carry out macro Operations e Locking a register macro register register editing e Copying a editing register e Deleting a register e Naming a register On Line Edit Edit events in a e Inserting an menu macro register event online editing of using the control e Deleting an event macro events panel and menus Modifying an event Editing Macros using Menus Macro Register Editing You can display the current state of a macro register using the Macro gt Register menu For details about the display Effect Status Display p 164 However region names are not displayed The operations for macro register editing are the same as those for effect register editing p 164 However it is not necessary to select a region in macro register editing Online Editing of Macro Ev
67. then press the region select button to select M E1 only This switches the memory recall section to snapshot operation mode The alphanumeric display shows the number of the last recalled register on the bank 2 Press the BANK SEL button and select the bank for the register with the saved snapshot you want to delete For details about the method of bank selection Banks and Registers p 168 3 Hold down the DEL button and press the button in the memory recall section corresponding to the applicable register The button you pressed goes off and this deletes the snapshot Snapshot Operations in the Menus Operations in the Snapshot menu You use the Snapshot menu to make snapshot settings The Snapshot menu displays the status of each register and is used to perform operations such as to set snapshot attributes or copy delete snapshot registers Operations in the Misc gt Snapshot Menu You can limit the snapshot setting to the M E or PGM PST bank Selecting a Region or Reference Region in a Menu During snapshot operations you can select a region in the menu This is convenient for selecting some of the regions assigned to the Flexi Pad or changing the reference region For details about the operations amp Selecting by menus p 132 Setting Snapshot Attributes Applying snapshot attributes 1 Open the Snapshot gt Snapshot gt Attribute menu 6321 The status area shows
68. 0 0 eee 164 Effect Status Display ccssscsvecierevencieeverere 164 Effect Register Editing 2c ic cchi needs 164 Displaying a List of Effect Registers for UCAS eani ei 166 Chapter 12 Snapshots OVOIVICW soo ctctisscicedccanncstnstatscsaranenasenewsacsans 167 Snapshot Types s csciaverosadeaseleiceestamase beens 167 Snapshot Attributes ce eeeeeeeseeeenees 167 Snapshot Operations in the Flexi PAG ss sii A E TETT 168 Banks and Registers eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 168 Saving and Recalling Snapshots 169 Snapshot Operations in the Menus 171 Selecting a Region or Reference Region in a DVM Uae tanec cir ae atte Sc fase 171 Setting Snapshot Attributes 171 Snapshot Status Display eeeeeeeeeeee 173 Setting Key Snapshot Attributes 173 Creating and Saving a Master Snapshot 173 Editing Snapshot Registers eee 174 Displaying a List of Snapshot Registers for Editing sic ests Say ces a 174 Operations in the Misc gt Snapshot DUNS sesh lec tes a ita ool ince teen 174 Chapter 13 Utility Shotbox Utility Execution tettteteeeeeeeeeeeeetees 176 Executing a Utility with Cross Point Buttons in the 2nd ROW c isei se kde ike 176 SNOWDOXK casteicierestainscicseisanisniiarseacdauedewitensins 176 Shotbox Register Creation 00 177 Creating a Shotbox Register in the Flexi Padog e e e a aat 177 Creating a Shotbox Register using the 1 Fes 0 UES eRe Reet
69. 00 to 23 As for Frame Memory 1 Clip to Frame Memory 8 Clip hh is fixed to 01 mm minutes 00 to 59 ss seconds 00 to 59 ff frames 00 to 29 a Mode in which the currently set timecode is used Stop Device 1 to 12 FrameMemory1Clip to Applicable device FrameMemory8Clip FF Device 1 to 12 FrameMemory1Clip to Applicable device FrameMemory8Clip 292 Macro File Editing Rules Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description Rewind Device 1 to 12 FrameMemory1Clip to Applicable device FrameMemory8Clip DiskFileLoad Device 1 to 12 Applicable device FileName File Name Name of file being set max 23 characters Snapshot Region ME1 PP User1 to User8 Applicable region Router Register 1 to 99 Applicable register number Attribute Off Dissolve AutoTransition Applicable snapshot attributes Dissolve amp AutoTransition Time Current a 0 to 999 Duration of effect dissolve number of frames a Mode in which the currently set value is used KeySnapshot ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank Key Key1 to Key4 Applicable key Register 1to4 Applicable register number WipeSnapshot ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank Register 1 to 10 Applicable register number DMEWipeSnapshot ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank Register 1 to 10 Applicable register number TimelineRecall Region ME1 PP Use
70. 168 Bus selection 45 Button assignment 227 user preference buttons 227 Button numbers cross point control block 46 Button operation mode 237 C Caps Lock button 35 Chroma key 67 adjustment 68 auto chroma keys 69 composition 67 Clear button 34 35 Clip transition 115 Clips operation 111 overview 111 Close button 33 34 35 Color backgrounds 122 Color cancel adjustment 69 overview 68 Color copy swap 124 Color corrector AUX bus 126 configuring 242 Color matte settings 50 Color palette window 36 Color vector key 65 Communications status 263 Config menu 219 240 Constant duration mode 146 Continuously capturing still images 109 Control panel button labels 309 care 310 connectors 43 power supply 42 shutdown 42 Control panel settings 219 Copy 123 operations 124 125 Cross point assign tables 223 226 Cross point button 22 inhibiting operation 46 Cross point control block 22 Cut 55 D Date and time 216 DDR recording 119 Default recall button 32 Del button 35 Delay 147 159 Device control block 26 Device Interface menu 254 control panel 230 Device setup 215 Diagnosis menu 263 Directories 208 Disk recorder 134 234 DME wipe copy swap 124 DME wipe modifiers 94 operations 100 DME wipe modify clear 97 101 DME wipe pattern list 264 DME wipe patterns modifiers 94 operations 95 selecting 95 type 93 DME wipe snapshots 99 operations 99 DME wipes independent key transitions 97 operations 95
71. 2 2 With reference to steps 2 to 3 in the preceding section Making New Tally Generation Settings p 258 change the parameters as required 3 Press Execute Deleting Tally Generation Settings 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Tally Enable menu 7364 select the tally generation entry 2 Press Delete Tally Copy Settings You can copy the tally information pertaining to a particular source to a different source The settings are common to the parallel and serial tallies Making New Tally Copy Settings 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Tally Copy gt New menu 7365 1 2 Select the copy from source When setting more than one tally copy you can specify the copy from source start and end addresses No Parameter Adjustment 1 Copy From Copy from source start address From 2 Copy From Copy from source end address To 3 Specify the copy to source address No Parameter 3 Copy To From Adjustment Copy to source start address 4 Copy To To Copy to source end address 4 Press Execute Modifying Tally Copy Settings 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Tally Copy gt Modify menu 7365 2 2 Select the copy source and copy destination No Parameter Adjustment 1 Copy From Copy from source 2 Copy To Copy to source 3 Press Execute Deletin
72. 2 Execute the transition The PTN LIMIT button turns off and the pattern limit state is released Depending on the way in which the transition was executed the action will be as follows e When you press the CUT button the pattern limit is immediately released and the image switches instantaneously When you press the AUTO TRANS button until the state of the next transition the transition is carried out over the duration given by the transition rate e When you move the fader lever the transition is carried out from the pattern limit state to the state before the pattern limit transition was carried out Moving the fader lever even a little synchronizes the fader lever position with the transition state and you can move the fader lever either in the forward direction or in the reverse direction Depending on the Setup settings the transition may be executed at the instant you press the PTN LIMIT button and the button will turn off In this case execution continues for the time specified by the dedicated transition rate in the menu setting as far as the state of the next transition For details about settings amp Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings p 251 To set the transition rate when the pattern limit is released T In the lt Pattern Limit Release gt group of the Edge Direction menu 1164 select one of the following Auto Trans Rate Use the transition rate set in the transitio
73. 7431 No Menus of Disabled Operations and Settings The following menus display functions and items that are not supported by the MVS 3000 system These are disabled even if the item is selected or a value specified and do not affect device operation Menu Disabled operation setting Number Path 1115 M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key DME1 DME2 Override settings 1115 1 M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key All menu operations gt Monitor Menus of Disabled Operations and Settings 281 Menu Disabled operation setting Number Path 1116 4 M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Selection of unsupported patterns Adjust gt 1ch Pattern Select 1116 5 M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt DME Wipe All menu operations Adjust gt 2ch Pattern Select 1161 M E 1 gt DME Wipe gt 1ch Selection of unsupported patterns 1162 M E 1 gt DME Wipe gt 2ch All menu operations 1177 M E 1 gt Misc gt Snapshot DME 2nd Video selection 1415 PGM PST gt DSK1 gt Processed Key DME1 DME2 Override settings 1415 1 PGM PST gt DSK1 gt Processed Key All menu operations gt Monitor 1416 4 PGM PST gt DSK1 gt Transition gt DME Selection of unsupported patterns Wipe Adjust gt 1ch Pattern Select 1416 5 PGM PST gt DSK1 gt Transition gt DME All menu operations Wipe Adjust gt 2ch Pattern Select 1461 PGM PST gt DME W
74. 8 and FC Output 1 2 Carrying out level settings To set the low level and high level first set the trigger type to Level then use the following procedure 1 inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Device Interface gt GPI Input menu 7337 2 select the action to be set and press H L Set The H L Set menu 7337 3 appears 2 Select the setting to apply 3 To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is the GPI high level press H Set To apply the selection the input is low press L Set e When the action is Format these settings conflict with the current settings but after making the settings agreement is restored after a pulse change or power off on When the Action is Bkgd A Side Flags or Bkgd B Side Flags the levels are fixed as follows High level Off Low level On To set the level for the format converter 1 Set Action to Format in step 5 of the procedure in Making Switcher Processor GPI Input Settings amp p 254 The format converter list appears 2 Select the format converter that you want to set from the list 3 Inthe lt FC Input Output gt group press H Set or L Set to set the high level or low level respectively Making Switcher Processor GPI Output Settings The switcher port must be assigned before using the following procedure Assigning a Parallel Output Port p 232 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Swi
75. 99 overview 93 Drop border 63 Duration effect 146 keyframe 146 Duration modes 146 158 constant 146 variable 146 E Edge fill color mix 84 overview 64 Edge modifiers 63 wipe 83 Edit point 152 Effect 145 attributes 145 164 duration 146 159 editing 145 executing 148 161 keyframes 17 register editing 164 resizer 80 saving 145 162 status 164 time settings 146 159 Emboss 63 Engineering setup 211 Enter button 34 35 Error messages 298 Error Information menu message box 309 error status log 299 Message box 300 Events 180 Exporting files 207 source and destination names 226 Extended VTR 134 235 External device 131 control port settings 125 External HDD 118 F Fader lever operation 250 Index x pu 311 xepu 312 Fade to black 60 250 setup 250 Features 12 Files 200 autoload function 202 209 batch copying 207 batch loading 207 batch saving 206 copying 204 copying between different unit IDs 209 deleting 117 205 frame memory 117 importing and exporting 207 loading 204 locking load operations 218 renaming 118 205 saving 203 Flexi Pad 13 28 assigning functions 222 DME wipe patterns 99 effects 161 key adjustment 74 keyframe 153 macros 182 master timeline 162 shotbox 179 snapshot 168 wipe patterns 90 Flip flop mode and bus fixed mode 56 Format converter conversion 244 output 248 setting 212 Frame memory clip function 111 clip operation 111 extracting images 12
76. Adjust the following parameter 2 No Parameter EC Position Adjustment Image position To return the edge crop image to the center Press Cancel Setting the image position in letter box up conversion mode T Inthe lt Letter Box Position gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input gt FC Adjust menu 7332 2 press Position turning it on 2 Adjust the following parameter 2 No Parameter LB Position Adjustment Image position To return the letterbox image to the center Press Cancel Making enhancer settings 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input gt FC Adjust menu 7332 2 press Enhancer turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Parameter group 1 2 No Parameter Adjustment 2 Detail Gain Adjust the edge enhancement sharpness 3 Limiter Adjust the maximum signal level to be added to the original signal 4 Crisp Set the amplitude value for which a low amplitude signal is not emphasized 5 Level Set the luminance range for edge Depend enhancement Parameter group 2 2 No Parameter Adjustment 2 Frequency Set the center frequency for edge enhancement 3 H V Ratio Set the horizontal vertical ratio for edge enhancement Making detailed settings for down conversion 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input gt FC Adjust menu 7332 2 select the input to which the
77. Crop The Border Crop menu 1115 2 appears 3 Press Crop turning it on 4 Set the following parameters Parameter group 1 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Crop positions on left and right sides 2 V Crop positions on top and bottom sides 3 All Crop positions on all sides Parameter group 2 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 Top Crop position on top side 2 Left Crop position on left side 3 Right Crop position on right side 4 Bottom Crop position on bottom side Signs of numeric settings For H V and All settings the sign of the setting need not be considered For example in the case of an H setting the value for Left is automatically regarded as a negative value and the value for Right as a positive value to display the image The following is an example of these settings Parameter Entered value Setting H 1 5 Left 1 50 Right 1 50 1 5 Left 1 50 Right 1 50 5 To soften the edges of the image press Edge Soft turning it on and set the following parameter Edges cannot be softened when the Crop effect is disabled No Parameter 1 Soft Adjustment Edge softness If mosaic is enabled or if defocus is enabled and in the lt Defocus Mode gt group you select Video Key then the crop is disabled Applying a border to a key for which resizer is on 1 Inthe M 1 gt key1 gt Pr
78. External Device Connected to the Serial Port p 232 When using a disk recorder or Extended VTR always use the Device gt DDR VTR gt File List menu 5333 to recall the file amp p 142 Shared Functions for External Device Control Keyframe functions There are 250 registers numbered 1 to 250 holding external device control data as keyframe data p 145 only 99 registers for the GPI timeline The following are the keyframe functions that can be used e RECALL 1 250 STORE 1 250 empty register search AUTO SAVE RECALL MODE RECALL RECALL amp REWIND Chapter EDIT ENABLE EDIT UNDO CONST DUR EFF DUR KF DUR DELAY PAUSE INSERT BEFORE INSERT AFTER MODIFY DELETE COPY PASTE BEFORE PASTE AFTER FROM TO ALL PREV KF NEXT KF GOTO TC GOTO KF RUN REWIND FF STOP NEXT KF NORMAL JOG KF FADER Actions set in a keyframe are executed only when the keyframe effect is executed in the normal direction Take care when executing simultaneously with a switcher or keyframe effect since the actions are not executed in the reverse direction The following keyframe functions cannot be used KFLOOP EFFECT LOOP REVERSE NORMAL REVERSE PATH Saving to registers Set the data for controlling external devices in the Device menu You can save the set data in keyframe snapshot or shotbox registers p 144 You can manipulate data by recalling the register in which it is saved and usin
79. If you press a color palette button with this button held down the color is used as the source for copying Next press a different color palette button to copy to that button Swap If you press two color palette buttons in sequence with this button held down the two colors are swapped Default If you press any color palette button with this button held down the color palette button is set to the default color Color display This shows the setting color and its parameters LUM SAT and HUE By adjusting the parameters you can create any color If a parameter value is outside the permitted range for RGB 0 to 255 the Illegal Color indication appears and this is adjusted to a value within range Cancel Pressing this button returns to the state when the color palette window was opened Basic Menu Operations Numeric keypad Use this to enter numeric values for parameters For details Numeric Keypad Window p 34 Basic Menu Operations Some functions and items not supported by the MVS 3000 system may be displayed in parts of the menu These items are ignored even if selected and values specified and are not reflected in the system operation For details Menus of Disabled Operations and Settings p 281 Recalling Menus The following three methods are available for recalling menus Top menu selection buttons on the top menu window Open the top menu 1st menu level of
80. Inthe Keyl Wipe Adjust menu press Position turning it on 2 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Position H Horizontal position 2 Position V Vertical position a p 85 To move the pattern from its current position to the center through the course of a transition Press Auto Center turning it on Rotating the wipe pattern Rotation T In the lt Rotation gt group of the Keyl Wipe Adjust menu select the rotation type Angle Incline the pattern through a fixed angle Speed Rotate at a speed rate Magnitude Rotate the pattern through a fixed angle during the course of the transition 2 Depending on the selection in step 1 set the following parameters When Angle is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 Angle Rotation angle of pattern a p 86 When Speed is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 Speed Rotation speed of pattern a p 86 When Magnitude is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 Angle Angle of pattern at start of transition 2 Magnitude Amount of rotation through course of transition a p 86 Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio Aspect ratio 1 Inthe Key1 Wipe Adjust menu press Aspect turning it on 2 Set the following parameter No Parameter Adjustment 1 Aspect Aspect ratio a p 86 Replicating the wipe pattern
81. Key Edge Modifications amp p 70 Setting the degree of edge softening SOFT EDGE button Softens the key edge For details about parameters see step 6 in Key Edge Modifications p 70 Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults Holding down a key type button LUM LIN CRK or WIPE PTN recalls the key default values Key modify clear When the KEY ADJ button is held down holding down the region selection button for the selected region together returns all the key settings of the region to the initial status settings When the KEY ADJ button is held down holding down the button for the selected key together returns the key settings to the initial status settings For details about initial status amp Saving User Defined Settings p 214 Resizer Resizer allows you to apply effects such as image shrinking magnification and movement rotation as well as change of the aspect ratio to the processed key You can use the following operations e Two dimensional transformations of keys p 77 e Key rotation on the x or y axis e Resizer interpolation settings p 78 e Resizer crop border settings p 79 e Resizer effect settings p 80 mosaic defocus e Resizer can only be used for keys 1 and 2 DSK1 and DSK2 for the PGM PST bank e The image of the key manipulated by resizer has a one frame delay e DME wipes cannot be simultaneously used on keys whe
82. Key Mask Masks a part of a key Bkgd Mask Masks a part of a background 3 Inthe lt Mask Source gt group select the mask source Box Signal from the dedicated box generator Pattern Signal from the dedicated pattern generator 4 Set the mask source parameters When Box is selected No Parameter Top Adjustment Position of top side Left Position of the left side Right Position of the right side Bottom Position of the bottom side oy AJ wo rm Soft Box softness Key Adjustments Menus 73 shay y1 dey9 74 When Pattern is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 Size Pattern size 2 Soft Edge softness of the pattern 5 Pattern Pattern number a The pattern is the same as the wipe See Wipe Pattern List p 264 To select the pattern display the Mask Ptn Select menu 1113 1 by pressing the Mask Ptn Select button in the Main Mask menu After selecting one of the patterns wipe patterns 1 to 24 displayed in the Mix Pattern Select menu you can adjust the following parameters Using the blink function For example to perform settings for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 Open the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition menu 1116 2 Inthe lt Blink gt group select Key Blink or Edge Blink to set it on 3 Set the blink parameters When key blink is selected No Paramet
83. Low Low 1 times 1 times 3 times gt Forward direction Reverse direction To disable the Z ring and cancel variable mode press the STOP button Alternatively pressing any of the REW PLAY FF STB OFF and ALL STOP editing buttons cancels variable mode Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders Recording to VTRs and disk recorders You can record to the VTR or disk recorder selected in the device control block e Recording is not possible if the VTR or disk recorder is not set to Recorder e The disk recorder type must be specified to use the video disk communications protocol p 232 e When using a disk recorder recording is not possible unless a new file name is specified For details about file name settings amp Creating new files p 142 1 Using the buttons of the device control block select the VTR or disk recorder to which you want to record You can select more than one button The first button pressed lights green as the reference device and subsequently pressed buttons light amber 2 While holding down the REC button in the device control block press the PLAY button Recording starts During recording the REC button lights red and the PLAY button lights amber Note the following points about recording to a disk recorder e The maximum length of time that can be recorded in one operation is 30 minutes If you want to record to a dif
84. M IE 1 Key1 Type Key Type Luminance 2 Frame Men riegQOoles TumboaigsirgaaMinaneoot Frame Mem File Delete Thumbnail Single Simage0o1 Frame Mem File Delete Thumbnail Single Mimage002 Frame Mem File Delete Thumbnall Single Simage002 M E 1 Key1 Type Matte Adjust Fill Matte Mix Color Menu macro configuration list 2 Selecta register 3 Press Recall amp Run x or Recall x x is the number of the register selected in the menu macro register list To execute the menu macro at the same time as recalling the register press Recall amp Run x To recall the register only press Recall x Executing a menu macro In the Macro gt Menu Macro Register gt Recall amp Run menu 5431 check that you are not in macro editing mode then use the following procedure Select the opening event to execute 2 Press Run To stop execution of a macro Press Stop To move to the start of a menu macro event Press Rewind Recalling a menu macro register from a macro register Menu macro recall and execution operations can be saved as events in a control panel macro and then recalled If with the control panel in macro editing mode you execute a menu macro then this operation is recorded as an event For details about recalling operations amp Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad p 182 and Editing Macros using Menus p 186 Registering a Menu Macro in the Shortcut Menu 1 In the Hom
85. Menu macro Remaining Memory register name Menu Macro 1 MMCR1 Remain 99 92 Menu macro creation event list If required press the Auto Insert button to toggle the auto insert mode on or off In the auto insert mode when you carry out a menu operation this is automatically recorded as an event in the menu macro Create an event carry out the menu operation you want to record as an event in the menu macro For details about menus that can be recorded Menu macro events p 194 When auto insert mode is on carrying out a menu operation automatically saves the event in a menu macro When auto insert mode is off proceed to step 5 When auto insert mode is off press Insert Before or Insert After to save the event Repeat steps 4 and 5 to register the required events in the menu macro Set the event execution interval No Parameter Adjustment 5 Interval Time Event interval seconds Sec The settings are applied to each menu macro register Press the Store button Enter the menu macro register number as required and press Enter The menu macro is saved with the specified number The menu returns to the state in step 1 To set a pause duration During menu macro editing use the following procedure Enter the pause duration No Parameter Adjustment 4 Pause Time Sec Pause duration Seconds 2 Press Pause Set W
86. No Parameter 1 Soft Adjustment Edge softness Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions Setting the wipe position Positioner There are two methods of setting the wipe position using the device control block or in a menu To set the wipe position using the trackball 1 Press the M E1 button in the device control block turning it on The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position setting as follows Table 1 Buttons and assigned settings Button Setting name K1 Wipe position for independent key 1 transition K2 Wipe position for independent key 2 transition K3 Wipe position for independent key 3 transition K4 Wipe position for independent key 4 transition Table 2 Buttons assigned to functions Button Function name POS Toggle Position On Off X Y Fix the operating direction CTR Return the pattern position to the center of the screen 2 Press the K1 button and select the setting item key 1 You can also enable simultaneous selection of multiple keys in the Setup menu 3 Press the POS button turning Position on 4 Move the trackball to set the wipe position By pressing the X button turning it on you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction and by pressing the Y button turning it on you can restrict movement to the vertical direction To set the wipe position by a menu operation 1
87. Overview In the MVS system all detailed settings for basic operations such as transitions keys and wipes are made in menus In addition system management data management and setup are all performed using menu operations You can display menus on an external monitor and operate using a mouse or touch panel You select menus and items by pressing buttons and lists displayed on the screen touch operation or by clicking with the mouse For information about using the mouse amp Operation with a Mouse p 38 For information about supported monitors contact your Sony representative Top Menu List When the control panel is powered on the top menu list appears as shown below DEV SNAP SHOT Sa Shutdown USER SETUP ENG SETUP Press each button to display the corresponding top menu in the monitor screen Press the Shutdown button on the bottom right to shut down the control panel For details about shutting down the control panel Shutting down the control panel p 42 Menu Screen The menu screen consists of the following principal parts The section describes the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu 1111 screen as an example Names and Functions of Parts of the Menu lt previous button and gt next button Status area Menu page number button Menu title button Edge Matte 8H Mode Source Proc Key cB Key Type Linear Key Invert Po
88. Path settings for the switcher M E 1 bank and PGM PST bank 2nd and 3rd rows Path settings for Userl to User8 Time Settings Path Setting soueAey se deyo 159 seweiyhoy 1 Ja deyo A path cannot be set even if a category is selected using the M E 2 button on the 1st row or buttons on the 4th row Making switcher path settings This section describes an example using key 1 on the M E 1 bank The area for the VF buttons shows the names of items A P sign by a button indicates that pressing it opens a more detailed setting menu The status area shows the settings for Xpt Hue and Curve However depending on the item these parameters may or may not be present Whenever you set a path or modify its setting be sure to press the MOD button in the Flexi Pad The setting does not become effective unless the MOD button is pressed Key Frame Pag Effect 0 Free KF 0 6113 1 gt Path gt M E 1 KF 0 0 00 00 00 00 Aa y IIE IN h Hekeke w z a NNN DME User Timeline PGM Assign Changing the path type for Curve 1 In the Key Frame gt Path menu 6113 press M E 1 The M E 1 menu 6113 1 appears 2 Press the Curve path type indication for the Key1 item that you want to change A path selection window appears 3 Press the indication for the desired path type to select it OFF Executing the effect causes no change Step There
89. Priority 1474 No HF6 Clip Transition 1476 Yes Clip 1476 1 Yes Transition 1471 Yes Snapshot 1477 No HF7 Snapshot 1477 No a For DSK2 DSK3 and DSK4 the menu page number changes as follows DSK2 142X DSK3 143X DSK4 144X b The Matte Adjust menu 1411 2 is displayed if Matte is selected in the lt Key Fill gt group and the Signal Select menu 1411 3 is displayed if Key Bus is selected c The Pattern Select menu 1416 2 is displayed if Key Wipe Pattern is selected in the lt Key Type gt group and the Signal Select menu 1411 3 is displayed if a setting other than Key Wipe Pattern is selected d Not displayed for DSK3 and DSK4 e For DSK3 and DSK4 the menu name changes to Edge Pattern Adjust gt Pattern Select f Some parameters are not reset to default values xlpueddy Color Bkgd Menu Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 Color Bkgd1 2210 Yes Mix Ptn Select 2210 1 Yes VF2 Color Bkgd2 2220 Yes Mix Ptn Select 2220 1 Yes a Some parameters are not reset to default values AUX Menu Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 Aux Bus 2311 Yes 270 Menu Tree Frame Memory Menu Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 Still HF 1 Recall 2511 No HF2 Freeze Store 2512 Yes HF4 Animat
90. Snapshots Overview The term snapshot refers to a function whereby the various settings required to apply a particular effect to an image are saved in memory as a set of data for recall as required to recover the original state Use the following to operate the snapshot e Flexi Pad p 168 e Menu p 171 If the M E bank has the Inhibit setting p 219 itis not possible to recall a snapshot on that M E bank Snapshot Types Snapshots are divided as follows Snapshots applying to a particular region functional block of the switcher The term snapshot alone usually refers to this type of snapshot This only applies to regions assigned to region selection buttons in the Flexi Pad For details about a region amp Regions p 144 Master snapshot This applies to the selected regions and the register numbers saved in the regions A master snapshot can be saved and recalled using the Flexi Pad Snapshots applying only to particular functions This type of snapshot includes the following Key snapshot This includes the key on off state and all key settings other than key priority for each keyer amp p 81 Wipe snapshot This includes the wipe settings of each of the banks p 89 DME wipe snapshot This includes the DME wipe settings of each of the banks p 99 Chapter The rest of this section describes the snapshots that apply to a particular region or regions S
91. Speed of waves e Negative values create waves Target bank Target keyer Target data M E 1 Keys 1 to 4 Key settings excluding PGM PST Downstream is es data keys 1 to 4 in the down left and counterclockwise directions e Positive values create waves in the up right and clockwise directions Setup data e Key snapshots e Key memory Copy and Swap sBumes 1410 pue dems pue Adog spunosbyoeg 10 09 8 seydeyy 123 sBulyjes 19410 pue dems pue Adog spunosbyoeg 10109 g sajdeuD 124 Wipe copy and wipe swap You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the banks as follows Color data copy and swap You can copy or swap the color data among the following color generators Target bank Target data M E 1 Wipe settings PGM PST However it is not possible to carry out copy or swap involving independent key transition wipe settings Wipe copy and wipe swap in the independent key transition control block You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the following keyers Target bank Target keyer Target data M E 1 Keys 1 to 4 Wipe settings in the independent key PGM PST iar tet transition control y block DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the banks as follows Target bank Target data M E 1 DME wipe settings PGM PST However it is not possible to carry out cop
92. Testing an action command Press Test Fire The action command is output from the switcher Remote 1 to Remote 4 ports Clearing an action setting To clear the setting for separate devices Select the device select action 1 Off then press Set To clear the action settings for all devices in a single operation Press All Off Setting the action for a rewind operation On the P Bus timeline when the REWIND button in the Flexi Pad is pressed the action set for the first keyframe is not executed when the RUN button is pressed then the first keyframe action is executed To execute an action when the REWIND button is pressed it is necessary to set this action Rewind Action To carry out this setting press Rewind Action in the Device gt P Bus Timeline gt P Bus Timeline menu 5321 to recall the Rewind Action menu 5321 1 In this setting screen use the same setting method as in the screen for setting an action on the P Bus timeline Alternatively you can select the reverse arrangement whereby when the REWIND button is pressed this executes the action set for the first keyframe and when the RUN button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed In this case the Rewind Action setting is still valid For details amp Setting the First Keyframe When a Rewind is Executed p 236 Carrying out a Direct Store You can carry out a Learn with the register number specified for the device
93. To select all regions press ALL Operation between regions Operation between regions is possible in the following cases e Between M E 1 and P P regions e Between two of the User to 8 regions having the same configuration 3 Press OK 4 Select the source and destination registers To select all registers press ALL 5 To copy without transferring the name in the Copy group press W o Name turning it on 6 In the lt Copy gt group press Copy This carries out the copy If for example the copy destination register is write protected or the same register is specified both as the copy source and destination registers a confirmation message appears Press OK to cancel the copy Merging effect registers 1 Open the Effect gt Effect 1 99 gt Copy Merge menu 6223 The left side of the status area shows a list for the register to be placed at the back when merged The right side shows a list for the register to be placed at the front when merged 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the list and in the selection window select the region You can select more than one region To select all regions press ALL 3 Press OK 4 Select the register to be at the back and the register to be at the front after the merge 5 Press Merge Deleting data from effect registers 1 Open the Effect gt Effect 1 99 gt Delete menu 6226 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the
94. Wipe gt Edge Direction menu 1164 2 Select the edge type in the lt Edge gt group Border Border Soft Border Soft border 3 Set the parameters according to the selection in step 2 When Border is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 Width Border width 3 Luminance Luminance of border color 4 Saturation Saturation 5 Hue Hue When Soft Border is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 Width Border width 2 Inner Soft Border inner softness 3 Luminance Luminance of border color 4 Saturation Saturation 5 Hue Hue Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings sedi IWA 9 Jeideuo 95 s d M AWC 9 Je deyo 96 Setting the DME wipe position Positioner 1 Open the M E 1 gt DME Wipe gt Modify menu 1165 2 Press Position in the lt Position gt group turning it on 3 Set the following parameters No Parameter 1 H Adjustment Horizontal position 2 V Vertical position To return the DME wipe pattern position to the center of the screen In the lt Position gt group press Center Displaying and moving the position of the DME wipe pattern position select 1 Open the M E 1 gt DME Wipe gt Modify menu 1165 Among the Top Left Top Right Bottom Left and Bottom Right buttons in the lt Position Select gt group the button that is on indicates the current display position of the DME wipe pattern 2 Press Po
95. Y in step 3 set the following parameter No Parameter 1 Mode Adjustment Degree of motion detection 5 Inthe lt Key Field Frame Mode gt group select the interpolation method for the key signal The supported signal formats are 4801 59 94 5761 50 1080i 59 94 and 1080i 50 Adaptive Detect changes in the luminance component of the key signal separately and switch automatically between fields and frames Field Perform interpolation in field units This gives natural movement suitable for moving video Frame Perform interpolation in frame units This gives higher image precision suitable for still pictures 6 When you select Adaptive in step 5 set the following parameter No Parameter 1 Mode Adjustment Degree of motion detection T Inthe lt Filter Mode gt group select the method used to show the picture reduced or expanded Model standard Even when the picture is reduced add compensation so that it can be seen clearly Mode2 soft Suppress aliasing when expanding or reducing the picture Mode3 sharp Do not suppress aliasing when expanding or reducing the picture Resizer Crop Border Settings Making a crop setting for a key for which resizer is on For example to make the crop settings for key 1 of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 Inthe ME 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key menu 1115 press Resizer turning it on 2 Press Border
96. Z Ja deyuD 233 dnjes jeued joujuoy Z4 Ja deyD 234 Making detailed settings for a disk recorder video disk communications protocol 1 In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt Serial Port Assign menu 7325 5 select the serial port connected to the disk recorder for which you want to make the settings Press Port Setting When DDR VDCP is selected as the protocol the DDR VDCP Setting menu 7325 9 appears DDR Type Player A Frame Control Mode Non Drop Frame Play After Cueup Delay Stop Delay Idle Delay Variable Length DDR Type Recorder When Simple VDCP is selected as the protocol the Simple VDCP Setting menu 7325 11 appears a Frame Control Mod Non Drop Frame Loop Idle Delay Name Mode Variable Length DDR Type Recorder In the lt DDR Type gt group select the type of disk recorder Player Functions as a player Recorder Functions as a recorder In the lt Name Mode gt group select the file name character count mode Fixed 8 Character Uses 8 character file names Variable Length Uses variable length file names The file name is limited to 23 characters In the lt TC Sense gt group select the type of timecode sensing Interfacing with External Devices Zero based Mode in which timecode is detected taking the first frame of the recalled file as 00 00 00 00 SOM based Mode in which timecode saved in t
97. a macro attachment is set p 184 5 When auto insert mode is off press the INS button to register the event 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to register the required events in the macro Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad This registers the events in the macro in the order the operations were carried out on the control panel 7 Press the STOR button 8 Enter the register number to save with the numeric keypad buttons There is no need to enter a number if saving into the register recalled in step 1 9 Press the ENTR button This saves the created macro in the register and editing ends The MCRO button lights amber To merge a macro for which a macro attachment is set While creating editing a macro if you press a button for which a macro attachment is set the macro in the register assigned to the button is recalled and the following occurs e When auto insert mode is on it is merged with the macro being edited However the macro assigned to the button is not executed e When auto insert mode is off it is stored in the paste buffer Pressing the PSTE button merges it with the macro being edited Specifying an edit point T Recall the register for the macro 1 to 250 you want to edit amp p 182 2 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to macro editing mode 3 Using any of the following methods specify the edit point To move the edit p
98. a macro by recalling an empty register Recalling a register holding a macro executes the macro immediately To recall a macro register use the following procedure Recalling by entering a register number 1 Press the MCRO button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to macro mode 2 Enter the number of the register 1 to 250 to be recalled with the numeric keypad buttons To search for an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button The entered register number or corresponding register number appears in the alphanumeric display If the number is followed by a letter E the register is empty 3 Press the ENTR button e It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a time e If the same register is recalled again during macro execution or when the macro is paused the following operation depends on a setting in the Setup menu For details amp Setting the Macro Execution Mode p 238 e Individual events stored in a macro are executed according to the settings in the Setup menu If you change the settings in the Setup menu a saved macro may not have the expected effect e During macro execution if you switch the control panel to macro editing mode the macro being executed stops e During macro editing it is not possible to execute a macro If you recall a macro from the Flexi Pad while executing another macro using a button with a macr
99. a shortcut menu by grouping frequently used menus into a Favorites menu In addition to menus menu macros can also be saved to the shortcut menu For details about menu macros amp Menu Macros p 194 The shortcut menu settings are handled as part of the control panel setup You can recall and save them in the same way as setup data Recalling a menu from the shortcut menu 1 Open the Home gt Favorites gt Shortcut menu 0021 2 Selecta group in the lt Group Select gt group 3 Press the button to which the desired menu is registered Registering a menu to the shortcut menu You can register 15 buttons to a single shortcut menu group The following two registration methods are available To register by page number 1 In the Home gt Favorites gt Shortcut menu 0021 select the group to which you want to register the menu 2 Press Button Edit The Home gt Favorites gt Button Edit menu 0023 appears 3 Select the position in which to display the button To change the content of an already displayed button press the button to select it 4 Press Page Set 5 Enter the page number for the menu you want to register To register the currently displayed menu 1 In the Home gt Favorites gt Shortcut menu 0021 select the group to which you want to register the menu beforehand Display the menu you want to register in the shortcut menu Press the menu page number button and press
100. and a combination of the two colors a color mix 1 Open the M E 1 gt Wipe gt Edge Direction menu 1154 2 Select the edge type in the lt Edge gt group 3 Depending on the selection in step 2 set the following parameters When Border is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 Width Border width When Soft edge is selected No Parameter 1 Soft Adjustment Edge softness When Soft Border is selected No Parameter Adjustment Width Border width Inner Soft Border inner softness Outer Soft Border outer softness Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 4 When you selected Border or Soft Border select the edge fill signal in the lt Edge Fill gt group Utility 1 Bus Signal selected on the utility bus Matte Signal from the dedicated color matte generator 5 Depending on the selection in step 4 carry out the following operation When Utility 1 Bus is selected Hold down the UTIL1 button in the 1st row of the cross point control block and select the signal in the 2nd row When Matte is selected In the Edge Direction menu press Matte Adjust to display the Matte Adjust menu 1154 1 then adjust the single color or two color combination color matte Select whether to use a single color matte or a two color combination in the lt Edge Matte gt group Flat Color Adjust color 1 with the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Luminance Lu
101. appears in the alphanumeric display If the number is followed by a letter e or E this indicates the following e Indicates the selected register is empty for the regions selected in step 2 E Indicates that the corresponding register is empty in all selectable regions 6 Press the ENTR button This saves the effect in the specified register Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Creating and Saving a Master Timeline in the Flexi Pad Creating and saving a master timeline You can save region information information on any regions including the register numbers associated with the regions referred to as a master timeline in a dedicated register By recalling that register you can manipulate the regions and registers together Creating and saving a master timeline 1 Press the EFF button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to effect operation mode 2 Recall the register number of the effect you want to save on the master timeline for each region amp p 151 3 Press the buttons for the regions you want to save on the master timeline turning them on Press the region selection button MSTR turning it on The display shows the number of the register last used for master timeline register operation Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to effect editing mode Press the STOR button With the numeric keypad
102. automatically executing a keyframe effect 1 2 In the Flexi Pad press the EFF button turning it on Press the button corresponding to the region you want to select turning it on You can select more than one button Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad buttons Press the REWIND button The VTR Extended VTR disk recorder automatically advances to the timecode value set as the start point While the VTR Extended VTR disk recorder is operating the ALL STOP button in the device control block flashes amber and when the start point is reached lights green If the operating VTR Extended VTR disk recorder is selected as the reference region in the device control block the CUE button also flashes and lights in the same way as the ALL STOP button Also when the start point is reached the STOP button lights amber Press the RUN button The VTR Extended VTR disk recorder is now controlled according to the keyframe data Setting the start point stop point and start delay time in a menu 1 Open the Device gt DDR VTR gt Cueup amp Play menu 5331 The status area shows the device number register number status information current time start point stop point and start delay time 2 Select the device 3 Carry out any of the following operations as required e To set the start point press Set in the lt Start TC gt group e To set the stop point press
103. axis to adjust the second parameter Moving up or to the right increases the parameter value and moving down or to the left decreases the parameter value Turn the Z ring to adjust the third parameter Turning clockwise increases the parameter value and turning counterclockwise decreases the parameter value Basic Menu Operations Sued JO suonouny pue sewenN z 13 deyo 37 Sued JO suoloun4 pue sowey Zz Jejdeup 38 Returning Parameters to Default Values Press the Default Recall button turning it on then press a VF button or parameter setting button to return the parameters to their default values in the following groupings e When a VF button is pressed Function grouping functions of the HF buttons at the bottom of the screen e When a parameter setting button is pressed Parameter grouping e The default state of the parameters depends on the initial status mode specified in the Setup menu as follows User The state when Initial Status Define is executed Factory Factory default settings e The horizontal H and vertical V position settings cannot be returned to their default states individually For example returning the horizontal H position to its default value also returns the vertical V position to its default value automatically and vice versa For details about menus that can be returned to their default states amp Menu Tree p 266 Operation with a Mouse Inste
104. because the register is locked Please change the register status to be unlocked first 6211 1 Effect gt Master Timeline gt Store gt Edit 6311 1 Snapshot gt Master Snapshot gt Store gt Edit 6411 1 Shotbox gt Register gt Store gt Edit In the above menus an attempt was made to store to a register that is locked Unlock the register before carrying out the store Error Messages Shown in the Error Information Menu If a file transfer related error occurs the Error Information menu appears to the following error messages Error message Error Server Not Respond Error description measures There is absolutely no response on the LAN from the processor Check your LAN connections and the power source of the processor Error No Space There is insufficient space in the local disk or removable disk If a message other than those above appears store the data or recall the data again If the error message persists M al nte nance contact your Sony service representative Exchanging Button Labels A button top puller is supplied with the control panel After changing a pattern assigned to a numeric button you can use the following procedure to exchange the button label T write the new pattern on one of the supplied exchange labels 2 Grip the holes on the button sides with the supplied button top puller and remove the button 3 Grip the slots on the sides of the whi
105. button The TRANS PVW button lights green and the switcher is now in the transition preview mode At this point the preview output is the same as the program output before the TRANS PVW button was pressed 2 Operate the fader lever or press the AUTO TRANS button or CUT button On the preview monitor you can check the effect of the transition To terminate a transition preview There are three modes for a transition preview To terminate a transition preview carry out the operation which depends on the mode and press the TRANS PVW button turning it off Lock Switching the TRANS PVW button on or off switches between the transition preview mode and the normal mode Hold The preview mode is enabled only while the TRANS PVW button is held down One Time Each time a transition ends it reverts to the normal mode Set the transition preview mode in the following combinations For details amp Setting the Button Operation Mode p 237 and Setting the transition preview mode p 250 suolisuel pue uonoajas jeubis Je deyp Transition Switcher setup Panel setup preview Transition menu Operation gt Custom mode lt Transition Button menu Preview gt group lt Trans Pvw gt group Lock Normal Lock Hold Normal Hold One Time One Time Independent Key Transitions What is an independent key transition In addition to common transitions it is pos
106. buttons enter the number of the register in which you want to save the master timeline To search for an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button The entered register number or corresponding register number appears in the alphanumeric display If the number is followed by a letter E the register is empty Press the ENTR button The regions selected in step 3 and the register numbers recalled in those regions are saved in the master timeline register Saving the master timeline does not carry out a save of effects Save the effects for each region first then carry out the master timeline save Changing a master timeline As an example if you want to change the M E 1 register from Effect 11 to Effect 15 use the following procedure 1 Recall the master timeline register you want to change amp p 151 This simultaneously recalls M E 1 register 11 and P P register 11 and the M E 1 and P P region selection buttons light Press the region selection button MSTR turning it off Turn on only the button for the region you want to change here M E 1 and recall the desired register here Effect 15 This recalls M E 1 register 15 while on P P register 11 remains selected 4 Press the buttons for the regions you want to save on the master timeline here M E 1 and P P turning them on 5 Press the region selection button MSTR turning it on The al
107. clip file cannot be deleted Not enough free register area for Backup or Restore process 10 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Restore is pressed this message appears if there is not enough space to carry out the backup Prepare failed not any file was found on this board 11 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Restore is pressed this message appears if no image is present Prepare failed insufficient Clip id 15 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Restore is pressed this message appears if there are not enough Clip IDs internal processing error Restore failed Cannot find symbol files on this tape 18 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Restore is pressed this message appears if a marker frame file was not found ERROR 19 Bad register number 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Restore is pressed this message appears if Register Number is invalid internal processing error Restore failed file name already exist try to rename but unsuccessful 20 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Restore is pressed this message appears if renaming failed
108. corresponds to no rotation Speed 2 Magnitude Amount of rotation through Through the course of the course of transition transition the wipe pattern rotates e A value of 200 00 at a fixed specified speed corresponds to a rotation of two turns counterclockwise e A value of 200 00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns clockwise Magnitude e A value of 0 00 corresponds to no rotation Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates through the specified angle Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio AA Aspect ratio You can freely change the aspect ratio of the pattern 1 Open the M E 1 gt Wipe gt Main Modify menu 1155 86 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings p Aspect Off Aspect On 1 Open the M E 1 gt Wipe gt Main Modify menu 1155 2 Press Aspect turning it on 3 Setthe following parameter No Parameter Adjustment 1 Aspect Aspect ratio e Negative values expand vertically e Positive values expand horizontally Replicating the wipe pattern Multiplication The same pattern can be repeated horizontally and vertically or both up to 63 times kkk Kk KK x Multi On gt Multi Off The Invert Type parameter allows you to select one of the following four replication layouts VV VV y 7 NV daa y IN
109. disable settings are maintained until you next press the XPT HOLD button Applying temporary attributes does not affect the contents of the register It is not possible to apply temporary attributes to a master snapshot 5 Press the button in the memory recall section corresponding to the register you want to recall The button you pressed is lit yellow and this recalls the snapshot The alphanumeric display shows the selected register number To enter the number of the register to be recalled using the numeric keypad After step 1 in Recalling a snapshot amp p 170 press the 10 KEY button in the memory recall section This switches the memory recall section to the numeric keypad input mode and after pressing the RCLL button lighting it yellow you can enter the desired register number from the numeric keypad Confirm the displayed number by pressing the ENTR button To cancel a snapshot recall operation Press the UNDO button It is not possible to cancel recalling a master snapshot Creating and saving a master snapshot To create and save a master snapshot refer to the operations in Creating and Saving a Master Timeline in the Flexi Pad amp p 162 Note however that in place of the EFF button in the Flexi Pad the SNAPSHOT button is used Deleting a snapshot As an example to delete a snapshot on the M E 1 bank proceed as follows 1 Press the SNAPSHOT button in the Flexi Pad
110. disk recorder timeline setting before carrying out When using a disk recorder with Cueup amp Play if you carry out the following sequence of operations the system may freeze on the frame of the start point Press the RUN button to play to a point close to the end of a file stop playback then press the RUN button SedlNeq JeUse Xy 04 Ja deup 137 SedINEG JeUeIXy OQ Jeldeup 138 The entered register number or corresponding register number appears in the alphanumeric display If the number is followed by a letter e or E this indicates the following e Indicates the selected register is empty for the regions selected in step 2 E Indicates that the corresponding register is empty in all selectable regions Press the ENTR button This recalls the register you specified in step 3 When using the device control block press the DEV button turning it on Check that the MENU button is not lit If it is lit press to turn it off With the buttons in the device control block select the VTR Extended VTR or disk recorder for which you want to make the setting You can select more than one button The first button pressed lights green as the reference device and subsequently pressed buttons light amber Set the start point e Using the START TC button Play the VTR Extended VTR or disk recorder by control from the device control block Find the desired start point and pr
111. effect 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Carry out the necessary modifications on any keyframe 3 Press the ALL button turning it on green 4 Press the MOD button Alternatively hold down the SHFT button and press the MOD button For the difference in the result Differences in the changes when a number of keyframes are modified p 155 To modify the keyframes in a specified range 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect at any keyframe within the range to be modified 3 Carry out the necessary modifications 4 Press the FROM TO button This switches the memory recall section to numeric keypad entry mode The alphanumeric display shows the current keyframe number and the indication TO 5 Carry out the following operations e To set the first keyframe in the range to be modified press the CLR button then enter the keyframe number using the numeric keypad buttons and press the ENTR button to confirm e To set the last keyframe in the range to be modified enter the keyframe number using the numeric keypad and press the ENTR button to confirm The FROM TO button lights green 6 Press the MOD button Alternatively hold down the SHFT button and press the MOD button For the difference in the result Differences in the changes when a number of keyframes are modified
112. first event in the range to be modified press the CLR button then enter the event number using the numeric keypad buttons and press the ENTR button to confirm e To set the last event in the range to be modified enter the event number using the numeric keypad and press the ENTR button to confirm The FROM TO button lights green Press the MOD button Modifying all events at the same time 1 2 Carry out steps 1 to 3 of the procedure in Modifying a single event p 185 Press the ALL button turning it on green 3 Press the MOD button Deleting an event 1 2 3 Specify the edit point p 184 To delete a number of events in a single operation press the FROM TO button or the ALL button If you press the FROM TO button specify the event range For how to specify a range of events amp Modifying a particular range of events p 185 Press the DEL button Moving events 1 2 Specify the edit point for the start of the range to be moved p 184 To move a number of events in a single operation press the FROM TO button and specify the event range For how to specify a range of events amp Modifying a particular range of events p 185 Press the DEL button This deletes the specified events from the macro and stores them in the paste buffer Move to the edit point which is the destination within the macro to which you want t
113. following ancillary data status information is added to a frame memory clip Disable In this state the ancillary data is not played This is the status when the Ancillary Enable button in the Frame Memory gt Clip gt Ancillary Enable menu 2525 is set to Off Enable In this state ancillary data is present and can be played back This is the status when the Ancillary Enable button in the Frame Memory gt Clip gt Ancillary Enable menu 2525 is set to On This is the status after a clip recording operation This status information is saved in a file and is followed when the file is recalled Frame memory clip settings For frame memory clips you can make the following settings using a menu or device control block e Start point e Stop point e Loop On Off The above settings can be saved in a snapshot register as snapshot attributes and recalled Frame Memory Clip Operations During frame memory clip playback p 112 of the pair assigned to either of the target FM selection buttons frame memory operations may not be performed properly Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip playback Preparations for Operation The preparations for using a frame memory clip hereafter a clip are the same as for a still image operation For details Preparations p 103 and Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory p 106 Frame Memory Clip Function Frame Memory Clip Opera
114. for selecting the region to which operations apply Default recall button Press this button and then press a VF button or parameter setting button to return the parameters to their default values in the following groupings e Function grouping functions of the HF buttons under the VF button e Parameter grouping values of the parameter setting buttons This only appears in those menus for which the default recall function is available For details about menus that can be returned to their default states Menu Tree p 266 lt previous button and gt next button The lt button returns to the previous menu Press the button to continue to the next menu Top Menu Window FRAME COLOR MEM pBkGD AUX COPY swap MISC DEV MCRO KEY SNAP SHOT FRAME FFF SHOT BOX USER _ ENG FILE setup setup DAG D Top menu selection buttons B Shutdown button Add Favorite button e Close button Page number entry section Top menu selection buttons These display the selected menu Shutdown button Shuts down the control panel For details about shutting down the control panel Shutting down the control panel p 42 Add Favorite button This registers the currently displayed menu to the Shortcut menu p 38 Close button This closes the top menu window Page number entry section Enter a page number and press
115. from the time that the menu display is started up listed with the most recent information at the top A maximum of 1024 error status changes appear and when the number exceeds 1024 the oldest items disappear from the list Error Messages xipueddy 299 xlpueddy ONo Date Time Device Status Effect 0 KF 0 0 Free KF 0 00 00 00 00 a Error Popup button ALL button Plural button Clear button No This is a sequential number assigned to the items in the error log Date Time This shows the date and time the status change occurred Device This shows the device on which the status change occurred Status This shows the details of the status change If you press on the list this switches the display to reverse video and selects the item You can also select items in the error log by pressing the parameter setting button Clear button This deletes the selected error log item from the list Plural button When this is on you can select more than one error log To cancel the selection press once again to return to the normal display All button When this is on all error log items are selected To cancel the selection press once again to return to the normal display Error Popup button This selects whether or not to display ERROR on the menu title button when an error occurs This button is lin
116. gt Device Interface gt Serial Port Assign GPI Input Please set Target xlpueddy Please set Trigger Type Please set Reg No Please set Aux Bus No Please set Src No 7325 1 2 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt GPI Input 7357 2 3 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Device Interface gt GPI Input In the above menus when making a setting a parameter setting value was incorrect Check the settings and try again GPI Out put Please set Target Please set Trigger Type Please set Reg No Please set Pulse Width Please set Pulse Timing 7325 3 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt GPI Output 7337 4 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Device Interface gt GPI Output In the above menus when making a setting a parameter setting value was incorrect Check the settings and try again HDD Fo rmat No external HDD was found 2 2561 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Format In the above menu when 5 Partition or 15 Partition is pressed this message appears if the external HDD cannot be found Check that the external HDD is correctly connected Format operation failed 11 2561 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Format In the above menu when 5 Partition or 15 Partition is pressed this message appears if HDD formatting failed Cannot access the partition 12 25
117. gt Record menu 2523 record the tape image as a clip p 114 Open the Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction menu 2542 Select a clip single file recorded from the tape Press Extraction Start Check the message then press Yes This starts the extraction analyzes the currently selected single clip and automatically extracts a movie Clip or still image Still When there is key data a pair file is created To check the details of the images still image clip Set and check the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 No File number 3 Viewer Timecode for selected image Managing Images Using a DDR VTR Aiowey ewes4 zZ Jaydeyo 121 sBulyjes 19410 pue dems pue Adod spunosbyoeg 10109 g sajdeuD Color Backgrounds Copy and Swap and Other Settings Chapter Color Background The dedicated generators generate color signals and these can be used as color backgrounds in video effects Color background selection There are two color backgrounds color background 1 and color background 2 which you use by assigning to cross point buttons Color mix The color generators can output the result of combining two colors color 1 and color 2 Using a pattern from a dedicated pattern generator color 1 and color 2 can be combined in the boundary region forming a color gradation This is referred to as color mix You can also apply modifiers to the
118. in the memory recall section to pattern images using the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Flexi Pad Mode menu 7326 3 2 Select the region for the wipe snapshot to be recalled with the region selection buttons 3 Press the button lit orange in the memory recall section corresponding to the register in which the desired wipe snapshot is stored The button you pressed lights yellow and this recalls the saved wipe snapshot The alphanumeric display shows the corresponding pattern number or register name Selecting the Wipe Pattern 1 Press the WIPE button and select the region with the region selection buttons 2 Press the PTN NO button in the memory recall section The PTN NO button lights green 3 Use the numeric keypad to enter the pattern number consisting of up to three digits and press the ENTR button This confirms the input and the pattern number p 264 appears in the alphanumeric display The PTN NO button light changes to orange and the system returns to wipe snapshot mode Editing the Wipe Pattern By pressing the EDIT ENBL button to switch the memory recall section to editing mode you can edit the selected wipe pattern To exit from the editing mode press the EDIT ENBL button again or press the EXIT button
119. in standby Stopped on mode Play Playing Playing FF Fast forwarding Rewind Rewinding Shtl gt Playing in the forward direction in shuttle mode Shtl lt Playing in the reverse direction in shuttle mode Var gt Playing in the Playing in the forward direction in forward direction in variable mode variable mode Var lt Playing in the Playing in the reverse direction in reverse direction in variable mode variable mode Jog gt Playing in the Playing in the forward direction in forward direction in jog mode jog mode Jog lt Playing in the Playing in the reverse direction in reverse direction in jog mode jog mode Still Playing still image a Not supported by Extended VTR Current Shows timecode for current device position Start TC Shows timecode for start point set on device Stop TC Shows timecode for stop point set on device Variable Shows the variable speed set for each device Delay Shows start delay time set on device Mode Shows operation mode Loop or Recue set for each device Cueup amp Play You can use the device control block or Device menu to save Cueup amp Play settings start point timecode stop point timecode start delay time and so on fora VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR in an effect register By recalling this register you can operate the following buttons in the Flexi Pad to automatically control the VTR disk recorder or Extended
120. in the Flexi Pad p 150 The regions that can be selected simultaneously are those assigned to the region selection buttons and the memory recall section buttons p 220 When MSTR and other regions are selected simultaneously the master timeline takes precedence The first button pressed is lit green as the reference region Subsequently pressed buttons turn amber for the region select buttons and yellow for the memory recall section buttons Pressing one of the amber or yellow lit buttons while holding down the EFF button turns the button green to indicate its corresponding region as the new reference region For details about the precedence order for becoming the reference region amp Reference region p 144 The alphanumeric display shows the name of the reference region and the number of the register previously recalled for that region 3 Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad buttons To search for an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button To search for an empty register common to all currently selectable regions press the button again To search for an empty register in the 100 range press 1 0 0 period in this order To search for an empty register in the 200 range press 2 0 0 period in that order The entered register number or corresponding register number appears in the alphanume
121. inhibit operation for a button press and hold the button assigned with INH SET and press the cross point button whose operation you wish to inhibit XPT HOLD cross point hold Recalls a keyframe or snapshot while maintaining the current cross point selection conditions Available for background A row and background B row The following function blocks can be enabled depending on settings in the Setup menu e Background A and B rows e Key bus e Utility bus PRE MCRO pre macro Sets a macro attachment in pre macro mode Simultaneously pressing this button and the POST MCRO button sets a macro attachment in macro only mode POST MCRO post macro Sets a macro attachment in post macro mode Simultaneously pressing this button and the PRE MCRO button sets a macro attachment in macro only mode MCRO ATTCH ENBL macro attachment enable Enables the macro attachments set for the buttons in the M E PGM PST bank In the Setup menu you can also set the buttons to light whenever they are enabled KEY Pressing and holding this button and then pressing a 2nd row button selects the key signal 1ST ROW DSPLY first row display Displays the name of the bus and function currently assigned to the 1st row in the source name display 2ND ROW DSPLY second row display Displays the source name for the bus currently selected in the 1st row in the source name displa
122. is Disable then it is not possible to switch Aspect or System Format by GPI input If a GPI to switch Aspect or System Format occurs when powering the system off the action triggered by the GPI may start immediately before the power goes off and the power may go off before the action is completed This may corrupt the setup settings It is therefore recommended to use Level Enable to avoid such a situation C As for Aux O ride Src when Rising Edge is selected on a rising edge the set AUX bus input is used On a falling edge the original state of the cross point is restored If the GPI trigger is applied repeatedly at short intervals 0 5 second or less the cross point switching may not be carried out correctly In this case apply the GPI trigger again arrying out level settings To set the low level and high level first set the trigger type to 1 Level then use the following procedure In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt GPI Input menu 7325 1 select the action to be set and press H L Set The H L Set menu 7325 2 appears Select the setting To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is the GPI high level press H Set To apply the selection the input is low press L Set To set the level for the format converter 1 Set System Format for Action using the same operation in Step 5 of Making Contro
123. is no interpolation between keyframes so that the effect parameters are updated each time a keyframe is passed Linear Linear interpolation between keyframes resulting in constant speed movement 160 Path Setting S Curve The rate of change accelerates and decelerates before and after a keyframe so that the rate of change is maximum midway between two keyframes Spline The effect follows a smooth curved path from each keyframe to the next The status area reflects the selected path type At this point depending on the setting for Curve the effect for Hue and Xpt is also affected as shown in the following table In the menu the Hue and Xpt settings do not change but the path type indication is dimmed out Curve setting Hue change Xpt change OFF Does not change Hold Stop Changes as with Is not affected the Step setting 4 it you selected Spline as the path type set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Tens Spline interpolation tension Bias Spline interpolation bias Cont Spline interpolation continuity Changing the path type for Hue 1 Inthe Key Frame gt Path gt M E 1 6113 1 press the Hue path type indicator for Key1 A path selection window appears 2 Press the indication for the desired path type to select it CW The hue changes in a clockwise direction as seen on a Vectorscope CCW The hue changes in a counterclockwi
124. it orange 3 Press the memory recall button for the register in which you want to save If you press a button which is already lit this overwrites the contents of the register Recalling a wipe snapshot from the menu In the Wipe Snapshot menu press the memory recall button for the wipe snapshot you want to recall This recalls the wipe snapshot and the button you pressed lights orange In the upper left is shown the currently recalled register name or number A setting in the Setup menu determines whether register names or pattern numbers appear Deleting a wipe snapshot from the menu 1 Inthe Wipe Snapshot menu press Delete 2 Press the memory recall button for the wipe snapshot y p p you want to delete Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi Pad Recalling a Wipe Snapshot To recall a wipe snapshot in the Flexi Pad use the following operation 1 Press the WIPE button in the Flexi Pad Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi Pad This switches the memory recall section to wipe snapshot mode Adjustment knobs WIPE button Alphanumeric display Le eal L KEJ AJ G z EEJ az A Region selection buttons Memory recall section You can change the indications for buttons 0 to 9
125. it a video signal and a key signal forming a pair You can set these video and key combinations in the Setup menu Signal Selection Bank Bus name Cross point Delegation operation button row M E 1 Background Background A bus A row Background Background B bus B row e Key 1 bus 2nd row In the 1st row press the button to which the o Key 2 bus corresponding key D Key 3 bus was assigned during 3 Key 4 bus setup turning it on F PGM Program Program S PST bus row o oO Preset bus Preset row g DSK 1 bus 2nd row In the 1st row press S the button to which the 3 DSK 2 bus corresponding key z DSK 3 bus was assigned during 5 setup turning it on DSK 4 bus p g a M E 1 Utility bus 2nd row In the 1st row press PGM the button to which PST UTIL1 was assigned during setup turning it on AUX1 to In the 1st row press AUX24 the button to which the buses corresponding bus Frame Se memory P 9 source 1 and 2 buses Edit preview bus 45 suolisues pue uonoajas euis Je deyp 46 Cross point control block button numbers Shift buttons DUOUUUOUUUUUUUUOOUUOO 1 2 3 4 first button numbers 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 second button 44 45 46 numbers Shift buttons
126. l 1 I I I L I I I I Ss ye ey i Ca i ec a my Se Se a g lt o LAN cable straight type SSeS eae DVI cable a oar bok USB cable 20 System Configuration Examples Names and Functions of Parts Chapter Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel The MVS 3000 system is composed by the MVS 3000 For details about monitors that can be connected consult switcher processor and the ICP 3000 control panel your Sony representative An external monitor connected to the control panel is required to operate the menus Control Panel Configuration Flexi Pad p 28 Device control block p 26 M E 1 bank PGM PST bank
127. linenn acs tuseaeg Sean 220 Assigning Regions to Region Selection Buttons in the Flexi Pad 220 Setting Transition Control Block Button ASSISMIMENUS 3 1 5casssenassesacaensecernsdseds 221 Assigning Devices or Functions to the Region Selection Buttons of the Device Control Block Trackball cece eeeeee 222 Inhibiting Utility Bus and Key Operations vsssacsicistdatessnacesasiecceesdcsade 222 Assigning Functions to the Buttons in the Flex Padi a ybassiguhoasss woavenevs 222 Cross Point SettingS eeceeeeeeee 223 Creating Cross Point Assign Tables 223 Setting the Cross point Button Color for Each Signal senian nn 225 Copying Cross Point Assign Tables 225 Selecting Cross Point Assign Tables 226 Names ssnsitsc Staseesdirn aaeuyaoidiers Gausetyi gcse 226 Assigning a Cross Point Button to Enable Disable Side Flags eeeeeees 226 Router Remote Control Settings 226 Assigning a Destination to a Destination Selection Button eee 226 Setting the Source Table eects 227 Assigning Levels to a Level Selection Button enone aiia 227 Selecting a Destination Selection Button for a Snapshot icenic 227 Setting Button Assignments 227 Assigning Functions to User Preference B ttonsS i essicevacesatan erase necaeencumvaanisnns 227 Assigning a Function to 2nd Row Cross Point BONS diinn aana 229 Interfacing with External Devices 230 M
128. memory folder and file to be played back 3 Press Ancillary Enable turning it on Clip Transition Operations Linked to a mix dissolve or wipe transition a frame memory clip movie is played back The following restrictions apply to the use of a clip transition e Key frame capture is not possible It is not possible to apply a pattern limit Transitions executed in two strokes such as a preset color mix with the stroke mode set to Normal or a DME wipe with a picture in picture pattern will not execute correctly It is not possible to vary the transition rate of a clip transition Transition preview cannot be used No instantaneous state of a clip transition can be saved as a snapshot When recalling a snapshot including a clip transition during execution of another clip transition the follow up transition does not operate properly Be sure to complete the transition before recalling a snapshot When a clip transition is selected as the transition type if one of the wipe direction selection buttons in the transition control block is lit it indicates the direction of clip playback Clip Transition Operations Aiowey ewes zZ Jaydeyo 115 oway ewes 7 Ja deyo 116 Setting a clip transition This section describes a clip transition using FM1 amp 2 Clip on the M E 1 bank as an example To use a clip transition effectively the image from the frame memory clip being played back during the clip
129. menu 7321 5 The status area lists the status of the currently selected link combinations of video signals and sources and the sources that can be selected 2 Select the switcher cross point button and the matrix source to be linked to the button 3 Toconfirm the matrix source selection made in step 2 press Link Source Set 4 As required repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the matrix sources to be linked to other cross point buttons To initialize the set links 1 In the Link Matrix Adjust menu 7321 4 press Init Link Table 2 Check the message then press Yes Making link bus settings For the link number selected in the External Bus Link menu use the following procedure 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt External Bus Link gt Link Bus Adjust menu 7321 6 The status area lists the current link status and the switcher buses and router destinations that can be selected In this menu too you can use the Link No parameter to set the link number 2 Select the switcher bus and the router destination to be linked to the switcher bus Overall Control Panel Settings 3 To confirm the bus selected in step 2 press Master Bus Set and to confirm the destination press Linked Dest Set Linking Transitions between Keyers You select whether or not to link transitions between keyers and if so which keyer to link to 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt Key Trans
130. nenin 178 Shotbox Execution ccssseeeeeseeeesees 179 Executing a Shotbox in the Flexi Pad 179 Executing a Shotbox Function with Cross Point Buttons in the 2nd Row 179 Shotbox Register Editing 0 10 179 Chapter 14 Macros MACK OS aserite anaiai aaan 180 Overyie Wonton ne e ia 180 Macro Creation and Editing eee 180 Macro Execution iisc 4tinn sem hik andes 182 Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad 182 Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macio nania 182 Creating and Editing a Macro 183 Editing Macros using Menus 186 Macro Register Editing eee 186 Online Editing of Macro Events 186 Offline Editing of Macro Events 188 Macro Attachment Assigning 190 Setting and Canceling a Macro Attachment iicced casted cedeuedeatinc 191 Displaying the Macro Attachment List 193 Executing a Macro by Macro ATACHIMEN ES oeaee este isla 193 Menu Macro iii tseneasesctcccusensatesccccavadaneusetes 194 Recalling a Menu Macro Register and Executing a Menu Macro 194 Creating and Editing a Menu Macro 196 Menu Macro Register Editing 0 00 198 Macro Timelline cssssssccsssssssccssressscsees 198 Creating and Editing a Macro Timeline 199 Chapter 15 Files Overview of File Operations 200 Operations on Individual Files 202 Viewing Det
131. new file on a disk recorder New files cannot be created when the disk recorder is set to Player or Recorder Player e In the case of Extended VTRs new files cannot be created 1 Open the Device gt DDR VTR gt File List menu 5333 2 Press New File 3 Enter a file name and press Enter You can enter up to eight characters Fixed 8 Character mode or 23 characters Variable Length mode For details about the file name character count mode in the video disk communications protocol Making Detailed Settings on the External Device Connected to the Serial Port p 232 When the loaded file is not a target for recording 1 Open the Device gt DDR VTR gt File List menu 5333 2 Press Unload Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders s 49q Jeuse Xy O Ja deu9 143 seweiysoy 1 Ja deyo 144 Keyframes Regions The term region refers to a functional block of the system When saving or recalling snapshot registers and effect registers or creating or editing effects you first select the region to which the operation applies You can also select multiple regions simultaneously Classification of the regions The regions are classified as follows e Master region The following 32 regions Switcher M E 1 PGM PST User1 to User8 External devices P Bus Router Device 1 to Device 12 GPI Macro Only the regions assigned to the region selection buttons of t
132. of a fader lever in the transition control block In macro only mode it is not possible to set a macro attachment T Recall the macro register 1 to 250 that you want to assign to the fader lever p 182 2 Move the fader lever to the position where you want to set the macro attachment 3 Hold down the PRE MCRO button or POST MCRO button assigned to the 1st row in the cross point control block and press the PRIOR SET button in the control block containing the fader lever operated in step 2 1 Only when setting a macro attachment to the start point or end point of fader lever operation use PRE MCRO and POST MCRO in distinction as follows To set the operation start point 0 Hold down PRE MCRO for the operation To set the operation end point 100 Hold down POST MCRO for the operation This assigns the register recalled in step 1 to the fader lever position selected in step 2 To check a macro attachment setting Hold down the PRE MCRO button or POST MCRO button assigned to the 1st row in the cross point control block While it is held down the fader lever position where Macro Attachment Assigning the macro attachment is set appears in the following places e Fader status indicator in the transition execution section An arrow appears where the macro attachment is set Transition rate indication in the transition execution section This shows the fader lever position where the macro at
133. on the preview monitor first press the TRANS PVW button to select the transition preview mode p 57 2 Press the LIMIT SET button This sets the current fader lever position as the pattern limit Setting the pattern limit by a menu operation When operating from the M E 1 bank for example open the following menu e When wipe is selected M E 1 gt Wipe gt Edge Direction menu 1154 e When DME wipe is selected M E 1 gt DME Wipe gt Edge Direction menu 1164 2 Press Pattern Limit turning it on Executing a Transition 3 Adjust the following parameter No Parameter 1 Pattern Limit Adjustment Pattern limit Executing a pattern limit transition T Press PTN LIMIT turning it on The button you pressed lights amber 2 Execute the transition The transition progresses as far as the set pattern limit Even if the transition completes the cross point button assignments of the background A and B buses do not interchange 3 Carry out the transition once again The status before the previous transition is restored To cancel the pattern limit To cancel the pattern limit after completion of step 3 in the previous procedure press the PTN LIMIT button turning it off If after carrying out step 2 in the previous procedure the pattern limit has been reached carry out the following procedure T Press the PTN LIMIT button The button you pressed lights green
134. only the foreground is output and you can make adjustments for color cancel see the next paragraph Color cancel If the foreground image includes shades of the background color turn this function on to remove the color from the foreground image Window You can adjust the range over which the key signal is determined as matching the specified hue When this function is off the default range is used for the key Chroma keying generates a key signal based on a particular color reference color in the foreground typically a plain blue background and the window refers to the range of colors which are regarded as matching this specified reference color to create the key signal As seen on a vectorscope that is in the hue saturation color space the range for this matching corresponds to a truncated sector This range is specified by two parameters the Angle parameter which determines the range of the hue parameter and the Crop parameter which determines the degree of truncation see the following figure Reference color specified by Hue setting Range of colors creating the key signal to be replaced by background signal Range of colors remaining as foreground a The Crop and Angle values do not change even if you use the auto chroma key function Y balance In normal chroma keying the key signal is generated from the chrominance component only and all elements of the fore
135. or PGM PST transition rates and independent key or DSK transition rates and change the settings These settings are linked to the other transition rate setting operations You can also display and set the fade to black transition rate Menu display The display of the independent key transition rate in the Misc gt Transition Key ME FTB menu 3231 depends on the selection in the lt Key Transition gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Transition menu 7334 for each of the switcher banks When Same On direction and Off direction settings are the same is selected in the lt Key Transition gt group Only Key or DSK in the PGM PST bank appears When Independ On direction and Off direction settings are independent is selected in the lt Key Transition gt group Key On and Key Off each appear In the PGM PST bank DSK On and DSK Off appear For details amp Settings Relating to Video Switching p 250 Setting the transition rate To set the M E transition rate For example to make the settings for the M E 1 bank use the following procedure T Inthe status area if the Misc gt Transition Key ME FTB menu 3231 press M E 1 2 Inthe lt Transition Rate gt group press Transition 3 Set the number of frames No Parameter Adjustment 1 Transition Rate Transition rate When a clip transition is selected as the transition typ
136. output port must be assigned using the control panel Make this setting in the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt Tally GPI Output Config menu 7325 12 For details Assigning a Parallel Output Port p 232 GPI timeline For a keyframe effect controlled from the control panel the GPI timeline allows you to set an action setting a trigger output from a particular GPI output port at a keyframe point on the GPI timeline At any keyframe point you can make a maximum of eight GPI output port settings GPI timeline actions e Switcher GPI output port The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register When you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect and advance the effect to the keyframe point for which the GPI output is set a trigger pulse is output to the external device from the specified GPI output port GPI Timeline Creation and Editing This section describes how to set GPI output ports to be registered at a keyframe point and how to carry out creation and editing of the GPI timeline For details about keyframe creation and editing operations amp Creating and Editing Keyframes p 133 GPI output port settings Set the GPI output port number of the switcher which outputs GPI pulses at a keyframe point on the GPI timeline Use the following procedure to change the settings 1 Open the Device gt GPI Timeline gt GPI Timeline menu
137. over the parameter setting button and turn the mouse scroll wheel Displaying the Timeline Menu souelAey saldeyo 149 seweiyhoy 1 Ja deyo 150 Settings in the Timeline Menu Selecting the region to be displayed The Timeline menu shows a timeline for each region but you can also restrict the regions to be shown Recalling the Timeline Assign menu 1 Open the Key Frame gt Timeline Assign menu 6115 The right of the status area shows a list of the regions including the global region assigned to the region selection buttons in the Flexi Pad The left shows the regions in order of precedence and whether each region is shown on the Timeline menu Deciding which regions appear on the timeline In the Timeline Assign menu press Active Region toggling it on or off On The regions for which the region selection buttons in the Flexi Pad are lit are shown in the precedence order p 150 set in this menu followed by the regions for which the buttons are off in the same order Off The regions appear according to the precedence order p 150 and display on off setting p 150 set in this menu Deciding the precedence order for timeline display To change the precedence order insert and delete regions in the list in the desired order T Inthe Timeline Assign menu select the desired precedence order position and the region you want to insert 2 Inthe lt Priority gt group press In
138. parameter setting Names and Functions of Parts of the Menu Trim button After entering the difference from the current value press this button to confirm the numeric input Enter button This confirms the entered value If correctly set the numeric keypad window closes If it is not correctly set the input display changes color Keyboard Window Notes Except when changing source names the following characters cannot be used space 3 comma dot lt gt Item display Ca Caps Lock button ere O Shift button Space button SS Clear button Input display Close button Ju BS button sled Jo suonouny pue sewen z 13 deyo Left Right button Clear Del Del button Item display This is the name of the parameter being set Input display This is the character string being input Close button This closes the keyboard window BS backspace button This clears the character immediately before the cursor Caps Lock button This enables input of capital letters only You can enter items to be displayed on the control panel LCD using lowercase letters but these will be converted to capitals for display MS DOS does not distinguish case in filenames and therefore you are recommended to enter filenames in capital letters Shift button This selects the characters on t
139. pattern position and size for an independent key transition DME wipe For an overview of modifiers amp DME Wipe Pattern Variations and Modifiers p 94 Setting the DME wipe position Positioner For details about applicable pattern numbers see Positioner in DME Wipe Pattern Variations and Modifiers p 94 1 nthe lt Position gt group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu press Position turning it on 2 Set the following parameters No Parameter 1 H Adjustment Horizontal position DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 2 No Parameter V Adjustment Vertical position To return the pattern position to the center of the screen In the lt Position gt group press Center Setting the DME wipe pattern size Size For details about applicable pattern numbers see Size in DME Wipe Pattern Variations and Modifiers p 94 1 mte Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu press Size turning it on 2 Set the following parameter 1 No Parameter Size Adjustment Effect size a The effect size when Size is off is taken as 100 00 Cropping a DME wipe 1 inthe lt Crop Mode gt group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu press Crop turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Parameter group 1 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Crop the left and right of the
140. point buttons for the key bus Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid succession changes its state so that you can make cross point selections on the corresponding key bus The key delegation buttons can also be used for copying keys For details amp Copy and Swap Operations p 124 Independent key transition type selection buttons These select the independent key transition type For details amp Basic Independent Key Transition Operations p 59 Key snapshot buttons These correspond to registers 1 to 4 of the keyer selected with the key delegation buttons and pressing a button saves or recalls a key snapshot K SS STORE key snapshot store button Press the key snapshot button of the register you want to save while holding this button to save the key snapshot Device Control Block The device control block is used for wipe pattern position setting and for VTR disk recorder frame memory clip operation Region selection buttons 6 MENU button rien Operation buttons Trackball Z ring Region selection buttons The operation mode allocated to the device control block depends on the select
141. position of a fader lever linking the execution of the button function or a fader lever operation with a macro execution For details see Chapter 14 Macros amp p 180 File Operations You can save register data including setup information and snapshot information as a file on a local disk or removable disk and recall it as required Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations 1 7 M Q Je deuD 18 Regarding frame memory it is possible to capture image data stored in an external device into frame memory You can also convert the format of image data in frame memory into a different format and save it in an external device For details see Chapter 15 Files p 200 Setup Various settings are required in order to operate the switcher control panel external devices and so on connected together in a single system This is referred to as setup and you can carry out the setup operations from the Engineering Setup menu The settings are grouped under the following headings System setup System For details see Chapter 16 System Setup p 211 Panel setup Panel For details see Chapter 17 Control Panel Setup amp p 219 Switcher setup Switcher For details see Chapter 18 Switcher Setup p 240 Router tally setup Router Tally For details see Chapter 19 Router Interface and Tally Setup p 257
142. press All Select The frame memory is not selected when you press All Select To apply the setting to frame memory press Frame Memory turning it on When frame memory is selected it is not possible to apply settings to the lt Category gt group data 5 Press Copy If there is already data in the specified location a confirmation message appears Select Yes to overwrite the data Importing and Exporting Files You can import or export frame memory image data from or to external media Import Transfers a file in a different format from a local disk or removable disk to frame memory as image data Export Changes the file format of register data and saves the data on a local disk or removable disk For details about the formats supported for import and export Importing or exporting files to or from frame memory p 201 Importing Frame Memory Data As an example to import data in a bitmap format from a removable disk to a frame memory register use the following procedure Importing and Exporting Files Sollq 9 saydeyo 207 Selly 94 seideyo 208 For details about the points you should take note of when importing data amp About import image size p 201 1 Open the File gt All External File gt Import Export menu 7162 2 Press the file format selection area at the top of the screen to select Frame Memory BMP Files of the selected type are sh
143. register lock status register number for each region and so on 2 if required press the following buttons in the status area to change the region display M F P P Indicates assignment of M E 1 ME1 P P P P User Indicates the User USR1 to User8 USR8 assignments Misc Indicates the Router RTR assignment Snapshot Operations in the Menus sjoysdeus z Jajdeyo 173 sjoysdeus z sejdeu9 174 Editing Snapshot Registers You can carry out the following editing on snapshot registers You can use similar procedures also on master snapshot wipe snapshot DME wipe snapshot and key snapshot registers e Lock Write protect the contents of the register e Copy Copy the contents of one register to another register e Move Move the contents of one register to another register e Swap Swap the contents of two registers e Delete Delete the contents of a register e Name Attach a name to a register For details about snapshot register operations Effect Register Editing p 164 Displaying a List of Snapshot Registers for Editing You can display a list of snapshot registers including status information whether data is present and so on then carry out lock copy delete and rename operations Displaying the list of snapshot registers with status information Press the menu title button at the top left of the Snapshot menu The Snapshot gt Status menu 6300 appears
144. required Before transition After transition Key priority display suolisues pue uonoajas euis Je deup 50 Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation Changing the key priority When operating from the M E 1 bank for example open the M E 1 gt Misc gt Key Priority menu 1173 2 To target the currently inserted keys select Key Priority To target the keys after transition select Next Key Priority 3 For each of lt Priority1 gt lt Priority2 gt lt Priority3 gt and lt Priority4 gt select a key to determine the key priority sequence It is not possible to select the same key for two or more priority numbers The keys appear in the set order on the program monitor of the corresponding bank Displaying the Key Output Status and Key Priority The key status is displayed as follows in the key priority display of the transition control block Example K1 indicates key 1 Super Mix Settings Color Matte Settings The current priority i e before transition is displayed on the left CRNT and the priority after the transition is displayed on the right NEXT After the transition is complete the CURRENT and NEXT displays switch places Super Mix Settings You can set the output levels of the current and new video signals at the mid point of the transitio
145. selected in the menu 1 In the Device gt P Bus Timeline gt P Bus Timeline menu 5321 select the device ID 2 Press Direct Store 3 Enter the register number 1 to 250 for which you want to carry out the Learn 4 Press Enter P Bus Trigger P Bus trigger is a function whereby a button operation in the Flexi Pad outputs an action command to a P Bus device To use the P Bus trigger function the P Bus control mode must be set to Trigger Make this setting in the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface menu 7325 For details amp Setting the Control Mode for P Bus Devices p 232 Action command for an operation in the Flexi Pad e RCLL Recall e STOR Store This recalls the register specified in the numeric keypad control block and a Recall or Store is carried out according to the setting e RUN Trigger 1 e REWIND Trigger 4 e gt gt NEXT Trigger 7 e lt lt PREV Trigger 8 Outputting an action command As an example to output a Recall use the following procedure 1 In the Flexi Pad press the EFF button turning it on 2 Select PBUS using the region selection buttons 3 Enter the number of the register 1 to 250 to be recalled with the numeric keypad buttons 4 Press the ENTR button Control of GPI Devices You can control GPI devices from this system through the GPI output port of the switcher If using a switcher GPI output port a controllable
146. should format the local disk T Inthe lt Local Disk gt group of the Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance menu 7317 press Format When the local disk is operating normally pressing Format has no effect 2 Press Yes 3 Press OK Locking the Setup Menu Settings To protect the data you can inhibit operations in selected setup menus Use the following procedure It is not possible to lock the Setup Operation Lock menu 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance menu 7317 press Setup Operation Lock The Setup Operation Lock menu 7317 1 appears 2 Inthe lt VF Group gt group select the group including the desired menu 3 Select the menu or the set of menus as candidates for the locking operation You can also select a menu while it is open For details amp Selecting an opened setup menu for locking p 217 4 Press Lock Item Select This makes the selected menus candidates for locking and a padlock icon appears in the Lock box in the unlocked state ga If there are already one or more locked menus selection of lock candidates is not possible To deselect a lock candidate After selecting a menu press Lock Item Select once more to clear the Lock box To deselect all lock candidates in the selected VF group Press Lock Item All Clear 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to select all of the lock candidates 6 Press Lock T Enter the password w
147. shown in the following illustration WIPE Key Snapshots s y yp sajdeyo shay y1 dey9 82 2 In the memory recall section hold down the STOR button and press the button any of 1 to 4 for the register in which you want to save the key snapshot To recall a key snapshot For example to recall a key snapshot for M E 1 key 1 saved in register 1 select the M E region and KEY 1 then proceed as follows 1 Press the KEY SS button 2 According to the information you want to recall set the following buttons on off MOD ENBL button Recall the key adjustment values and key modifier settings TRNS ENBL button Recall independent key transition settings If both are off then key memory is enabled and just the saved key fill and key source signal selections are recalled 3 Press button 1 for the register you want to recall The 1 button lights yellow and the key snapshot is recalled To cancel the recall operation press the UNDO button To delete a key snapshot For example to delete a key snapshot saved to register 1 of key 1 of M E 1 select the M E1 region and KEY 1 then use the following procedure 1 Press the KEY SS button 2 Holding down the DEL butt
148. so that they can be selected By default the following regions are shown on the memory recall section buttons MSTR master snapshot master timeline registers USER1 to 3 USERS to 8 MCRO macro DEV2 device 2 PBUS GPI RTR router If there is a region selected in the memory recall section this is indicated by the MORE button lighting green To revert the button displays in the memory recall section press the MORE button once more or press the EXIT button that appears in the memory recall section e Note that except for the ALL EXIT and MORE buttons you can freely change the region assignments in the Setup menu e Displays buttons in the memory recall Alphanumeric display This shows the selected region name register number and entered numeric values Memory recall section This comprises 16 LCD buttons each with a display that changes according to the operating mode Adjustment knob displays Each of these shows the initial letter of the parameter that can be adjusted with the knob to the right and the setting value three digit places including the minus sign Adjustment knobs Use these to adjust the parameters selected with the memory recall section buttons Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel seq Jo suonouny pue seweN zsaideyo 29 Sued JO suonouny pue sowen Zz Je deup 30 Names and Functions of Parts of the Menu
149. system This manual principally describes operations when using the ICP 3000 control panel Device and system nomenclature Principal components and naming The formal product names of the principal components of the MVS 3000 system and the terms used in this manual are as follows Term used in this manual Formal product name MVS 3000 Multi Format Switcher Processor ICP 3000 Control Panel Switcher and switcher processor Control panel System nomenclature The following terms are used for systems depending on the combination of installed options and the signal format System configuration and features System nomenclature System with settings that support HD system HDTV format System with settings that support SD system SDTV format Features The MVS 3000 Multi Format Switcher system boasts extensible high performance and multifunctionality The following are some of the principal features of this system Introduction Features Chapter System configuration flexibility Multiformat support This system supports both HDTV and SDTV signal formats The format selection can be switched by a simple control panel operation Powerful external device interfaces By connecting to a Sony routing switcher or similar a large system can be built It is also possible to operate other equipment including VTRs and disk recorders from a switcher via a 9 pin serial port
150. the Enter button to open that page If the page number does not exist the color of the entered page will change Pressing the Clear button clears the entry Names and Functions of Parts of the Menu 33 sled Jo suonouny pue seweNn zsaideyo Sued Jo suoloun4 pue sowey zseideyo 34 Numeric Keypad Window Item display Max min value indication Input display CIR ie A Close button 10 0 149 0 100 00 we QTC timecode button ea _ minus button 7189 4 5 6 1 2 3 Shee Trim button eee __ Clear button eo _ Enter button Item display This is the name of the parameter being set in the numeric keypad window Max min maximum minimum value indication This shows the maximum and minimum values of the parameter Input display This is the value being input into the numeric keypad window Close button This closes the numeric keypad window TC timecode button When the numeric keypad window is opened for a setting requiring a timecode value to be entered this button appears in a depressed state The range of timecode values you can enter varies as follows depending on the signal format 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 nn where nn number of frames per second 1 minus button This toggles the sign of the entered value Clear button This clears the input display It does not change the
151. the UTIL button and in the 2nd row select the signal utility bus signal you want to insert in the side flag areas 2 Inthe background B row press the cross point button corresponding to the 4 3 video material At this point if auto side flags are on this automatically adds side flags to the 4 3 video material For details amp Setting the Side Flag Video Material and Operation p 241 3 Use either of the following methods to turn the side flags on e Use the Misc gt Enable gt Side Flags menu 3213 amp p 128 e Use a cross point button operation p 128 This adds side flags to the 4 3 video material Wipe Action on Images with Side Flags When a wipe is carried out on an image with side flags all wipe patterns can be used The following show the action in a wipe Wipe from a 4 3 image to a 16 9 image Side flag area 16 9 image 4 3 image side flags on Wipe from a 4 3 image to another 4 3 image when side flags are on for both images Side flag area 4 3 image side flags on The circles indicate the position of the wipe pattern edge when the transition is half finished Side flag area DME Wipe Action for an Image with Side Flags When a DME wipe is carried out on an image with side flags all wipe patterns can be used Depending on the on off setting of Auto Crop in the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu
152. the corresponding menu for each button For details amp Top Menu Window p 33 Top menu window page number entry Specify the menu page number to open the menu For details Top Menu Window p 33 Pressing a particular button twice Open the menu that corresponds to the button For details Menu Access by Pressing a Button Twice p 286 Selecting Menus 1 Display the top menu 2 Use the VF buttons right side of screen to select the 2nd level of the menu and then use the HF buttons bottom of screen to select the 3rd level of the menu 3 Press the appropriate function button within the function button area center of screen In this manual menu selection operations are indicated as Ist level gt 2nd level gt 3rd level menu number Example To select the Shortcut menu Home gt Favorites gt Shortcut menu 0021 To go back to the previous menu To return to the last displayed menu press the previous page button Selecting List Items The following methods can be used to select items displayed in lists on the menu screens e Press an item in the list directly e Press the arrow keys to scroll to highlight the item e Press the parameter settings button for the item selection and enter the item number in the numeric keypad window Depending on the menu you can click Plural to select multiple items or the All button to select all items You can also select the nu
153. the register you want to run The selected button lights yellow and the shotbox register is run The alphanumeric display shows the selected register number If the selected shotbox register has auto run set on recall the effect is immediately executed When auto run is not set for the recalled register Simply recalling the register does not run the effect To do this press the RUN button Executing a Shotbox Function with Cross Point Buttons in the 2nd Row You can use the bank 2nd row for utility shotbox operations To use this function you must first assign the utility shotbox function switch button UTIL SBOX to the Ist row For details about the assignment amp Assigning a Bus or Function to Ist Row Buttons p 235 You can assign any shotbox register to the cross point buttons For details about the assignment amp Assigning a Function to 2nd Row Cross Point Buttons p 229 1 Press the UTIL SBOX assigned to the Ist row turning it on 2 Press the cross point button to which the desired shotbox is assigned Shotbox Register Editing You can carry out the following editing on shotbox registers e Lock Write protect the contents of the register e Copy Copy the contents of one register to another register e Move Move the contents of one register to another register e Swap Swap the contents of two registers e Delete Delete the contents of a register e Name Attac
154. the remaining section Executing a Transition Even in a non sync state you can carry out auto transitions If you execute an auto transition by pressing the AUTO TRANS button the indicators show the transition progress in the usual way but when the transition completes they once again indicate the non sync state Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode Flip flop mode and bus fixed mode The following describes the difference between flip flop mode and bus fixed mode taking an M E bank as an example the functionality is the same however on the PGM PST bank Normally when a background transition is carried out on the M E bank the signals selected on the A and B rows of the cross point buttons are interchanged at the end of the transition That is to say except during a transition the background output is always from the background A bus This is called flip flop mode The alternative is known as bus fixed mode in which there is no bus interchange In this mode when the fader lever is at the top of its travel the output from the A bus is always 100 and when the fader lever is at the bottom of its travel the output from the B bus is 100 a OORO BOO Flip flop mode Fader lever ABOOOO a B EOR Lit buttons a EOCEEN s COROS Bus fixed mode In the bus fixed mode there is a fix
155. then recall it for each region For details about the procedure for recalling a snapshot amp Recalling a snapshot p 170 Press the SHOTBOX button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to shotbox operation mode Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to shotbox editing mode Press the STOR button The SNAPSHOT button lights green If not lit press the SNAPSHOT button to turn it on In shotbox editing mode when you press the STOR button the SNAPSHOT button or EFF button lights to indicate that snapshot data will be saved in the shotbox register or that effect data will be saved Press the region selection button corresponding to the snapshot region you want to save turning it on Enter the shotbox register number to save with the numeric keypad buttons To search for an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button The entered register number or corresponding register number appears in the alphanumeric display If the number is followed by a letter E the register is empty 8 Press the ENTR button This saves the region you turned on in step 6 and the register number you recalled for that region as a snapshot setting in a shotbox register and the STORE button changes color to orange At the same time the RCLL button lights yellow 9 Press the EFF button turning it on
156. this allocation in the Setup menu Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu The menu screen consists of the following principal parts The frame memory selection area display is the same for all except the File excluding Pair Recombination menu Folder and External Device menus Still Image Operations Aiowey ewes4 zZ Jaydeyo 103 oway ewes 7 Ja deyo 104 Target FM selection buttons Reposition Lock n Frame memory selection area Name 101 CRTN0008 Folder CGWC00 CGWC00 CRTNOO CRTNOO File selection area External Device CRTNOO CRTNOO CRTNOO CRTNOO z A Ti CRTNOO CRTNOO CRTNOO Animation Record Freeze Default Store Recall Black Auto store status display Display of available image capacity Pair selection buttons Free KF 0 01 00 00 00 KF 0 0 Frame memory folder selection area Pair button Black 6 7 Find button CRTNOO Direct Recall Direct Recall button CRTNOO ar Recall CRTNOO Create Key Frame Auto store status display Depending on the Setup menu settings this appears when the auto store function is enabled Display of available image capacity This shows the remaining number of frames When no more frames can be stored 1 or 0 appears in red in pair mode and 0 appears in red in single mode Still Image Operations
157. to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 in the PGM PST bank turning them on You can press more than one button at the same time 2 Select the transition type To fade a key in or out Press the MIX button turning it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated wipe pattern Press the WIPE button turning it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated DME wipe pattern Press the DME button turning it on If in the Setup menus you set insertion and deletion as independent modes make the following transition settings Separate settings are required for both inserting a key and deleting it For example with the key not inserted if you select the transition type and carry out a transition this will be the setting when inserting a key You can also use the Transition menu to select a desired independent key transition type for each key see the next section For details about wipe settings amp Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions p 87 For details about DME wipe settings amp DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions p 97 3 Execute the transition To insert or delete the key gradually with a mix or wipe transition Press one of the KEY 1 TRANS to KEY4 TRANS buttons For details about the transition rate amp Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate p 60 For details about operation together with a common transition amp Combining other transitions
158. to Device 8 DEV8 DEV9 12 Shows the allocations for Device 9 DEV9 to Device 12 DEV12 Misc Shows the allocations for P Bus PBUS GPI GPT Router RTR and Macro MCRO 3 Select a register 4 Press Edit Shotbox Register Creation The Edit menu 6411 1 appears You can also use the Shotbox Reg parameter to select the register in this menu In the status area the shotbox register status for each region appears 5 Select a region You can select more than one region To select all regions press ALL To select all switcher related regions M E P P User press SWR ALL 6 Inthe lt Assign gt group select the snapshot or effect to be allocated to the region Snapshot Allocate a snapshot Effect Allocate a keyframe effect If the selected register is locked a confirmation message appears asking whether or not to cancel the operation Press OK to return to the previous menu display without carrying out the registration If the operation is carried out the region selected in step 5 is registered in the shotbox and the parameters are now valid 7 Depending on the selection in step 6 set the following parameters When a snapshot is selected No Parameter Adjustment 3 Snapshot Snapshot register number When an effect is selected No Parameter 3 Effect Adjustment Keyframe effect register number 8 To run the allocated effect as soon as it is recalle
159. to all the still images captured in the same recording operation up to four characters This string can be specified using a menu before carrying out the capture The first string is automatically used as the clip name when the images are treated as a frame memory clip Second character string A four digit number 0000 or greater which is incremented each time a still image is captured When using the record function to continuously capture frames it is not possible to use the mask function Continuously freezing input images and writing to memory 1 Open the Frame Memory gt Still gt Animation Record menu 2514 2 Select the desired frame memory p 106 3 To use V K mode press V K Mode turning it on 4 Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area to select the folder to hold the freeze image p 106 The folder selected here is the destination folder for saving the freeze image After step 5 that follows it will not be possible to change the selected folder An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder 5 Press Record Enable turning it on The signals of frame memory source buses and 2 are assigned to the pair of FMs selected in step 2 and the recording function is now possible 6 Input the file name if required Press File Name and enter the first character string up to four characters of the file name in the keyboard window T Set the record
160. to the right Scrl Up Clockwise Turning the mouse wheel in the direction to scroll up is the same as moving the parameter setting button indicator to the right Selecting the Mouse Button for the Parameter Setting Buttons In the lt Mouse Slider Control gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Maintenance menu 7327 press one of the following buttons Left Button Dragging the bar while holding down the left mouse button adjusts the bar of the parameter setting button Right Button Dragging the bar while holding down the right mouse button adjusts the bar of the parameter setting button When Left Button is selected pressing one of the parameter setting buttons in the menu does not display a numeric keypad window Screen Saver and Other Settings dnjes jeued 04u09 Z Ja deyo 239 dnyes seyoms 8 Ja deyo 240 Switcher Setup Settings for Switcher Configuration Adjusting the Reference Phase To adjust the switcher internal reference phase in the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu 7331 set the following parameter No Parameter 3 Phase Adjustment Switcher internal reference phase Specifying the Video Switching Timing 1 inte Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu 7331 press Switching Timing The Switching Timing menu 7331 8 appears 2 Select any of the following Any Not specified Field 1 Field 1 Field 2 Field 2 Wh
161. transition should be applied to the M E 1 program output For example inserting a key using frame memory output 1 and frame memory output 2 1 In the M E 1 gt Misc gt Transition menu 1171 and select FM1 amp 2 Clip in the lt Transition Type gt group 2 Press Clip Transition The Clip Transition menu 1176 appears Background transition display area Clip transition display area Current 32 Stop 39 FM1 amp 2 Clip DN i ete t60 Start 0 m Stop 60 irection cGwc pod Normal Duration a a SES OC Super Mix Preset DME Wipe Color Mix _ FM1 amp 2 Transition Clip Clip Snapshot BKGD Transiljon Direction BKGD Transition Set Timing J i ty a Normal E Tory Reverse Start Stop Timing Reverse Reset Clip display area 3 Press Clip The status area shows a list of clips 4 Select the clip to use in the clip transition 5 Returnto the Clip Transition menu and in the lt BKGD Transition Type gt group select the background transition type For details about the background transition selected here see the various adjustments in the M E 1 gt Misc gt Transition menu 6 Inthe lt Select gt group press BKGD Transition Clip Transition Operations T Use either of the following methods to set the background transition start point independently of the clip playback timing e Move the fader lever to the desired position and in the lt B
162. turning it on Automatically Naming and Saving to Frame Memory In the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Key Wipe FM CCR menu 7335 press FM Auto Store turning it on Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings In the following procedures select the bank to which the settings apply then make the settings Selecting the key memory mode In the lt Key Memory gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Key Wipe FM CCR menu 7335 select one from Full full mode Simple simple mode Off Key Memory p 64 Selecting the processing order of masks and borders In the lt Mask Border Process gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Key Wipe FM CCR menu 7335 select one of the following Mask gt Border Applies the Mask effect then applies the Border effect Border gt Mask Applies the Border effect then applies the Mask effect Selecting the key priority operation mode In the lt Key Priority gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Key Wipe FM CCR menu 7335 select one of the following Normal The key priority sequence can be varied freely Fix Fixed at currently set priority sequence Setting the operation mode of the key bus XPT HOLD button In the lt Xpt Hold Mode gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Key Wipe FM CCR menu 7335 select any of the following This setting is applied for the attributes of snapshots as well as the operation m
163. typically blue background parts of the foreground video must be converted to black For this use the color cancel function amp p 69 Using the plane function In an additive mix the foreground is not shaped by the key signal and variations in the blue background will appear in the composite image To prevent this it is possible to set a particular luminance level for the background and any parts below this level are cut forcibly 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Plane on 2 Adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Luminance Luminance level Key Adjustments Menus This section describes key adjustments made using menu operations You can adjust the following functions using menu operations e Chroma Key Adjustment p 68 e Key Edge Modifications p 70 e Masks p 73 e Specifying the Key Output Destination e Key Modify Clear p 74 e Blink Function amp p 74 Chroma Key Adjustments Methods of adjusting the composite obtained from chroma keying include automatic adjustment with the auto chroma key function and manual adjustment carrying out the necessary processing separately The optimum results will be obtained by first carrying out adjustments with the auto chroma key function then making any fine adjustments as required The following manual adjustments are possible Key Adjustments Menus Key active When this function is off
164. you want to set 3 Inthe lt Level Assign gt group press the levels you want to assign to the button turning them on You can select multiple levels You can also make a selection that overlaps that of another button Selecting a Destination Selection Button for a Snapshot 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Router Remote gt RTR Mode Setting menu 7323 1 select the destination selection button to set 2 Press SS Enable turning it on or off On When a snapshot applying to the router is recalled the recall also applies to the selected destination selection button Off When a snapshot applying to the router is recalled the recall does not apply to the selected destination selection button When a destination selection button is set to Inhibit then even if SS Enable is on the snapshot for that destination is not recalled Setting Button Assignments You can assign user preference buttons that can be accessed via macros or GPI PREFS 1 to PREFS 16 and the cross point control block buttons This assigns recalling frequently used menus menu shortcuts enabling disabling functions recalling utility commands and recalling shotbox registers or macro registers User preference buttons are virtual buttons that can be accessed via a macro or GPI They are not physical buttons on the control panel Assigning Functions to User Preference Buttons 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Prefs Util
165. 0 To create a new effect recall an empty register to edit an effect open the register containing it Specifying the region and edit points p 152 Select the region in which editing applies and set the edit points Creating and editing keyframes p 153 Create the keyframes that make up the effect using operations to create insert modify or delete keyframes Time settings p 159 Set the overall duration of the effect or the duration of each keyframe Path setting p 159 Set the type of interpolation used between successive keyframes Executing effects p 161 This provides a smooth effect based on the time and path settings Saving effects p 162 Save a completed effect in a register Displaying the Timeline Menu By displaying the Key Frame gt Time Line menu 6111 you can view keyframe effects on the timeline for each region and the associated information Interpreting the Timeline Menu The menu screen consists of the following principal parts Page Key Frame 6111 gt Time Line 00 00 5 9 Region name and register number 1 Delay numerical display st USER2 00 00 1 4 9 Keyframe number total USER4 USER5 Pause point Delay display on timeline DME User PGM D Keyframe status Scrollable parameter setting button Total timeline length
166. 0 folders 114 menus 103 overview 102 pair files 117 still image operation 103 Frame memory clip 111 creating 114 playback 112 recalling 112 Frame memory folder 205 Function button area 32 G GPI devices 133 timeline 133 GPI input control panel 230 switcher 254 Index GPI output control panel 231 switcher 255 Group Tally menu 257 H HDD 118 formatting 118 partitions 118 HF buttons 31 Image data backing up and restoring 119 deleting 117 extracting 120 moving 117 pair file 117 renaming 118 still image operations 103 Independent key transition combining with transitions 57 control block 24 DME wipes 97 execution section 25 operation 57 setting the transition rate 60 type selection buttons 26 wipe 87 wipe modifier 88 Initial Status Define data saved by 298 Initialize menu 215 Input display 34 35 Input menu 242 Install Unit Config menu 215 Installation 215 Item display 34 35 K Key active 68 69 Key adjustments Flexi Pad 74 menus 68 Key auto drop 251 KEY button 23 Key default 64 Key delegation buttons 26 Key edge modification 70 Key fill color mix 67 selection 66 Key memory 64 Key modify clear 74 Key priority 251 displaying 50 operation mode 251 setting 49 Key rotation 77 Key settings menu 64 Key snapshot 81 attributes 173 buttons 26 Key source name display 26 selecting 66 switcher 66 Key types overview 62 setting 65 Key wipe pattern key 65 Key Wipe FM CCR menu 251 Keyboard
167. 1 Keyframes A keyframe represents an instantaneous state of an image it can be saved in a register and recalled for reuse By arranging a number of keyframes on the time axis and interpolating between successive keyframes you can create a keyframe effect in which there is a continuous change from each keyframe to the next The following figure shows three keyframes created with a wipe pattern the circle in different positions This is interpolated to create the effect shown Background A Background B Interpolated images Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Execute effect Example of keyframes and effect execution You can save the sequence of keyframes representing a single effect in a register Then by recalling this register you can replay the same effect For details see Chapter 11 Keyframes p 144 Snapshots The term snapshot refers to a function whereby the various settings required to apply a particular effect to an image are saved in a register as a set of data for recall as required to recover the original state Snapshots are divided as follows e Snapshots applying to a particular region functional block of the switcher e Master snapshot e Key snapshot e Wipe snapshot e DME wipe snapshot For details see Chapter 12 Snapshots amp p 167 Utilities The utility function refers to a function whereb
168. 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Maintenance menu 7327 press Screen Saver turning it on 2 Adjust the following parameter No Parameter Adjustment Time until screen saver starts operation 1 Sleep Time Using Panel Sleep Mode The brightness of all indicators on the control panel with the exception of the menu screen can be dimmed 1 In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Maintenance menu g g p 7327 press Panel Sleep Mode turning it on 2 Set the following parameter No Parameter Adjustment 1 Sleep Time Time of inactivity until panel sleep mode starts Adjusting the Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the following hardware parts LCD Btn Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the LCD buttons in the Flexi Pad Display Brightness Adjust the brightness of the organic EL panel for the source name displays etc Switch Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the panel switches The following description takes the LCD brightness as an example Use a similar process for the other adjustments 1 inte Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Maintenance menu 7327 press LCD Btn Brightness 2 Adjust the following parameter No Parameter Adjustment LCD button brightness 1 Brightness Setting the Touch Operation Beep Sound In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Maintenance menu 7327 press Touch Beep Each t
169. 154 2 Press the desired pattern 1 to 24 to select it and set the Size and Soft parameters If you selected Pattern in step 4 if required the following modifiers can be added If a wipe mix was set skip to step 6 When turning Position on and setting the pattern position No Parameter Adjustment 1 Position H Horizontal position 2 Position V Vertical position a p 85 When turning Multi on and using replications of the same pattern No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout a p 87 When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern No Parameter Adjustment 1 Aspect Aspect ratio a p 86 When turning Angle on in the lt Rotation gt group and slanting the pattern No Parameter Adjustment 1 Angle Rotation angle of pattern a p 86 When turning Speed on in the lt Rotation gt group and rotating the pattern at a constant rate No Parameter Adjustment 1 Speed Rotation speed of pattern a p 86 T To interchange color 1 and color 2 press the Color Invert button turning it on Setting the wipe position Positioner Move the pattern to a desired position g E Positioner Off Positioner On
170. 16 2 Yes Signal Select 1411 3 Yes Key Priority 1473 No HF2 Edge 1412 Yes Matte Adjust 1412 1 Yes Mix Ptn Select 1412 2 Yes Zabton Adjust 1412 3 Yes Pattern Select 1416 2 Yes Mix Ptn Select 1412 2 Yes Main Mask 1413 Yes Matte Adjust 1412 1 Yes Wipe Adjust 1416 1 Yes Key Delay Mode 1412 4 Yes HF3 Main Mask 1413 Yes Mask Ptn Select 1413 1 Yes HF5 Processed Key 1415 Yes gt Monitor 1415 1 Yes 8 Border Crop 1415 2 9 Yes x Resizer Process 1415 3 Yes Enhanced Effect 1415 4 Yes HF6 Transition 1416 Yes Wipe Adjust 1416 1 Yes Pattern Select 1416 2 Yes DME Wipe Adjust 1416 3 Yes 1ch Pattern Select 1416 4 Yes 2ch Pattern Select 1416 5 Yes Remove From Begin 1416 7 Yes VF5 Wipe HF 1 Main Pattern 1451 Yes HF4 Edge Direction 1454 Yes Matte Adjust 1454 1 Yes Mix Ptn Select 1454 2 Yes HF5 Main Modify 1455 Yes HF7 Wipe Snapshot 1457 No DME Wipe Snapshot 1467 No Menu Tree 269 Menu Page No Default Recall VF6 DME Wipe HF1 1ch 1461 Yes HF2 2ch 1462 Yes HF4 Edge Direction 1464 Yes HF5 Modify 1465 Yes Remove From Begin 1465 1 Yes HF7 DME Wipe Snapshot 1467 No Wipe Snapshot 1457 No VF7 Misc HF1 Transition 1471 Yes Clip Transition 1476 Yes Clip 1476 1 Yes Transition 1471 Yes Snapshot 1477 No HF3 Key Priority 1473 No HF4 Next Key
171. 16 3 For an overview of independent key transitions Independent Key Transitions p 57 DME wipe patterns that can be used in independent key transitions e Slide pattern numbers 7001 to 7008 e Squeeze pattern numbers 7021 to 7031 e Frame in out pattern numbers 7201 to 7208 7221 to 7224 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions sedi IWA 9 Jeideuo 97 sedim AWC 9 Je deyo 98 For details about image patterns and numbers Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List p 265 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings Selecting the independent key transition DME wipe pattern You select the independent key DME wipe pattern from the list of patterns displayed in the menu To select an independent key transition DME wipe for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure For details about patterns that can be selected see DME wipe patterns that can be used in independent key transitions p 97 Other patterns cannot be selected even if displayed on the screen Also patterns cannot be used in two channel mode 1 Press 1ch in the lt Pattern Select gt group The Ich Pattern Select menu 1116 4 2 Select Resizer Slide Squeeze or Resizer Frame I O The selected group pattern appears on the screen 3 Press the button to select the desired pattern Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers You can add modifiers such as
172. 165 1 Yes HF7 DME Wipe Snapshot 1167 No Wipe Snapshot 1157 No VF7 Misc HF1 Transition 1171 Yes Clip Transition 1176 Yes Clip 1176 1 Yes Transition 1171 Yes Snapshot 1177 No HF3 Key Priority 1173 No HF4 Next Key Priority 1174 No HF6 Clip Transition 1176 Yes Clip 1176 1 Yes Transition 1171 Yes Snapshot 1177 No HF7 Snapshot 1177 No a For Key2 Key3 and Key4 the menu page number changes as follows Key2 112X Key3 113X Key4 114X b The Matte Adjust menu 1111 2 is displayed if Matte is selected in the lt Key Fill gt group and the Signal Select menu 1111 3 is displayed if Key Bus is selected c The Pattern Select menu 1116 2 is displayed if Key Wipe Pattern is selected in the lt Key Type gt group and the Signal Select menu 1111 3 is displayed if a setting other than Key Wipe Pattern is selected d Not displayed for Key3 and Key4 e For Key3 and Key4 the menu name changes to Edge Pattern Adjust gt Pattern Select f Some parameters are not reset to default values Menu Tree PGM PST Menu Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 DSK1 HF1 Type 1411 Yes te e Chroma Adjust 1411 1 Yes VF4 DSK4 Matte Adjust 1411 2 gt Yes Pattern Select 1416 2 Yes Wipe Adjust 1416 1 Yes Pattern Select 14
173. 2000 to 2037 The set date and time appears in the Set box in the status area 2 Press the Set Date Time button Using Removable Disks Displaying removable disk information 1 Insert the removable disk to the USB connector of the external monitor or control panel 2 Inthe lt USB Storage Device gt group of the Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance menu 7317 press Refresh Formatting a removable disk Format the removable disk if this is the first time the removable disk has been used 1 Insert the removable disk to the USB connector of the external monitor or control panel 2 Inthe Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance menu 7317 select the removable disk 3 Inthe lt USB Storage Device gt group press Format 4 Check the message then press Yes Carrying Out the Primary Setting To specify a removable disk as a primary device use the following procedure Without this setting you cannot use the Removable Disk item in the File menu to access a removable disk Be sure to configure this setting 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance menu 7317 select the removable disk 2 Inthe lt USB Storage Device gt group press Set Primary Making the primary setting automatic In the lt USB Storage Device gt group press Auto Detect Formatting a Local Disk If a file system corruption error has occurred on the local disk you
174. 221 to 7224 Crop You can crop the image It is also possible in 16 9 mode to crop both sides and convert the image to a 4 3 aspect ratio For the execution of the transition you can select from the following three possibilities e Cut e Last 5 e Linear When Last 5 is selected you can set the Release Transition as follows e Last 30 e Last 5 e Off When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected crop cannot be used Relation between DME Wipes and Other Effects The relations between DME wipes and other effects are as follows Relation to ordinary wipes e DME wipes do not use the wipe generator built into the switcher Therefore during the execution of a DME wipe you can still use a pattern produced by the wipe generator as the source for a pattern key or mask e A DME wipe pattern cannot be used as the source for a pattern key or mask Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings You carry out DME wipe setting operations principally using the DME Wipe menu for each bank This section describes an example on the M E 1 bank For details about independent key transition DME wipe settings DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions p 97 DME Wipe Pattern Selection For details about patterns that can be selected see Types of DME Wipe Pattern p 93 Other patterns cannot be selected even if displayed on the screen Also patterns cannot be used in two channel mode
175. 25 1 No H L Set 7325 2 No S GPI Output 7325 3 No gt Device Assign 7325 4 No Serial Port Assign 7325 5 No g P Bus Setting 7325 6 No a VTR Setting 7325 7 No DDR VDCP Setting 7325 9 No Extend VTR Setting 7325 10 No Simple VDCP Setting 7325 11 No Device Assign 7325 4 No Tally GPI Output Config 7325 12 No HF6 Operation 7326 No Effect Mode 7326 2 No Flexi Pad Mode 7326 3 No Custom Button 7326 4 No Next Trans All 7326 11 No Sensitivity 7326 5 No Macro 7326 6 No Button Tally 7326 9 No Key AUX Function Assign 7326 13 No HF7 Maintenance 7327 No Menu Tree 279 xlpueddy 280 VF3 Switcher Menu Page No Default Recall HF1 Config 7331 No M E Output Assign 7331 1 No PGM Config 7331 2 No K PVW Config 7331 3 No User 1 8 Config 7331 4 No DME Config 7331 6 No Side Flags 7331 7 No Side Flags 3213 No Side Flags Button Assign 7322 10 No Switching Timing 7331 8 No HF2 Input 7332 No CCR 7332 1 No FC Adjust 7332 2 No Format Converter 3121 No FC Input Select 7332 3 No Xpt Assign 7322 No HF3 Output 7333 No Output Assign 7333 1 No Video Clip 7333 2 No V Blank Through 7333 3 No Safe Title 7333 4 No 4 3 Crop 7333 5 No FC Adjust 7333 6 No Format Converter 3121 No Mu
176. 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Restore but the recalling file from the external HDD was not completed correctly No directory exists 50 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore When Restore was pressed in the above menu the specified directory does not exist Error Messages xipueddy 307 4 o o lt EJES gt DEARA Ea Es ES Ea Es GS ES GS gt IE x TE 3 xlpueddy 308 Message Rename operation failed 52 Rename operation failed 53 Description 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore When Restore was pressed in the above menu directory renaming failed Invalid FM OutCh 6 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Restore is pressed this message appears if the specified frame memory output channel cannot be used Specified FM OutCh was locked 7 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Restore is pressed this message appears if the specified frame memory output channel is locked Restore failed some Clip files cannot be deleted on this board 8 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Restore is pressed this message appears if the restore failed because a
177. 293 User1 to User8 PBus Device1 to Device12 GPI Current a Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description TransitionType ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank TransitionType Mix NAM SuperMix Transition type PresetColorMix Wipe DMEWipe FM1 amp 2Clip FM3 amp 4Clip FM58 amp 6Clip FM7 amp 8Clip KeyTransitionType ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank Key Key1 to Key4 Key of the applicable independent key transition Direction On a Independent key transition execution mode Off b a Key is inserted Any c b Key is deleted c Transition is always executed KeyTransitionType Mix Wipe DMEWipe Cut Transition type of the independent key transition NextTransition ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank All On Off Applicable next transition KeyPriority On Off Applicable next transition BKGD On Off Applicable next transition Key1 to Key8 On Off Applicable next transition FadeToBlack Time Current a Transition rate number of frames 0 to 999 a Mode in which the current value set in fade to black is used TimelineDirectionNormal Region ME1 PP Applicable region a Mode in which operation takes place in the region currently specified in the Flexi Pad TimelineDirectionReverse Region ME1 PP Applicable region User1 to User8 a Mode in which operation takes place in the gt PBus Dev
178. 34 press the program output name to toggle between On and Off On When the FTB button is pressed a fade to black is carried out Off Even when the FTB button is pressed no fade to black is carried out Settings Relating to Video Switching The PGM2 to PGM4 settings are only valid in Multi Program mode or DSK mode Setting a preset color mix 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Transition gt Preset Color Mix menu 7334 1 2 Inthe lt Stroke Mode gt group select whether to carry out a transition in one stroke or two strokes Normal Carries out a preset color mix with two transition operations Single Carries out a preset color mix with a single transition operation In bus fixed mode p 250 the setting is fixed to Single 3 Inthe lt Non Drop Key gt group select the key setting for a transition including a key To carry out the transition with the key state maintained press Key1 to Key4 turning them on 4 feach time a transition ends the transition type is to return to the previous setting press One Time Enable Settings relating to fader lever operations To select the way in which the fader lever position and the transition progress are related use the following procedure 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Transition gt Transition Curve menu 7334 2 2 Inthe lt Fader Curve gt group select the fader lever operation mode Normal The transition p
179. 4 Select the pair number 5 Using the buttons in the lt Button Assign gt group assign the selected pair number to the button number currently selected in table 1 Set Deletes the signal currently assigned to the selected button number and makes a new assignment Insert Moves the signal currently assigned to the selected button number to the next number and makes a new assignment If a button number above 121 is selected see Notes in step 5 in Creating the main table p 223 To disable a button Select the button you want to disable and press Inhibit To delete an assigned signal Select the button for the signal you want to delete and press Delete in the lt Button Assign gt group The signal assigned to the button number next to the selected button number moves up one line When a button number above 121 is selected see Notes in To delete an assigned signal p 224 Returning the table to its default state 1 mte Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Main V K Pair Assign menu 7322 5 or Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Table Button Assign menu 7322 1 press Default Recall 2 Check the message then press Yes Setting the cross point button shift operation You can set the operation of the rightmost button in each row of cross point buttons In the lt Xpt Shift Mode gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Main V K Pair A
180. 61 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Format In the above menu when 5 Partition or 15 Partition is pressed this message appears if the external HDD logical drive could not be accessed Check that the external HDD is correctly formatted 304 Error Messages Icon Message Cannot access the directory 20 Description 2561 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Format In the above menu when 5 Partition or 15 Partition is pressed this message appears if an external HDD directory could not be accessed The external HDD is busy 22 2561 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Format In the above menu when 5 Partition or 15 Partition is pressed this message appears if the external HDD is in use and cannot be accessed Try again after you check that the access lamp of the HDD or the indicator of the menu is turned off Import Cannot create the clip file because 7162 File gt All External File gt Import Export x the number of selected files is In the above menu when importing a clip file this message appears if insufficient insufficient files are selected to make up the clip Install No Task Select a package on the list 7316 10 Engineering Setup gt System gt lnstall Unit Config gt Install In the above menu the package for installation was not selected Select a package to be installed An error occurred during the install 7316 10 Enginee
181. 6417 No File Menu xlpueddy Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 Setup Init KMem HF 1 Setup 7111 No File Edit 7111 1 No HF2 Initial Status 7112 No File Edit 7112 1 No HF3 Key Memory 7113 No File Edit 7113 1 No HF5 User Setup 7115 No File Edit 7115 1 No HF6 Export User Source Name 7116 No File Edit 7116 1 No HF7 Import User Source Name 7117 No File Edit 7117 1 No VF2 Effect HF 1 Effect 1 99 7121 No File Edit 7121 1 No HF2 User DME Wipe Effect 101 199 7122 No File Edit 7122 1 No HF3 User DME Wipe Effect 201 299 7123 No File Edit 7123 1 No HF5 DEV PBUS Effect 1 250 7125 No File Edit 7125 1 No VF3 Snapshot HF1 Snapshot 7131 No File Edit 7131 1 No HF2 Wipe Snapshot 7132 No File Edit 7132 1 No HF3 DME Snapshot 7133 No File Edit 7133 1 No HF4 Key Snapshot 7134 No File Edit 7134 1 No 276 Menu Tree Menu Page No Default Recall VF4 Shotbox Macro HF1 Shotbox 7141 a T o File Edit 7141 1 No HF2 Macro 7142 No File Edit 7142 1 No On Line Edit 7142 2 No Off Line Edit 7142 3 No HF3 Macro Attachment 7143 No File Edit 7143 1 No HF4 Menu Macro 7144 No File Edit 7144 1 No Menu Macro Edit 7144 2 No VF5 Fra
182. 7331 the appearance of the 4 3 image changes The following show the action in a DME wipe Side Flags suonouny jeloeds 6 Je deyo 129 suonouny jeiseds 6 Ja deu9 130 DME wipe from a 4 3 image to a 16 9 image Wipe action using slide No 1001 16 9 image Side flag area Auto crop off Auto crop on Side flag area 4 3 image side flags on Side Flags DME wipe from a 4 3 image to another 4 3 image when side flags are on for both images Wipe action using squeeze No 1031 4 3 image side flags on Side flag area Side flag area Auto crop on Side flag area Auto crop off Side flag area 4 3 image side flags on External Devices Control of External Devices In this system you can operate while controlling the following types of external devices e Devices supporting P Bus Peripheral II protocol e GPI devices e VTRs e Disk recorders video disk communications protocol e Extended VTRs Abekas A53 protocol For details about the devices that can be connected consult your Sony representative To operate P Bus devices VTRs Extended VTRs and disk recorders the following settings are required for the Remote 1 to Remote 4 ports on the rear panel of the switcher processor Device type setting Device name For details amp Serial Port Settings p 232 and Making Detailed Settings on the
183. 80 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel 4 inthe Engineering Setup gt System gt Initialize menu P gt y 7315 select PNL and carry out a reset This carries out a restart and when the restart is completed connection to the MKS 8080 8082 is possible 5 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Router menu P 7361 set the position of the MVS 3000 system in S Bus space Select the setting of SWR1 and set each of Source Destination and Level to 1 Setting Status of the MKS 8080 8082 in Simple Connection As a result of making the simple connection the MKS 8080 8082 operates in AUX bus mode and the settings are the following factory defaults With regard to the meaning of the following settings see the section Menu Operations in the Operation Manual for the MKS 8080 8082 C SET SWITCHER ID for AUX mode This is set to 001 which is the station number of the control panel D SET AUX DESTINATION SOURCE for AUX mode The source is set to IN001 and following and destination is set to OUTOO1 and following H SET PHANTOM TABLE for Router mode Not set as unit does not operate in router mode N SET PANEL TABLE for Router mode The source is set to INOO1 and following and destination is set to OUTOO1 and following However since the unit does not operate in router mode these settings are not used O SET AVAILABLE SOURCE DESTINATION Set the source and destination ranges so that the MVS
184. 80 8082 AUX bus remote panels via an S Bus data link enables the following kinds of control e Returning to the S Bus tally data created by this unit on the basis of data received from other devices Switching the cross points of a routing switcher from the control panel Switching the cross points of a switcher from the remote panel Displaying on the control panel source names set on a routing switcher UTIL FM utility frame memory data connector RJ 45 compliant Intended for future expansion UTIL SCU utility SCU connector RJ 45 compliant Intended for future expansion REMOTE S1 and S2 connectors D sub 9 pin RS 422A compliant These connectors are used to operate the MVS 3000 system from external devices or editing control systems such as the BVE 9100 Define the types of the connected devices on the control panel MVS multi format video switcher connector RJ 45 compliant Connect to an ICP 3000 control panel You can also connect to the control panel via an Ethernet switch P UTIL SW utility SW connector RJ 45 compliant Intended for future expansion REF INPUT reference video input connectors BNC type If you wish to synchronize this unit to an external reference signal input the reference signal For an HDTV system input an HD tri level sync signal black burst signal or analog sync signal For an SDTV system input a black burst signal or analog sync signal The tw
185. ANOS SONY Multi Format Switcher System MVS 3000 System With ICP 3000 Control Panel JaUe_ 01 U0D OOOE ddI UHM WeisksS 000 SAN MVS 3000 ICP 3000 MKS 6550 User s Guide Printed in Japan Software Version 1 00 and Later SY http www sony net 2012 09 32 ibe 4 444 918 1 1 printed on recycled paper 2012 1st Edition NUNN 4444918110 Sony Corporation MVS 3000 System NOTICE TO USERS 2012 Sony Corporation All rights reserved This manual or the software described herein in whole or in part may not be reproduced translated or reduced to any machine readable form without prior written approval from Sony Corporation SONY CORPORATION PROVIDES NO WARRANTY WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER INFORMATION IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON TORT CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE THEREOF Sony Corporation reserves the right to make any modification to this manual or the information contained herein at any time without notice The software described herein may also be governed by the terms of a separate user license agreem
186. Adjustment Station ID setting a If set to 255 the information is sent to all stations with display of All 3 Press Src Name Export This exports the source names to the station selected in step 2 4 Press Dest Name Export This exports the destination names to the station selected in step 2 Since destination names cannot be selected freely fixed names are used Router Remote Control Settings Assigning a Cross Point Button to Enable Disable Side Flags By assigning the side flag function to the rightmost button in a cross point button row you can use this button to enable disable side flags for each of the M E and PGM PST banks This setting applies to all of the M E and PGM PST banks When you make this assignment the SHIFT button the button assigned to the shift function is moved one to the left If a macro attachment is set when you assign the button to the side flag function the button numbers are offset and therefore when you press the button this does not execute the macro The settings however are maintained so that when you cancel the side flag assignment the macro can be accessed once more For details about side flag operation amp Side Flag Settings p 128 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Side Flags Button Assign menu 7322 10 2 Press Side Flags Btn Assign turning it on Router Remote Control Settings
187. Assign menu 7325 5 select the serial port connected to the P Bus device for which you want to make the settings Press Port Setting The P Bus Setting menu 7325 6 appears At the top of the status area the relevant serial port slot number protocol serial port name and SCU number appear In the lower part of the status area the device name and response speed settings appear Select the ID for which you want to make a device name setting In the lt Name gt group press Set Input the desired name and press Enter To return the device name for the selected ID to the default name Press Clear in the lt Name gt group Specify the command to which the response speed setting applies Set the disk recorder response speed No Parameter Adjustment 3 Delay Response speed setting Press Delay Set Repeat steps 3 to 8 as required to make the settings for other commands Making detailed settings for a VTR 1 In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt Serial Port Assign menu 7325 8 select the serial port connected to the VTR for which you want to make the settings Press Port Setting The VTR Setting menu 7325 7 appears At the top of the status area the relevant serial port slot number protocol serial port name SCU number and timecode source appear In the lower part of the status area the VTR constants appear 3 Inthe lt TC Source gt group
188. Assigning a Destination to a Destination Selection Button 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Router Remote gt RTR Mode Setting menu 7323 1 2 Select a destination selection button and the destination to be assigned to the button When a destination selection button having a number in the range 65 to 128 is selected source table selection automatically becomes invalid and therefore the Inhibit function also becomes invalid 3 Press Dest Set to confirm the selection 4 iin step 2 you selected a value in the range 1 to 64 select the source table No Parameter Adjustment 3 Source Source table selection Table 5 Press Source Table Set to confirm the selection 6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 as required Setting the Source Table 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Router Remote gt RTR Mode Setting gt Table Assign menu 7323 3 2 Inthe lt Source Table Select gt group select the source table you want to manipulate 3 Select a source selection button and the source you want to assign 4 Press Source Set to confirm the selection Assigning Levels to a Level Selection Button To assign levels to the LEVEL1 to LEVEL4 buttons in the auxiliary bus control block use the following procedure 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Router Remote gt RTR Mode Setting gt Level Button Assign menu 7323 4 2 In the lt Level Button Select gt group select the button
189. Assigns a shotbox register recall dnyas jaueg joujuoD Z Ja deuD Assigning a Function to 2nd Row Cross Point Buttons You can assign functions to the 2nd row cross point buttons for the M E 1 and PGM PST banks 1 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Prefs Utility gt Xpt Module Src Reg Btn Assign menu 7324 2 2 Select the button to be assigned 3 In the lt Action gt group select the function to be assigned Depending on the selection in step 3 make the following settings If Menu Shortcut is selected With the 2nd row cross point buttons flashing press one of the cross points buttons after displaying the menu for which you want to create a shortcut to assign the menu shortcut To finish the assignment press Menu Shortcut again If Utility Command is selected A list of commands appears on the right of the status area select the command you want to assign Setting Button Assignments 229 dnjes jeued 04u00 Z4 Ja deyD 230 If Macro Recall is selected Select the macro register you want to assign No Parameter Adjustment 3 Macro If Shotbox Recall is selected Select the shotbox register you want to assign Macro register selection No Parameter 3 Shotbox Adjustment Shotbox register selection 5 if you selected a function other than Menu Shortcut in step 2 press Action Set This assigns the selected action which is reflected in the status
190. Begins with The content of the line following the up to the next newline has no effect on macro execution and can be used as a comment You can only use comments in files saved to a local disk or removable disk When you load a macro file into a register the comments are discarded Event statement Begins with Event and defines the macro event For details see Syntax of Event and Continue Statements p 289 Continue statement Begins with Continue and defines the macro event For details see Syntax of Event and Continue Statements p 289 Some events cannot be used Correspondence between Events and Symbols p 290 Syntax of Event and Continue Statements An event can be written with an Event statement only or with an Event statement followed by any number of Continue statements The Event statements and Continue statements have the following syntax Word separator character Use comma Ignored Spaces and tabs are ignored There is no distinction between lowercase and uppercase If two or more separator characters appear consecutively later ones are ignored Separator characters at the beginning of a line are also ignored Content of line Must begin with Event or Continue followed by symbols and parameters Event symbol parameter parameter Continue symbol parameter parameter symbol ASCII character stri
191. Cannot find the File Name Data please load the File Name Data first 21 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Restore is pressed this message appears if the file list was not loaded e Date Error Wrong Format 7317 Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance In the above menu an incorrect date and time was specified Specify the date and time correctly The Start TC or Stop TC is not properly set 2522 Frame Memory gt Clip gt Play In the above menu when Trim is pressed this message appears if neither Start TC not Stop TC is set 2522 Frame Memory gt Clip gt Play In the above menu when Trim is pressed this message appears if the interval between Start TC or Clip Begin and Stop TC or Clip End is the entire clip 2522 Frame Memory gt Clip gt Play In the above menu when Trim is pressed this message appears if the Start TC or Clip Begin value is greater than the Stop TC or Clip End value This file is locked 2522 Frame Memory gt Clip gt Play In the above menu when Trim is pressed this message appears if the file is locked This file is using for playback 2522 Frame Memory gt Clip gt Play In the above menu when Trim is pressed this message appears if the file is being played back Error Messages Icon Message Warning Description This operation will be cancelled o
192. D button is pressed turning it on enables cross point hold for all buses used in the corresponding bank A B bus Key1 to Key4 bus utility bus Setting the Operation Mode of the ALL Button in the Transition Control Block Specify the next transition selected by pressing the ALL button in the transition control block If everything here is set to Off then pressing the ALL button does not change the specification of the next transition 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Custom Button gt Next Trans All menu 7326 11 2 Press the button for the next transition you want to select with the ALL button turning it On Operation Settings dyes jeued 04u09 Z Ja deyD 237 dnjes jaued 04u00 Z4 Ja deyD 238 Setting Trackball and Button Double Click Sensitivity You can adjust the sensitivity of the trackball and button double clicks 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Sensitivity menu 7326 5 2 Make the following settings as required Trackball and Z ring sensitivity in normal mode In the lt Trackball Normal Mode gt group select x1 x2 or x4 Trackball and Z ring sensitivity in fine mode In the lt Trackball Fine Mode gt group select el CH or g Touch sensitivity for recalling menus by double clicking buttons In the lt Double Click gt group select Fast Normal or Slow Setting the Macro Execution Mode 1 Ope
193. DSK1 to DSK4 e Press a button turning it on to make the next transition insert or remove the forthe PGM PST corresponding key keys 1 to 4 bank e If the key is currently not inserted the transition will insert it and if the key is currently inserted the transition will delete it KEY PRIOR The priority setting of the key after the priority next transition is enabled 24 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Name ALL Description This turns on a preselected set of the BKGD KEY 1 to KEY4 and KEY PRIOR buttons Make this setting in the Setup menu Transition type selection buttons These select the transition type p 47 When multi program mode is selected in the Setup menu two or more of the following buttons may light For details about the multi program mode setting Setting the Operation Mode p 240 You can also assign a function to these buttons that selects whether or not the fader levers are used as keyframe faders For details Executing an effect manually p 161 For details about assignments for the transition type selection buttons amp Setting Transition Control Block Button Assignments p 221 Transition execution section This section is used to carry out a transition and check the progress of the transition Fader status display __ Fader lever __ I ____
194. Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Backup to the external HDD but the file storing process was not completed correctly Cannot be executed Amount of FM files exceeds the capacity of usable frame memory 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore When Backup was pressed in the above menu the number of files exceeded the storage capacity Cannot be executed The function requires two frames of frame memory 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore When Backup was pressed in the above menu two files are required but there was only one file remaining No directory exists 50 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore When Backup was pressed in the above menu the specified directory does not exist Rename operation failed 52 Rename operation failed 53 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore When Backup was pressed in the above menu renaming the directory failed u O x c xe Invalid FM OutCh 6 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup is pressed this message appears if the specified frame memory output channel cannot be used Error Messages xipueddy 301 Message Specified FM OutCh was locked 7 Description 2565 Frame Memory gt Ex
195. External Devices 0 131 Shared Functions for External Device Controli nra Sarre ere erste a rever ere 131 Control of P Bus Devices cc000 132 Creating and Editing the P Bus Timeline neata 132 P Bus PIS GOR 5 ai i 133 Control of GPI Devices ccccceeeeee 133 GPI Timeline Creation and Editing 133 Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk FROGONGGIS ws vsesisesscectuiacstisiissiedincueetasis 134 Controlling the Tape Disk Transpott 135 Checking VTR Disk Recorder Extended VTR MNTOUMATION sok arnt nonameneiiae 136 CUCU amp Plays enaa E ESEE 137 VTR Disk Recorder Extended VTR Timeless na 139 Disk Recorder Extended VTR File Op rationS aei a 142 Chapter 11 Keyframes REgIONS wtcceded coe tsvetencevecevincetaaianmaseuereuntcunes 144 PRREGISTON Sw ccdecoceccsscec united sainatataanebineccassestete 144 Overview of Keyframes 0 0csseeee 145 PERC CES a eet E TET 145 Saving and Recalling Effects 145 Bifecth Attnibutes cn i avewtede oc osiadn 145 Effect Edn T arc 2 E E 145 Time Settings a R 146 Table of Contents Effect Execution oinnes an 148 Master Timelines s es 148 Sequence of Keyframe Operations 148 Displaying the Timeline Menu 149 Interpreting the Timeline Menu 149 Settings in the Timeline Menu 150 Recalling a Register ssssssseseeeeeeees 150 Specifying the Region and Edit POINTS seis
196. Format a removable disk before using it for the first time amp p 216 e You cannot perform the following operation when Src Patch Link is lit on the menu screen p 262 1 Open the File gt All External File gt All menu 7161 2 In the device selection area of the All menu select the destination for saving the files Local Disk or Removable Disk and directory 3 If there are registers you do not want to save in the lt Category gt group exclude them from the operation To select all registers press All Select Files that can be manipulated p 200 The frame memory is not selected when you press All Select To apply the setting to frame memory press Frame Memory turning it on When frame memory is selected it is not possible to apply settings to the lt Category gt group data 4 Press Save 5 Check the message then press Yes Batch Loading Files To batch load files from a local disk or removable disk use the following procedure It is not possible to recall a file from a category for which recall operations are locked p 218 1 Open the File gt All External File gt All menu 7161 2 In the device selection area select the location where the files are saved Local Disk or Removable Disk and the directory 3 If there are files you do not want to load in the lt Category gt group exclude them from the operation To select all files press All Select
197. GM PST gt DME Wipe gt XX p 95 SNAPSHOT e Snapshot gt Master Snapshot gt Store p 171 e Snapshot gt Snapshot gt XX 3 EFF e Effect gt Master Timeline gt Store p 162 x Effect gt Effect 1 99 gt XXP p 164 SHOTBOX Shotbox gt Register gt Store Recall DIr MCRO Macro gt Register gt XX p 186 TRANS RATE Misc gt Transition gt Key ME FTB p 126 KEY SS Snapshot gt Key Snapshot gt XX p 171 STOR Key Frame gt Region Select p 152 RCLL Key Frame gt Region Select p 152 KEY ADJ KEY1 e M E 1 gt Key1 gt XX p 64 e PGM PST gt DSK1 gt XX KEY2 e M E 1 gt Key2 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK2 gt XX KEY3 e M E 1 gt Key3 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK3 gt XX KEY4 e M E 1 gt Key4 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK4 gt XX LUM e M E 1 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Type p 65 LIN e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt Type WIPE PTN CRK e M E 1 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Type gt Chroma Adjust p 67 e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt Type gt Chroma Adjust Menu Access by Pressing a Button Twice 287 xlpueddy 288 Flexi Pad Button Double press Menu Refer to KEY SS KEY1 e M E 1 gt Key1 gt XX p 64 e PGM PST gt DSK1 gt XX KEY2 e M E 1 gt Key2 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK2 gt XX KEY3 e M E 1 gt Key3 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK3 gt XX KEY4 e M E 1 gt Key4 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK4 gt XX a When the MSTR button is On b When the MSTR button is Off System control unit Board STATION ID c When the SNAPSHOT button is
198. Independent key transition type Wipe Effect of a background transition and independent key transition For details see Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions p 44 Keys A key is an effect in which a part of the background image is replaced by an image or superimposed text The signal determining how the background is cut out is termed key source and the signal that replaces the cut out part is termed key fill The system component responsible for processing a key is referred to as a keyer For the four keyers on each switcher bank you can use the following key types i e methods of processing the key source e Luminance key e Linear key e Color vector key e Chroma key e Key wipe pattern key Key modifiers You can apply borders and other modifiers to the edge of the key image Masks A mask allows a part of the image to be masked by the background or a key If unwanted holes occur in the background or if a key is not the desired shape you can correct the problem with a mask Resizer This function allows you to apply effects such as zoom movement or aspect ratio change to a part of a created key You can use the following operations e Two dimensional transform of a key e Rotation of keys e Resizer interpolation settings e Resizer crop border settings e Resizer effect settings mosaic defocus For details see Chapter 4 Keys p 62 Resizer a
199. KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 FILL MAT MASK DROP BDR SOFT SHOW EDGE KNOB 1 2 c r r SNAP SHOT SHOT BOX DME WIPE TE KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 _ a StS TRANS KEY RATE ADJ OVER DME RIDE TRCE NON TRNS _ S DME DME ROT ROT gt 1 2 X Y a PAGE ROT RE KNOB py MORE 3 3 ENBL SIZR 1 2 U SW ih With these buttons in the memory recall section you can carry out the following key adjustment Selecting the key type LUM button Selects a luminance key LIN button Selects a linear key CRK button Selects a chroma key WIPE PTN button Selects a key wipe pattern key Adjust the parameters for each type with the adjustment knobs For details about the parameters amp Setting the key type in a menu p 65 Selecting the key source AUTO SEL button The signal assigned as a pair with the key fill bus signal for the key row button in the cross point control block is automatically selected SPLT button Select a different signal manually To make the selection hold down this button and press the button assigned to the signal you want
200. KGD Transition Set Timing gt group press Start Set the number of frames in the BKGD Trans Start parameter The left end of the reference axis see following figure is the position of frame 0 Position of frame 0 Reference axis Current 32 Trans Rate 60 BKGD Trans Start 24 Stop 39 FM1 amp 2 Clip Start 0 Stop 60 8 Using either of the following methods set the end g 8 point of the background transition e Move the fader lever to the desired position and in the lt BKGD Transition Set Timing gt group press Stop Set the number of frames in the BKGD Trans Stop parameter 9 If Wipe or DME Wipe is selected in the lt BKGD Transition Type gt group in the lt BKGD Transition Direction gt group select the background transition direction 10 In the lt Select gt group press FM1 amp 2 Clip 11 Using either of the following methods set the start point of the clip e Move the fader lever to the desired start point and in the lt Clip Transition Set Timing gt group press Start e Set the number of frames in the Clip Start parameter The left end of the reference axis see previous figure is the position of frame 0 It is not possible to set the clip end point 12 Inthe lt Clip Transition Direction gt group select the playback direction of the clip To reset the start point and end point Press Timing Reset The background transition
201. Key1 gt to lt Key8 gt groups select the corresponding key status from the following Link Follows the key on off setting On Key is always on Off Key is always off Switching Backgrounds using DME Wipes e Only the background DME wipe or key 1 can be enabled at any one time If background DME wipe is enabled side flags cannot be used in DME wipes This setting can be made for each of the M E and PGM PST banks 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu 7331 select the target M E or P P bank 2 Inthe lt BKGD DME Wipe Key 1 gt group select BKGD DME Wipe Setting User Regions This assigns the color backgrounds 1 and 2 AUX1 to 24 and frame memory 1 to 8 for User regions to any of Userl to User8 If you change the user region settings the previously stored snapshot data and keyframe effect data can no longer be used 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu 7331 press Userl 8 Config The User1 8 Config menu 7331 4 appears The status area shows the region names and assigned user region numbers 2 Select the region to set 3 Inthe lt User Region Assign gt group select the user region you want to assign If you do not want to assign a user region select No Assign 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to make the settings for other regions 5 Press Execute 6 Check the message then press Yes Setting the Side Flag Video Material and Operat
202. Link menu 7321 2 2 Select the keyer to be master 3 Inthe lt Key Select gt group select the keyer to be linked to the transition of the master Linking the Next Transition Selection Buttons To the transition links between keyers you can add a link for the next transition selection buttons in the transition control block The effect of this additional link is such that if for example two keyers Key2 and Key3 are linked with the master keyer Key1 pressing the KEY1 next transition selection button also selects the KEY2 and KEY3 buttons T Set the transition links between keyers For details about the operation amp Linking Transitions between Keyers p 220 2 Press Next Trans Link turning it on The KEY1 to KEY4 next transition selection buttons in the transition control block are now selected coupled to the settings in the Key Trans Link menu for transition links between keyers These settings apply to the whole Key Trans Link menu It is not possible to make separate settings for each master keyer Assigning Regions to Region Selection Buttons in the Flexi Pad You can set a maximum of four regions to each of the region selection buttons in the Flexi Pad In the Flexi Pad pressing the region selection button MORE displays the regions not assigned to the region selection buttons on the memory recall section numeric keypad buttons so that you can select them and set the assignme
203. M E x is the M E bank number the x in DSKx is the DSK number and the x in Keyx is the key number When Target is M E x Cut Auto Trans Keyx Cut Keyx Auto Trans Keyx SS Recall When Target is P P Cut Auto Trans DSKx Cut DSKx Auto Trans DSKx SS Recall FTB Auto Trans FTB Cut When Target is Common Setup Master SS Recall Master Effect Recall SS Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind FM Srcl Frame Freeze FM Srcl Field Freeze FM Srcl Freeze Off FM Src2 Frame Freeze FM Src2 Field Freeze FM Src2 Freeze Off FM Src1 Clip Record FM Sre1 Clip Stop FM Src2 Clip Record FM Src2 Clip Stop FM1 to FM8 Clip Cueup FM1 to FM8 Clip Play FM1 to FM8 Clip Stop Shotbox Recall Macro Take Prefs Button Macro Recall No Action When the trigger type is Rising Edge or Falling Edge Aux O ride Src Select a source from the following Primary inputs 1 to 48 33 to 48 are disabled Format converter dedicated inputs 49 to 56 When the trigger type is Level When Target is M E 1 x No Action When Target is Common Setup System Format Aspect overall system settings Level Enable No Action e Level Enable is a function that determines whether GPI inputs are enabled Enable or disabled Disable for the Aspect and System Format actions that can be used when the trigger type is Level When Level Enable is used if the input
204. Multiplication 1 mnte Key1 Wipe Adjust menu press Multi turning it on 2 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout a p 87 Wipe Snapshots You can snapshot and save a wipe pattern together with the current settings of its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when required There are 10 wipe snapshot registers on each bank Wipe snapshots can be saved or recalled using the Flexi Pad or a menu operation For details about Flexi Pad operations amp Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi Pad p 90 Wipe Snapshot Operations with the Menus Use the Wipe Adjust menu in each switcher bank When operating from the M E 1 bank for example open the M E 1 gt Wipe gt Wipe Snapshot menu 1157 Current Pattern No DME Wipe Snapshot Memory recall buttons Wipe Snapshots s d M g Je deyp 89 sedi g JaydeyD 90 Button displays In the Setup menu you can select whether the memory recall buttons show the pattern number or register name For details amp Settings for the Flexi Pad and Wipe Snapshot Menus p 237 Saving a wipe snapshot from the menu T Make the wipe settings that you want to save 2 Inthe Wipe Snapshot menu press Store lighting
205. No Rewind Action 5311 1 No VF2 P Bus Timeline HF1 P Bus Timeline 5321 No a Rewind Action 5321 1 No 3 VF3 DDR VTR HF1 Cueup amp Play 5331 No i HF2 Timeline 5332 No Rewind Action 5332 1 No HF3 File List 5333 No Macro Menu Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 Register HF2 Lock 5412 No On Line Edit 7142 2 No Off Line Edit 7142 3 No HF3 Copy 5413 No HF6 Delete 5416 No On Line Edit 7142 2 No Off Line Edit 7142 3 No HF7 Rename 5417 No On Line Edit 7142 2 No Off Line Edit 7142 3 No VF2 Attachment 5421 No 272 Menu Tree Menu Page No Default Recall VF3 Menu Macro HF1 Recall amp Run 5431 No Register Menu Macro Edit 7144 2 No HF2 Lock 5432 No Menu Macro Edit 7144 2 No HF8 Copy 5433 No HF6 Delete 5436 No Menu Macro Edit 7144 2 No HF7 Rename 5437 No Menu Macro Edit 7144 2 No VF4 Timeline HF 1 Timeline 5441 No Rewind Action 5441 1 No Key Frame Menu Menu Page No Default Recall Effect Menu Status 6200 HF 1 Time Line 6111 No HF3 Path 6113 Yes M E 1 6113 1 Yes P P 6113 4 Yes User1 6113 5 Yes User2 6113 6 Yes User3 6113 7 Yes User4 6113 8 Yes a User5 6113 9
206. OM9 LPTO LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPTS LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 Deleting a folder Select the folder in the Frame Memory gt Folder menu 2551 To select all folders press Al 2 Press Delete 3 Check the message then press Yes The Default folder cannot be deleted Clip Output As with still image operation you can use the reposition and lock functions For details about the method of operation amp Image Output p 108 Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data Preparations To record ancillary data it is first necessary in the Setup menu to select save with ancillary data as the frame memory saving mode For details amp Saving a Frame Memory Clip with Ancillary Data p 216 Recording ancillary data To record in a frame memory clip use the Frame Memory gt Clip gt Record menu 2523 For details about the method of operation amp Clip Creation p 114 To check ancillary data during recording If the ancillary data to be recorded is embedded audio by first setting the signal output to through mode you can listen while recording For details about the through mode setting amp Making Vertical Blanking Interval Adjustment and Through Mode Settings p 247 When Freeze Enable or Record Enable is pressed turning them on off noise may occur Also with these buttons in the on state selecting the signal on the frame memory source bus
207. OWER for about five seconds e If status indicator A or B does not light even when power is supplied to the AC IN A and B connectors there may be a fault in the power circuits Disconnect the cords from the AC IN A B connectors and contact your Sony service representative If you force shutdown without performing shutdown processing setting data may not be saved e Shut down the control panel before turning off the AC power supply or disconnecting the power cord Power Supply and Connectors Rear panel DVI D connector DEVICE 1 to 4 connectors MVS connector UTIL connector O AC IN A and B connectors rh terminal UTIL utility connector RJ 45 compliant Intended for future expansion MVS multi format video switcher connector RJ 45 compliant Connect to the MVS 3000 You can also connect to the switcher processor via an Ethernet switch DEVICE 1 to 4 connectors USB 2 0 compliant USB Type A Connect to a USB device DVI D connector Connect to an external monitor signal ground terminal Connect to the system ground O AC IN AC power input A and B connectors 3 pin Connect to 100 V to 240 V AC power supply with the optional AC power cords The unit is equipped with two powe
208. On switches MVS 3000 CA 85 3801 Simple Connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel Procedure for Simple Connection To connect the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel to the control panel using an S Bus data link requires a HKSP R80 Routing Switcher Controller Board or similar primary station and various settings for connection However using a simple connection the need for an S Bus data link primary station is avoided and direct connection to the MKS 8080 8082 is possible A simple connection is possible if the following conditions are met e There are no devices other than the control panel and MKS 8080 8082 connected on the S Bus data link e There are no more than 16 MKS 8080 8082 units connected on the S Bus data link To carry out simple connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel use the following procedure For settings on the MKS 8080 8082 see the section Making the Setting With Buttons Setup Function in the Operation Manual for the MKS 8080 8082 1 Initialize the MKS 8080 8082 settings This can be executed on the MKS 8080 8082 separately 2 Set the MKS 8080 8082 station number in the range 2 to 17 This can be set on the MKS 8080 8082 separately 3 Set the S Bus data link primary station to the control panel by setting the STATION ID switches on the front of the board in the MVS 3000 SLOT 8 to 001 switch 1 only to the OPEN position Simple Connection of the MKS 80
209. Output to 12 However the following signals are unavailable if already assigned to Output 1 to bit 1to 12 Multi Viewer 1 and 2 FC Output 1 and 2 2 FC Output 1 and 2 can be assigned as a pair combination to Outputs 15 and 16 3 Select the output connector number and signal to be assigned For output connectors not to be assigned press Inhibit The signals that can be assigned to Outputs 13 to 16 are selected from the list displayed by pressing Output MV FC DME Mode 4 Press Set to confirm the assignment Adjusting the Video Clip 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output gt Video Clip menu 7333 2 2 Select the output you want to set 3 Adjust the following parameters No Parameter 2 White Clip Adjustment Luminance signal white clip value 3 Dark Clip Luminance signal dark clip value 4 Chroma Clip Chrominance signal clip value To set the values to the default values press Default Making Vertical Blanking Interval Adjustment and Through Mode Settings This sets the number of scan lines from the reference blanking position of field 1 for each format that should be masked 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output gt V Blank Through menu 7333 3 2 Select the output you want to set 3 Press V Blank Mask 4 Adjust the following parameter No Parameter Adjustment 2 Mask End Final value for vertical blanking in
210. P FM7 amp 8 CLIP PRIOR SET M E 1 PGM PST gt Misc gt Key Priority p 50 286 Menu Access by Pressing a Button Twice Transition control block Button Double press Menu Refer to KEY PRIOR M E 1 PGM PST gt Misc gt Next Key Priority p 50 WIPE e M E 1 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust gt Pattern Select p 87 Independent key transition type e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust gt Pattern selection buttons Select DME e M E 1 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust gt 1ch p 97 Independent key transition type Pattern Select selection buttons e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust gt 1ch Pattern Select K SS STORE Snapshot gt Key Snapshot gt XX p 171 Device control block Button Double press Menu Refer to DEV1 to DEV12 assigned buttons e Device gt DDR VTR gt Cueup amp Play p 136 Device gt DDR VTR gt Timeline p 140 FM1CLIP to FM8CLIP assigned e Frame Memory gt Clip gt Recall p 111 buttons K1RSZ K2RSZ e M E 1 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Processed Key p 76 e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt Processed Key a When the MENU button is Off c When the resizer operation mode is enabled b When the MENU button is On Flexi Pad Button Double press Menu Refer to WIPE M E 1 PGM PST gt Wipe gt Main Pattern p 83 DME WIPE M E 1 P
211. PE Transition rate TRANS RATE Key adjust KEY ADJ Key snapshot KEY SS Buttons in the memory recall section during effect editing Function Button indication Undo UNDO Pause setting PAUS Function Button indication Copy COPY Paste PSTE Select all ALL Insert INS Modify MOD Delete DEL Keyframe loop count setting KF LOOP Effect duration setting EFF DUR Keyframe duration setting KF DUR Delay setting DLY Constant duration mode on or off CNST DUR Go to specified timecode GOTO TC Go to specified keyframe GOTO KF Set range FROM TO Return the button display to that EXIT before effect was executed Switch to numeric keypad input STOR mode Go to first keyframe REWIND Switch to shifted functions SHFT Go to previous keyframe lt lt PREV Go to next keyframe gt gt NEXT Execute effect RUN The functions of the buttons in the memory recall section during effect editing are on two pages to set the functions of buttons on the second page press the 2 button in the lt PageSelect gt group in the button area e Buttons in the memory recall section during macro editing Function Button indication Undo UNDO Pause setting PAUS Auto insert mode on or off AUTO INS Copy COPY Paste PSTE Select all ALL Insert INS Modify MOD Delete DEL Set range FROM TO Go to specified event GOTO EVNT
212. PI output In the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link gt GPI Link menu 7336 4 set Re Entry Enable to On or Off When set to On the GPI is executed upstream 1 When the bus toggle is set to Off the applicable bus depends on the position of the fader lever For re entry upstream applies to a single stage only This setting is common to all GPI output ports GPI output execution on the upstream M E block is only possible on buses for which GPI Link is set to Enable in the GPI Link Adjust menu GPI outputs are executed when reentry signals are selected under the following conditions When selected using buttons in cross point control block When selected by macro execution When selected on the AUX bus remote panel Setting Links between M E Banks The operations for which you can link two M E banks are as follows e Transition execution auto transition cut and fader lever operation e Next transition selection Settings Relating to Function Links dnyes 1e4yoMS 84 Je deyD 253 dnyes seyoms 8 Ja deyo 254 e Transition type selection 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link gt M E Link menu 7336 6 and specify the link number to set 2 In the lt M E Select gt group select Master M E link source 3 Select the M E or PGM PST link source then press M E Set 4 In the lt M E Select gt group select Linked M E link destination 5 Select th
213. Pad For example to set the independent key transition rate for M E 1 key 1 carry out the following procedures 1 In the Flexi Pad press the TRANS RATE button The Flexi Pad switches to the transition rate setting mode 2 Inthe region selection buttons select the switcher bank 3 Press the TRNS SEL button in the memory recall section You can select the type of transition for which to set the rate 4 Press the KEY 1 button This enables setting of the independent key transition rate for key 1 of the M E 1 bank 5 while viewing the alphanumeric display enter the transition rate you want to set with the memory recall section button If required press the TC button to toggle the input mode frame input or timecode input e Enter a value of up to three digits e To cancel the input press any of the mode selection buttons Fade to Black 6 Press the ENTR button Setting the independent key transition rate by a menu operation 1 For DSK1 for example open the PGM PST gt Misc gt Transition menu 1471 2 Select any transition type in the lt Transition Type gt group If in the Setup menus you set insertion deletion as independent modes make the settings for insertion in the lt On Transition Type gt group and the settings for deletion in the lt Off Transition Type gt group 3 Set the transition rate No Parameter Adjustment 1 Transition Rate Transition rate Displ
214. Pit gt 4 bid 15 15 A A A KF1 frames frames KF2 KF3 Interval for which clip is recorded Interval in which still frame is displayed Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders s 49q Jeuse Xy 04 Je deup 139 SedINeg JeUJeIXy OQ Jeldeup 140 In this example when keyframe 1 is executed the first 15 frames consist of clip playback and the remaining 15 frames show the 15th frame as a still image When executing the timeline using a disk recorder also take note of the following points e Set the keyframe duration to at least 30 frames e From pressing the RUN button to the time when the effect actually starts execution may take around one second In order that pressing the RUN button after REWIND make the effect start execution as soon as possible set cueing up of the file for operation as rewind operation In the first keyframe to be executed with RUN for the cued up file do not set the start point but set only the start command 1 If the setting when the REWIND button is pressed is for the first keyframe to be executed then the first keyframe is executed and otherwise the setting for the Rewind Action is carried out 2 If the setting when the REWIND button is pressed is for the first keyframe to be executed then the second keyframe is executed and otherwise the first keyframe is executed e To execute an effect be sure to carry out a Rewi
215. Press the level for which you want to set the cross point hold turning it on and press OK To select all levels press ALL 5 Press ON This enables cross point hold on the selected bus or buses Snapshot Operations in the Menus To apply the effect dissolve attribute 1 Press Effect Dissolve turning it on 2 Set the dissolve duration No Parameter 3 Eff Diss Duration Adjustment Dissolve duration To set the duration for a dissolve set as a temporary attribute effect Set the following parameter to set the duration for a dissolve set as a temporary attribute effect in the Flexi Pad No Parameter Adjustment 5 Temp Dur Temporary attribute dissolve duration To apply the auto transition attribute Press Auto Transition turning it on To apply the GPI output attribute 1 Press GPI Output turning it on 2 Set the port number No Parameter 4 GPI Out Port Adjustment GPI output port number To apply the clip event attribute The following operating procedure can be used only for the frame memory channels assigned to a user region For details about the assignment amp Setting User Regions p 241 1 Press Clip Event The Clip Event menu 6321 2 appears 2 Inthe lt Frame Memory Select gt group press the desired button On the left of the status area the name and content of the selected region for example USER1
216. RANS button turns off Thereafter the fader lever controls the progress of the transition Executing an auto transition after partly moving the fader lever Press the CUT button to instantaneously complete the transition Press the AUTO TRANS button to complete the rest of the transition at the preset transition rate If the transition rate is set to 100 frames and the fader lever has moved through a of the transition then the remaining i of the transition is carried out in 100 frames Non Sync Non Sync indicator d Sync indicator e syrc Non Sync State If the fader lever is in an intermediate position when a transition is completed as an auto transition then the lever position no longer agrees with the transition state This is termed a non sync state In a non sync state the Non Sync or Sync indicator indicates the position from which a normal transition can be carried out This is at both end positions of the fader lever travel e If you move the fader lever toward the Non Sync indicator transition is not executed and the non sync state will be released and the Non Sync indicator will disappear when you reach the end of the lever travel e If you move the fader lever toward the Sync indicator the transition resumes and the Sync indicator will disappear when you reach the end of the lever travel In this case a 100 transition is executed in
217. Saturation Saturation 122 Color Background respectively then adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Luminance Luminance Saturation Saturation Hue Hue 4 it required set the pattern modifiers When turning Position on and setting the pattern position No Parameter Adjustment 1 Position H Horizontal position 2 Position V Vertical position a p 85 When turning Multi on and using replications of the same pattern No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout a p 87 When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern No Parameter Adjustment 1 Aspect Aspect ratio a p 86 When turning Pairing on and making a wipe pattern like a Venetian blind 1 No Parameter Width Adjustment Width When turning Angle on in the lt Rotation gt group and slanting the pattern No Parameter Adjustment 1 Angle Rotation angle of pattern a p 86 When turning Speed on in the lt Rotation gt group and rotating the pattern at a constant rate No Parameter Adjustment 1 Speed Rotation speed of pattern a p 86 When selecting H horizontal or V vertic
218. Saving a Master Timeline soueyAey se deyo 163 seweiyhoy 1 Ja deyo 164 5 Select a region You can select more than one region To select all regions press ALL To select all switcher related regions M E P P User press SWR ALL 6 Press Assign turning it on If the selected register is locked a confirmation message appears asking whether or not to cancel the operation Press OK to return to the previous menu display without carrying out the registration If the operation is carried out the region selected in step 5 is registered on the master timeline and the parameters are now valid T Select the number of the effect register No Parameter 3 Effect Reg Adjustment Effect register number 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 as required to set all regions and register numbers to be saved on the master timeline Q Inthe lt Store gt group press Store To return to the state before saving the master timeline content In the lt Store gt group press Undo Register Operations in the Menus Using the Effect menu you can carry out the following effect register operations e Effect Attribute Settings p 164 e Effect Status Display p 164 e Effect Register Editing amp p 164 Here the menu for dedicated effect registers 1 to 99 is described as an example For registers for P Bus and Device to Device12 carry out similar operations using VF6 DEV PBUS Effe
219. Set in the lt Stop TC gt group e To set the start delay time press Set in the lt Delay gt group 4 Set the timecode value for the start point stop point or start delay time You can enter a start delay time in the range that depends on the signal format as follows 00 00 to 59 nn where nn number of frames per second frame 5 Press Enter To clear the start point stop point and start delay time settings in a menu Select the device then press Clear in the lt Start TC gt group lt Stop TC gt group lt Delay gt group as required Selecting Loop or Recue as the playback mode You can set the device operation mode to loop or recue Loop Plays from the start point of a file to the stop point then repeats playback from the start point Recue Plays from the start point of a file to the stop point then returns to the start point and stops e Loop and recue functions are only available when using the video disk communications protocol e To use the loop or recue function it is necessary to enable the function in the Setup menu For details amp Serial Port Settings p 232 and Making Detailed Settings on the External Device Connected to the Serial Port p 232 1 Open the Device gt DDR VTR gt Cueup amp Play menu 5331 The status area shows the device number register number status information current time start point stop point start delay time and playback mo
220. T bank To modify the key edge of key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 Open the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Edge menu 1112 1111 1 set Window on 2 Adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Crop Crop value 2 Angle Angle value Adjusting the Y balance Setting the Y balance amp p 68 on allows you to specify that even if the hue is the same only portions of a particular luminance will be replaced by the background 1 mnte M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type gt Chroma Adjust menu 1111 1 set Y Balance on 2 Adjust the following parameters Key Adjustments Menus 2 Select the edge type p 63 in the lt Edge gt group Normal Unadorned edge Border Edge with border applied Drop Border Edge with drop border applied Shadow Edge with shadow applied Outline Edge used as outline Emboss Embossing effect applied to edge If you select Normal skip to step 7 3 Set the border width and other parameters When border or outline is selected The setting parameters depend on the key type and whether the separate edge function is on or off To enable the separate edge function press Separate Edge setting it on e When separate edge is off No Parameter Adjustment 1 Width Width 3 Density Density e When separate edge is on The left right top and bottom border or outline widths can be adjusted independently The separate
221. Target FM selection buttons Display of ancillary data Status display Reposition Lock status display The border color shows the status as follows Blue Selected as the reference channel Orange Selected but not as the reference channel Black Not selected Still duration display Press one of these to select which of the selected outputs FM1 and FM2 in the example shown the operation applies to The following information appears on the button Status display File name e g image001 and thumbnail File output in progress Black Black signal output in progress Through Input image output in progress Freeze Freeze in progress Record Continuous image capture i e recording in progress Still duration display When a still image is selected Still is shown When a clip is selected a duration indication e g 00 00 10 is shown Reposition Lock status display This shows R when the reposition function p 108 is on and L when the lock function p 109 is on Ancillary data attached clip display For a clip with ancillary data attached an A appears Pair selection buttons Select the pair to be displayed in the target FM selection buttons In the following figure the FM1 and FM2 pair is selected Status display Biack 4 5 Black 6 7 Black 8 The border color shows the status as follows Blue Selected as the reference chan
222. Transition Control Block KEY PRIOR button PRIOR SET button Key priority display Next transition selection buttons nonu NORM IREV REV TRANS PVw Changing the key priority Transition control block suolisues pue uonoajas jeubis Je deyD KEY1 aa selected bh gt A Key priority Key priority 3 1 4 2 1 3 4 2 To target the currently inserted keys press the KEY PRIOR button to turn it on To target the keys after transition hold down the PRIOR SET button and press the KEY PRIOR button to turn it on Hold down the PRIOR SET button and press one of the next transition selection buttons KEY1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank for the key you want to bring to the front after the transition To set the priority to be the same as before the transition press the BKGD button Key Priority Setting 49 The BKGD button is only effective when in the mode for changing the key priority for after the transition When the next transition selection button KEY PRIOR is on the selected key appears on top on the preview monitor The priority of keys other than the selected one does not change 3 To change the priority of more than one key repeat the previous operation as
223. UL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPTS LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 Renaming frame memory files 1 Open the File gt Frame Mem gt Frame Memory menu 7151 2 Press File Edit 3 Select the type of data to be displayed e To display still image files press Still e To display clip files press Clip e To display all types of file press AII 4 Select the file to be renamed If you selected Clip in step 3 you cannot select multiple files 5 Press Rename 6 Depending on the selections in steps 3 and 4 enter a name as follows and press Enter e If you selected a single file with Still or AL Enter a name of not more than eight characters e If you selected more than one file with Still or All Enter a name of not more than four characters e If you selected Clip Enter a name of not more than four characters If you select Register in the operation device selection block and select and rename multiple files using Still or AI the still images are converted to a clip Deleting Files You can delete data from a local disk or removable disk and snapshot or effect data from a register As an example to delete a snapshot file use the following procedure 1 Open the File gt Snapshot gt Snapshot menu 7131 2 Press File Edit A detailed list appears Here too you can select a device or specify a directory 3 Select th
224. User setup User Setup For details see Chapter 20 User Setup amp p 261 Setup System Configuration Examples MVS ICP System Configuration MVS 3000 Multi Format Switcher Preview monitor e BBA SVY ERRES Playback VTR Program output monitor Character generator Menu display monitor Removable disk Oo000000000000000 oo00000g500000 or oo0o0000000000000000000000 ooo0a Qooooooooo00000000000000 4 00 oooooogocogocgogo0gb0000000000000 peoog00g00000000000000 gQoo00000000 Monitor for multi viewer Bessesen oooo0o0oo0000000000000000i ICP 3000 Control Panel mi D0 D0 Recording VTR System Configuration Examples M IAJOAC 1 dLeyI 19 Connection Example Menu display monitor MVS 3000 Multi Format Switcher O O MAIAIBACQ 1 dey9 AC power supplies AC power supply SS SS SR Re eee ee a ee AC power supplies t jam poonsat T MVS I l I I I I L I I ICP 3000 Control Panel
225. VTR REWIND button Cue up to the start point timecode RUN button Play With this function you can also stop the VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR used for playback at the stop point timecode recalled from the same register Disk recorder video disk communications protocol operation when loop recue is set When loop is set Plays repeatedly between the start point and stop point When recue is set Automatically cues up the start point when play reaches the stop point the operation once more In such cases first recall a different register then carry out the following sequence Recall the original register again press the REWIND button then press the RUN button Making and saving settings relating to Cueup amp Play 1 In the Flexi Pad press the EFF button turning it on 2 Press the button corresponding to the region you want to select turning it on You can select more than one button For details about the method of region selection Selecting regions in the Flexi Pad p 150 3 Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad buttons To search for an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders In an effect register set on the VTR disk recorder timeline Cueup amp Play settings are not possible To add Cueup amp Play settings to such a register first clear the VTR
226. Wipe pattern edge setting buttons BDR border Applies a border to the wipe pattern SOFT BDR soft border Softens the applied border SOFT soft edge Softens the edge EDGE MAT edge matte Selects whether to fill the edge with a color matte or insert an image from the utility bus By default a color matte is selected You can adjust the parameters selected with these buttons using the adjustment knobs when the button is lit green When border is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 W Border width 2 L Luminance 3 S Saturation 4 H Hue When soft border is selected Parameter group 1 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 Ww Border width 2 l Border inner softness 3 O Border outer softness Parameter group 2 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 L Luminance 2 S Saturation 3 H Hue When soft edge is selected No Parameter 1 S Adjustment Edge softness When edge matte is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 L Luminance S Saturation H Hue Buttons for positioning the wipe pattern POS positioner Adjusts the position of the wipe pattern CNTR center Returns the wipe pattern position to the center When you press the POS button the alphanumeric display first shows the name of the parameter H or V and then the value of the parameter When the POS button is lit green you can adjust the posi
227. a Wipe snapshot setting data DME wipe snapshot setting data Key snapshot setting data Shotbox setting data Macro setting data Macro attachment data Menu macro setting data Frame memory image data List of files automatically created in a frame memory file backup to DDR VTR single data set User setup setting data User source name setting data Overview of File Operations Chapter File operations You can carry out the following file operations When operating on individual files or registers Save Saves the data in a register to a local disk or removable disk Load Loads a file from a local disk or removable disk Copy Copies a file within a directory or from one directory to another When a remote panel is used this function applies to it too Rename Renames a file on a local disk or removable disk Delete Deletes a file from a local disk or removable disk When operating on files or registers in a batch The Save Load Copy and Delete operations above are available Notes on transferring multiple frame memory files together to removable disk Transferring all of the files within frame memory together fails if the capacity of the removable disk is too small to hold all of the images In this case replace with a larger capacity removable disk or delete files until saving is possible The following table roughly shows the relation between removable disk capacity and number of files that can be save
228. a key signal at the same time Video and Key in the lt Assign gt group cannot be turned off at the same time One or the other is always on Select the signal IN33 to IN48 and signal names relating to DME and M E 2 are disabled even if selected Using the buttons in the lt Xpt Assign gt group assign the selected signal to the button number currently selected in the main table Cross Point Settings dnyas jaued joujuoD Z Ja deuD 223 dnjes jeued 04u00 Z4 Ja deyD 224 Set Deletes the signal currently assigned to the selected button number and makes a new assignment Insert Moves the signal currently assigned to the selected button number to the next number and makes a new assignment When a button number above 121 is selected execution of Insert is impossible If an Insert execution attempts to change a signal assignment to a button number above 121 the signal assigned to 120 is automatically deleted while signal assignments to 121 and above are maintained To disable a button Select the button you want to disable and press Inhibit To delete an assigned signal Select the button for the signal you want to delete and press Delete in the lt Xpt Assign gt group Signal deletion is executed in accordance with the selection in the lt Assign gt group and the signal assigned to the button number next to the selected button number moves up one line When a butto
229. a new menu macro amp p 196 To exit the Menu Macro Edit menu without saving the results of editing Press Exit To scroll the event display using the menu macro listing Select the event to display and then use the H Scroll parameter to scroll the characters in the Data field About the menu macro editing mode display If you switch to another menu while in menu macro editing mode the display is as shown below Screen when the keyframe status is displayed The keyframe status section appears as follows e Menu macro register number e Menu macro register name e Current event number total number of events e Remaining memory Menu shortcut button to Menu Macro Edit menu Color Bkgd gt Color Bkgd1 ro 1 MMCR1 as 9 81 The Previous page button shows one of the following e When Auto Insert is on Menu Macro Auto Insert appears e When Auto Insert is off Menu Macro Insert After appears but operates as Insert After Menu Macros soley pi saydeyp 197 soley p seideyup 198 Screen when the keyframe status is not displayed The Default Recall button shows the following Menu shortcut button to Menu Macro Edit menu The Previous page button shows one of the following e When Auto Insert is on Menu Macro Auto Insert appears e When Auto Insert is off Menu Macro Insert After appears but operates as Insert After
230. about the setting operation amp Setting Transition Control Block Button Assignments p 221 Variable speed playback modes With the device control block you can play back the material on an external device at variable speed Turning the Z ring in the device control block controls the direction and speed of playback in response to the direction and angle of rotation There are three operation modes jog shuttle and variable Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders SedlNeq Jeuse Xy 04 Je deup 135 Jog mode Pressing the JOG button lighting it amber changes the Z ring to jog mode In this mode you can advance material frame by frame at a speed proportional to the rotation angle of the Z ring To show a still image stop turning the Z ring Reverse direction Forward direction SedINEG JeUJeIXy OQ Jeldeup 136 Shuttle mode Pressing the SHTL button lighting it amber changes the Z ring to shuttle mode In this mode the playback speed varies in steps according to the rotation angle of the Z ring up to a maximum of 50 times normal Low Still image Low speed speed Reverse Forward direction direction Maximum Maximum speed speed Variable mode Pressing the VAR button lighting it amber changes the Z ring to variable mode In this mode the playback speed varies according to the rotation angle of the Z ring from 1 to 3 times normal speed Still image
231. aced by an image or superimposed text The signal determining how the background is cut out is termed key source and the signal that replaces the cut out part is termed key fill The system component responsible for processing a key is referred to as a keyer Each switcher bank has four keyers If using a DME wipe with background selected for the next transition on the M E bank KEY1 cannot be used Similarly DSK1 cannot be used with DME wipes on the PGM PST bank You select whether to enable KEY1 DSK1 or DME wipes in the Setup menu p 241 Keyers that support resizer key edge The resizer and key edge functions can be used by following keyers e Keys 1 and 2 of the M E bank e DSK1 and DSK2 of the PGM PST bank Key Types The key type indicates the manner in which the key source signal is used to cut out the background Type Description Clean mode Luminance The background is cut out Can be key according to the luminance Y of used the key source signal and at the same time the key fill signal is cut out and then added to the background signal Linear key This is a type of luminance key Can be but there is a reduced variability in used gain allowing more precise adjustment Overview Chapter Clean mode Can be used Type Description Color vector The key signal is created from a key combination of the luminance and chrominance components of the k
232. ackup Restore In the above menu when Rename is pressed this message appears if the external HDD cannot be found Check that the external HDD is correctly connected Cannot access the directory 20 2546 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu when Rename is pressed this message appears if an external HDD directory could not be accessed 306 Error Messages Icon Message Description The external HDD is busy 22 2546 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore O In the above menu when Rename is pressed this message appears if the external HDD is in use and cannot be accessed Try again after you check that the access lamp of the HDD or the indicator of the menu is turned off Restore Success But some files were not restored 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu recalling a file from the external HDD was correctly done However some files were not restored because of a different video format or file corruption Success But the number of folder exceeds the limit 12 and the files expected for the folders were restored in the default folder Or the name was changed because it was the same file name 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu recalling a file from the external HDD was correctly done However the limit on the n
233. ad of pressing buttons on screen touch operation you can position the mouse cursor over a button and click the mouse The parameter setting and list scrolling operations are described below To set a parameter with the mouse To adjust the value of a parameter setting button with the mouse you can use one of the following three methods Position the cursor over the parameter setting button for which you want to adjust the value and turn the mouse wheel Position the cursor over the parameter setting button for which you want to adjust the value then hold down the right mouse button and drag the bar showing the setting to the desired value Position the cursor over the parameter setting button for which you want to adjust the value then click the left mouse button to open the numeric keypad window and enter the desired value To scroll a list with the mouse Position the cursor over the list you want to scroll and turn the mouse wheel Basic Menu Operations In the Setup menu you can specify the scroll direction and whether parameters increase or decrease in relation to the mouse wheel rotation You can also switch the functions of the right and left mouse buttons during parameter setting button adjustments For details amp Setting the Mouse Wheel Scrolling Direction for Parameter Setting p 239 and Selecting the Mouse Button for the Parameter Setting Buttons p 239 Using Shortcut Menus Create
234. added or deleted and can be given a name of up to 8 characters e When the system is powered off the folder names are deleted The folder names must be saved onto media e The following names cannot be used for folders Flashl Flash2 CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 A folder named Default is provided and this folder cannot be renamed or deleted e Still images and clips in different frame memory folders cannot have the same name Still Image Operations The frame memory function provides the following functions for still image creation and saving e Capturing and Saving an Input Image Store amp p 106 e Recalling Still Images Recall p 107 e Image Output amp p 108 e Continuously Capturing Still Images Record amp p 109 e Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images Animation p 110 During frame memory clip playback p 112 of the pair assigned to either of the target FM selection buttons frame memory operations may not be performed properly Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip playback Preparations Allocating the frame memory outputs FM1 to FM8 to cross point buttons To output a frame memory image to a monitor for example the output signal from the frame memory FM1 to FM8 must be allocated to a cross point button Carry out
235. age in the corresponding frame memory output image and saves it in temporary memory For a freeze an image can be captured either as a video frame frame freeze or a video field field freeze When the system is powered off any freeze images written to temporary memory are lost Freezing an image and writing it to memory To freeze the signal selected as input material and write it to memory use the following procedure 1 Open the Frame Memory gt Still gt Freeze Store menu 2512 2 Select the target frame memory For the procedure Selecting outputs FM and target frame memory p 106 3 To use V K mode press V K Mode turning it on 4 Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area to select the folder to hold the freeze image amp p 106 The folder selected here is the destination folder for saving the freeze image After step 5 that follows it will not be possible to change the selected folder An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder 5 Press Freeze Enable turning it on The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair of FMs selected in step 2 and a freeze is now possible 6 if necessary set the mask settings p 107 for the selected signal 7 Press one of the following in the lt Freeze gt group to write a freeze image to temporary memory Frame Execute frame freeze Field Execute field freeze
236. ailed File Information 202 Selecting REGIONS jss6snGesderssvenessoqiamuareese 203 Selecting a Device for Operations 203 Saving TGS aesica nr a E 203 Loading Files jc senicesdensdseqiadsasrsoccaaheavetacaeenee 204 Table of Contents 7 8 Copying PILES susie csostssingscgpsbecasesiccsndemesreke 204 Ren amine PIGS iieii 205 Deleting Files ca5 05 enn e aed 205 Saving the List of Frame Memory Files to a Local Disk or Removable Disk 206 File Batch Operations eeeeeeeeees 206 Batch Saving Biles ciss c sut ccesscgenctondedeaesaats 206 Batch Loading Files cccssccseseseeenes 207 Batch Copying Piles aiiucs seca sseogetectuse 207 Importing and Exporting Files 207 Importing Frame Memory Data 207 Exporting Frame Memory Data 208 Directory Operations cccssseeseeeeee 208 Creating a New Directory eeeeeeee 208 Renaming a Directory 209 Deleting a Directory 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeee 209 Copying Files between Different Unit DS sctisdneudatetuduauenciuateveneedadtanedaaudeaianteaus 209 Saving Files Recalled by Autoload 209 Chapter 16 System Setup Setup for the Whole System 0 211 Network Settings cccccccssseeeeseeeeeseeeeeees 211 Setting the Group IDs caeisatinentacs 211 Authenticating the IP Address Automatically ciccecccs ccssseedecsdecesssccaes 211 Setting the Signal Forma
237. aking Control Panel GPI Input Setting Seini 230 Making Control Panel GPI Output SeS Se 2H cas aE EE EiS 231 Assigning a Parallel Output Port 232 Setting the Control Mode for P Bus DEVICES fei 25s n a a 232 Associating a Port with a Device Selection BUON na a ERS 232 Serial Port Settings 232 Making Detailed Settings on the External Device Connected to the Serial POL neitrisinsatdavnerteteuvradtamertnaparaadtars 232 Setting the AUX Bus Override Operating Modei ahenn enaa 235 Operation Settings ccccccssssseeeeeeeeeees 235 Setting the On Air Tally eeens 235 Assigning a Bus or Function to 1st Row B ONS a a 235 Setting the Transition Rate Display Mod es viaved istvasticiststt aa naracncusteiwiss 236 Making Settings Relating to Effects 236 Setting the First Keyframe When a Rewind is Executed cic tscssecets Suara vinsisiiertunctiatiens 236 Setting the Source and Destination N men nnna na a 236 Settings for the Flexi Pad and Wipe Snapshot Mentse aa es 237 Setting the Button Operation Mode 237 Setting the Operation Mode of the ALL Button in the Transition Control Setting Trackball and Button Double Click SENSIIVALY Sacdisessaceasacpaasedesnredeusnncdaeses 238 Setting the Macro Execution Mode 238 Screen Saver and Other Settings 238 Using the Menu Display Screen Saver 238 Using Panel Sleep Mode ceeeeeeeee 238 Adjusting the Brightness
238. al in the lt Modulation gt group and applying waviness to the pattern When using 1080PsF mode in an HD system the modulation function is not available 5 To interchange color 1 and color 2 press the Color Invert button turning it on Copy and Swap Overview of Copy and Swap You can copy or swap the settings among the switcher banks or between keyers The following settings can be copied or swapped Overall settings for the M E and PGM PST banks Keyer settings Wipe settings in a transition control block Independent key wipe settings in a transition control block DME wipe settings in a transition control block Independent key DME wipe settings in a transition control block Matte color settings color 1 color 2 and how to compose them Color settings Format converter input settings copy only Format converter output settings copy only You can carry out keyer copy operations by a simple button operation M E copy and M E swap You can copy and swap the overall bank settings among the switcher banks Target bank M E 1 PGM PST Target data Bank settings excluding the following data items e Setup data Snapshots Keyframe effects Key snapshots Key memory Keyer copy and keyer swap You can carry out copy and swap operations among the following keyers No Parameter Adjustment 1 Amplitude Amplitude of modulation Frequency Frequency of modulation Speed
239. al you want to set Primary33 to Primary48 are disabled even if selected 3 Press CCR turning it on This enables the color correction function 4 Press Video Process turning it on 5 Adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Video Gain Video signal gain 2 Y Gain Y signal gain 3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain 4 Hue Delay Hue delay 5 Black Level Black level To return adjustment values to their defaults press Unity Applying primary color correction 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input gt CCR menu 7332 1 press Primary CCR turning it on 2 Inthe lt Primary CCR Adjust gt group select the setting item Black Black balance adjustment White White balance adjustment Gamma Gamma correction Knee Knee correction Output level A White balance adjustment Black A Input level balance f adjustment Unadjusted signal ____ Adjusted signal Output level A k Gamma i correction i Input level Knee correction 3 Depending on the selection in step 2 adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Red Red signal adjustment 2 Green Green signal adjustment 3 Blue Blue signal adjustment 4 All Simultaneous RGB adjustment To return the parameters to their default settings In the lt Primary CCR gt group press Unity Making RGB clip adjustment
240. alled and played back A movie held in frame memory is called a frame memory clip A frame memory clip can be named using up to four characters p 109 Ancillary data In a frame memory clip in addition to the video image you can also record and play back ancillary data which can be used as embedded audio To record the ancillary data the frame memory saving mode in the Setup menu must be set to save with ancillary data For details amp Saving a Frame Memory Clip with Ancillary Data p 216 e With this setting the saving mode for still images also changes to save with ancillary data but when playing back a still image the ancillary data is never played e When you change the saving mode the frame memory is initialized and any existing recorded frame memory data is lost Note on transferring ancillary data Ancillary data is recorded when the frame memory saving mode is set to save with ancillary data and can be saved to the local disk removable disk or other external devices and recalled However the ancillary data can only be saved or recalled when all of the following conditions are met The frame memory saving mode is set to save with ancillary data Ancillary data is present in the saved or recalled frame memory file The system signal format is the same as the signal format in the file When the frame memory saving mode is set to save with ancillary data the
241. ally adjusting the keying When the key active function is off only the foreground image appears Set this off when manually adjusting color cancel see the next section 1 Inthe ME 1 gt Key1 gt Type gt Chroma Adjust menu 1111 1 set Key Active on 4 set Key Active on The chroma key composite image now appears in the monitor Making key signal adjustments for color cancel When the color cancel function is set on you can adjust the key signal for color cancel T In the lt Color Cancel gt group of the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type gt Chroma Adjust menu 1111 1 set Color Cancel on 2 In the lt Color Cancel gt group set Cancel Key on The cancel key is now on and you can now adjust the key signal for color cancel No Parameter 1 Clip Adjustment Color cancel key reference level 2 Gain Color cancel key gain 3 Make the following settings as required in the lt Color Cancel gt group Key Adjustments Menus shey y Jaydeyo 69 shay y1 dey9 70 When setting Key Position on and adjusting the color cancel key edge position No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Phase Move left and right edges of the color cancel key simultaneously 2 Left Move left edge of the color cancel key 3 Right Move right edge of the color cancel key When setting Window on and adjusting the detection range of the color cancel key No Param
242. ames to which a modify operation applies Effect position On a keyframe Variable duration mode Applies to currently selected keyframe Constant duration mode Applies to currently selected keyframe Between two keyframes Applies to previous keyframe Modify operation not possible seweyhoy p Ja deyo 146 a A new keyframe is inserted at the effect position Difference in the effect of a paste operation Variable duration mode The copied keyframe is inserted at the specified position Constant duration mode The copied keyframe is written over the specified position Time Settings Keyframe duration and effect duration You can determine the execution time of an effect by setting either the keyframe duration or the effect duration Keyframe duration This is the time from the keyframe to the next keyframe You can set this time in the Flexi Pad p 159 In constant duration mode p 146 it is not possible to change the keyframe duration setting Effect duration This is the total execution time of the effect from the first keyframe to the last You can set this time in the Flexi Pad p 159 When you change the effect duration the keyframe duration for each keyframe in the effect is automatically recalculated proportionally Overview of Keyframes Keyframe duration Keyframe 1 ails 2 3 4 5 number lt gt Effect duration
243. an empty register is recalled to automatically insert a first keyframe of the state at that point turn 1st KF Auto Insert on Automatic effect saving To automatically save an effected when it is recalled after being edited turn Effect Auto Save on Keyframe duration default value Press Default KF Duration then enter the default value from the numeric keypad window Setting the First Keyframe When a Rewind is Executed For P Bus GPI and DDR VTR timeline operations to execute the first keyframe when a rewind is carried out set each external device on in the lt REWIND amp 1st KF gt group in the Effect Mode menu 236 Operation Settings When an effect is executed by pressing the RUN button with this setting on the first keyframe action is not executed GPI Settings for the GPI timeline P Bus Settings for the P Bus timeline DDR VTR Settings for the VTR disk recorder Extended VTR timeline Macro Settings for the macro timeline Setting the Source and Destination Names To set the Source and Destination names used in the control panel use the following procedure Before carrying out these settings it is necessary to set the number of the S Bus description name p 257 nthe lt Source Dest Name gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation menu 7326 select the names to be used from the following Sw er Local Source names set in the Xpt Assign menu and fixed bus nam
244. and make any required settings For details about key settings amp Keys p 62 To carry out a cut transition skip to step 7 otherwise continue to step 5 Select one of the transition type selection buttons in the transition control block To carry out a dissolve to the new video Press one of the MIX NAM SUPER MIX and PST COLOR MIX buttons turning it on To carry out a wipe Press the WIPE or DME button turning it on To carry out a transition while playing back a frame memory clip Press one of the buttons corresponding to the clip to be used FM1 amp 2CLIP FM3 amp 4CLIP FM5 amp 6CLIP and FM7 amp 8CLIP turning it on You can also use the Misc gt Transition menu 1171 to select a desired transition type for a switcher bank The transition type selection buttons in the transition control block can be interchanged in the setup menu For details amp Setting Transition Control Block Button Assignments p 221 Make the required settings according to the selected transition type Super mix Super Mix Settings p 50 Preset color mix Color Matte Settings p 50 Wipe Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings amp p 83 DME wipe Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings p 95 Clip transition Clip Transition Operations amp p 115 Using the transition preview function p 57 you can check the transition on the preview monitor 7 Carr
245. and press Test Fire The action command is output from the switcher Remote 1 5 If setting a start point in the lt Start TC gt group press to Remote 4 ports the Set button If not setting a start point skip to step 8 To clear the start point stop point and variable speed settings Notes Select the device from the upper list in the status area then press Clear in the lt Start TC gt group lt Stop TC gt group For a disk recorder on which the start point is not set lt Variable Speed gt group as required the file recalled in the disk recorder when the keyframe point is passed is the subject of the action To set the action for a rewind operation On the VTR disk recorder Extended VTR timeline when 6 Set the start point as a timecode value the REWIND button in the Flexi Pad is pressed the action set for the first keyframe is not executed when the RUN 7 Press Enter Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders 1 41 SedINEG JeUJeIXy OQ Jeldeup 142 button is pressed then the first keyframe action is executed To execute an action when the REWIND button is pressed it is necessary to set this action Rewind Action To carry out this setting in the Device gt DDR VTR gt Timeline menu 5332 press Rewind Action to recall the Rewind Action menu 5332 1 In this setting screen use the same setting method as in the screen for setting an action on the VTR disk recorder timeline A
246. anks have 24 cross point buttons in their cross point control blocks These buttons are identified by numbers common to all of the banks and blocks and a signal is assigned to each number The basis of signal selection is to select in a cross point button row the cross point button to which the desired signal is assigned M E reentry signal selection A video signal created on the M E bank can be imported as an input signal on the PGM PST bank These signals are referred to as M E reentry input signals To select an M E reentry input signal using the cross point buttons the signal must be assigned beforehand in the Setup menu p 223 For example if the program output from the M E 1 block M E1 OUT is assigned to an arbitrary cross point button the signal can be used as input material at any time Bus Selection Each row of the 24 cross point buttons is shared by multiple buses The following table illustrates the correspondence between buses and cross point button rows and the delegation operations Signal Assignment and Selection Assigning signals to buttons Each of the 24 cross point buttons has a corresponding button number to which you assign a signal In addition to the signals input to the connectors at the rear of the switcher processor you can also select signals generated within the switcher Each button has assigned to
247. ansitions Key1 to Key4 including independent key transition settings wipes DME wipes e Color backgrounds 1 2 e Frame memory e AUX bus including CCR settings 3211 Misc gt Enable gt Port Enable Setting data for lt Switcher gt group 3213 Misc gt Enable gt Side Flags All data relating to Side Flags menu Error Messages Error messages appear in the following three formats e A list display in the Error Status menu 7411 Error Log menu 7412 Error Messages e Message boxes e List based on the Error Information menu 9900 Error Messages Displayed in the Error Status Error Log Menu When an error occurs the word ERROR appears in red on the menu title button When ERROR is displayed pressing the menu title button displays the Error Status menu or Error Log menu When an error is still in effect The Error Status menu appears p 299 When an error has already been cleared The Error Log menu appears p 299 S Page M E 1 1111 gt Keyi gt Type Menu title button You can select whether or not to indicate the occurrence of an error by the word ERROR shown on the menu title button by setting Error Popup in the Error Status menu or Error Log menu To display the error status or error log regardless of whether there is currently an error 1 Carry out either of the following e Press the DIAG button of the top
248. any one event You can delete all events within a macro or events within a specified range in a single operation You can then paste the deleted event using the paste function Event copy Copy any one event You can copy all events within a macro or events within a specified range in a single operation Event paste Paste a copied or deleted event at a desired position within a macro Undoing an edit operation You can undo the last event insertion modification deletion or paste operation Macro merging During macro editing you can recall and copy another register to merge it with the macro being edited For example while editing macro register 2 you can recall and copy register 1 to merge it as shown in the following figure Macros soe p 13 dey9 181 soley p Jeideup 182 Recall macro register 2 and move to another event S Se A 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 Macro being edited Newly recalled macro register 2 register 1 Recall register 1 4 Copy contents of register 1 and add after current event register 2 TIT Contents of register 1 remain unchanged 3 1 2 Macro Execution To execute a macro recall the register in which the macro is held Simultaneous with the register recall all events stored in the macro are played back executed in sequence without pause Pausing and restarting macro execution It is also possible to execute a macro in the following ways Paus
249. appears 3 Inthe lt Release Transition gt group select the timing of transition completion Last 30 The transition completes at the end of 70 of the transition execution time The transition has a dead zone from 70 to 95 of the transition time Last 5 The transition completes at the end of 95 of the transition execution time When the transition completes the cropping is removed during the last 5 enlarges Off The transition completes at the end of the transition execution time During the last 5 of the transition the transition and cropping removal proceed together Dead Zone cof et 0 70 95100 9 70 95 100 ep Last 30 Last 5 y Transitions zZ A 95 100 A Cropping t Transition execution time y Change in transition and cropping amount Off DME Wipe Modify Clear Press Default Recall at the lower left of the menu screen turning it on then press the DME Wipe VF6 button to return the DME wipe settings to their initial status For details about initial status Saving User Defined Settings p 214 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions You can set independent key transition DME wipes in the DME Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer This section describes an example using key 1 on the M E 1 bank Open the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition menu 1116 select DME Wipe Adjust and display the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu 11
250. appears 3 Select the setting to apply Signal Input Settings Making detailed settings for up conversion 1 inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input gt FC Adjust menu 7332 2 select the input to which the setting applies 2 Inthe lt Conversion gt group select one of the following Frame Conversion mode in frame units Field Conversion mode in field units Adaptive Automatically switches between the above two modes When Adaptive is selected adjust the following parameter No Parameter 2 Motion Select Adjustment Motion detection sensitivity a 1 Still priority mode 2 Standard mode 3 Motion priority mode 3 Inthe lt Aspect gt group select one of the following Edge Crop Adds black bars on the left and right sides of a 4 3 aspect ratio image to convert it to a 16 9 image Letter Box Crops the top and bottom of a 4 3 aspect ratio image to convert it to a 16 9 image Squeeze Stretches a 4 3 image horizontally to covert it to a 16 9 image For details about the image transformations see the following figure Up converted image 16 9 Edge Crop Original image 4 3 C Letter Box Squeeze T o T 2 Setting the image position in edge crop up conversion mode 1 Inthe lt Edge Crop Position gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input gt FC Adjust menu 7332 2 press Position turning it on 2
251. area To cancel an assignment Select the button then press Clear To display register names in the Utility Command column If in step 3 you select Macro Recall or Shotbox Recall press the Reg Name Display button to select whether or not register names appear in the Utility Command column Interfacing with External Devices Making Control Panel GPI Input Settings You can set the GPI input ports and trigger type and make the action settings 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt GPI Input menu 7325 1 2 Select the port to set 3 Inthe lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger type Rising Edge Applies the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse Falling Edge Applies the trigger on a falling edge of an input pulse X Any Edge Applies the trigger on a change in the polarity of the input signal _ Level Carries out the specified operation when the input is low or high No Operation Applies no trigger on an input pulse 4 inthe lt Target gt group select the action block Interfacing with External Devices M E 1 and P P Sets an action for the M E or PGM PST bank Common Setup Sets an action for something other than the above or a setup action 5 Select the action to set 6 Press Action Set to confirm the action selection Selectable actions for various trigger types e When the trigger type is other than Level The x in
252. ary to assign inputs and outputs of the switcher and so on to an S Bus space The settings are common to the parallel and serial tallies Assigning Switcher Inputs and Outputs to S Bus Space T Inthe lt Device gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Router menu 7361 select the device to which the settings apply SWRI Settings apply to switcher 1 The SWR2 setting is disabled 2 In the lt Matrix Size gt group select the matrix size 136 x 138 Standard Assigns to S Bus space with the switcher input output at 136 x 138 size 128 x 128 Assigns to S Bus space with the switcher input output at 128 x 128 size 3 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Source Source start address Destination Destination start address Level S Bus space level Setting the group number of an S Bus description name Sets the group number for an S Bus description name to be displayed in the source name displays for a cross point operation Chapter T nthe lt Alias Name Gp gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Router menu 7361 press Gp No 2 Set the following parameter No Parameter 1 Gp No Adjustment Group number of S Bus description name a When setting values 1 to 7 are selected and the name is not set the description name for 0 appears If the description name for 0 is not registered either the T
253. as key source in the cross point control block You can also use the same signal as the key fill selected on the key fill bus as key source SELF Press the AUTO SEL button and SPLT button simultaneously so that both are off to select the SELF mode Setting auto chroma key SMPL MARK button Toggles the sample mark display on and off When on the monitor screen shows the foreground video and a white box sample mark AUTO STRT button Automatically adjusts the chroma key When the SMPL MARK button is off pressing this does not carry out automatic chroma key adjustment You can adjust the display position and size of the sample mark with the adjustment knobs Key Adjustments Flexi Pad s y yp Jajdeyo 75 shay y1 dey9 76 For details about these parameters amp Making auto chroma key adjustments p 69 Setting the show key function SHOW KEY button When this is pressed the key source signal to which key processing has been applied is output from the specified output port show key mode For details about setup amp Settings for the Show Key Function p 251 Setting the resizer function RE SIZR button Enables and disables the resizer function The parameters that can be adjusted with the knobs are on two pages to access the second page press the KNOB 1 2 button For details about the parameters amp Menu operations for key shrinking magnific
254. ater assigned device selection button takes priority and the previous selection is invalidated e If P Bus is assigned to a serial port it is not possible to assign a device selection button to that port 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to make assignments to other ports Sharing disk recorder extended VTR file lists You can share files between devices connected to ports on the same disk recorder Extended VTR Select the port to set 2 Select the device selection button for sharing the file list 3 Press Same File List Set Serial Port Settings This sets the Remotel to Remote4 ports on the rear panel of the switcher 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt Serial Port Assign menu 7325 5 In the list on the left select the port for the setting In the list on the right select the device type Press Device Type Set oF W N To attach a name to the selected port push Set in the lt Assign gt group and enter a port name in the keyboard window 6 To display detail information about the selected port press Port Setting Making Detailed Settings on the External Device Connected to the Serial Port After setting the external device for each serial port it is necessary to make further detailed settings for operation of the external device Making detailed settings for a P Bus device 1 In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt Serial Port
255. ation rotation and movement p ZZ If you press this button at the same time as any of the KEY 1 to KEY4 buttons you can switch the trackball to the resizer setting mode ROT X button When this is set to on you can rotate the key on the x axis ROT Y button When this is set to on you can rotate the key on the y axis Inverting black and white in the key source KEY INV button When this is set to on black and white in the key source is inverted Selecting the key fill signal FILL MAT button When this is on the signal generated by the dedicated color matte generator is selected and when it is off the signal selected on the key 1 fill bus is selected For details about parameters amp Selecting the key fill and key source p 66 Selecting the mask source MASK button Selects the mask source box generated by dedicated generator or pattern to be selected in the Main Mask menu for each M E bank The parameters that can be adjusted with the adjustment knobs are different for a box or a pattern The box parameters are on two pages to access the second page press the KNOB 1 2 button For details about parameters amp Using a mask p 73 Resizer Applying modifiers to the key edge BDR button Applies a border to the edge DROP BDR button Applies a drop border to the edge SHDW button Applies a shadow to the edge For details about parameters see step 3 in
256. ation editing 196 executing 194 recalling aregister 194 register editing 198 Menu page number button 31 Menu title button 31 Menu tree 266 Message box 309 Minus button 34 Misc menu 125 Mix 47 Mode selection buttons 28 Mouse 38 Mouse button settings 239 Mouse wheel settings 239 Multi viewer 248 Multiplication 87 89 N Network Config menu 211 Network settings 211 Next transition selection buttons 24 Non additive mix 47 Non sync state 56 Normal edge 63 Normal mix 67 Numeric keypad window 34 O Operation buttons 27 Operation menu 235 Operation settings 235 Outline 63 Output menu 246 P Page number entry section 33 Parameter group button 32 Parameter setting buttons 32 Parameters initializing 38 setting 37 Path 147 setting 159 Pattern limit 53 252 P Bus devices 132 timeline 132 Positioner 85 setting 88 POWER switch control panel 42 switcher processor 39 Power on state 213 Prefs Utility menu 227 Preset color mix 250 Previous page button 32 PRIOR SET button 25 R Recalling a continuous sequence of stillimages 110 Record 109 Recue 139 Reference region 144 Region 144 selecting 150 152 Region selection buttons 26 29 Register 144 effect 150 keyframe 150 macro 182 menu macro 194 shotbox 177 snapshot 168 Register editing effect 164 keyframe 164 macro 186 menu macro 198 shotbox 179 snapshot 174 Register listing effect 166 snapshot 174 Removable di
257. ations of saving canceling and deleting a wipe snapshot p 92 DME Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi Pad sedi JING 9 Jeideuo 101 oway ewes 7 Ja deyo 102 Frame Memory Overview Frame memory is a function whereby a frame of input video can be frozen and written to memory for further use as material for editing You can also play recorded frame memory clips movies Frame capacity The following tables show the maximum number of images that can be written to the memory HD system Video format Memory capacity Without With ancillary ancillary data data 1080i 50 Approx 1000 Approx 700 frames frames 1080i 59 94 Approx 800 frames 1080PsF 23 976 Approx 600 1080PsF 24 trames 720P 50 Approx 2300 Approx 1400 frames frames 720P 59 94 Approx 1700 frames SD system Video format Memory capacity Without With ancillary ancillary data data 480i 59 94 Approx 5600 Approx 4700 frames frames 576i 50 Approx 4800 Approx 3900 frames frames For details about the method of operation amp Still Image Operations p 103 Overview Chapter Types of image and terminology used The following types of image are handled in frame memory Freeze image An input image that has been frozen but not saved to memory Still image A freeze frame that has been saved to memory as a file Each file still file holds just one
258. attachment You can temporarily disable the macro attachment settings When a macro attachment is disabled pressing the button does not cause execution of the assigned macro You can enable and disable macro attachments for the PGM PST bank and M E banks individually Setting and Canceling a Macro Attachment Setting a macro attachment to a button This section describes an example of setting a macro attachment to a background A row cross point button For details about buttons that can have a macro attachment amp Setting a macro attachment to a button p 190 The PRE MCRO and POST MCRO functions must be assigned to buttons in the 1st row of the cross point control block The assignment is carried out in the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Key AUX Function Assign menu 7326 13 p 235 T Recall the macro register 1 to 250 that you want to assign to the button p 182 2 To set in pre macro mode hold down the PRE MCRO button assigned to the 1st row in the cross point control block and to set in post macro mode hold down the POST MCRO button and then press the desired button in the background A row The cross point button you pressed flashes amber and the register you recalled in step 1 is assigned to the button If you make both pre macro and post macro settings for the same button The later setting is valid To set a macro attachment without changing cross points When
259. attern size softness density and color Zabton Edge type and key fill key source position The key edge modification function has two modes a mode key drop ON mode in which the key fill key source position moves downward and a mode key drop OFF mode in which it does not move Key drop ON mode The key fill key source position moves downward by eight scan lines or four scan lines When a drop border or shadow is selected it is possible to apply a border to the top edge of the key Key drop OFF mode The key fill key source position does not move When a drop border or shadow is selected it is not possible to apply a border to the top edge of the key In the key drop ON mode a menu setting selects between the mode 4H mode in which the key fill key source position is lowered by four scan lines and the mode 8H mode in which the key fill key source position is lowered by eight scan lines When Fine Key is on the edge width is forced to the range 0 00 to 4 00 Note that in the following situations the key drop mode is forcibly turned on e When the edge type is border outline or emboss e When the edge type is normal with soft edge being on e When fine key is on To fix key fill key source in key drop OFF mode Switch frame delay mode on Regardless of the fine key and edge type settings key fill and key source are fixed in key drop off mode In this mode key image has a o
260. ault unit red This is not a malfunction Turn both POWER A and Not lit Power supply Exchange the B switches ON fault power supply unit Rear panel PRIMARY INPUTS 1 to 32 connectors a QD OUTPUTS 1 to 16 connectors SERIAL TALLY connector AG inane c nnectors TALLY GPI IN 1 to 18 and TALLY O E E k GPI OUT 1 to 48 connectors e 4 terminal REF INPUT connectors UTIL SW connector MVS connector REMOTE S1 and S2 connectors REMOTE 1 to 4 connectors FM DEVICE connector S BUS connector UTIL FM connector UTIL SCU connector AC IN AC power input A and B connectors 3 pin Connect to 100 V to 240 V AC power supply with the optional AC power cords The unit is equipped with two power supplies When A or B power supply is connected unit operation can proceed signal ground terminal Connect to the system ground REMOTE 1 to 4 connectors D sub 9 pin RS 422A Connect devices supporting Sony 9 pin VTR VDCP Video Disk Communications Protocol or P Bus Peripheral II Protocol protocols FM frame memory DEVICE connector USB 2 0 compliant This connector is for attaching an external HDD for frame memory S BUS connector BNC type Connect this connector with a BNC cable to an S Bus data link via a T bridge Power Supply and Connectors Connecting devices such as IXS series routing switchers and MKS 80
261. automatically extract an image from the clip and save as a separate frame memory file Relation between recorded state of video tape and files after extraction The extraction is carried out according to the following rules Example 1 When only video signal clips and a still images are recorded single files V video Red red marker frame Single video tape Result of extraction Each section surrounded by red marker frames is extracted as a clip main file If the red markers surround a single frame then it is extracted as a still image In the case above two clip files main files and one still image file are extracted Example 2 When a video signal clip is followed by a key signal clip with the same number of frames pair file V video K key Red red marker frame Blue blue marker frame Single video tape Result of extraction The section surrounded by red marker frames is extracted as the main file and the section surrounded by blue marker frames is extracted as the sub file In the case above one clip file pair file is extracted a A red marker frame is a monochrome frame with the RGB signal levels at 100 0 0 respectively b A blue marker frame is a monochrome frame with the RGB signal levels at 0 0 100 respectively For extraction as a pair file the main file and sub file must have the same number of frames 1 In the Frame Memory gt Clip
262. aved in memory using the thumbnails and assign it to an FM output use the following procedure 1 Open the Frame Memory gt Still gt Recall menu 2511 When Pair is on only pair files each consisting of a main file and a sub file are displayed When Pair is set to Off both of single files and pair files are shown see following figure ijfage002 image003 image004 image005 Sub file Main file 2 Inthe frame memory selection area select the frame memory to be assigned p 106 3 If Direct Recall is on press it to turn it off 4 Select the desired folder in the folder selection area By pressing More to switch the display you can select from a maximum of 12 folders Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear 5 Press the thumbnail of the still image you want to recall 6 Press Recall This recalls the still image file which is assigned to the FM you selected in step 2 To recall in direct recall mode Direct recall means that pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file In this mode only the front thumbnail file is recalled d n step 6 of Recalling a still image amp p 108 instead of pressing Recall press Direct Recall 2 Press the thumbnail for the file you want to recall To display the sub file in front While direct recall mode is on press Sub Display turning it on Still Image Operations To search by file name 1 Press
263. aying the independent key transition rates in a menu and changing the settings For each of the banks you can display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate and change the settings p 126 Fade to Black This function gradually darkens the program output video of the PGM PST bank eventually cutting it to black e In multi program mode it is possible to carry out a fade to black on a number of programs simultaneously e Fade to black can be executed via GPI or a macro It cannot be executed from a control panel button You can also make a Setup menu setting such that a fade to black does not apply to particular programs For details about settings amp Enabling or disabling the fade to black function p 250 Setting the fade to black transition rate 1 Open the PGM PST gt Misc gt Transition menu 1471 2 Select FTB 3 Set the fade to black transition rate No Parameter Adjustment 1 Transition Rate Transition rate Displaying the transition rates in a menu and changing the settings For each of the banks you can display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate and change the settings p 126 Fade to Black 61 suoljisued pue uonoajas euis Je deyD shay y1 dey9 62 Keys Overview A key is an effect in which a part of the background image is repl
264. bnail file is recalled d mn step 6 of Recalling a clip amp p 112 instead of pressing Recall press Direct Recall 2 Press the thumbnail for the file you want to recall To display the sub file in front While direct recall mode is on press Sub Display turning it on To search the clip file by file name Press the Find button Perform the same operation as for still images p 108 Clip Playback You can play a recalled clip by a menu operation or by using the device control block With a pair file recalled it is possible to set Pair to off and carry out a single file operation but if you then set Pair to on again the output of frame memory may be black In such cases it is necessary to recall the pair file once more Playing a clip using the menu 1 Open the Frame Memory gt Clip gt Play menu 2522 The status of the clip shown in the current target FM selection buttons appears c uve P T Black Black 00 00 10 R so i 00 00 10 RL Clip Begin 01 00 00 00 1 2 Start Current Stop FM i CENTIS 01 00 00 05 01 00 00 09 Clip Begin Cren a 01 00 00 00 2 San 1 Current lt m a 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 05 01 00 00 09 Rewind Status buttons These show the timecode values for the start point current position and end point Current position red bar Playback start point pale blue bar Playback end point yellow bar
265. button Macro register listing Register number Register name 9 Event number Remaining Memory SCS MEt A 2 Video v 30 PP A 3 Video 30 gt Next button lt Prev button Modify button Delete button Insert After button Insert Before button Macro creation event list Register number Shows the number of the register 1 to 250 being edited Register name Shows the name of the register being edited Event number Shows the current event number When the FROM TO button in the Flexi Pad is pressed to select a range of events this appears as a range From X To Y The event number reflects the position of the cursor in the macro register listing Remaining Memory Shows the percentage of memory still available for recording events Macro register listing When a macro is stored in the register this shows a list of the macro events Each macro event consists of the following components which you can check in the list e Contents Identifies this as an Event statement Continue statement or event number e Symbol Type of event ASCII character string e Data Event details in the form of parameters and data For details about the event components amp Macro File Editing Rules p 289 The cursor shows the current event in the list in reverse video You can use the No parameter to scroll the list without changing the cursor position Depen
266. called automatically This is known as the autoload function To save the data to be recalled by the autoload function use the menu for operations on individual files For information about the data recalled by the autoload function Saving data recalled by autoload p 202 For information about enabling or disabling the autoload function amp Setting Automatic Loading of Register Data at Power On Autoload Function p 214 For example to save snapshot data use the following procedure 1 Open the File gt Snapshot gt Snapshot menu 7131 2 In the device selection area on the left select Register 3 In the device selection area on the right select Local Disk Be sure to select Local Disk as the saving destination 4 Select the PWON_LD directory The PWON_LD directory is automatically created when Power On File Load is set to On in the Copying Files between Different Unit IDs Saving Files Recalled by Autoload In the operating device selection section on the left list select the storage location of the source files and in the Select the copy source and copy destination unit IDs s ll4 9 saydeyo 209 sellq S4 sedeyo 210 Engineering Setup gt System gt Start Up menu 7314 If set to Off the directory does not appear Select the data to be saved and the file in which to save it Press Save If there is already data in the specified location a
267. cation of the button you want to disable press the MCRO ATTCH ENBL button turning it off In this state pressing a button for which a macro attachment is set does not execute the macro Executing a macro assigned to a fader lever 1 inte cross point control block for the fader lever on which you want to execute the macro press the MCRO ATTCH ENBL button assigned to the Ist row turning it on 2 Move the fader lever from the start position to the end position When the fader lever passes the position at which the macro attachment is set the macro register is recalled and the macro is executed e Unless you move the fader lever to the end position completing the travel it is not possible to execute the macro again e When the preset color mix stroke mode is Normal the first lever operation executes the macro but the second lever operation does not For details about switching stroke mode amp Setting a preset color mix p 250 e If a button is pressed twice during macro execution or when the macro is stopped or if another macro is recalled the following operation stop or continue depends on a setting in the Setup menu p 238 Individual events stored in a macro are executed according to the settings in the Setup menu If you change the settings in the Setup menu a saved macro may not have the expected effect e During macro execution if you switch the control panel to macro editing mode the
268. cees 63 Key MEMORY ee a 64 Key Default ananos ien uena 64 Key Setting Operations Using Menus 64 Key Setting Menus cncvsinaeGaveaee 65 Key Type Setting cs cusnsesadaeanhanain 65 Selecting the Key Fill and Key Source 66 Chroma Key Composition and Basic SVC UIE S eua alanis n a ea 67 Key Adjustments Menus 0c0s00 68 Chroma Key Adjustments cceeeeee 68 Key Edge Modifications ceeeeeeeee 70 Mask asninn aana 73 Key Modify Clearness roan 74 Blink Function 2 o3 zyceniecseceantaceteecionsatsiencens 74 Table of Contents Key Adjustments Flexi Pad 0 74 PROSIZOM sicocteuiaanndastercieanitaseastGutneevtendnndadaan 76 Two Dimensional Transformations and Rotation Of Keys 11 Resizer Interpolation Settings 78 Resizer Crop Border Settings 0 79 Applying Resizer Effects eeneeeeeeeee 80 Key Snapshots cccccccsesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 81 Key Snapshot Operations 0 0 0 0 eee 81 Chapter 5 Wipes OVERVIEW jictiisarstenaccnaeteteianeniatiaiss 83 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 83 Wipe Pattern Selection s 83 Setting Wipe Modifiers ceeeeeeeeeeeee 83 Wipe Modify Clear sc aisssisecesazssstocsavernesenans 87 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions sexivcrstcsesteantinienedneude 87 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings 88 Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers 22
269. ch the effect duration is fixed p 146 e To select variable duration mode turn the CNST DUR button off e To select constant duration mode turn the CNST DUR button on Time Settings You can determine the execution time of an effect by setting either the keyframe duration or the effect duration amp p 146 You make these settings in the Flexi Pad For details about Flexi Pad operations amp Keyframe Creation and Editing in the Flexi Pad p 153 Setting the Keyframe Duration 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect on the keyframe for which you want to set the duration The time from this keyframe to the following keyframe is what you set 3 Press the KF DUR button turning it on The alphanumeric display shows KF DUR followed by the duration of the current keyframe seconds frames 4 Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired timecode value as a maximum of four digits For example to set 9 seconds and 20 frames enter 920 You can also use the TRIM button to enter a difference value p 153 5 Press the ENTR button to confirm the entry In addition to the above operation the keyframe duration may also be automatically changed as a result of changing the effect duration For details amp Time Settings p 146 Setting the Effect Duration 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL b
270. ch time the RUN button is pressed the range of execution of the effect is from timecode 01 00 00 00 or the current time the position at which the current effect is stopped to the end point of the effect However if there is a pause set on a keyframe the execution range is up to that point Pressing the RUN button again resumes the effect which then runs to the next pause point or the end of the effect Overview of Keyframes Run mode setting You can select from the following run modes for when the effect is executed DIRECTION Specifies the effect execution direction STOP NEXT KF Runs the effect and stops at the next keyframe EFFECT LOOP Repeats the effect in an endless loop You make these settings in the Flexi Pad For details amp Setting the Run Mode p 161 Master Timelines You can save the regions selected for a keyframe effect and the register numbers saved in the regions in a master timeline register so that operation can be applied to two or more regions at a time Master timeline registers can be saved or recalled using the Flexi Pad or a menu operation For details amp Creating and Saving a Master Timeline p 162 Sequence of Keyframe Operations The following table shows the principal operations involved in the sequence from creating keyframes to executing an effect For details about each operation see the page number in parenthesis Recalling a register p 15
271. chroma key image either a normal mix or an additive mix can be used Normal mix The foreground is cut out with the key signal and then combined with the background which has also been cut out with the key signal Additive mix The background which has been cut out with the key signal is combined with the unshaped foreground This is effective for a natural looking composite when the scene includes glass or other translucent objects Plane In an additive mix the foreground is not shaped by the key signal and variations in the blue background will appear in the composite image To prevent this it is possible to set a particular luminance level for the background and any parts below this level are cut forcibly Composing an image by chroma keying 1 Open the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu 1111 2 Select Chroma in the lt Key Type gt group It becomes possible to adjust the key density p 65 3 Select Chroma Adjust The Chroma Adjust menu 1111 1 appears Key Setting Operations Using Menus shey y Jajdeyo 67 shay y1 dey9 68 4 Carry out auto chroma key adjustments Also carry out manual adjustments see next item if necessary to obtain an optimum chroma key image n the lt Mix Mode gt group select Normal Mix or 5 Inthe lt Mix Mod p select Normal Mix Additive Mix depending on the desired type of chroma key composition When using an additive mix for chroma keying the
272. ck Satake encanta titeiteec neat 28 Names and Functions of Parts of the MOI esis tasdaccudacwaceuauseouticduaacntiderntasintaaws 30 OVERVIEW esas rra pio Sena esto ns 30 Top Ment Last 2cc cesessiaasssestavsczivetenerives es 30 Menu SCREEN wisi ven E ER SERE 30 Top Menu Window ccceesseceesseeeeeteeeeees 33 Numeric Keypad Window eseeeeeee 34 Keyboard Window sic snsssieasvncsesevevitageviees 35 Color Palette Window cccceesseeeesteeeeees 36 Basic Menu Operations sssssseeeeees 36 Recalling Menus 2 5 hneereneoadiok 36 Selecting Menus cscci issn easiness 37 Selecting List lems 22 4 406c aes 37 Setting Parameters iii vvnwrewavewauicog 37 Returning Parameters to Default Values 38 Operation with a MOuSe ceeeesseeeeeeeees 38 Using Shortcut Menus 25 45 4 cegeteneeiesa 38 Power Supply and Connectors 39 MVS 3000 Multi Format Switcher PROCESS OM sais eaves a E 39 ICP 3000 Control Panel eee eeeeeeeeee 42 Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions Video Processing FIOW eeee 44 Signal Selection cccssssseeeeeeeeeeseeees 45 Basics of Signal Selection eee 45 Bus Selectionati 45 Signal Assignment and Selection 45 Inhibiting Cross Point Button Op rations nrt 46 Signal Name Display ceecceeeeeeeeseeees 47 TREN SIMON Sei sdstissasattewtsacataracacionwenscandantennes 47 Transition TY Pes swccssssessn
273. cro Creation and Editing You can create or edit a macro by recalling a macro register To create a new macro recall an empty macro register and create the desired sequence of events by executing the sequence of operations on the control panel that you want to save as events in the macro To add an event to an existing macro recall the register holding the macro and create the event you want to add While editing a macro it is not possible to execute another macro Creating a macro To include all information associated with an operation when registering a macro event When registering an auto transition operation as an event you can register the auto transition event to include the transition rate and background A B bus selection status When registering an effect execution rewind or fast forward as an event you can also save the region to which this applies Assign UTIL SBOX to the Ist row in the cross point control block and the following functions to the 2nd row beforehand For details about assignments amp Assigning a Bus or Function to Ist Row Buttons p 235 and Assigning a Function to 2nd Row Cross Point Buttons p 229 To use this capability press the button assigned with UTIL SBOX in the 1st row then press the button with the assigned function to use in the 2nd row turning it on Macro AT with Rate Macro Auto Trans Event with without Rate When registering an auto transition mac
274. ct 1 250 Effect Attribute Settings Applying effect dissolve To apply the effect dissolve attribute to a keyframe effect use the following procedure 1 Open the Effect gt Effect 1 99 gt Attribute menu 6221 Register Operations in the Menus 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the list and in the selection window select the region You can select more than one region To select all regions press ALL 3 Press OK 4 Select a register To select all registers press ALL 5 Press Effect Dissolve turning it on 6 Set the duration No Parameter 4 Eff Diss Duration Adjustment Dissolve duration Setting the duration for a temporary attribute Set the following parameter to set the duration for a temporary attribute in the Flexi Pad No Parameter Adjustment 5 Temp Dur Temporary attribute dissolve duration Effect Status Display The Effect gt Effect 1 99 menu displays the following information Region name The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list Register number Register name Write protected status When the register is write protected a letter L appears Empty status When the register is empty a letter E appears Effect Register Editing You can carry out the following editing on effect registers and master timeline registers e Lock Write protect the contents of the regis
275. ct the frame memory folder to be displayed Direct Recall button Toggle on and off the direct recall mode in which pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file Find button Pressing this button displays a popup window in which you can enter a file name to carry out a search Selecting an Input Image For the input image to be saved to frame memory you can use either the signal selected on one of the two frame memory source buses or a dedicated color matte signal When using the signal on frame memory source bus 1 or 2 for the input image select the signal as described below Still Image Operations Aiowey ewes zZ Ja deyo 105 oway awel 7 Ja deyp 106 Selecting the signal on a frame memory source bus This section describes an example of selecting the signal on frame memory source bus 1 Inthe 1st row of the cross point control block press the button to which frame memory source bus 1 is allocated turning it on For details about Ist row bus assignments Assigning a Bus or Function to 1st Row Buttons p 235 2 Inthe 2nd row select the signal you want to use as the input image Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory Selecting outputs FM and target frame memory This section describes an example of selecting FM1 amp 2 T Inthe Frame Memory menu press one of the VFI to VF4 buttons and select the required HF button menu The current status of frame memor
276. cted to the router in a group you can specify the start and end destination addresses Destination From Specifies the start destination address for the wiring configuration Destination To When the wiring configuration is multiple specifies the end destination address For a single wiring connection this setting is not required Destination Level Specifies the destination level of the wiring configuration No Parameter Adjustment 1 Destination Destination start address From 2 Destination Destination end address To 3 Destination Destination level Level 3 Set the source Source From Specifies the source start address for the wiring configuration Source Level Specifies the source level for the wiring configuration No Parameter Adjustment 4 Source Source start address From 5 Source Source level Level 4 Press Execute Wiring Settings Tally Generation Settings Changing Wiring Settings 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Wiring gt Modify menu 7363 2 2 Referring to steps 2 and 3 in the preceding section Making New Wiring Settings p 258 change the parameters as required In this case however it is not possible to specify multiple destinations in a single operation and a single address in Destination Address must be specified 3 Press Execute Deleting Wiring Settings 1 Inthe Engineering Setu
277. d Removable Number of files that can be saved HS SEAR SL SD system HD system except 720P 256 MB 214 46 When transferring to a local disk make sure there is ample capacity so that problems such as this do not occur If you cancel the operation during a data transfer between frame memory and a local disk or removable disk then an image which was not completely transferred will not be reproducible Avoid canceling such operations When loading a file from a local disk or removable disk if Freeze Enable in the Freeze menu is on the loaded file may sometimes be overwritten by the frame memory input image To avoid this when loading a file ensure that Freeze Enable is turned off Importing or exporting files to or from frame memory Import Imports a file in a different format from a local disk or removable disk into frame memory after changing its format Export Exports a file in a register to a local disk or removable disk after changing its format You can import TIFF BMP and TARGA files as follows into frame memory File type Format File name Notes TIFF file RGB Maximum eight Layers uncompressed characters plus cannot be format extension tif used required If an alpha channel is present two files are created asa pair BMP file Windows Maximum eight 24 bit format characters plus extension omp required TARGA RGB Maximum eight Layers
278. d When the function is assigned Macro Auto Ins Macro auto insert mode on off On Off Macro AT with Rate When registering an auto transition macro event on off setting of mode to save transition rate On Off Macro AT with A B Bus When registering an auto transition macro event for the transition control block on off setting of mode to save A B Bus cross point settings On Off Macro TL with Region When registering a timeline macro event on off setting of mode to save applicable region On Off System Manager Enbl Enable disable operation from System Manager Enabled Disabled Inhibit Set Inhibit cross point button Can be set only while When the function is pressed lit assigned Inhibit All Clear Clear all cross point button inhibit Can be set only while When the function is settings pressed lit assigned K SS Store Enable disable key snapshot saving Enabled Disabled a For the safe title on off commands from ME1 PGM1 ST ME1 PGM4 ST to AUX1 ST AUX24 ST the name of the assigned output signal is shown b Pressing this button to turn it on enables key snapshot operations for all control blocks Menu Shortcut Assigns a frequently used menu to be recalled menu shortcut Utility Command Assigns a function enable disable or similar operation utility command Macro Recall Assigns a macro register recall Shotbox Recall
279. d press Auto Run turning it on 9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 as required 10 In the lt Store gt group press Store to save the setting To return to the state before saving the setting In the lt Store gt group press Undo To execute the settings to check them Press Recall to execute the shotbox Shotbox Execution You can recall and run shotbox registers from the following control blocks This section describes the various methods of operation e Flexi Pad amp p 179 e Cross point control block p 176 Executing a Shotbox in the Flexi Pad 1 In the Flexi Pad press the SHOTBOX button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to shotbox operation mode The alphanumeric display shows the number of the last recalled register 2 Using any of the following methods select the bank To select bank 0 Press the BANKO button To select bank 1 Press the BANK1 button To select any of banks 0 to 9 Press the BANK SEL button then press the desired bank button any of 0 to 9 For details about the correspondence between banks and registers amp Banks and Registers p 168 This selects the bank and the buttons in the memory recall section show the register states as follows Lit yellow Last executed register Lit orange Register containing shotbox settings Off Register in which nothing is saved 3 Press the button in the memory recall section corresponding to
280. d PGM PST path settings for the following items are made simultaneously Key1 to Key4 Overall path settings for items Key All to See 1 to 4 are made Key4 All y Source Key source path for keys 1 to 4 Fill Key fill path for keys 1 to 4 Proc Proc path for keys 1 to 4 Trans Transition path for keys 1 to 4 Bkgd Util Overall path settings for items z relating to the background and Bkgd Util All utility buses are made simultaneously Bkgd A Path for background A Bkgd B Path for background B Util 1 Path for utility Wipe DME Wipe Overall path settings for items Wipe DME relating to wipes and DME wipes Wipe All are made simultaneously Wipe Path for wipes DME Wipe Path for DME wipes Trans Transition path for each M E and PGM PST bank User1 to User8 menus The items that can be adjusted depend on the settings in the Setup menu For details amp Setting User Regions p 241 Item Paths that can be set User1 All to User8 Overall path settings for the All following items for each User are made simultaneously FM Still Store Overall path settings for frame L Store All y FM Still Paths for frame memory freeze Store 1to8 image outputs 1 to 8 Aux Overall path settings for AUX buses Aux All are made simultaneously Aux 1 to 24 Paths for Aux 1 to 24 Overview of Keyframes souelAey 131deyo 147 seweyhoy 1 Ja deyo 148 Item Paths tha
281. d flashes yellow as the macro execution starts and returns to constantly lit yellow when the execution ends The alphanumeric display shows the selected register number Macro execution modes You can execute a macro in normal execution mode or step execution mode Normal execution mode In this mode the macro events are automatically executed in sequence However if there is a pause event set at some point execution pauses at that point Then pressing the TAKE button in the memory recall section resumes execution Step execution mode The macro events are executed one at a time with pauses in between Execute the events in sequence by repeatedly pressing the TAKE button You can select normal execution mode or step execution mode by a selection in the Setup menu p 238 Creating and Editing a Macro To create or edit a macro recall a register and then press the EDIT ENBL button in macro operating mode The MCRO button and EDIT ENBL button light red and the memory recall section switches to macro editing mode Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad soley p saydeup 183 soley p Jeideyup 184 Switching auto insert mode on off In auto insert mode when creating or editing a macro an operation carried out on the control panel is automatically registered as an
282. d in the timeline Available key frame functions The following lists the key frame functions that can be used on the macro timeline RECALL 1 99 STORE 1 99 empty register search AUTO SAVE RECALL MODE RECALL RECALL amp REWIND EDIT ENABLE EDIT UNDO CONST DUR EFF DUR KF DUR DELAY PAUSE INSERT BEFORE INSERT AFTER MODIFY DELETE COPY PASTE BEFORE PASTE AFTER FROM TO ALL PREV KF NEXT KF GOTO TC GOTO KF RUN REWIND FF STOP NEXT KF NORMAL JOG KF FADER The following keyframe functions cannot be used e KF LOOP EFFECT LOOP REVERSE NORMAL REVERSE e PATH Saving to a register Set the recall and execute actions for the macros to be registered in the timeline using the Macro gt Timeline gt Timeline menu 5441 p 199 The setting data can be saved in a register as key frame data You can manipulate this data by recalling the register in which it is saved and using the Flexi Pad Actions set in a keyframe are executed only when the keyframe effect is executed in the normal direction Take care when executing simultaneously with a switcher keyframe effect since the actions are not executed in the reverse direction Forcibly ending a macro timeline e If the timeline has completed but a macro is still executing press the REWIND or RUN button in the Flexi Pad to forcibly end the macro timeline e Ina macro timeline since a take operation is not possible if a macro included in th
283. d or adjusts perspective e When this button is held down the trackball or Z ring operation is switched to a finer control fine mode RENB Press this button turning it on to enable rotation rotation operation enable CLR WORK e Pressing this button once returns the two BUFR clear dimensional transformation and rotation settings to the defaults e Pressing the CLR WORK BUFR button twice or holding down SHIFT and pressing the CLR WORK BUFR button returns all resizer parameter values to the defaults X Y Z These restrict the axes affected by the trackball and Z ring to the x y or z axis CTR center e Pressing this button once changes the two dimensional transformation and rotation settings to the closest detent values e Pressing the CTR button twice or holding down SHIFT and pressing the CTR button returns the two dimensional transformation and rotation settings to the defaults SHIFT Use this in combination with the CTR WORK BUFR or CTR button Trackball The effect of operation depends on the operating mode as follows When the positioner operation mode is enabled By moving this you can move the pattern in the x axis and y axis directions When the resizer operation mode is enabled By turning the trackball you can move in the x and y directions of the key to which the resizer is applied change the aspect ratio and rotate around the x ax
284. d subsidiary FMs light 2 Press the PLAY button turning it on To stop playback press STOP or any of the SHTL JOG CUE REW FF and ALL STOP buttons For details about the buttons in the device control block Device Control Block p 26 and Buttons used when the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled p 135 To specify the playback start point To make the current position the playback start point press the START TC button To specify the playback stop point Start playback press the STOP button to stop playback at the desired position then press the STOP TC button To apply a loop to a frame memory clip Press the FM LOOP button To carry out the variable speed playback Press any of the SHTL JOG and VAR buttons then turn the Z ring The image changes in the forward direction when you turn the Z ring clockwise and in the reverse direction when you turn it counterclockwise When you pressed the JOG button Playback is at a speed corresponding to the turning speed of the Z ring When you pressed the SHTL button Playback is at a speed corresponding to the rotation angle of the Z ring When you pressed the VAR button Playback is at a speed corresponding to the rotation angle of the Z ring in the range 1 to 3 times normal speed Frame Memory Clip Operations Aiowey ewes4 zZ Ja deyo 113 oway ewes 7 Ja deyo 114 Cli
285. d to region selection buttons L Region Select E Boo Mem Rei Setup gt PNL 10Key Reg Assign Flexi Pad Module Btn Area Selection screen for regions assigned to buttons in the memory recall section AC 4 USER 1 4 5 6 7 Ref Region Select USER USER USER USER a 1 2 3 5 8 9 10 1 USER USER USER E p p MCRO 12 13 14 15 DEV p pus cpi RTR Flexi Pad Module Region Select USER 1 Selup gt PNL Region Sel Bin Area 10Key Reg Assign Depending on the region selection state the following indications appear Green text Indicates that the assigned regions include the reference region Orange text Indicates that one of the assigned regions is selected White text Indicates that no assigned region is selected When any one or more of the regions assigned to the region selection buttons is not selected a red bar appears within the button indication 2 Press a button indication on the left of the status area to select the button you want to assign The regions currently assigned to the button you pressed appear on the right side of the status area 3 Inthe lt Region Select gt group press the button for the region you want to select turning it on 4 Inthe lt Ref Region Select gt group press the button indication you want to make the reference region The button you pressed lights green Specifying an Edit Point Use one of the following operations in the Flexi Pad Fo
286. de 2 Select the device 3 In the lt Mode gt group press Loop or Recue turning it on VTR Disk Recorder Extended VTR Timeline For a keyframe effect controlled from the control panel the timeline allows you to set a VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR action at a keyframe point on the timeline Timeline actions e Start e Stop e Cue up e Variable speed e The timeline does not support loop and recue e For a disk recorder the maximum number of files for a single register is eight You can save the data set in the Device menu in keyframe effect registers When you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect and advance the effect to the keyframe point for which the action is set an action command is output to the external device through the 9 pin serial port assigned to the VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR When executing a timeline using a disk recorder or Extended VTR note the following points It is not possible to use loop and recue on the timeline When carrying out keyframe settings be sure to recall the file for operation first If the duration of the recorded video clip is less than the keyframe duration after playback to the end of the clip the remainder of the keyframe duration is filled with a still of the last frame of the clip see figure below Example When the recorded clip for keyframe 1 has a duration of 15 frames 30 frames 30 frames 4
287. deup 42 ICP 3000 Control Panel Top panel Status indicators A and B POWER switch e 0 aj ooog O Oo 200000 o POWER switch and status indicators A and B When power is supplied to the AC IN A and B connectors on the rear panel the status indicators green light If you press the POWER switch under this condition lights green and the panel turns on Shutting down the control panel Press the Shutdown button in the top menu list or top menu window and follow the on screen instructions After the menu screen goes fully black check that the control panel power switch indicator C has gone out You can forcibly turn off the power without shutting down by pressing and holding the P
288. ding on the switcher status the cursor color changes as follows e Yellow Macro editing mode e Gray When the editing mode is exited by a control panel operation e Blue During macro execution ALL button Selects all events in the macro register listing Macro creation event list Shows the event being created or executed in the control panel Insert Before button Inserts a created event immediately before the selected event in the macro register listing Insert After button Inserts a created event immediately after the selected event in the macro register listing Delete button Deletes the selected event in the macro register listing Modify button Replaces the selected event in the macro register listing with a created event lt Prev button Moves the cursor to the event immediately before the selected event in the macro register listing gt Next button Moves the cursor to the event immediately after the selected event in the macro register listing Editing Macros using Menus soley p saydeup 187 soley p seideup 188 Carrying out online editing of macro events It is not possible to save editing results using the On Line Menu Carry out the necessary control panel operations to save the edited register To insert an event 1 On the control panel if auto insert mode is on switch it off 2 On the control panel create a macro event The created event appears i
289. djust menu press Border turning it on For subsequent operations use the same process as in step 3 in Modifying the DME wipe pattern edge p 95 Specifying DME wipe direction For details about the corresponding pattern number DME Wipe Pattern Variations and Modifiers p 94 Select one of the following in the lt Direction gt group of the DME Wipe Adjust menu for Key1 Normal Wipes in the normal direction Normal Reverse Switches between normal and reverse for each transition Reverse Wipes in the opposite direction to normal DME Wipe Snapshots You can snapshot and save a DME wipe pattern together with the current settings of its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when required There are 10 DME wipe snapshot registers for each of the switcher banks Saving to and recalling these registers can be performed using the Flexi Pad or a menu operation For details about Flexi Pad operations amp DME Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi Pad p 99 DME Wipe Snapshot Operations with the Menus You can save recall and delete in the same way as for wipe snapshots For details about the method of operation amp Wipe Snapshot Operations with the Menus p 89 DME Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi Pad Recalling a DME Wipe Snapshot The operation of recalling a DME wipe snapshot in the Flexi Pad is the same as the operation of recal
290. e CLR WORK BUFR button in the operation buttons To clear all resizer parameters and set the initial state In the device control block press the CLR WORK BUFR button in the operation buttons twice in rapid succession For the initial state you can select either the factory default settings or user settings For details about the settings amp Selecting the State at Start up p 214 Resizer Resizer Interpolation Settings For example to make the interpolation settings for key 1 of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key menu 1115 press Resizer turning it on 2 Press Resizer Process The Resizer Process menu 1115 3 appears 3 Inthe lt Video Field Frame Mode gt group select the interpolation method for the video signal The supported signal formats are 480i 59 94 5761 50 1080i 59 94 and 1080i 50 Adaptive Y C Detect changes in the luminance and chrominance components of the video signal separately and switch automatically between fields and frames Adaptive Y Detect changes in the luminance component of the video signal separately and switch automatically between fields and frames Field Perform interpolation in field units This gives natural movement suitable for moving video Frame Perform interpolation in frame units This gives higher image precision suitable for still pictures 4 When you select Adaptive Y C or Adaptive
291. e Continues the effect e Cancel Cancels the effect and returns to the state before starting the execution Interchanging the AUTO TRANS and CUT buttons To interchange the AUTO TRANS and CUT buttons in the transition control block press the Auto Trans Cut Swap button turning it on Transition preview operation mode For the operation mode of the TRANS PVW button select Lock or Hold in the lt Trans Pvw gt group The setting as to whether to use the One time mode in which the transition preview terminates when the transition completes or to use button control is made on the switcher side p 250 KEY button operation mode for 2nd row buttons in the cross point control block When a bus is selected with the 1st row buttons specify the KEY button operation mode in the lt Key Source Bus Select Mode gt group as follows e Key If you select this the KEY button is always lit and this mode allows only key signals to be selected with the cross point buttons e Video amp Key The KEY button is enabled and either video or key signals can be selected Operation mode of the XPT HOLD buttons in the 1st row of the cross point control block Sets the operation mode of the XPT HOLD buttons assigned in the Ist row in the lt Xpt Hold gt group as follows A B Bus When the XPT HOLD button is pressed turning it on enables only A bus and B bus cross point hold All Bus When the XPT HOL
292. e PTN LIMT LIMT SET buttons e NORM NORM REV REV buttons e KNOB 1 2 button For details about each button operation amp Editing the Wipe Pattern p 91 DME wipe pattern edge setting buttons BDR border Applies a border to the DME wipe pattern SOFT BDR soft border Softens the applied border You can adjust the parameters selected with these buttons using the adjustment knobs when the button is lit green When border is selected Parameter group 2 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 L Luminance S Saturation H Hue Buttons for positioning the DME wipe pattern POS positioner Adjusts the position of the DME wipe pattern CNTR center Returns the DME wipe pattern position to the center When you press the POS button the alphanumeric display first shows the name of the parameter H or V and then the value of the parameter When the POS button is lit green you can adjust the position of the pattern with the adjustment knobs No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Horizontal position V Vertical position H R Relative movement in the horizontal direction 4 V R Relative movement in the vertical direction Buttons for setting DME wipe pattern cropping CROP Adjusts the DME wipe pattern cropping 4 3 CROP Crops a 16 9 image to 4 3 When the CROP button is lit green you can set the cropping ratio of the DME wipe pattern wi
293. e gt Favorites gt Button Edit menu 0023 select a button to register 2 Press MenuMacro Set The Menu Macro Set menu 0023 1 appears The L E indications have the following meanings L The register is locked E The register is empty L E indication Group Name Group Name 1 Button No 1 No Menu Macro Register Menu Macros soley p saydeup 195 soley p Jeideyp 196 3 In the list on the left select the button number to be assigned 4 Press Set Executing a menu macro from the shortcut menu 1 Open the Home gt Favorites gt Shortcut menu 0021 2 Press the group name button 3 Press the button to which the menu macro is assigned To stop a menu macro during execution Press MenuMacro Stop Creating and Editing a Menu Macro It is not possible to execute a menu macro during editing To run the macro first press the Store button to end editing Creating a new menu macro T Inthe Macro gt Menu Macro Register gt Recall amp Run menu 5431 select an empty register in the menu macro register list For details about the method of operation Recalling a Menu Macro Register p 195 2 Press Menu Macro Edit The Menu Macro Edit menu 7144 2 appears The menu macro register is recalled and the system is now in menu macro editing mode Menu Macros Menu macro register configuration list Menu macro register number Event number
294. e gt Imp Usr Src Name The Imp Usr Src Name menu 7117 appears Select the removable disk as the import source and press Import The user source name file is loaded from the removable disk Press Patch Table Assign The Patch Table Assign menu 7212 1 appears The user source names in Switcher A imported by step 3 are listed on the left and the pairs of videos and keys set in Switcher B are listed on the right 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 to create a patch table It is also possible to execute the following editing operations using the buttons in the lt Table Assign gt group e Press Insert to insert a signal name above the signal name selected in the list on the left e Press Delete to delete the signal name selected in the list on the left User source name Signal pairs INT IN2 IN3 IN4 INS ING IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 2 IN11 IN12 Table Assign Set Insert Default Select the target user source name in the list on the left Select the signal pair you want to assign from the list on the right In the lt Table Assign gt group press Set The video key signal name selected in the list on the right is reflected in the list on the left Source Patch Replacing Signal Pairs Using the Patch Table The source patch is effective for key snapshots snapshots and keyframes The following describes the operation for a snapshot as an example Copy a snapshot file created in
295. e it is not possible to change the transition rate in this menu To set the independent key transition rate For example to make the settings for keys 1 to 4 in the M E 1 bank use the following procedure AUX Menu Operations 1 Inthe status area if the Misc gt Transition gt Key ME FTB menu 3231 press M E 1 2 In the lt Transition Rate gt group press Key K1 K4 To insert on or remove off keys individually press Key On K1 K4 or Key Off K1 K4 3 Set the number of frames No Parameter Adjustment Key1 Trans Rate Key 1 transition rate Key2 Trans Rate Key 2 transition rate Key3 Trans Rate Key 3 transition rate BLO mM Key4 Trans Rate Key 4 transition rate Setting the fade to black transition rate 1 In the Misc gt Transition gt Key ME FTB menu 3231 press FTB 2 Set the number of frames No Parameter Adjustment 1 Transition Rate Transition rate AUX Menu Operations AUX Bus Settings In the AUX menu you can make color corrector settings for an AUX bus Setting the AUX bus color corrector In the Engineering Setup gt S witcher gt Key Wipe FM CCR gt CCR menu 7335 3 you can make settings for an AUX bus for which color correction is enabled 1 In the Aux gt Aux Bus menu 2311 select the AUX bus to which the settings apply 2 Inthe lt CCR gt group press CCR turning it on 3 Make the following settings as
296. e DME wipe e Clip transition e Cut There are two modes of executing a transition an auto transition by button operation or a manual transition using the fader lever It is also possible to combine these two modes Independent key transitions In addition to common transitions it is possible to carry out independent transitions on the keyers of the M E banks and PGM PST bank These are called independent key transitions Basic Video Processing By carrying out an independent key transition in combination with a common transition different transition types can be used for the background and keys The following compares the independent key transition with a common transition taking a simultaneous change of the background and key as an example Video used in the transition Background A Background B Key to insert Effect of a common transition In the case shown in the previous illustration carrying out a common transition produces the following change in the image Transition type Wipe gt ih X ia Same wipe is applied to background and key Effect of a common transition Effect with use of an independent key transition The key is inserted with an independent key transition as the background changes with a common transition providing the following result Transition type Wipe Different wipe patterns are applied to the background and key transitions
297. e M E 1 region takes precedence If there is no data for the M E 1 region then the register name appears in the sequence P P gt User 1 to 8 gt Device 1 to 12 gt P Bus gt GPI gt Macro Indication colors Each register has a color coded border indicating its status Selected register Pale blue border Register Operations in the Menus Register containing data Orange inner border If however there are one or more locked regions the display is in red Write protecting the contents of the register lock function This applies to all regions 1 In the Effect gt Status menu 6200 select the register 2 Press Lock The register is locked and the background of the register indication appears in red To release the lock Press Lock once more turning the contents of the frame to orange Copying the contents of a register This applies to all regions T Inthe Effect gt Status menu 6200 select the copy source register 2 Inthe lt Copy gt group press From __ 3 Select the copy destination register 4 inthe lt Copy gt group press To __ Deleting the contents of a register This applies to all regions 1 In the Effect gt Status menu 6200 select the register 2 Press Delete Renaming a register This applies to all regions 1 In the Effect gt Status menu 6200 select the register 2 Press Rename 3 Enter a name of not more than 8 characters and press Enter
298. e M E or PGM PST bank you want to be the link destination then press M E Set To link the banks not only for transition execution but also for the other operations Press Transition Only turning it off To release a link Use the same operation as in step 1 to select the link number for which you want to release the link setting then press Clear Making a Link Setting for Key Transition The operations for which you can link two banks are the following independent key transition operations e Auto transition e Turning the key on or off 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link gt Key Transition Link menu 7336 7 and specify the link number to set 2 In the lt Key Select gt group select Master Key link source 3 Select the key you want to be the link source then press Key Set 4 inthe lt Key Select gt group select Linked Key link destination 5 Select the key you want to be the link destination then press Key Set To release a link Use the same operation as in step 1 to select the link number for which you want to release the link setting then press Clear Interfacing with External Devices Interfacing with External Devices Making 9 Pin Port Device Interface Settings The description in this section takes the Remote S1 port as an example For other Remote ports carry out the same process as required 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Device Inter
299. e Size of tiles 2 Aspect Aspect ratio of tiles If mosaic is enabled crop is disabled Defocusing 1 In the Enhanced Effect menu press Defocus turning it on 2 Inthe lt Defocus Mode gt group select the signal to which to apply the mosaic effect Video Key Video signal and key signal Video Video signal only 3 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Horizontal defocusing V Vertical defocusing All Horizontal and vertical defocusing If defocus is enabled and in the lt Defocus Mode gt group you select Video Key then crop is disabled Key Snapshots Key settings other than the key on off status and the key priority can all be instantaneously saved in a dedicated register for recall when required A key snapshot comprises three values a cross point button number key memory full mode and independent key transition and can be called in any combination There are four key snapshot registers for each keyer Key Snapshot Operations Key snapshot operations are carried out in the transition control block or the Flexi Pad Key delegation buttons KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 MIX wel ome Key snapshot buttons Transition control block Saving a key snapshot For example the following procedure saves the state of the M E 1 key 1 settings 1 Press the KEY 1 key delegation b
300. e by capturing a frame of input video or a clip by specifying a range of input video The created images and clips can be written to memory for playback editing and output For details see Chapter 7 Frame Memory p 102 Color Backgrounds This function can be used to obtain color background video Two color signals generated from the dedicated generators can be switched or mixed and then output For details see Color Background amp p 122 in chapter 8 Basic Video Processing 1 5 MAIAIBAC JE deUD 16 Copy and Swap This function can be used to copy and swap the settings between switcher banks or between keyers The following settings can be copied or swapped e Settings for the M E and PGM PST banks e Keyer settings e Wipe settings in a transition control block e Wipe settings in an independent key transition e DME wipe settings in a transition control block e DME wipe settings in an independent key transition e Matte color settings color 1 color 2 and how to compose them e Color settings e Format converter input settings copy only e Format converter output settings copy only For details see Copy and Swap amp p 123 in chapter 8 Color Corrector The color corrector enables video signal color correction black balance white balance adjustment gamma correction knee correction etc The color corrector includes the following adjustment
301. e control panel when macro saving has been executed or when the EXIT button in the Flexi Pad has been pressed 3 Operate the control panel to save the editing result To modify an event 1 On the control panel if auto insert mode is on switch it off 2 In the macro register listing press lt Prev or gt Next to select the event you want to modify 3 On the control panel create a macro event The modified event appears in the macro creation event list For details about the display amp Macro File Editing Rules p 289 4 Press Modify If not in macro editing mode Modify is disabled and it is not possible to modify the event 1 While a macro is being executed on the control panel when macro saving has been executed or when the EXIT button in the Flexi Pad has been pressed 5 Operate the control panel to save the editing result Offline Editing of Macro Events You use the Off Line Edit menu to carry out offline editing of macro events In the Off Line Edit menu you can carry out editing in the menu only unrelated to operation of the control panel To display the Off Line Edit menu In any of the following menus select the register or device holding the macro you want to edit and press Off Line Edit e Macro gt Register gt Lock menu 5412 e Macro gt Register gt Delete menu 5416 e Macro gt Register gt Rename menu 5417 File gt Shotbox Macro gt Macro gt File Ed
302. e event To adjust the execution timing of a particular event to delay the start of execution of the event by a particular time interval you can store a special event which pauses macro execution This event is called a pause event When you store a pause event you can set the interval for which the macro is paused the pause length to any value in the range 1 to 999 frames When the set time has elapsed the macro is automatically executed Pause zero event By including a pause event with the time set to zero you can make macro execution pause at the pause event Step execution requires a Setup menu setting By selecting step execution mode in the Setup menu you can make macro execution pause every time an event is executed Take operation When a paused macro is restarted this is referred to as a Take operation Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad Macro take operation using a GPI input You can carry out a macro take operation using a GPI input on the control panel For details about GPI input settings amp Making Control Panel GPI Input Settings p 230 Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad Memory recall section MCRO button DRCT MODE button Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro A macro operation is performed by recalling a macro register You can edit
303. e file to be deleted 4 Press Delete 5 Check the message then press Yes Deleting frame memory files Between steps 2 and 3 of the procedure in Deleting Files above do as follows 1 To select the frame memory folder press Default in the device selection in the list 2 Press the required folder name in the pull down menu 3 Select the type of data to be displayed e To display still image files press Still e To display clip files press Clip e To display all types of file press AI Creating a frame memory folder on the device local disk or removable disk 1 Open the File gt Frame Mem gt Frame Memory menu 7152 Operations on Individual Files Sollq G saydeyo 205 2 Inthe pull down menu of the device selection section select Local Disk or Removable Disk and then specify the directory 3 Press New 4 Enter a name of up to eight characters and press Enter The following names cannot be used Default Flash1 Flash2 CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COMS COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 It is not possible to create 12 or more directories in the frame memory folder To rename a frame memory folder 1 Select a folder 2 Press Rename 3 Enter a name of up to eight characters and press Enter To delete a frame memory folder 1 Select a folder 2 Press Delete 3 Check the message t
304. e same Type menu press the Matte Adjust button to display the Matte Adjust menu then adjust the single color or two color combination color matte Select whether to use a single color matte or a two color combination in the lt Fill Matte gt group Flat Color Adjust color 1 with the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Luminance Luminance 2 Saturation Saturation 3 Hue Hue Mix Color Carry out a color mix Adjust color 1 and color 2 and select a mix pattern see the next section In the lt Key Source gt group specify the key source selection mode Self The key fill bus signal is automatically selected as the key source When the key type is selected as chroma key select Self Auto Select The signal allocated being paired with the key fill bus signal to a cross point button is automatically selected as the key source The pairing settings are carried out in the Setup menu For details amp Cross Point Settings p 223 Split You can select a key source signal independently of the key source automatically selected in Auto Select mode Key Setting Operations Using Menus 6 If you selected Split in step 5 select the key source using any of the following methods In the cross point control block press the button in the 2nd row while holding down the KEY1 button in the Ist row Press the button in the 2nd row of the cross point control block while
305. e side flags 1 inte Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config gt Side Flags menu 7331 7 press Width 2 Adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment Left Width of left side flag Right Width of right side flag All Width of both side flags Displaying the menu for enabling disabling the side flags In the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config gt Side Flags menu 7331 7 press Misc gt Enbl gt Setup Flags Displaying the menu for assigning the side flags on off function to a cross point button In the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config gt Side Flags menu 7331 7 press Side Flags Button Assign Signal Input Settings Signal Input Settings Making Through Mode Settings This sets the through mode for input You can set this independently for each primary input Through mode is disabled for the input signals which have been converted in the format converter 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input menu 7332 select the input signal to which the settings apply Input33 to Input48 are disabled even if selected 2 To enable through mode press Through Mode turning it on Configuring the Color Corrector You can switch the color corrector on or off for each input signal and adjust the brightness hue and other parameters 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input gt CCR menu 7332 1 2 Select the input sign
306. e timeline has a pause event with a pause time of zero the remainder of the timeline after the pause is ignored and the macro timeline ends at that point Register editing functions You can use the following editing functions on a register in which a macro timeline is stored e Copy e Move e Swap e Merge e Lock e Name e Delete File related functions You can save and recall a created macro timeline as effect data in the File menu Timeline operations are carried out on a macro timeline in the same way as for normal effects For details about timeline operations amp Keyframes p 144 When using a macro timeline note the following e To use a macro timeline the Macro region must be assigned to a region selection button in the Flexi Pad For details about the region assignment Assigning Regions to Region Selection Buttons in the Flexi Pad p 220 On a macro timeline only macro recall and execution actions are stored The data for a macro to be recalled on the macro timeline is not held on the timeline It is necessary to create the macro data first A macro timeline can be saved and recalled on the master timeline or a shotbox register but cannot be saved as a snapshot Creating and Editing a Macro Timeline This section describes how to set actions and add keyframe points Note that path settings are not needed on the macro timeline For details about keyframe operations amp
307. e trigger polarity there is no Pulse Width setting When Status is selected there is no Pulse Width or Timing setting In the lt Source gt group select the action block M E 1 and P P Sets an action for the M E or PGM PST bank Common Sets an action for error status Select the action to set Press Action Set to confirm the action selection Selectable actions for various trigger types When the trigger type is other than Status The x in M E x is the M E bank number the x in DSKx is the DSK number and the x in Keyx is the key number When Source is M E x Keyx SS Recall No Action When Source is P P DSKx SS Recall No Action When Source is Common KF Run No Action When the trigger type is Status The x in M E x is the M E bank number the x in DSKx is the DSK number and the x in Keyx is the key number When Source is M E x Keyx SS Recall Keyx On No Action When Source is P P DSKx SS Recall DSKx On No Action When Source is Common Error Make Error Break Keep Break Keep Make PREFS1 PREFS2 PREFS3 PREFS4 PREFS5 PREFS6 PREFS7 PREFS8 PREFS9 PREFS10 PREFS11 PREFS12 PREFS13 PREFS 14 PREFS15 PREFS16 Device Recording No Action Interfacing with External Devices dnjes jeued 04u09 Z Ja deyD 231 dnjes jaued 04u00 7 Ja deyD 232 Test firing the trigger Press Test Fire This outputs a trigger from the selected output port This is no
308. ect ratio 4 3 auto side flags and auto crop settings Press Setup gt SWER Side Flags To display a menu for assigning the side flags on off function to a cross point button Press Side Flags Button Assign Enabling and disabling side flags with a button operation For example to enable side flags for the background B row of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 Inthe Setup menu assign the rightmost cross point button to the SIDE FLAG button beforehand For details about the assignment amp Assigning a Cross Point Button to Enable Disable Side Flags p 226 2 Press the SIDE FLAG button at the right end of the background B row of the M E 1 bank The button you pressed lights amber and this enables the side flags e The operations of enabling or disabling the side flags by menu operation and by control panel button operation are linked e When the auto side flags are on selecting 4 3 video material automatically lights the SIDE FLAG button but if you press this button turning it off the side flags are temporarily disabled However when you select different 4 3 video material the SIDE FLAG button automatically lights once again enabling the side flags Creating an image with side flags For example to create an image with side flags in the background B row of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure Inthe Ist row of the cross point control block of the M E 1 bank hold down
309. ect the source signal of the key bus by selecting the cross point while holding down the button to which any of KEY1 to KEY4 or DSK1 to DSK4 is assigned in the Ist row Cross point button numbers Cross point buttons are respectively numbered p 46 Assigning signals to buttons You can assign a signal to each button using the Setup menu For details amp Cross Point Settings p 223 Visual indications on cross point buttons For details amp Colors of lit cross point buttons p 47 Ist row This selects a key bus AUX bus or function You can assign the following buses functions and buttons in the Setup menu e KEY1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 UTIL1 EDIT PVW AUX to AUX24 FMS1 FMS2 e Utility shotbox function INH SET XPT HOLD PRE MCRO POST MCRO MCRO ATTCH ENBL KEY 1ST ROW DSPLY 2ND ROW DSPLY SHIFT buttons For details about assignments amp Assigning a Bus or Function to Ist Row Buttons p 235 Utility shotbox function Assign the function of the UTIL SBOX button and use for utility shotbox operations When you turn on the button to which UTIL SBOX is assigned the buttons in the cross point control block will be used for utility shotbox operations For details Executing a Shotbox Function with Cross Point Buttons in the 2nd Row p 179 Assignable buttons Name INH SET inhibit set Description Disables button operation To
310. ection NORM NORM REV REV PLAY CUE STOP and PTN LIMIT Button 1 Button 2 EFF RUN REWIND NORM REV NORM REV Button 3 nothing a The Flexi Pad control block appears as 10 eyPad Block Select Others Block Trackball Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 DEV CLR WORK BUFR CUE nothing Y PLAY TRGT STOP AXIS LOC START TC Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro The menu operations not recorded in a menu macro comprise some operations common to all menus and some operations inhibited in individual menus Operations not recorded in menu macros common to all menus e Recalling a menu e Delegation operations region selection channel delegation operations enabling parameter setting buttons and so forth e Parameter setting operations using the parameter setting buttons or trackball value input operations from the numeric keypad are recorded Operations not recorded in menu macros in individual menus Other Blocks Block Select Others Block Multi Function Flexi Pad Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 DSK1 AUTO TRANS nothing KEY_ON DSK4 M E 1 KEY1 M E 1 KEY4 Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro Menu No Menu path 0011 to 0023 All menus under Home 2541 Frame Memory gt File gt Pair Recombination 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction 2544 Frame Mem
311. ecute for changing the format converter signal format to save the new values When you press Execute some data is lost such as frame memory images If you press FC Format Execute this data is not lost Setting the Signal Format Specify the signal format to be handled by the devices The combinations of signal formats that can be selected are as follows System Field frequency Effective number of SS scan lines o ea HD system 50 1080i S oO 59 94 P O 23 976 1080PsF L 24 8 50 720P F 59 94 i SD system 59 94 480i 50 576i 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt System gt Format menu 7313 select the device for operations Setup for the Whole System Network Settings Setting the Signal Format 21 1 dnjes wajshs 9 Je deyo 212 2 Press Signal Format 3 Press the button for the desired signal format Switching the Input Reference Signal for HD System In the lt Ref Input Format gt group of the Engineering Setup gt System gt Format menu 7313 select one of the following e Tri Sync Tri level sync for an HD system e BB Black Burst Black burst or sync The following table shows the relation between signal format and the frequency of a signal that can be used as the input reference signal Signal format Input reference signal Tri Sync BB 1080i 59 94 59 94 Black Burst Sync 59 94 59 94 1080i 50 50 Black Burst 50
312. ed relationship between the position of the fader lever and the signal output on background A bus and B bus Depending on the direction of the transition the fader lever must therefore always be moved in a particular direction as shown in the following table This does not affect an auto transition which is executed regardless of the fader lever direction Next transition Transition Fader lever direction movement Background A B Downward BA Upward Keys 1 to 4 On Off Downward delete Off On Upward insert e When a transition applies to a combination of more than one of the background and keys then the transition for all of these must be in the same direction complying with the above table If as a result of an auto transition for example the fader lever position does not agree with the signal output this is a non sync state p 56 and the Non Sync indicator will appear Transition Preview With the preview output of the M E bank and PGM PST bank you can check the effect of a transition in advance To carry out a transition preview press the TRANS PVW button in the transition control block to enable transition preview mode It is not possible to carry out a transition preview during the following e Transitions in progress e Multi program mode e Bus fixed mode Carrying out a transition preview T Inthe transition control block of a switcher bank press the TRANS PVW
313. edge function is only valid when a luminance key linear key or chroma key is selected as the key type You can select whether to use a single color matte or a two color combination color matte in the lt Edge Matte gt group For the color mix operation Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte p 72 When emboss is selected for the edge type adjust the color in the lt Emboss Fill gt group To adjust matte 1 and 2 press Mattel or Matte2 respectively then adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment Luminance Luminance 2 Saturation Saturation Hue Hue No Parameter Adjustment 1 Top Top edge width 2 Left Left edge width 3 Right Right edge width 4 Bottom Bottom edge width 5 Density Density When drop border or shadow is selected The setting parameter values depend on the on off setting of key drop and the selection of 4H mode 8H mode amp p 63 No Parameter Adjustment 1 Width Width 2 Position Position 3 Density Density When emboss is selected To make the edge soft press Soft Edge to turn it on then adjust the softness No Parameter 1 Soft Adjustment Edge softness For a normal edge when Soft Edge is enabled Key Drop is kept on To make separate fine adjustments to the positions of the left right top and bottom of the source edge press Fine Key t
314. effect together Deleting keyframes from an effect reduces the duration of the effect amp p 147 After deleting a keyframe you can reinsert the keyframe with a paste operation Copy Copies a keyframe You can copy a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together Paste Pastes the keyframe last copied or deleted anywhere within the effect Pause You can set a pause on a particular keyframe so that when the effect is run it pauses on this keyframe You can make this setting on any number of keyframes To restart the paused effect repeat the operation to run the effect KF Loop Executes the effect the specified number of times through the keyframes in the specified range Overview of Keyframes souejyAey sa deyp 145 Undo an edit operation Undoes the effect of the last operation to insert modify delete or paste a keyframe Duration modes In keyframe editing there are two duration modes switch between them in the Flexi Pad p 158 Variable duration mode In this mode inserting or deleting a keyframe increases or reduces the duration Constant duration mode In this mode inserting or deleting a keyframe does not change the duration This is useful for keyframe editing of an effect with a fixed duration In the variable and constant duration modes the keyframes to which a modify operation applies and the effect of a paste operation are different Difference in keyfr
315. elect the directory to which to export the files The displayed directories are only those directories immediately below root 6 In the folder selection area on the left select the frame memory folder that contains the file you want to export T Select the file you want to export from the list on the left 8 Press Export This adds the image data from the frame memory in a bitmap format on the removable disk If the specified destination file name already exists an overwriting confirmation message appears Select Yes to overwrite the data Directory Operations You can create a new directory on a local disk or removable disk rename or delete a directory Creating a New Directory You can create a maximum of 120 directories on a removable disk or 200 on an internal local disk 1 Open the File gt Configure gt Directory menu 7171 2 Inthe device selection pull down menu select Local Disk or Removable Disk 3 Press New 4 Enter a name of up to eight characters and press Enter The following names cannot be used for directories CON PRN AUX CLOCK and NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 and COM9 LPTO LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 3 Press the categories you do not want to select turning them off Press OK Renaming a Directory 1 Open the File gt Configure gt Directory menu 7171 2 In the device selection pul
316. ems amp Macro File Syntax p 289 Select the desired item from the macro editing candidate list and press Set The selected item appears at the event insertion position in the macro listing as an event component Additionally in the leftmost blank position of the editing button group to the right of Contents a button appears corresponding to the item in the macro editing candidate list For example if Event is selected an EVNT button appears Cont EVNT ents In the editing button group press the button that has just appeared The item corresponding to the button appears in the macro editing candidate list If you press the EVNT button the symbol indicating the event contents appears p 290 Select the desired item from the macro editing candidate list and press Set At the event insertion position of the macro listing the selected item is added as an event component Additionally in the next blank position of the editing button group a button appears corresponding to the item in the macro editing candidate list For example if MEAutoTransition is selected a button for the parameters and data for the MEAutoTransition appears Cont EVNT Time Abus Bbus ents Xpt Xpt Repeat steps 4 and 5 to edit the event components At the event insertion position of the macro listing the item is added as an event component To add further events repeat steps 1 to 6 Press Store
317. en the signal format is set to 720P or 1080PsF this selection is not possible Setting the Operation Mode In the lt M E Config gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu 7331 select the operation mode for each M E or PGM PST bank from the following e Standard mode Fixes the output configuration for the maximum of four outputs Out to 4 as follows Outl Program output Out2 Preview output Settings for Switcher Configuration Chapter Out3 Clean output Out4 Key preview output e Multi program mode The M E or P P 4 system outputs Out to 4 can be assigned to one of the following outputs M E Output Assign Program outputs 1 to 4 Preview output Key preview outputs 1 and 2 Clean output Further you can change the combination of signals from which the program output is configured PGM Config 1 For the key preview output you can select either video mode background and key or key mode key only and select the background and key K PVW Config When Multi Program mode is selected two or more transition type indication may light It is also possible that more than one Transition Type has been selected in the Misc gt Transition menu for each M E Assigning the output of each bank in Multi Program mode When Multi Program is selected as the operation mode use the following procedure 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu 7331 p
318. ent Table of Contents Chapter 1 Overview INEFOGUCTION iii cnisdedsesiaecaasanaedeaiseandeecedeentinns 12 Features sisi isensinncecicineeiavadavendseweserensannsien 12 Basic Video Processing ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 TransitiOn Ss in a EE 13 KEYS riren a TRE 15 WIPES reinen ean RE 15 DME WW Ipes sk siurs aana ence Ae evens 15 Frame Memory ssessesesseessessserssseessresssesse 15 Color Backgrounds eeeceeeseeeeseeeeeteeees 15 Copy and Swap im ae e E 16 Color Corrector i acesisi sa ccsntaentebvalenceaiteqeneue 16 Side Flasar 16 Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operati nS ecsicsceseseccccccdenestwececteeeecesivnss 16 Controlling External Devices 16 INCYTE ANTICS lt cciisinaccasceceachiatvagenernmneneveceneie 17 Snapshots een rte NR 17 PUES e ie ee siatie etsa 17 SHOtDOXE S iep orrea L r T RE 17 Matrosen nia A uaea eee 17 Pile Operations niis tessen 17 LE ET o EEPE E A E E T 18 System Configuration Examples 19 MVS ICP System Configuration 19 Connection Example ccssccssssscsesenees 20 Chapter 2 Names and Functions of Parts Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel vesicciciccsssssseevivavcaiectvecsveee 21 Control Panel Configuration 00 21 Cross Point Control Block ccceeee 22 Transition Control Block ceeeeeeeeees 24 Device Control Block cccccccceeeeeertees 26 PICK Pasi co
319. ents You use the On Line Edit menu to carry out online editing of macro events In the On Line Edit menu you can check the control panel operating sequence in the menu You can also carry out editing using the control panel and menu To display the On Line Edit menu 1 Recall the macro register 1 to 250 you want to edit with the control panel and select the macro editing mode 1 The Flexi Pad switches to macro editing mode Creating and Editing a Macro p 183 2 In any of the following menus select the same register as the register recalled in step 1 and press On Line Edit e Macro gt Register gt Lock menu 5412 e Macro gt Register gt Delete menu 5416 e Macro gt Register gt Rename menu 5417 e File gt Shotbox Macro gt Macro gt File Edit menu 7142 1 The On Line Edit menu 7142 2 appears and you can now carry out online editing of the events held in the recalled register Meanwhile the control block of the control panel operated in step 1 is assigned to control editing operations In the following cases On Line Edit is disabled and it is not possible to display the On Line Edit menu e When the recalled register and the register selected in the menu are different e When a device other than Register is selected Local Disk or Removable Disk in the File gt Shotbox Macro gt Macro gt File Edit menu e If the recalled register is locked On Line Edit menu ALL
320. eously Multi viewer function Equipped with two system multi viewer function as standard for displaying a window split into 10 subwindows or 4 subwindows Designed for use in a live broadcasting environment High performance user interface e Anorganic EL display with high visibility is used for the source name displays The buttons in the Multifunction Flexi Pad hereinafter called Flexi Pad and transition control blocks use color backlit LCD displays The signal names and graphical representations of the patterns associated with buttons provide intuitive feedback and allow the immediate decisions that are required in a live operating environment Backup power supply Equipped with two backup power supplies as standard This alleviates the risk of power supply problems for improved reliability during live operations Basic Video Processing This section introduces basic functions used for video processing on the switcher Transitions In the M E banks and PGM PST bank the switch from the current video stream appearing on the corresponding program monitor to a new video stream is referred to as a transition In the M E banks and PGM PST bank you can change one of the images the background and keys 1 to 4 downstream keys 1 to 4 in the PGM PST bank and also vary combinations of these simultaneously The following are examples of transition Changing the background A background transition switche
321. er Adjustment 1 Blink Rate Length of blink cycle 2 Duty Proportion of cycle for which No Parameter Adjustment 1 Size Pattern size 2 Soft Edge softness of the pattern 5 To invert the black and white of the mask source press the Mask Invert button turning it on 6 Whena pattern is selected as the mask source set the pattern modifiers as required see step 5 of Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte p 72 Key Modify Clear A simple button operation or a menu operation returns the key settings to the initial status settings Press Default Recall at the lower left of the menu screen turning it on then press the corresponding VF button VF1 to VF4 to return the key settings to their initial status For details about initial status Saving User Defined Settings p 214 Blink Function With the blink function you can obtain the following effects Key blink The key is alternately inserted and deleted at regular intervals You can set the period of blinking and the proportion of each cycle for which the key is inserted Edge blink The key fill and key edge fill are interchanged at regular intervals You can set the period of blinking and the proportion of each cycle for which the original state holds The blink settings are in the Transition menu for each key Key Adjustments Flexi Pad original state holds When edge blink is selected
322. er Cueup Delay Delay time from the cued up state to begin playback 4 Stop Delay Delay time from issuing the stop command until actually stopping 4 Set the response speed of the Extended VTR No Parameter 2 Setting Adjustment Response speed setting 5 Press Set 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 as required to make the settings for other items Setting the AUX Bus Override Operating Mode Set the operating mode when the trigger type is Rising Edge or Falling Edge and Aux O ride Src is selected as the GPI input action In the lt Aux Bus Override Mode gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface menu 7325 select one of the following modes Momentary On an input pulse rising falling edge the input of the selected AUX bus is used and on a falling rising edge this returns to the original cross point Latch On an input pulse rising falling edge the input of the selected AUX bus is used and this does not return to the original cross point change even on a falling rising edge Operation Settings Setting the On Air Tally To set the high tally state reflected on the control panel use the following procedure 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Button Tally menu 7326 9 2 Inthe lt Tally Type gt group select either of the following R1 to R8 Reflect the tally state of the tally group l to 8 Independe
323. erations may not be performed Using an External HDD properly Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip playback For details about HDDs that can be connected contact your Sony service or sales representative HDD Formatting When you connect an HDD for the first time it is necessary to format the HDD This partitions the HDD creating 15 logical areas FMHDD1 to FMHDD15 1 Open the Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Format menu 2561 To get the HDD information Press Refresh Status The Device item shows the product information for the HDD 2 Press Format Carrying out formatting erases any existing data on the HDD 3 Check the message then press Yes HDD formatting starts 4 Check the message then press OK Saving Files You can save all of the files from frame memory to the external HDD When performing this operation for the first time format the HDD beforehand p 118 1 Open the Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore menu 2562 For each partition a list of the directory names and number of files appears To get the HDD information Press Refresh Status The Device item shows the product information for the HDD and the names of directories 2 Select a logical drive FMHDD1 to FMHDD 15 3 Inthe lt Backup gt group perform one of the following e To replace the existing data press Replace e To save in addition to
324. es 302 Error Messages Icon Message Create Key Frame cannot be executed Key Frame Register is not active UserX Description 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Create Key Frame using a register for which the appropriate region selection button in the numeric keypad control block is not selected Try again after you select the region selection button UserX in the numeric keypad control block Disk Format Failure Make sure of the removable disk 7317 Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance In the above menu removable disk formatting procedure failed Check that the removable disk is correctly inserted This operation is cancelled because the register is locked Please change the register status to be unlocked first 6211 1 Effect gt Master Timeline gt Store gt Edit 6311 1 Snapshot gt Master Snapshot gt Store gt Edit 6411 1 Shotbox gt Register gt Store Recall gt Edit In the above menus an attempt was made to assign to a register that is locked Unlock the register before carrying out the assignment The file was not able to be read 7142 1 File gt Shotbox Macro gt File Edit In the above menu Off Line Edit was pressed but the selected file could not be read Select the file again and press Off Line Edit once more It was not possible to make a file 7142 3 File gt Shotbo
325. es S Bus Descript Description names set in the router S Bus Type Num Type Num set in the router In this case always eight characters 2 Inthe lt Name Display Mode gt group select the method of display in the source name displays Auto Optimizes the display according to the number of characters Line breaks occur every four characters with up to the first twelve characters shown in three lines 4 Character The first four characters appear To replace a name set in the Xpt Assign menu with an S Bus description name Turn S Bus Name Link on This has such effect that each time a description name is changed on the router the corresponding source name is automatically changed Thus the same description name can always be used both on the router and the switcher Even when Sw er Local is selected the same name as when S Bus Descript is selected can be displayed The S Bus description name can also be displayed in the Xpt Assign menu Settings for the Flexi Pad and Wipe Snapshot Menus Makes settings for the display of buttons in the Flexi Pad and menus 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Flexi Pad Mode menu 7326 3 2 Make the following settings as required Settings for memory recall buttons in the Wipe Snapshot menu and DME Wipe Snapshot menu Press Pattern or Register Name in the lt Wipe DME Display gt group to select the buttons Settings for memory recall buttons
326. es an entry of 1 second 23 frames Executing a Transition Whereas you can enter a value of up to 999 in frame input mode a value not smaller than 10 seconds cannot be entered in timecode input mode Frame display mode and timecode display mode For the transition rate display in the transition control block there are two modes frame display mode and timecode display mode You can select one of these modes in setup For details Setting the Transition Rate Display Mode p 236 The setting is common to all banks of the switcher Frame display mode Values are shown as from 0 to 999 frames In this display mode a value entered in timecode input mode is converted for display as a number of frames Timecode display mode Values are shown as timecode values consisting of seconds and frames In this display mode a value entered in frame input mode is converted for display as a timecode value If the value consists of four or more digits the last digit is not shown Example A value of 9 seconds 23 frames appears as 9 23 and a value of 10 seconds 01 frame appears as 10 0 Setting the transition rate in the Flexi Pad 1 In the Flexi Pad press the TRANS RATE button The button displays in the memory recall section change as shown in the following illustration and the Flexi Pad switches to the transition rate setting mode SHOT BOX an IZ os 30
327. es when a wipe or DME wipe is selected as the transition type e A pattern limit cannot be applied to an independent key transition p 57 e In multi program mode a pattern limit can be used only when the background transition type is a wipe or DME wipe If a key is selected for the next transition the pattern limit setting is reflected in the wipe or DME wipe selected by the background transition type Executing a Transition suolisuel pue uonoajas jeubis Je deyp 53 suonisues pue uonoajas euis Je deup 54 KEY4 J ALL KEY1 KEY3 BKGD PRIOR ET KEY PRIOR Si J J NAM WIPE T Ea zo3 554 8 DME LIMIT TRANS eur NORM PTN TRANS SET LIMIT PVW LIMIT SET button E PTN LIMIT button TRANS PVW button Transition control block Setting the pattern limit with the fader lever For assignment of buttons for pattern limits Setting Transition Control Block Button Assignments p 221 1 Move the fader lever to the position corresponding to a particular pattern size e First make sure that the PTN LIMIT button is off e To check the pattern size
328. ess the START TC button at that position Each time you press the button the start point timecode is overwritten e Setting with the Cueup amp Play menu Set the start point stop point and start delay duration amp p 138 Set the stop point Setting the start point and stop point automatically determines the duration Using the STOP TC button Play the VTR Extended VTR or disk recorder by control from the device control block Find the desired stop point and press the STOP TC button at that point Each time you press the button the stop point timecode is overwritten Setting with the Cueup amp Play menu Set the start point stop point and start delay duration p 138 To set a start delay time press the DELAY button in the device control block and enter a value in the Flexi Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders Pad Alternatively make the setting in the Cueup amp Play menu If no setting is required continue to step 10 10 Press the STOR button in the Flexi Pad 11 Enter the register number to save with the numeric keypad buttons When overwriting the settings in the register recalled in step 3 entering a number is not required 12 Press the ENTR button Automatically running cue up and play By recalling a register in which you have saved setting data for Cueup amp Play you can control the VTR Extended VTR disk recorder automatically in the same way as when
329. et execution with the key not inserted With the key not inserted the key is gradually inserted using the transition type whose AUTO TRANS button is pressed first Since the key is then in the inserted state the transition whose AUTO TRANS button is pressed later will delete the key When the key is completely deleted both transitions complete Example 1 When the independent key transition AUTO TRANS button is pressed later i Common transition wipe en dE ina Independent key transition mix The transition completes with the key deleted Example 2 When the common transition AUTO TRANS button is pressed later oe Independent key transition mix e The transition Common completes with the transition wipe key deleted Basic Independent Key Transition Operations Switching keys with key independent transitions Independent key transition type selection buttons Key delegation buttons wee DME TRANS PYW NORM NORM IREV REV Key source name display Key snapshot buttons Transition control block right side To set independent transitions for the keyers on switcher bank use the transition control block 1 Select one or more of the delegation buttons KEY 1
330. eter Adjustment 1 Crop Crop value 2 Angle Angle value For details about the crop and angle parameters r Window p 68 When setting Y Balance on and adjusting the ratio in which Y balance is added to the color cancel key 1 No Parameter Mixture Adjustment Ratio of Y balance key Adjusting the window No Parameter Adjustment 1 Clip Luminance range 2 Gain Key gain Luminance Luminance Adjusting the video signal You can vary the foreground signal gain or change the hue There are separate adjustments for the gain of the overall video signal and Y and C components 1 Inthe M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type gt Chroma Adjust menu 1111 1 set FRGD CCR on 2 Adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Video Gain Overall gain of video signal 2 Y Gain Y signal gain 3 C Gain C signal gain 4 Hue Hue offset amount Key Edge Modifications Setting the window p 68 function on allows you to adjust the detection range used to determine the key signal When this function is off the default range is used for image adjustment After making sure that the values of Clip Gain and Hue are adjusted appropriately use the following procedure to make the window adjustment 1 Inthe M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type gt Chroma Adjust menu Key edge functions can only be used for keys 1 and 2 DSK1 and DSK2 for the PGM PS
331. ettings as required To invert the black and white of the key source Press Key Invert turning it on To adjust the horizontal position or key source width for a luminance key linear key or chroma key Press Key Position turning it on and set the parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Phase Key horizontal position 2 Left Key left edge position 3 Right Key right edge position No Parameter Adjustment 1 Clip Reference level for generating the key signal 2 Gain Key sensitivity To set the key priority Press Key Priority or open the M E 1 gt Misc gt Key Priority menu 1173 For details amp Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation p 50 Key Setting Operations Using Menus s y yp Jajdeyo 65 shay y1 dey9 66 Selecting the Key Fill and Key Source Selecting the key fill and key source To select the key fill and key source for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 2 io Open the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu 1111 In the lt Key Fill gt group select either of the following for use as the key fill Key Bus Signal selected on the key 1 fill bus Matte Signal from the dedicated color matte generator If you selected Key Bus in step 2 select the KEY 1 button in the 1st row of the cross point control block and select the key fill in the 2nd row If you selected Matte in step 2 in th
332. event When this mode is off it is necessary to press the INS button in the memory recall section for each operation to register an event To switch auto insert mode on or off press the AUTO INS button Creating a new macro T Recall an empty register p 182 2 Press the MCRO button and then press the EDIT ENBL button This switches the memory recall section to macro editing mode 3 if required press the AUTO INS button to toggle the auto insert mode on or off 4 Create the events carry out the control panel operations to be registered as events in the macro You can include pause events p 186 For details about events that can be registered Events p 180 When auto insert mode p 154 is on execution of a control panel operation automatically registers an event in the macro When auto insert mode is off proceed to step 5 During macro editing if you press any of the mode selection buttons in the Flexi Pad other than the MCRO button WIPE button DME WIPE button and so on the executed operation is also registered as an event In this case the MCRO button stays lit red Even during macro editing you can carry out keyframe operations using the following buttons EFF LOOP STOP NEXT NORM REV NORM REV REWIND RUN During macro editing if you press a button for which a macro attachment is set the outcome is as described in To merge a macro for which
333. evice In this mode there are Setup and Initial Status settings which can be set separately e Setup mode Selects the setup state to be used after powering on from the following User Starts up using the user data previously saved with Setup Define Factory Starts up with the factory default settings Initial status mode Selects the state of each device after powering on excluding the settings to which setup applies User Starts up using the user data previously saved with Initial Status Define Factory Starts up with the factory default settings For details Saving and Recalling Setup Data p 214 and Data Saved by Setup Define and Initial Status Define p 297 Autoload function Switch on or off the function to automatically load predetermined register data or frame memory image data at power on Set the data to be read in the File menu Selecting the State After Power on dnas wayshs 9 sa deyo 213 dnas wajshs 9 19 dey9 214 Saving and Recalling Setup Data Local disk Removable disk User setup data File menu Load File menu Save RAM Current setup data If in Resume mode settings data is saved Setup menu Setup Define Non volatile memory ROM User setup data Factory default setup data Initialize Setup menu All Clear In Custom mode power on or reset Updating the switcher or control pa
334. execute Append Key Frame using a register UserX region into which files are being loaded Try again after file loading has finished Append Key Frame cannot be executed Key Frame Register is being edited UserX 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Append Key Frame using a register UserX region with which a keyframe creating or editing operation is proceeding Try again after the keyframe operation has finished Append Key Frame cannot be executed Key Frame Register is full UserX 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Append Key Frame using a register UserX region in which no keyframe remains Append Key Frame cannot be executed Key Frame Register is not active UserX 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Append Key Frame using a register for which the appropriate region selection button in the numeric keypad control block is not selected Try again after you select the region selection button UserX in the numeric keypad control block No external HDD was found 2 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Backup but the external HDD could not be recognized Check that the external HDD is correctly connected
335. ey Wipe FM CCR menu 7335 select either of the following operation modes Auto When the pattern limit is released the remainder of the transition is carried out automatically at a special purpose transition rate Manual After the pattern limit is released the transition waits for the next operation then executes Until you move the fader lever or press AUTO TRANS the transition is not executed Applying color correction to AUX bus signal When color correction is applied in the AUX bus the color correction that was applied to the input signal is disabled 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Key Wipe FM CCR gt CCR menu 7335 3 2 Select the AUX bus to set 3 Press Bus CCR to switch between Enable and Disable Settings Relating to Function Links Settings Relating to Function Links Setting a Cross Point Button Link To link together two buses internal to the switcher use the following procedure 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link gt Internal Bus Link menu 7336 1 2 Select the setting to apply 3 Press Link Bus Select 4 In the lt Bus Select gt group select Master Bus link source bus 5 Select the bus to be the link source and press Bus Set Only when Master Bus is selected M E 1 Trans PGM and P P Trans PGM are available With M E 1 Trans PGM or P P Trans PGM is selected for Master Bus the link setting become effective as soon as you start movi
336. ey source signal When perfect keying is not possible with a luminance key this allows a key signal to be created even if the luminance level is low provided that the colors have high saturation Cannot be used Chroma key A key signal based on a particular color is used to cut out the background and the key fill is then inserted Cannot be used Key wipe pattern key This uses the wipe pattern selected for an independent key transition to cut out the background and insert the key fill Clean mode In a luminance key linear key or color vector key you can turn clean mode on When clean mode is on key fill is added to the background without cutting out with key source This improves the keyed image quality but means that the part of the key fill signal which is not to be inserted must be completely black or it will color the background You set the clean mode with the Type menu of the respective keyer For details amp Setting the key type in a menu p 65 Note that in the following situations the clean mode is turned off and cannot be turned on e When the key type is a pattern key e When key inversion is on e When the key fill is a matte e When the key edge is an outline e When the key edge is normal with soft edge being on e When fine key is on e When the key positioner is on Key Modifiers Edge modifiers You can apply borders and other modifiers to the edge of
337. eyer or the signal from the dedicated pattern generator as the mask source Key Setting Operations Using Menus When the box generator is selected a mask using a rectangular signal is formed When the pattern generator is selected you can select the pattern and apply modifiers Key Memory The key memory function allows the keyer settings on each cross point button to be automatically stored so that the next time the same cross point button is selected these settings are recalled automatically There are two modes for key memory simple mode and full mode The parameters stored in each mode are as follows Simple mode Key type clean mode including the plane setting for chroma keying key position key inversion and adjustment values for the particular key type Clip Gain Density Filter etc This includes color vector key key wipe pattern key and chroma key However in the case of a chroma key it excludes color cancel Y balance foreground CCR and window Full mode All settings except transition the same parameters as simple mode fine key key modifiers mask settings chroma key detailed settings etc For details about settings for these modes amp Selecting the key memory mode p 251 Key Default With a simple operation you can return the key adjustment values to their defaults The adjustment values that can be returned to their default values are as follows e Adjustment val
338. eyframe 6 Press the PSTE button This inserts the keyframe you have copied after the current keyframe In constant duration mode the copied keyframe overwrites the edit point To insert the copied keyframe before a keyframe Hold down the SHFT button and press the PSTE button to insert the copied keyframe before the current keyframe Pause To apply a pause to a keyframe use the following procedure 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect on the keyframe to which you want to apply a pause 3 Press the PAUS button Keyframe Loop Repeated Execution of a Specified Range By setting the range of the loop within the effect and the number of loop executions you can execute the loop range repeatedly It is only possible to set one keyframe loop for each region Creating a new keyframe loop To specify the loop range and loop count carry out the following procedure 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect on the keyframe you want to make the first of the loop range start point Here by way of example keyframe 2 is taken as the start point 3 Press the KF LOOP button This switches the memory recall section to numeric keypad entry mode The alphanumeric display shows the start point keyframe number FM 2TO The example shown means from keyframe 2 to where the end
339. eypad operations This is called the reference region The reference region is determined according to the following precedence M E 1 gt PGM PST gt User1 gt User2 gt User3 gt User4 gt User5 gt User6 gt User7 gt User8 gt Devicel gt Device2 gt Device3 gt Device4 gt Device5 gt Device6 gt Device7 gt Device8 gt Device9 gt Device10 gt Devicel 1 gt Device12 gt P Bus gt GPI gt Router gt Macro Master region The regions saved in a master snapshot register or master timeline register and the register numbers saved in such regions can be recalled at a time as the master region The master region can be saved or recalled using the Flexi Pad Registers A register is an area of memory in a device which holds a snapshot p 167 keyframe macro p 180 and so on Keyframe effect registers Dedicated effect registers There are 99 dedicated registers for keyframe effects in each region numbered to 99 P Bus and Device registers There are 250 registers for P Bus and Devicel to Device12 in each region numbered 1 to 250 Work register This is a temporary register used when editing keyframes When you recall an effect it is read from the effect register into the work register and when you save the contents of the work register are written to the effect register Master timeline registers There are 99 master timeline registers numbered to 99 for each control panel They store keyframe effect re
340. eze Field freeze of frame memory source 2 During field freeze Either of the other two states FM Src2 Freeze Off Release freeze of frame memory source 2 While freeze being released Either of the other two states SWR GPI Enbl Enable disable switcher GPI Enabled Disabled Panel GPI Enbl Enable disable panel GPI Enabled Disabled Setting Button Assignments Command name SWR GPI1 Test Fire SWR GPIB Test Fire Function Output test trigger from switcher GPI1 l Output test trigger from switcher GPI8 Button status Lit amber Output lights only at the instant the button is pressed Off When the output is assigned Panel GPI1 Test Fire Panel GPI8 Test Fire Output test trigger from panel GPI1 Output test trigger from panel GPI8 Output lights only at the instant the button is pressed When the output is assigned Macro Attachment Enbl Enable disable macro attachment Enabled Disabled Macro Only Set Macro only mode on off On Off Pre Macro Set macro attachment in pre macro Can be set only while When the function is mode pressed lit assigned Post Macro Set macro attachment in post macro Can be set only while When the function is mode pressed lit assigned Macro Take Macro execution During execution When the function is assigned Macro Cancel Cancel a macro Lit only at the instant the button is presse
341. f the deleted keyframe In constant duration mode amp p 146 the duration of the keyframe before the deleted keyframe is increased by the duration of the deleted keyframe Thus the effect duration does not change Deletion position Change in effect duration Deletion of the first 1 2 3 4 keyframe z A we eae 2 3 Deletion of an 1 2 3 4 intermediate C A keyframe a Pa 1 ai 3 Deletion between 1 2 3 4 two keyframes Vida E 1 2 3 Co I Deletion of the last 1 2 3 4 keyframe A o A eS Keyframe deletion position and the change in effect duration Delay setting You can set the delay from the time of executing an operation to run the effect and the effect actually starting that is the delay until the first keyframe You make this setting in the Flexi Pad Note that changing the delay does not alter the duration of the effect Paths The term path refers to the specification of how interpolation is carried out from one keyframe to the next Images are interpolated from an edit point to the next one according to the path setting For details about the path setting procedure amp Path Setting p 159 Switcher path settings Carry out path settings in the Key Frame menu For each menu the following settings are available M E 1 and P P menus Item Paths that can be set M E 1 P P All For each M E an
342. f the screen frame 90 00 Sets the grid size to 90 of the screen frame 100 00 Sets the grid size to the full screen size 100 of the screen frame 6 If you selected Box1 or Box2 in step 4 in the lt Box1 Adjust gt or lt Box2 Adjust gt group select the screen aspect ratio 16 9 14 9 4 3 If you selected Grid in step 4 in the lt Grid Adjust gt group select the screen aspect ratio 16 9 4 3 Cropping the Image to a 4 3 Aspect Ratio in an HD System In an HD system to crop an image having a screen aspect ratio of 16 9 to an aspect ratio of 4 3 use the following procedure Signal Output Settings dnyes seyoMS 84 Je deyD 247 dnyes seyoMs 8 Ja deyo 248 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output gt 4 3 Crop menu 7333 5 The status area shows the output ports and respective 4 3 Crop mode settings 2 Select the output you want to set 3 Press 4 3 Crop turning it on When the screen aspect ratio of 16 9 is selected for all M E banks in the Engineering Setup gt System gt Format gt Aspect menu 7313 1 the setting of 4 3 Crop is disabled off Selecting the Output to be Used as the Format Converter 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output menu 7333 press FC Output Select The FC Output Select menu 7333 11 appears The status area shows the format converter list left and the output signal list right The following signals cannot be used in
343. face gt GPI Input e Selection of following items on P P x 5 to 8 DSKx Cut DSKx Auto Trans DSKx SS Recall 7337 4 Engineering Setup gt Switcher e M E 2 selection gt Device Interface gt GPI Output Selection of following items when Trigger Type is not set to Status in P P x 5 to 8 DSKx Cut DSKx Auto Trans DSKx SS Recall e Selection of following items when Trigger Type is set to Status in P P x 5 to 8 DSKx On 7337 7 Engineering Setup gt Switcher All menu operations gt Device Interface gt DME SDI I F Menus of Disabled Operations and Settings xlpueddy 285 Menu Disabled operation setting Number Path 7361 1 Engineering Setup gt Router Tally All menu operations gt Router gt External Box Assign 7364 1 Engineering Setup gt Router Tally Tally Input settings gt Tally Enable gt New 7364 2 Engineering Setup gt Router Tally Tally Input settings gt Tally Enable gt Modify 7366 Engineering Setup gt Router Tally All menu operations gt Parallel Tally 7366 1 Engineering Setup gt Router Tally All menu operations gt Parallel Tally gt Set 7367 Engineering Setup gt Router Tally DCU1 Port1 to DCU2 Port2 settings in the lt Serial Tally Port gt group gt Serial Tally a The same conditions apply to the Key2 to Key4 and DSK2 to DSK4 menus b For details about patterns that can be selected amp DME wipe patterns that can be used in independent key trans
344. face gt Remote Assign menu 7337 1 2 Select the device interface you want to set for the Remote port from the lt Remote S1 gt group Editor A Assigns Editor A to the Remote S1 port Editor B Assigns Editor B to the Remote S1 port AUX Assigns AUX to the Remote S1 port The device interfaces which can be selected for Remote S2 are the same as for Remote S1 Making Switcher Processor GPI Input Settings 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Device Interface gt GPI Input menu 7337 2 2 Select the setting to apply 3 Inthe lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger type Rising Edge Applies the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse Falling Edge Applies the trigger on a falling edge of an input pulse _X_ Any Edge Applies the trigger on a change in the polarity of the input signal _J Level Carries out the specified operation when the input is low or high No Operation Applies no trigger on an input pulse 4 inthe lt Target gt group select the action block M E 1 and P P Sets an action for the M E or PGM PST bank Common Setup Sets an action for something other than the above or a setup action 5 Select the action 6 Press Action Set to confirm the action selection Selectable actions for various trigger types e When the trigger type is other than Level The x In M E x is the M E bank number the x in DSKx is the DSK number and the x in Keyx i
345. fect in pair mode p 103 the files used must be main files and sub files with the same last three numeric characters in the file name To recall a continuous sequence of still images create an effect in the user region with the still image files as a keyframe and run the created effect In 720P systems you can continuously recall images using the frame memory in units of two frames only Creating an effect with still image files as a keyframe 1 Open the Frame Memory gt Still gt Create Key Frame menu 2515 A thumbnail appears for each group of files having the same characters except for the last three characters in the file name When Pair is on only pair files each consisting of a main file and a sub file appear Still Image Operations When Pair is off both single files and pair files appear In the frame memory selection area select the frame memory to be assigned p 106 The effect is created in the user region to which the selected frame memory is assigned Select the desired folder in the folder selection area By pressing More to switch the display you can select from a maximum of 12 folders Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear Select the register number of the user region No Parameter Adjustment 5 Register Effect register number Use the Flexi Pad to search for an open register for the user region For details amp Recallin
346. ferent file than the file used in the previous recording use the Device gt DDR VTR gt File List menu 5333 to create a new file If you resume recording without executing Unload from the Device gt DDR VTR gt File List menu recording starts at the position in the same file where recording was interrupted To stop recording Press the STOP button or the ALL STOP button in the device control block Checking VTR Disk Recorder Extended VTR Information You can check the following information using the Device gt DDR VTR gt Cueup amp Play menu 5331 DEV device name DEV1 to DEV12 represent respectively device 1 to device 12 Reg register Number of the register to which settings apply Status Status of each device Operating When VTR is used When video disk status communications display or Extended VTRis used XXXX Communications Not with the device are communicating or being carried out communicating but normally but status the device type information is not cannot be read received Local The REMOTE Port is not open LOCAL switch of the device is set to LOCAL Tape Out No tape is loaded No file loaded Rec Recording Recording Cue gt Cueing up in the forward direction Cue lt Cueing up in the reverse direction Eject Ejecting cassette Stb Off Stopped in standby off mode Stop Stopped
347. file uncompressed characters plus cannot be compressed extension tga used format required If an alpha channel is present two files are created asa pair PNG file RGB Maximum eight Layers compressed characters plus cannot be format extension png used required If an alpha channel is present two files are created as a pair This functionality has been tested and confirmed to work with TIFF files created by Photoshop but it may not be possible to use TIFF files created with some other software About import image size Pay attention to the following depending on the signal format which you use SDTV 480i Images 720 x 487 pixels in size are exactly the size which fills the full screen The following figure shows how an import image is processed when the 480i 59 94 format is used Images are placed with the upper left of the screen as the origin When an image is smaller than the screen the remainder of the screen is filled with black When it is larger parts which extend beyond the screen are discarded 720 pixels Sl 487 pixels Parts discarded when image is too large Section filled with black for a small picture Position of small picture No pixel ratio conversion is performed when images are imported for the SDTV format When the signal format is 480i 59 94 if you create an image with a size of 720 x 540 on a computer and then import it just as itis the ima
348. g Tally Copy Settings 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Tally Copy menu 7365 select the tally copy settings 2 Press Delete Serial Tally Settings This sets the serial tally settings including tally type and source address for each serial tally port Setting or Changing the Serial Tally Settings Inthe lt Serial Tally Port gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Serial Tally menu 7367 select the port to which the setting applies Tally Copy Settings Serial Tally Settings dnyas le pue aveau Ja NOY 64 Je deyuD 259 dnjas Aye pue soepaju JojnNoY 64 Ja deuD 260 The display relating to DCU is disabled even if selected 2 Inthe lt Tally Group gt group select the tally group 3 Inthe lt Tally Type gt group press the tally types to select You can select up to four The selectable tally types depend on the settings in step 2 4 inthe lt Tally Data Size gt group press one of the following to select the data size 128 Bit 128 bits 256 Bit 256 bits Making the Serial Tally Source Address Settings To set the serial tally source address for each port use the following procedure 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Serial Tally gt Source Assign menu 7367 1 2 In the lt Serial Tally Port gt group select the port to which the setting applies 3 Select the bit number of the port 4 Select the source address
349. g a Register p 150 Select the thumbnail of the files to be used for the keyframe If necessary check the animation effect in the thumbnail display No Parameter Adjustment 3 Viewer Current frame position Using the region selection buttons in the Flexi Pad select the region to which the frame memory output was assigned User1 to User8 Carry out either of the following To clear the effect register selected in step 4 and create a new effect press Create Key Frame e To add to the end of the effect register selected in step 4 press Append Key Frame Check the message then press OK If there is an invalid condition for creating the effect an error message appears For details about error messages amp Error Messages p 298 The effect is created in the selected user region register e The effect is built with the selected files in increasing order of the last three characters of the file name If you do not want to include some of these files in the effect first delete or rename them e A maximum of 99 keyframes can be included in a single effect Recalling a sequence of still images Run the effect created in the foregoing procedure The procedure for doing this is the same as for any other effect For details Executing Effects p 161 Frame Memory Clip Function What is a frame memory clip Movies can be read into frame memory and rec
350. g co kee ates 88 Wipe Snapshots ceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 89 Wipe Snapshot Operations with the Men s 89 Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi PAG EE E A 90 Recalling a Wipe Snapshot eee 90 Selecting the Wipe Pattern eee 90 Editing the Wipe Pattern eee 91 Saving Canceling and Deleting Edited Wipe Patterns i ieee ne eee ees 92 Chapter 6 DME Wipes OVervieW ieniccatitiuiaisinacesnssccuiasdbdetelaivensanaecsie 93 Types of DME Wipe Pattern 0 0 0 93 DME Wipe Pattern Variations and Modifiersa onere 94 Relation between DME Wipes and Other Effets i n o E eee ee 94 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings seeriana iia aaien 95 DME Wipe Pattern Selection 95 Setting DME Wipe Modifiers 95 DME Wipe Modify Clear oo eee 97 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions eisissectcsecicnas crcccdanusaeeuiuscccdins 97 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings 98 Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers s cccssvcssiesasevadiessoses 98 DME Wipe Snapshots c sssssseseeeeeees 99 DME Wipe Snapshot Operations with the MENUS simaa a a 99 DME Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi e EE T 99 Recalling a DME Wipe Snapshot 99 Selecting the DME Wipe Pattern 99 Editing the DME Wipe Pattern 100 Saving Canceling and Deleting DME Wipe Snapshots on a 101 Chapter 7 Frame Memory OVEMVICW isiis
351. g procedure 1 Open the User Setup gt Source Patch gt User Source Name menu 7211 Chapter Set the User Source Name on Apply Patch Tb onon o 3 IN10 IN10 1N11 1N11 IN12 IN12 pi Step 2 Export to memory File gt Exp Usr Sre Name 2 Select the target pair in the list on the left 3 Press Usr Src Name outside the list 4 Enter a name of not more than 16 characters and press Enter 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set all of the necessary names 6 Press File gt Exp Usr Src Name The Exp Usr Src Name menu 7116 appears T Select the removable disk as the destination and press Export To apply the signal pairs in the patch table to this menu Press Apply Patch Tbl Creating a Patch Table Conversion Table Load the removable disk prepared in Switcher A to Switcher B and use the following procedure in Switcher B 1 Open the User Setup gt Source Patch gt Patch Table menu 7212 Source Patch dnas sesn oz 13dey9 261 dnjas asp og seldeup 262 io Step 1 Import from memory User Source Name File gt Imp Usr Src Name Step 2 Set the Patch Table Patch Table VIK Usr Src Name f 4 Patch Table Assign Cami 12 IN 3 Cam2 RSN 4 Cam3 14 IN13 5 Cama 15 IN14 6 Cams 16 INI5 Cam6 17 M6 8 VIRI i2 im Step 3 Load from memory Effect Snapshot File gt File gt Effect Snapshot Key Snapshot Press Fil
352. g the Flexi Pad Register editing functions You can carry out the following operations on the registers in which the data for controlling external devices is saved e Copy e Move e Swap e Merge this cannot be carried out for registers containing VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR control data e Lock e Name File related functions You can save and recall files as effects data using the File menu Control of External Devices SedlNeq Jeuse Xy 04 Ja deup 131 SedINEG JeUJeIXy OQ Jeldeup 132 Control of P Bus Devices You can control P Bus Peripheral II protocol devices from this system through the switcher Remote 1 to Remote 4 ports P Bus device control modes There are two modes of P Bus device control as follows Trigger Operating a previously specified button outputs the command for an action assigned to that button Timeline Carrying out a keyframe effect under the control of the control panel controls external devices In the Setup menu select which of Trigger mode and Timeline mode to use You can set the following actions set what action command is output to which device in either mode e Store e Recall e Trigger Creating and Editing the P Bus Timeline At a keyframe point on the P Bus timeline you can set an action At any single keyframe point you can set actions for a maximum of 24 devices For details about keyframe creation and editing operations a
353. ge will be too tall To maintain the shape of the image first create it as a 720 x 540 image and then use computer software tools to compress the vertical dimension to 487 pixels before importing it HDTV 1080i Images 1920 x 1080 pixels in size are exactly the size which fills the full screen Like SDTV images are placed with the upper left of the screen as the origin When an image is smaller or larger than the screen processing is the same as for SDTV Since the pixel ratio of the HDTV format is 1 1 files created on computers are imported in their original shapes The following table shows the image sizes which exactly fill the full screen for the various signal formats Signal format Image size H x V 480i 59 94 720 x 487 5761 50 720 x 576 1080i 50 1920 x 1080 1080i 59 94 1080PsF 23 976 1080PsF 24 720P 50 1280 x 720 720P 59 94 Overview of File Operations Soll4 9 saydeyo 201 Selly S4 seideyo 202 Importing 720P movie material To import movie material in 720P format it is necessary to treat each frame as a separate image file Directory operations You can create a new directory on a local disk or removable disk rename or delete a directory p 208 Copying files between different unit IDs Switcher files within a local disk or removable disk are managed by unit ID To copy files between different unit IDs use the Unit ID Copy menu p 209
354. gions and the register numbers saved in the regions Snapshot registers These are registers for snapshots and there are 99 numbered to 99 for each region Master snapshot registers There are 99 master timeline registers numbered 1 to 99 for each control panel They store snapshot regions and the register numbers saved in the regions Overview of Keyframes A keyframe represents an instantaneous state of an image which can be saved and recalled for reuse Effects By arranging a number of keyframes on the time axis and interpolating between successive keyframes you can create a result in which there is a continuous change from each keyframe to the next This result is called an effect You can save the sequence of keyframes representing a single effect in a register p 144 Then by recalling this register you can replay the same effect Saving and Recalling Effects To create a new effect first recall an empty register then create the keyframes one at a time in this register To run an effect it is also necessary to set the time and the path To edit an existing effect recall the register holding the effect then make the changes When you have finished creating or editing the effect save it in the recalled register or another specified register Auto save function When you recall an effect the currently recalled effect is automatically saved in a register This is called the auto save function Y
355. ground video only appears on the monitor with a white box shaped sample selector 4 Adjust the position and size of the sample selector to specify the color to be used as the basis of chroma keying typically a blue background 2 Adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Clip Chroma key reference level 2 Gain Key gain 3 Hue Hue 4 Density Density 5 Filter Filter coefficient Making color cancel adjustments If the background color is leaking into the foreground video turning the color cancel function on allows you to eliminate this leakage 1 mthe ME 1 gt Key1 gt Type gt Chroma Adjust menu 1111 1 set Key Active off Only the foreground image appears on the monitor 2 Inthe lt Color Cancel gt group set Color Cancel on 3 Adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Luminance Luminance 2 Saturation Saturation 3 Hue Hue 5 Filter Filter coefficient No Parameter Adjustment 1 Position H Horizontal position Position V Vertical position Size Size 5 Press Auto Start in the lt Auto gt group This executes an auto chroma key based on the color specified by the sample selector and displays the composite image on the monitor Making key active adjustments When the key active function is on the composite image is output to the monitor and you can watch the monitor while manu
356. ground with the same hue are replaced by the background Using the Y balance function you can specify a luminance level range within which the key is active and replace the specified part by the background You can use the Y balance function independently on the key signal for the composition and the key signal for the color cancel function When applied to the key signal for the composition this produces the foreground with the color cancel effect applied This can therefore be used to provide an impression of smoke for example When the Y balance function is applied to the color cancel key the relevant part is output in its original color without canceling and therefore it is possible to combine colors which are the same color as the background i e typically blue in the foreground Video signal adjustment You can vary the foreground signal gain or change the hue There are separate adjustments for the gain of the overall video signal and Y and C components Making auto chroma key adjustments Auto chroma key is an automatic adjustment function which allows you to specify a part of the foreground video for example the blue background color and use it as a reference for creating the chroma key image 1 Inthe lt Key Type gt group of the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu 1111 select Chroma 2 Select Chroma Adjust The Chroma Adjust menu 1111 1 appears 3 Select Sample Mark in the lt Auto gt group The fore
357. gs Overview The term side flags refers to the areas to left and right of an image with aspect ratio 4 3 embedded within a 16 9 frame when these areas are filled with a separate image selected from the utility bus You can adjust the width of the side flag area Side Flag Settings Input source aspect ratio auto side flags and auto crop settings Aspect ratio 4 3 setting Set the input signal to aspect ratio 4 3 If set to 16 9 the side flags are disabled Auto side flag setting This function automatically applies side flags when a 4 3 signal is selected in the cross point control block Auto crop setting When carrying out a DME wipe this function automatically crops the image during transition to 4 3 Adjusting the width of the side flag area You can set the left and right sides separately For details about the above setting amp Setting the Side Flag Video Material and Operation p 241 Enabling and disabling side flags with a menu operation You can enable or disable side flags for the backgrounds A and B of each of the M E and PGM PST banks As an example to enable side flags for background B row on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure Side Flags Chapter 1 Open the Misc gt Enable gt Side Flags menu 3213 The status area shows the buttons for Bkgd A and Bkgd B for each of the banks 2 Inthe lt M E 1 Side Flags gt group press Bkgd B To display a menu for the asp
358. gt mr Macro register number 0001 to 0099 Saving and Recalling a File For a newly created file if you create a directory on a removable disk see figure below and move the file to the prescribed location you can then recall it in the File All External File menu When amending a file saved on the switcher be sure to save it in the original directory Removable disk Any directory CTRLCPU Annnnnnn PNL_rrrr PMR Path example Removable Disk Sample MACRO CTRLCPU nnnnnnnn PNL_rrrr PMR Errors If any of the following problems occur it is not possible to recall the file Attempting to recall the file will produce an error message e If there is a syntax error e If a required parameter is not present For details about error messages Error Messages p 298 Correspondence between Events and Symbols For details about events amp Events p 180 Event Symbol Using Continue AUX bus cross point selection in the cross point control block AuxXpt No Cross point selection in the router RouterXpt Yes Cross point selection in the cross point control block MEXpt Yes Auto transition and take in the transition control block MEAutoTransition Yes Cut in the transition control block MECut No Transition type selection TransitionType No Next transition setting NextTransition No Pattern limit on off PatternLimit No Fade to black execution FadeT
359. h a name to a register The procedures for shotbox register editing are similar to the procedures described in Effect Register Editing p 164 Unlike in effect register editing however it is not necessary to specify a region in shotbox register editing Shotbox Execution Shotbox Register Editing XOqIOyS HINN 194de49 179 soley p Jeideyp 180 Macros Macros Overview The term macro refers to the function whereby a sequence of signal selections and other operations on the control panel is saved as data in memory so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same sequence of operations To record menu operations in memory use a menu macro p 194 Macro registers The area of memory that holds a macro is termed a macro register For each control panel there are 250 macro registers numbered 1 to 250 Events The individual control panel operations constituting a macro are termed events One macro can contain a maximum of 99 events The following table shows the operations for each control block of the control panel that can be saved as events in a macro Chapter Control block Event Flexi Pad Recalling the following data e Effects e Snapshots e Shotbox e Wipe snapshots e DME wipe snapshots e Key snapshots Following operations e Selection of effect execution rewind fast forward execution direction e Auto t
360. h point the signal with the higher luminance level overpowers the other signal Independent key transition Not selectable See page Super mix The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to 100 Not selectable p 50 Preset color mix The current video is replaced by the new video in a two stage transition with a color matte unpatterned display inserted during the first stage Not selectable p 50 Wipe The current video is replaced by the new video according to a predetermined wipe pattern Selectable p 83 DME wipe Using an image transformation effect the current video is replaced by the new video as in a wipe Selectable p 93 Clip transition Linked to a mix dissolve or wipe transition a frame memory clip movie is played back Not selectable Cut The new video quickly cuts into and replaces the current video Selectable Transitions suolisuel pue uonoajas jeubis g Je deyp 47 suolisues pue uonoajas euis Je deup 48 Procedure for Basic Transition Operation Key priority display Next transition selection buttons PVW rev
361. he memory recall section to execute effects By pressing the EXEC MODE button to switch the memory recall section to run mode setting mode you can set the operation mode when executing effects Executing an effect automatically 1 Press the region selection button corresponding to the region for which you want to execute turning it on amp p 151 2 Enter the number of the register in which the effect you want to execute is saved and press the ENTR button This recalls the effect saved in the register 3 Press the RUN button The RUN button lights green and the effect is executed automatically Executing an effect manually In step 3 of the procedure in Executing an effect automatically p 161 operate the fader lever in the transition control block To use the transition control block fader lever as a keyframe fader You can also assign the KF button functions to a transition type selection button in the transition control block amp p 221 Press the KF button turning it on to execute a keyframe effect with the fader lever e It is not possible for the KF button to be on for multiple banks M E or PGM PST at the same time If you press the KF button in more than one bank only the last button pressed remains on e If a macro is assigned to the transition control block fader lever then while in use as a keyframe fader the macro is not executed Moving to the first keyframe of t
362. he recalled file is detected The details of the above operation modes depend on the connected device For more information consult the documentation for the connected device When using a disk recorder that does not support the timecode drop frame bit in the lt Frame Control Mode gt group select the drop frame mode or non drop frame mode Drop Frame Drop frame mode Non Drop Frame Non drop frame mode This setting is only valid when the system field frequency is 59 94 Specify the item to which the video port number or response speed setting applies 1 Video Port number of the video port associated with the serial port to which the setting applies For a player the output port setting For a recorder the input port setting 2 Maximum Open Delay Maximum time required to open a file 3 Maximum Cueup Delay Maximum time required to cue up a file 4 Play After Cueup Delay Delay time from the cued up state to begin playback 5 Stop Delay Delay time from issuing the stop command until actually stopping 6 Still Delay Delay time from issuing the still command until actually stopping 7 Continue Delay Delay time from issuing the continue command until actually stopping Idle Delay Delay time from unloading a file until entering the idle state The idle state is a state wherein a file has been unloaded but a new file has not been loaded yet that is a State wherein no file is loaded 9 Status Sense Inte
363. he Flexi Pad and the memory recall buttons can be selected simultaneously p 220 Regions applicable to keyframe operations All the regions above except Router Regions applicable to snapshot operations Seventeen regions comprising the regions above less the external device regions P Bus Device 1 to Device 12 GPI and Macro User regions You can optionally assign the following regions to the regions Userl to User8 p 241 The User regions shown in parenthesis are the default assignments e Color backgrounds 1 and 2 User1 e AUXI to AUX24 User e Frame Memory 1 to 8 User4 Notes on saving or recalling a frame memory still image for or by a snapshot keyframe e The saving and recalling of frame memory images for snapshots and keyframes is restricted to the still images or clips on the eight frame memory outputs The settings made for frame memory images in the Freeze menu or other menus do not apply to snapshots or keyframes Regions Registers Chapter To reproduce a frame memory still image or a clip of them by recalling a snapshot or keyframe you must have the same images that were present in the frame memory when you saved the snapshot or keyframe Therefore when saving a snapshot or keyframe using frame memory you must also save the images to a storage media such as the local disk Reference region When multiple regions are selected only one region appears in the displays for menu and numeric k
364. he M E bank P P changes to M E1 in the Block Select and Block columns In addition DSK changes to KEY in the Button 1 and Button 2 columns The contents of the Button 3 column do not change Block Select P P Block P P XPT Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 A Bus nothing XPT 1 B Bus Shift DSK1 Bus XPT 128 M E 1 DSK4 Bus P P DSK1 Src Bus V K DSK4 Src Bus V Shift K Shift UTIL1 Bus V XPT 1 K V Shift XPT 128 K Shift M E 1 P P About the Macro Attachment List Display xlpueddy 295 xlpueddy 296 Button 1 Utility Shotbox Button 2 Bank 1 1 Button 3 nothing Bank 1 32 Bank 2 1 Bank 2 32 Bank 3 1 Bank 3 32 Bank 4 1 Bank 4 32 Bank 5 1 Bank 5 32 Block Select P P Block P P Trans Button 1 blank DSK1 Button 2 MIX NAM SUPER MIX PST COLOR MIX WIPE DME DSK_ON AUTO TRANS CUT Button 3 nothing DSK4 ALL KEY PRIOR BKGD DSK12 DSK4 NORM NORM REV2 REV Fader PRIOR SET TRANS PVW a These buttons can be assigned with their functions in the setup menu They can be assigned with any of the following functions transition type selection MIX NAM SUPER MIX PST COLOR MIX WIPE DME FM1 amp 2CLIP FM3 amp 4CLIP FM5 amp 6CLIP FM7 amp 8CLIP next transition selection BKGD DSK1 to DSK8 PRIOR ALL wipe direction sel
365. he auto transition attribute XHLD xxx button Apply the bus cross point hold attribute where xxx is the applicable bus Recalling a snapshot As an example to recall a snapshot on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the Flexi Pad press the SNAPSHOT button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to snapshot operation mode The alphanumeric display shows the number of the last recalled register on the bank Press the region selection button corresponding to the region you want to recall turning it on You can select more than one button Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad For details about the method of region selection Selecting regions in the Flexi Pad p 150 The regions that can be selected simultaneously are those assigned to the region selection buttons and the memory recall section buttons p 220 It is not possible to select MSTR and other regions simultaneously If selected simultaneously the master snapshot takes precedence The first button pressed is lit green as the reference region Subsequently pressed buttons turn amber for the region select buttons and yellow for the memory recall section buttons Pressing one of the amber or yellow lit buttons while holding down the SNAPSHOT button turns the button green to indicate its corresponding region as the new reference region For details about the precedence order for becoming the refere
366. he effect Press the REWIND button Setting the Run Mode By pressing the EXEC MODE button to switch the memory recall section to run mode setting mode you can set the operation mode when executing effects Specifying the effect execution direction To specify the effect execution direction press the NORM button or the REV button turning it on To execute the effect so as to obtain the effects of the NORM and REV buttons alternately press the NORM REV button turning it on When the NORM button is lit The effect is executed in the direction from the first keyframe to the last keyframe When the REV button is lit The effect is executed in the direction from the last keyframe to the first keyframe Executing Effects soueiAey Ja deyp 161 seweiyAoy 1 Ja deyo 162 When the NORM REV button is lit Each time the effect is executed the direction reverses Executing an effect up to the next keyframe 1 Press the STOP NEXT button turning it on 2 Press the RUN button This executes the effect as far as the next keyframe When the REV button is lit it is executed as far as the previous keyframe Repeating an effect 1 Press the EFF LOOP button turning it on 2 Press the RUN button This executes the effect repeatedly from the first keyframe to the last keyframe When the REV button is lit the effect is executed in the reverse direction 3 To stop the repeat
367. he frame memory V K mode amp p 106 2 Inthe frame memory selection area select the FM output p 106 3 Inthe lt Reposition gt group select the movement mode Normal Move in normal mode Black amp White Move in black amp white mode 4 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Position H Horizontal movement 2 Position V Vertical movement a p 85 The surroundings of the moved image on the screen are filled with black To center the image Press Center in the lt Reposition gt group Fixing the output image selection lock function For the output of each of FM1 to FM8 this function fixes the image at the current output When this lock is enabled even if the output is recalled in a snapshot or keyframe the images output to FM1 to FM8 are preserved 1 Open the Frame Memory gt Reposition Lock gt Lock menu 2532 2 Inthe frame memory selection area select the FM output p 106 3 Press Lock turning it on This fixes the currently selected frame memory output image To unlock and press Lock again turning it off Continuously Capturing Still Images Record You can continuously capture freeze a sequence of input video frames and store the sequence of the still images over a specified time interval The name of each image recorded in this way consists of two character strings First character string A common name assigned
368. he shift side of the keys The shift is released when you enter a character Space button This enters a space character Clear button This clears all of the characters in the input string Del delete button This clears the character immediately after the cursor O Left Right button These move the cursor one character to the left or right in the input string Enter button This sets the input string as a parameter value If correctly set the keyboard window closes If it is not correctly set the input display changes color Line feed button After pressing the Shift button press this button to feed a line The input display shows this as I Names and Functions of Parts of the Menu 35 Sued JO suoljouny pue soweNy zseldeyo 36 Color Palette Window When parameters are assigned as a combination of luminance saturation and hue pressing a parameter setting button displays a color palette window Color Palette Color palette buttons Luminance 0 00 100 00 Operation buttons Sel Copy Swap SAT Color display Numeric keypad Default HUE Cancel Color palette buttons Press one of these to display the corresponding color in the color display Operation buttons Set If you press any color palette button with this button held down the color shown in the color display is assigned to the color palette button Copy
369. hen auto insert mode is on this sets the pause duration and inserts the pause event When auto insert mode is off use the same operations as in step 5 of Creating a new menu macro p 196 to save the event Editing a menu macro T In the Macro gt Menu Macro Register gt Recall amp Run menu 5431 select the target register in the menu macro register list p 195 2 Press Menu Macro Edit The Menu Macro Edit menu 7144 2 appears The menu macro register is recalled and the system is now in menu macro editing mode 3 Select an event 4 If required turn Auto Insert on or off 5 Carry out the editing operations When auto insert mode is on Carrying out a menu operation automatically inserts after the selected event When auto insert mode is off Perform one of the following e To overwrite the selected event carry out the new menu operation then press the Modify button e To insert an event before the selected event carry out the new menu operation then press Insert Before e To insert an event after the selected event carry out the new menu operation then press Insert After To delete the selected event Press Delete To delete all events select All Event Select and press Delete 6 Set the event execution interval using the same operation as step 7 of Creating a new menu macro p 196 T Save the register using the same operation as steps 8 and 9 of Creating
370. hen press Yes Selly 94 13 dey9 206 Saving the List of Frame Memory Files to a Local Disk or Removable Disk If you save all files currently held in frame memory as a single backup data set by high speed recording on video tape or other medium is created a file of file list data that is needed for successful frame memory file restore operation It is necessary to save this file on a local disk or removable disk 1 Open the File gt Frame Mem gt File Name Data menu 7153 2 Inthe operating device selection section on the left or right select Register File Batch Operations The register name FM_Bkup appears In the device selection section on the opposite side the destination for saving automatically appears 3 As the destination for saving select Local Disk or Removable Disk then specify the directory 4 Select the destination file for saving 5 e To save to disk press Save e To load from disk press Load To view details of files Press File Edit A list of the saved file names appears You can manipulate these files like any other files File Batch Operations You can batch process all files or registers Batch Saving Files To save the data of all registers to a local disk or removable disk use the following procedure e Files saved on a local disk may be lost if the local disk fails Always keep separate backup copies of important files on a removable disk e
371. holding down the SPLIT button in the Flexi Pad Press the button in the 2nd row while holding down the KEY1 key delegation button in the transition control block When Split is selected the key memory function amp p 64 is disabled To select a video signal that is assigned to a cross point button the operation mode for the KEY button must be set For details amp Setting the Button Operation Mode p 237 Selecting the key source and key fill in the menu Selecting the key source To select the key source use the following procedure 1 2 In the lt Key Fill gt group of the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu 1111 select Key Bus Press Signal Select The Signal Select menu 1111 3 appears Bin WK Video Ke f CC 2 2 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2 IN3 IN3 IN4 IN4 ING IN7 IN8 Ing Source Key Source Set Xpt Self In the lt Target gt group press Source In the lt Key Source gt group specify the key source selection mode Self Auto Select or Split See step 5 in Selecting the key fill and key source p 66 5 it Split is selected select the key source signal 6 Inthe lt Assign gt group select the video signal or key signal from the V K pair to assign to the key source 7 Press Set Xpt Selecting the key fill To select the key fill use the following procedure Inthe status area of the Type menu press Fill The Signal Select menu a
372. ice to Device12 region currently specified in the Flexi Pad 3 GPI Current a a TimelineNormalReverseOn Region ME1 PP Applicable region User1 to User8 a Mode in which operation takes place in the PBus Device1 to Device12 region currently specified in the Flexi Pad GPI Current a TimelineNormalReverseOff Region ME1 PP Applicable region User1 to User8 a Mode in which operation takes place in the PBus Device1 to Device12 region currently specified in the Flexi Pad GPI Current a UtilityButton UtilityModule UserPrefs Control blocks on the applicable bank UtilityBox Button 1 to 96 Applicable button UtilityStatus On Status of function assigned to button Off a Operates according to currently assigned Current a function FMLoop Device FrameMemory1Clip to Applicable clip FrameMemory8Clip FMLoopMode On a Frame memory clip loop on off Off b a Loop is enabled b Loop is disabled MenuMacroRun Register 1 to 99 Applicable register number 294 macro File Editing Rules Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description KeyBusUtilityButton ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank BANK Bank1 to Bank5 Applicable bank KeyBusUtilityButton 1 to 32 Applicable button UtilityStatus On Status of function assigned to button Off a Operates according to currently assigned Current a function ClipRecall Device FrameMemory1Clip to Applicable clip FrameMemorysClip ClipTy
373. ime you press this button it toggles the beep setting on and off Calibrating the Touch Panel 1 In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Maintenance menu g g p 7327 press Touch Panel Calibration The following message appears To Perform Calibration please touch the center of each plus sign 2 Press Yes 3 Press the center of the plus sign displayed on the screen When you press on the plus sign it disappears and then reappears on the diagonal 4 Press the center of the plus sign Setting the Menu to be Shown When the Menus Are Started 1 inte Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Maintenance menu 7327 press Initial Menu Set 2 Enter the page number of the desired menu The next time the menus are started the menu specified by this number appears To enable this setting the initial state of the control panel when powered on must be set to one of the following e Set to Resume mode e Set to Custom mode with User selected in the lt Setup gt group For details about these settings amp Selecting the State After Power on p 213 Setting the Mouse Wheel Scrolling Direction for Parameter Setting In the lt Mouse Wheel Direction gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Maintenance menu 7327 press one of the following buttons Scrl Down Clockwise Turning the mouse wheel in the direction to scroll down is the same as moving the parameter setting button indicator
374. in 263 Communications Status Display 263 Appendix Wipe Pattern List cccccsssteteeeeesseeeeeees 264 Wipe Pattern Liste cercerero sinan ban 264 DME Wipe Pattern List eee 264 Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List 265 Menu Tree saisiaiainssccdeartecesietnnsiincd annonces 266 M IE 1 MGI io 22s corasoecets eisenii 267 PGM PST MGniisisssiscsstesssasaieessesvavaveetesese 269 Color Bkgd Menu ceeecceceseeeeeteeeeeees 270 AUX WAG TY 5 cas ctondc oncecvee nial irnia 270 Frame Memory Menu ccccceeseeeeeees 271 Copw S wap Menttiiis onic caw inten 271 Mise Ment maniing neee 272 Router Menu 255 sessccsnaheasnssciensncsaatesaenseresbnes 212 Device Menning eri R 272 Macro MGnul c accascacnceniateasesetercanscseceantes 272 Key Frame Menut ss 0s cdiscsssseasasnaaceshosenveneees 273 Effect Menu srn feces siete E 273 Snapshot Men Us 2 hcisscsdsdecconssceeeasiaedeens 274 Shotbox Men reenn 276 Fle Menia Tesee a e 276 User Setup Menu ssessesseessseesersseessees 277 Engineering Setup Menu 278 Diagnostic Menu s ssessseseseseesseesssessesssee 281 Menus of Disabled Operations and Settings paete aaen ae aet daup eaaeo 281 Menu Access by Pressing a Button TW CE isi cceinidiscsccsnidevedenisinentiivenedidinidies 286 Simple Connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel 288 Procedure for Simple Connection 288 Setting Status of the MKS 8080 8082 in Sim
375. in the Misc gt Snapshot menu Press Register No or Register Name in the lt Snapshot Effect Display gt group to select the buttons Coupling the transition type selection with the Flexi Pad mode selection To make the Flexi Pad mode selection change automatically when WIPE or DME is selected in the transition control block press Wipe DME Auto Deleg turning it on Button indications in the memory recall section When the Flexi Pad mode is WIPE or DME for the button indications in the memory recall section select Pattern or Register Name in the lt Wipe DME Display gt group When the mode is Snapshot Effect or MCRO select Register No or Register Name in the lt Snapshot Effect Display gt group Setting the Button Operation Mode 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Custom Button menu 7326 4 2 Make the following settings as required Operation mode during an auto transition For the operation mode when the AUTO TRANS or TAKE button is pressed once more during an auto transition select Continue or Cancel in the lt Auto Trans Take gt group Continue Continues the transition e Cancel Cancels the transition and returns to the state before starting the transition Operation mode during keyframe execution For the operation mode when the RUN button is pressed once more during effect execution select Continue or Cancel in the lt Run gt group Continu
376. ind operation On the GPI timeline when the REWIND button in the Flexi Pad is pressed the action set for the first keyframe is Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders not executed when the RUN button is pressed then the first keyframe action is executed To execute an action when the REWIND button is pressed it is necessary to set this action Rewind Action To carry out this setting press Rewind Action in the Device gt GPI Timeline gt GPI Timeline menu 5311 to recall the Rewind Action menu 5311 1 In this setting screen use the same setting method as in the screen for setting an action on the GPI timeline Alternatively you can select the reverse arrangement whereby when the REWIND button is pressed this executes the action set for the first keyframe and when the RUN button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed In this case the Rewind Action setting is still valid For details about the setting operation amp Setting the First Keyframe When a Rewind is Executed p 236 Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders In this system for up to 12 VTRs disk recorders or Extended VTRs connected to a switcher you can carry out the following manual operations and timeline settings e Controlling manually from the device control block VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR selection Tape and disk transport control Start point stop point and start delay ti
377. ing effect press the EFF LOOP button turning it off or press the REWIND button Saving Effects When you recall an effect the currently recalled effect is automatically saved in a register This is called the auto save function You can disable the auto save function in a Setup menu By means of the following operation you can also specify a register and save an effect in it Saving an effect in a specified register You make register settings in the Flexi Pad 1 Press the EFF button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to effect operation mode 2 Press the region selection button corresponding to the region for which you want to save the register turning it on p 151 3 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to effect editing mode Saving Effects Creating and Saving a Master Timeline 4 Press the STOR button 5 Enter the register number to save with the numeric keypad buttons To search for an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button To search for an empty register common to all currently selectable regions press the button again To search for an empty register in the 100 range press 1 0 0 period in this order To search for an empty register in the 200 range press 2 0 0 period in that order The entered register number or corresponding register number
378. ing time if required Press Duration and enter the recording time as a timecode in the numeric keypad window If you set the recording time to 0 this uses all frame memory in which storing is possible for recording 8 Press Record to start recording If the recording time is set recording stops once the time has elapsed Still Image Operations Aiowey ewes4 zZ Jaydeyo 109 oway ewes 7 Ja deyo 110 9 Press Stop to stop recording Even if the recording time is set you can still stop recording before the set time has elapsed Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images Animation You can use a continuous sequence of images captured with the record function as keyframes to create an effect By executing this effect you can recall the continuous sequence animation e For example to create an effect using FM1 FM1 must be assigned to a user region e To execute the effect you must assign the user region to which FM1 is assigned to a region selection button in the Flexi Pad For details amp Assigning Regions to Region Selection Buttons in the Flexi Pad p 220 In the Frame Memory menu effect creation follows the image file names Of the characters in the file names if files have the same characters except for the last three characters they are treated as an image file group and the effect is created with the last three numeric characters in sequence When creating the ef
379. ings as required depending on the key type selected in step 2 To enable clean mode amp p 62 for a luminance key linear key or color vector key Select Clean Mode to turn it on When clean mode is enabled key fill is added to the background without cutting out with key source When chroma key is selected Select Chroma Adjust to access the Chroma Adjust menu p 69 and make the required settings When a key wipe pattern key is selected In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust menu 1116 1 amp p 88 carry out pattern selection and modifier setting then return to the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu 1111 4 Set the parameters When a luminance key or linear key is selected 3 No Parameter Density Adjustment Key density When a color vector key is selected Parameter group 1 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 Y Clip Reference level for creating luminance signal 2 Y Gain Luminance signal sensitivity C Clip Reference level for creating chrominance signal C Gain Chrominance signal sensitivity 5 Density Key density Parameter group 2 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 Y Filter Luminance signal filter coefficient 2 C Filter Chrominance signal filter coefficient When key wipe pattern key is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 Size Pattern size 2 Soft Edge softness Density Key density 5 Make the following s
380. int button this inhibits operation of all cross point buttons with the same number in the following buses The corresponding name also disappears from the source name display e Background A background B e Keys to 4 e Utility bus Assigning the function of disabling cross point button operation to a button In the Setup menu assign Inhibit Set to any of the buttons in the 1st row For details amp Assigning a Bus or Function to Ist Row Buttons p 235 Inhibiting operation of a cross point button Hold down the button to which Inhibit Set is assigned and press the cross point button whose operation you want to inhibit The button you pressed flashes amber and its operation is inhibited Even when you inhibit operation of a cross point button macro attachment settings are still possible For details amp Setting and Canceling a Macro Attachment p 191 Clearing a cross point button operation inhibit setting Hold down the button to which Inhibit Set is assigned and press the button whose operation is inhibited flashing amber This clears the operation inhibit setting for the button you pressed Clearing all operation inhibit settings Press the button to which Inhibit Set is assigned and the button to which Inhibit All Clear is assigned simultaneously Signal Name Display You can attach a name source name to each signal assigned to a cross point butt
381. ion Makes settings relating to the video material 4 3 aspect ratio for applying side flags Side Flag Settings p 128 Setting the aspect ratio 4 3 16 9 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu 7331 press Side Flags The Side Flags menu 7331 7 appears The status area lists the video key pair numbers video Settings for Switcher Configuration dnjes 1eyoms 8 4a deyo 241 dnyes seyoms 8 Ja deyo 242 signal source names and aspect ratio settings 16 9 4 3 2 Select the pair number for which you want to set 3 In the lt Aspect gt group press 4 3 If you select 16 9 no side flags are applied To set 4 3 video material to have side flags applied automatically You can make a setting so that when a signal with aspect ratio set to 4 3 is selected in the cross point control block side flags are automatically applied To do so in the Side Flags menu press Auto Side Flags Pressing this button toggles the setting on and off This setting applies to all of the M E and PGM PST banks To set to crop to 4 3 when a DME wipe is executed When side flags are enabled you can automatically crop an image as set to be a 4 3 image when executing a DME wipe Use the following procedure To do so in the Side Flags menu press Auto Crop Pressing this button toggles the setting on and off This setting applies to all of the M E and PGM PST banks Adjusting the width of th
382. ion Record 2514 No HF5 Create Key Frame 2515 No VF2 Clip HF 1 Recall 2521 No HF2 Play 2522 No HF3 Record 2523 No HF5 Ancillary Enable 2525 No VF3 Reposition Lock HF1 Reposition 2531 Yes HF2 Lock 2532 No VF4 File HF 1 Pair Recombination 2541 No Recall 2511 No Recall 2521 No HF2 Auto Extraction 2542 No HF4 Move 2544 No HF5 Delete 2545 No HF6 Rename 2546 No VF5 Folder 2551 No VF6 External Device HF1 Ext HDD Format 2561 No HF2 Ext HDD Backup Restore 2562 No HF4 Backup to DDR VTR 2564 No gt File Name Data 7153 No 8 HF5 Restore from DDR VTR 2565 No x File Name Data 7153 No Copy Swap Menu Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 Copy Swap HF 1 M E 3111 No HF2 Key 3112 No HF3 Wipe 3113 No HF4 DME Wipe 3114 No HF5 Matte 3115 No HF6 Color 3116 No HF7 DME 3117 No VF2 Copy HF 1 Format Converter 3121 No Menu Tree 271 Misc Menu Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 Enable HF1 Port Enable 3211 No HF3 Side Flags 3213 No Side Flags 7331 7 No Side Flags Button Assign 7322 10 No VF2 Safe Title 3221 No VFS Transition HF1 Key ME FTB 3231 No Router Menu VF1 Router Control Menu Page No HF1 Router Control 5111 Default Recall No Change Xpt 5111 1 No Device Menu Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 GPI Timeline HF1 GPI Timeline 5311
383. ion state of the region selection buttons Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Region Overview of assigned operation selection button M E1 P P e These enable the positioner wipe pattern position setting operation mode e You can select more than one button simultaneously Region selection button DEV Overview of assigned operation e This enables the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode e The operation applies to the DEV1 to DEV12 FM1 CLIP FM2 CLIP and FM LOOP buttons e You can also assign the FM3 CLIP to FM8 CLIP RECUE and LOOP buttons in the Setup menu RUN CTRL This enables the keyframe operation mode RSZR CTRL e This enables the resizer operation mode e Use the M E1 or P P button to select the target switcher bank e The operation applies to the K1RSZ and K2RSZ buttons Operation buttons These perform various operations The function of each button varies with the operation mode When the positioner operation mode is enabled Name Description K1 to K4 These enable wipe pattern position setting for keys 1 to 4 WIPE This enables wipe pattern position setting for normal transitions POS This enables the trackball to move the wipe position pattern in the x axis and y axis directions X Y These restrict which axes the trackball can control to the x or y axis CTR cente
384. ipe gt 1ch Selection of unsupported patterns 1462 PGM PST gt DME Wipe gt 2ch All menu operations 1477 PGM PST gt Misc gt Snapshot DME 2nd Video selection 3111 Copy Swap gt Copy Swap gt M E M E 2 selection 3112 Copy Swap gt Copy Swap gt Key e M E 2 Key1 to 8 selection e P P DSKS to 8 selection 3113 Copy Swap gt Copy Swap gt Wipe e Selection of items related to M E 2 e P P DSKS to 8 selection 3114 Copy Swap gt Copy Swap gt DME Wipe Selection of items related to M E 2 e P P DSK5 to 8 selection gt 3115 Copy Swap gt Copy Swap gt Matte e Selection of items related to M E 2 3 e Selection of items related to P P DSK5 to 8 a 3116 Copy Swap gt Copy Swap gt Color e Selection of items related to M E 2 e Selection of items related to P P DSK5 to 8 e Selection of items related to DME 3117 Copy Swap gt Copy Swap gt DME All menu operations 3211 Misc gt Enable gt Port Enable DME Override On Air Protect settings 3213 Misc gt Enable gt Side Flags M E 2 settings 3221 Misc gt Safe Title Output 13 to 32 settings 6113 1 Key Frame gt Path gt M E 1 Key5 to 8 settings 6113 2 Key Frame gt Path gt M E 2 All menu operations 6113 4 Key Frame gt Path gt P P DSKS to 8 settings 6113 13 Key Frame gt Path gt DME 3D Trans All menu operations Local 6113 14 Key Frame gt Path gt DME 3D Trans All menu operations Global 6113 15 Key Frame gt Path gt DME Effect All menu operations 6113 16 Key Frame gt Path gt DME Global Effect Al
385. is and y axis When the ASP LOC or ROT button is held down the operation is switched to a finer control fine mode Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel seq Jo suoNouny pue seweN z 13 deyo 27 Sued JO suolouny pue sowen Zz Je deup 28 Z ring The effect of operation depends on the operating mode as follows When the keyframe operation mode is enabled By turning the Z ring you can run the keyframe effect independent of the STOP NEXT KF EFFECT LOOP and similar settings in the Flexi Pad Turn clockwise to run the effect in the normal direction and counterclockwise for the reverse direction When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled Turning the Z ring controls the tape transport disk drive frame memory clip operations at a speed determined by the operating buttons Turn clockwise for the normal direction and counterclockwise for the reverse direction When the resizer operation mode is enabled By turning the ring you can zoom the key to which the resizer is applied and change the aspect ratio and perspective When the ASP LOC or ROT button is held down the operation is switched to a finer control fine mode MENU button This enables adjustment of the menu parameters using the trackball and Z ring Pressing this button and turning it on in VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode makes it possible to carry out timeline start stop point set
386. is pressed this message appears if there are not enough Clip IDs internal processing error Prepare failed symbol files create failed 16 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup is pressed this message appears if marker frame file creation failed internal processing error Prepare failed all one Clip recall failed 17 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup is pressed this message appears if All One Clip Recall failed internal processing error O 5 o o gt Q o xlpueddy ERROR 19 Bad register number 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup is pressed this message appears if Register Number is invalid internal processing error Prepare failed because there is clip playing 22 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup is pressed this message appears if processing failed during clip playback Password Failed The password was not changed 7317 1 Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance gt Setup Operation Lock In the above menu the password was not changed Create Key Frame Create Key Frame cannot be executed FMx is not assigned to a user region 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above
387. is recalls the macro register assigned to the button and the macro is executed as follows according to the operation mode Pre macro mode The macro is executed first and then the button function is executed Post macro mode The button function is executed first and then the macro is executed Macro only mode The button function is not executed and the macro only is executed During macro execution the button you pressed flashes It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a time Therefore even if you simultaneously press multiple buttons for which macro attachments are set only one macro is executed If a button is pressed twice during macro execution or when the macro is stopped or if another macro is recalled the following operation stop or continue depends on a setting in the Setup menu Macro Attachment Assigning soe p saideyp 193 soley p Jeideyp 194 For details Setting the Macro Execution Mode p 238 e Individual events stored in a macro are executed according to the settings in the Setup menu If you change the settings in the Setup menu a saved macro may not have the expected effect e During macro execution if you switch the control panel to macro editing mode the macro being executed stops e During macro editing pressing a button for which a macro attachment is set does not execute the macro To disable macro attachment settings Depending on the lo
388. is section describes FM1 and FM2 as an example 1 In the Frame Memory gt Still gt Recall menu 2511 or Frame Memory gt Clip gt Recall menu 2521 recall the pair file 2 Select the folder in which the file to be moved is stored 3 Open the Frame Memory gt File gt Pair Recombination menu 2541 4 Press Separate Moving Files 1 Open the Frame Memory gt File gt Move menu 2544 The status area shows files to be moved in the upper area and destination files in the lower area 2 Select the folder and file to be moved 3 Select the destination folder and file 4 Press Move Deleting Files 1 Open the Frame Memory gt File gt Delete menu 2545 In the status area regardless of whether pair mode is on or off all of the saved files appear as thumbnails 2 Select the folder which contains the file to be deleted 3 Select the file to be deleted To select all folders press Select All turning it on When a clip thumbnail is selected the still image files making up the clip are also selected for deletion 4 it necessary check the contents of the frame memory clip in the thumbnail display No Parameter Adjustment For a movie the current frame position For a still image no effect 3 Viewer 5 Press Delete 6 Check the message then press Yes Image Data Management Aiowey ewes4 zZ Jaydeyo 117 oway ewes 7 Ja deyo 118 Renaming Files
389. it menu 7142 1 The Off Line Edit menu 7142 3 appears and the selected macro register or macro file is recalled enabling offline editing If the selected register is locked Off Line Edit is disabled and it is not possible to display the Off Line Edit menu Off Line Edit menu Editing button group Register or file number B Register or file name amp Macro listing Exit button Store button Set button Delete button Append button Insert Before button Macro editing candidate list Register or file number Shows the number of the register or file being edited Register or file name Shows the name of the register or file being edited Macro listing Lists the macro events that are saved in the register or file The cursor moves to the selected event Each macro event consists of the following components which you can check in the list e Contents Event statement Continue statement comment or event number as selected in the editing button group Contents e Symbol Event type ASCII character string as selected in the editing button group EVNT e Data Parameters and data as set in the editing button group For details about the event components amp Macro File Editing Rules p 289 Editing button group This row of buttons shows the components of an event To carry out event editing 1 press an editing button then 2 select an ite
390. ith a maximum of 16 characters in the keyboard window and press Enter If the password is correct the menus selected in the list of candidates are all locked The padlock icon changes to the locked state Gh Releasing the lock 1 Inthe Setup Operation Lock menu 7317 1 press Lock 2 Enter the password in the keyboard window Changing the lock password 1 Inthe Setup Operation Lock menu 7317 1 press Change Password 2 Press Yes 3 Enter the old password and new password when P P prompted Selecting an opened setup menu for locking With the menu you want to lock open press Lock Item Select button at the lower left System Maintenance dnas wayshs 9 sa deyo 217 dnas wajshs 9 Je deyo 218 VF buttons etine HF buttons Lock Item Select button The Lock Item Select button turns red and a padlock icon appears This selection is reflected in the lock candidate list in the Setup Operation Lock menu If there are already one or more locked menus selection of lock candidates is not possible In this case the indication of the Lock Item Select button changes as follows When a menu other than the When the displayed menu is locked displayed menu is locked If you want to select lock candidates first remove the lock in the Setup Operation Lock menu Locking File Loading Operations You can inhibit load operations for a specified file
391. ition Rate Transition rate Displaying the transition rates in a menu and changing the settings For each of the banks you can display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate and change the settings p 126 Pattern Limits When a wipe or DME wipe pattern is selected for the transition you can specify the range of movement of the wipe pattern through the course of the transition for each bank When the pattern limit function is enabled carrying out a transition results in the following effect for example settings e When the limit value is set to 50 the effect at the end of the transition is the same as when the fader lever is at the center position in the normal case with the pattern limit function disabled the wipe pattern does not complete When the limit value is set to 0 the wipe effect is completely disabled and carrying out the transition produces no change in the image When the limit value is set to the maximum 100 the image changes in exactly the same way as when the pattern limit function is off but when the transition is completed the cross point selections on the background A and B buses do not interchange There are two ways of setting a pattern limit either by operating the fader lever to save the fader position or by using the Wipe menu or DME Wipe menu to access the Edge Direction menu for each bank e A pattern limit only appli
392. itions p 97 c For details about patterns that can be selected amp Types of DME Wipe Pattern p 93 Menu Access by Pressing a Button Twice For relevant buttons pressing twice in rapid succession XX indicates the last recalled page in each menu directly recalls a related menu page The following table lists these buttons of each control block together with the menus they recall Cross point control block e PGM PST gt DSK1 gt XX a Button Double press Menu Refer to 3 FM1 to 8 signals assigned buttons Frame Memory gt Still gt Recall p 107 Color Bkgd1 signal assigned button Color Bkgd gt Color Bkgd1 p 122 Color Bkgd2 signal assigned button Color Bkgd gt Color Bkgd2 FMS1 Frame Memory gt Still gt Recall H 107 FMS2 Frame Memory gt Still gt Recall Transition control block Button Double press Menu Refer to KEY1 DSK1 e M E 1 gt Key1 gt XX p 64 KEY2 DSK2 e M E 1 gt Key2 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK2 gt XX KEY3 DSK3 e M E 1 gt Key3 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK3 gt XX KEY4 DSK4 e M E 1 gt Key4 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK4 gt XX WIPE M E 1 PGM PST gt Wipe gt Main Pattern p 83 DME M E 1 PGM PST gt DME Wipe gt XX p 95 SUPER MIX M E 1 PGM PST gt Misc gt Transition p 50 PST COLOR MIX M E 1 PGM PST gt Misc gt Transition p 50 FM1 amp 2 CLIP FM3 amp 4 CLIP FM5 amp 6 M E 1 PGM PST gt Misc gt Clip Transition p 115 CLI
393. itirazondzenaielrabactececchamntnetanceetas 152 Selecting the Region in which Editing Applies sanean Aa e 152 Specifying an Edit Point eee 153 Creating and Editing Keyframes 153 Keyframe Creation and Editing in the Flexi PACs hiene a a a 153 Creations ecnin asiani 154 Insert oninia oie EEEE 154 Modification ioira apais 154 Dele ON sii vereitedi cine mie 156 Movement 2a ii Mite eee 156 OWING aust case aime a tecscateecsates 157 PAUSE sire iacicnieie ceed aes 157 Keyframe Loop Repeated Execution of a Specified Range isccesscabsscstaccegedeesnes 157 Undoing an Edit Operation ee 158 Duration Mode Setting 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeees 158 Time SettingS ccccesssseeseeeeeeeseeees 159 Setting the Keyframe Duration 159 Setting the Effect Duration 159 Delay Seting cenen e 159 Path Setting eiiiai sientini iniaa 159 Basic Procedure for Path Settings 159 Executing Effects ssssssssssseeeesesssseee 161 Executing an Effect in the Flexi Pad 161 Setting the Run Mode eeeeeeeeeeeeee 161 Saving Effects iicciivecsewieeicaieneserssivernancs 162 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline sscsecteeetenizedatsedscansseascedscartanawc 162 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline in the Flext Padin bi sins 162 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline with the Men ie jsccsccietsanteactoieiege tite 163 Register Operations in the Menus 164 Effect Attribute Settings
394. itle Settings 0 247 Cropping the Image to a 4 3 Aspect Ratio in an PAID SyStEM sieliai en 247 Selecting the Output to be Used as the Format Converte ae i r ERS 248 Setting the Format Converter Outputs 248 Making Settings for the Multi Viewer 248 Settings Relating to Video Switching 250 Selecting the Bank to Make the Seting S eeraa E i 250 Settings Relating to Keys Wipes Frame Memory and Color Correction 251 Settings for the Show Key Function 251 Settings for Key Auto Drop Function 251 Automatically Naming and Saving to Frame MEMOTY fi iscnseioss sbccesneiancadebacentaesdane 251 Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings a ced aie acest covey a ssaagueahecsesds baatss 251 Settings Relating to Function Links 252 Setting a Cross Point Button Link 252 Making Link Table Settings 253 Linking Cross Point Buttons and GPI Output Porten hited ss nied ai a a 253 Setting Links between M E Banks 253 Making a Link Setting for Key Transom nn a 254 Interfacing with External Devices 254 Making 9 Pin Port Device Interface Setting S oerein T aE 254 Making Switcher Processor GPI Input CULM OS sc rea a aE 254 Making Switcher Processor GPI Output SCLIN DS a a a ronaascereeene 255 Enabling or Disabling AUX Bus Contt lna anina an ann 256 Selecting the Mode for Turning Off Keys upon Receiving the Editor Command 256 Table of Contents Chap
395. ity menu 7324 select the button to be assigned 2 Inthe lt Action gt group select the function to be assigned Menu Shortcut Disabled even if selected Utility Command Assigns a function enable disable or similar operation utility command Macro Recall Assigns a macro register recall Shotbox Recall Assigns a shotbox register recall 3 Depending on the selection in step 2 make the following settings If Utility Command is selected Select a command on the right side of the status area If Macro Recall is selected Select the macro register you want to assign Setting Button Assignments dnyas joued joujuoD Z Ja deuD 227 dnjes jaued joujuoy 7 Ja deyD 228 No 3 Macro Parameter Adjustment Macro register selection If Shotbox Recall is selected Select the shotbox register you want to assign 4 Press Action Set To cancel an assignment Select the button then press Clear To display register names in the Utility Command No Parameter 3 Shotbox Adjustment Shotbox register selection column If in step 2 you select Macro Recall or Shotbox Recall press the Reg Name Display button to select whether or not register names appear in the Utility Command column List of utility commands and user preference button status The following table shows the utility commands that can be assigned to user preference buttons
396. ively you can select the reverse arrangement whereby when the REWIND button is pressed this executes the action set for the first keyframe and when the RUN button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed In this case the Rewind Action setting is still valid For details about the setting operation amp Setting the First Keyframe When a Rewind is Executed p 236 Macro Timeline soe p seideyp 199 Sellq 9 sedeyo 200 Files Overview of File Operations You can save register data including setup information and snapshot information as a file on a local disk or removable disk and recall it as required You can operate on individual files or registers or together in a batch Regarding frame memory it is possible to capture image data stored in an external device into frame memory You can also convert the format of image data in frame memory into a different format and save it in an external device Local disks and removable disks A local disk refers to an internal flash memory drive in acontrol panel A removable disk refers to generic USB compatible external storage devices connected to the system Files that can be manipulated The following files can be saved and recalled Operation mode setup data for system as a whole and individual devices Device status data for system startup Key memory setting data Keyframe effect setting data Snapshot setting dat
397. jes JeyomS 8 1 4de49 249 dnyes seyoums 8 sa deyo 250 Settings Relating to Video Switching Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings In the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Transition menu 7334 select the bank to which the settings apply then make the settings Setting the transition preview mode In the lt Transition Preview gt group of the Engineering Setup gt S witcher gt Transition menu 7334 select either of the following One Time The transition preview ends after a single transition Normal Switching the TRANS PVW button on or off switches between the transition preview mode and the normal mode Selecting the independent key transition mode of the transition control block In the lt Key Transition gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Transition menu 7334 select either of the following Same The transition settings for the On and Off directions are the same Independ The transition settings for the On and Off directions can be set separately Selecting the background transition flip flop mode In the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Transition menu 7334 press Bus Toggle to switch between on and off On Flip flop mode Off Bus fixed mode For details Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode p 56 Enabling or disabling the fade to black function In the lt FTB gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Transition menu 73
398. k is used ABusXpt Current a 1 to 300 A bus or B bus cross point button number Use the button number of the main table set in the 2 BBusXpt Current a 1 to 300 Xpt Assign menu a Mode in which the cross point number set for the current A bus or B bus is used MECut ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank KeyAutoTransition ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank Key Key1 to Key4 Key of the applicable independent key transition Time Current a 0 to 999 Transition rate number of frames a Mode in which the current value set on the independent key transition is used Direction ToOn a ToOff b Any c Transition execution mode a Key is inserted b Key is deleted c Transition is always executed KeyCut ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank Key Key1 to Key4 Key of the applicable independent key transition g Direction ToOn a ToOff b Any c Transition execution mode 3 a Key is inserted x b Key is deleted c Transition is always executed Play Device 1 to 12 FrameMemory1Clip to Applicable device FrameMemory8Clip Mode Normal a Playback mode Recue b a Normal mode Loop c As for Frame Memory 1 Clip to Frame Memory 8 Clip settings are ignored and operation mode is fixed to Normal b Recue mode c Loop mode Cue Device 1 to 12 FrameMemory1Clip to Applicable device FrameMemory8Clip Timecode Current a hh mm ss ff Start point timecode hh hours
399. ked to the Error Popup button in the error status menu On If a device error occurs displays ERROR on the menu title button Off If a device error occurs does not display ERROR on the menu title button Error Messages Appearing in a Message Box Corresponding to the content of the message an icon appears Icon Title EJ Arend Key Frame 4 Append Key Frame cannot be executed egister is not active User1 ey Frame Message Icon Append Key Frame Message Description Append Key Frame cannot be executed FMx is not assigned to a user region user region 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Append Key Frame but it failed because the frame memory output FMx is not assigned to a 7331 4 Make the assignment in the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config gt User1 8 Config menu and try again Append Key Frame cannot be executed Key Frame Register is locked UserX 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Append Key Frame using a locked register UserX region Unlock the register 300 Error Messages Icon Message Append Key Frame cannot be executed Key Frame Register is busy UserX Description 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to
400. keyframe is to follow 4 Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of the last keyframe in the loop range end point Here by way of example keyframe 5 is the end point FM 2TO 5 5 Press the ENTR button to confirm the entry Creating and Editing Keyframes soueyAey se deyo 157 seweyAoy 1 Ja deyo 158 The display changes as follows prompting you to enter the loop count COUNT 6 Enter the loop count Here by way of example 15 is entered To specify a loop count enter a number in the range 1 to 99 To specify an endless loop enter 0 zero COUNT 15 T Press the ENTR button to confirm the entry The start point end point and loop count that you have set are reflected in the Timeline menu If you enter the loop count as 0 endless loop the count is shown as inf infinity 8 Press the EXIT button The KF LOOP button lights green To change the keyframe loop settings While the KF LOOP button is lit green press it turning it orange and then change the loop range and count using the same procedure as in Creating a new keyframe loop p 157 Executing a keyframe loop Press the RUN button The set loop range is executed repeatedly for the set loop count number of times The total loop count and the number of loops remaining are displayed in the timeline menu If the loop count is infinite inf the remaining number is not sh
401. keyframe is what you modify In constant duration mode amp p 146 modification is only possible when the edit point is on a keyframe 3 Using image transformations or adding special effects modify the keyframe 4 Press the MOD button Modifying more than one keyframe simultaneously You can modify a number of keyframes simultaneously There are three different operating procedures e Modifying from the edit point to a particular keyframe e Modifying all keyframes in the effect e Modifying the keyframes in a specified range The different procedures for these cases are now described To modify from the edit point to a particular keyframe 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect at the first keyframe of the range to be modified 3 Carry out the necessary modifications 4 Press the FROM TO button This switches the memory recall section to numeric keypad entry mode The alphanumeric display shows the current keyframe number and the indication TO 5 Enter the number of the last keyframe to be modified from the numeric keypad and press the ENTR button to confirm The FROM TO button lights green 6 Press the MOD button Alternatively hold down the SHFT button and press the MOD button For the difference in the result amp Differences in the changes when a number of keyframes are modified p 155 To modify all keyframes in the
402. l Panel GPI Input Settings amp p 230 The format converter list appears Select the format converter that you want to set from the list In the lt FC Input Output gt group press H Set or L Set to set the high level or low level respectively Making Control Panel GPI Output Settings You can set the GPI output ports and trigger type and make the action settings 1 2 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt GPI Output menu 7325 3 Select the setting In the lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger type J L Rising Edge The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open circuit or drives the output high and holds this state for the specified pulse width 6 7 Falling Edge The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted or drives the output low and holds this state for the specified pulse width X Any Edge Each time the trigger occurs the relay contacts are alternately closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low Status Depending on the status the relay contacts are closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low No Operation The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level Select the pulse width and timing No Parameter Adjustment 3 Pulse Width Pulse width 4 Timing Output timing a 1 Field 1 2 Field 2 3 Any When gt C is selected as th
403. l down menu select Local Disk or Removable Disk 3 Select a directory 4 Press Rename 5 Enter a new name of not more than eight characters and press Enter Deleting a Directory 1 Open the File gt Configure gt Directory menu 7171 2 In the device selection pull down menu select Local Disk or Removable Disk 3 Select a directory 4 Press Delete 5 Check the message then press Yes Copying Files between Different Unit IDs Switcher files on a local disk or removable disk are handled separately for each unit ID p 211 With the normal file copy operation it is not possible to copy files between different unit IDs To copy files between different unit IDs grouped by category use the following procedure The following operation applies to frame memory data 1 Open the File gt Configure gt Unit ID Copy menu 7172 2 Inthe Unit ID Copy menu press the category selection section at the top right of the screen S operating device selection section on the right list specify the destination storage location N O Press Copy 8 Check the message then press Yes If there is already data present in the copy destination note that this will overwrite all of the data Saving Files Recalled by Autoload If you save effect setting data frame memory image files and so on in the PWON_LD directory on a local disk then when the system is powered on this data is re
404. l menu operations 6114 Key Frame gt DME User PGM All menu operations 6211 1 Effect gt Master Timeline gt Store gt Edit M E 2 DME region settings 6221 to Effect gt Effect 1 99 M E 2 DME region selection and settings 6227 6231 to Effect gt User DME Wipe Effect 101 All menu operations 6237 199 282 Menus of Disabled Operations and Settings Menu Disabled operation setting Number Path 6241 to Effect gt User DME Wipe Effect 201 All menu operations 6247 299 6311 1 Snapshot gt Master Snapshot gt Store M E 2 DME region settings gt Edit 6321 to Snapshot gt Snapshot M E 2 DME region selection and settings 6327 6332 to Snapshot gt Wipe Snapshot M E 2 region selection and settings 6337 6342 to Snapshot gt DME Snapshot M E 2 region selection and settings 6347 6351 to Snapshot gt Key Snapshot M E 1 Key5 to 8 M E 2 Key1 to 8 P P Key5 to 8 selection and settings 6357 6411 1 Shotbox gt Register gt Store Recall M E 2 DME region settings gt Edit 7121 File gt Effect gt Effect 1 99 M E 2 DME region selection 7121 1 File gt Effect gt Effect 1 99 gt File Edit M E 2 DME region selection 7122 File gt Effect gt User DME Wipe Effect All menu operations 101 199 7122 1 File gt Effect gt User DME Wipe Effect All menu operations 101 199 gt File Edit 7123 File gt Effect gt User DME Wipe Effect All menu operations 201 299
405. licating the pattern No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout a p 87 When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern No Parameter Adjustment 1 Aspect Aspect ratio a p 86 When turning Angle on in the lt Rotation gt group and inclining the pattern No Parameter Adjustment 1 Angle Rotation angle of pattern a p 86 When turning Speed on in the lt Rotation gt group and rotating the pattern at a constant rate No Parameter 1 Speed Adjustment Rotation speed of pattern a p 86 To interchange color 1 and color 2 press the Color Invert button turning it on Applying the zabton effects The zabton function and Fine Key p 71 cannot be turned on at the same time 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Edge menu 1112 press Zabton turning it on Adjust the following parameters You can change this pattern by pressing Pattern Select to open the menu for edge color mix dedicated wipe pattern selection Mix Pattern Select menu and make adjustments by pressing Pattern Adjust to open the menu for pattern adjustment Matte Adjust menu Mask Pattern Use the main mask Box or Pattern You can also press Pattern Select and i
406. ling a wipe snapshot p 90 except for pressing the DME WIPE button to select DME wipe snapshot mode You can change the indications for buttons 0 to 9 in the memory recall section to pattern images using the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Flexi Pad Mode menu 7326 3 Selecting the DME Wipe Pattern The operation of selecting the DME wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad is the same as the operation of selecting a wipe pattern p 90 except for pressing the DME WIPE button to select DME wipe snapshot mode DME Wipe Snapshots DME Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi Pad sedi IWA 9 Jeideuo 99 sedim AWC 9 Je deyo 100 Note however that the pattern numbers for DME wipe patterns have four digits p 264 Editing the DME Wipe Pattern By pressing the EDIT ENBL button to switch the memory recall section to editing mode you can edit the selected DME wipe pattern To exit from the editing mode press the EDIT ENBL button again or press the EXIT button The operation of the following buttons is the same as when editing a wipe pattern e EXIT button
407. list and in the selection window select the region You can select more than one region To select all regions press ALL 3 Press OK 4 Select a register To select all registers press ALL 5 Press Delete Register Operations in the Menus sowejyAey Ja deup 165 soweyAoy 1 Ja deyo 166 Attaching a name to an effect register 1 Open the Effect gt Effect 1 99 gt Rename menu 6227 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the list and in the selection window select the region You can select more than one region To select all regions press ALL Press OK Select a register Press Rename ao oa A Q Enter a name of not more than 8 characters and press Enter The following names cannot be used CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 Displaying a List of Effect Registers for Editing You can display a list of effect registers including status information whether data is present and so on then carry out lock copy delete and rename operations Displaying the list of effect registers with status information Press the menu title button at the top left of the Effect menu The Effect gt Status menu 6200 appears The status area shows a list of effect registers 1 to 99 Register name display For the same number the register name for th
408. ll Title e OK Installation already completed e On For installation but not completed e Error An error occurred during installation e Cancel Installation canceled Lower list For the device selected in the upper list this shows an automatically detected list of software that can be installed on the particular device Also software selected as a candidate for installation in the upper list is marked in the lower list with a bullet 3 if you are satisfied with the currently installed version of all items in the upper list skip to step 6 To change the items to be installed select the relevant device To display all related software Press Display All Software turning it on Not just the automatically detected software but the names of all related software for the selected device appear 4 inthe lower list select the software you want to install 5 Press Set The selection is reflected under Install and Title in the upper list 6 Press Install The Install box shows On confirming that this is to be installed To cancel this installation setting press Install once more making the box blank 7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 to confirm all software to be installed 8 Press Execute 9 Check the message then press Yes Reset and Initialization Installation and Device Setup dnas wajshs 9 sa deyo 215 dnjes wajyshs 9 se deyo 216 This carries o
409. ll an empty register the system state at that point is automatically captured as the first keyframe 4 Create the image you want to be the next keyframe 5 Press the INS button Creating and Editing Keyframes This inserts the current image as the second keyframe after the first keyframe Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create the required number of keyframes To insert a new keyframe before an existing keyframe Hold down the SHFT button and press the INS button to insert a new keyframe before the current keyframe Insertion Inserting keyframes To insert a keyframe in an existing effect use the following procedure 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect at the desired edit point 3 Create the image for the keyframe you want to insert 4 Press the INS button When the edit point is on a keyframe to insert the new keyframe before the existing keyframe hold down the SHFT button and press the INS button This inserts the current image as the new keyframe Inserting a keyframe may change the total duration of the effect For details amp Time Settings p 146 Modification Modifying keyframes 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect at the desired edit point When the edit point is on a keyframe this is what you modify If the edit point is between two keyframes the previous
410. lly assigned names ending with sequential numbers Example To assign sequential names to source signal 2 through source signal 4 1 In step 2 above set the Source No parameter to 2 and set the Num parameter to 3 Copying Cross Point Assign Tables The contents of a cross point assign table can be copied to another cross point assign table and vice versa The contents of a sub table cannot be copied to the main table 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Table Copy menu 7322 8 2 Select the copy source and copy destination table numbers Cross Point Settings dnjes jeueg jouog Z sa deyD 225 dnjes jeued 04u00 7 Ja deyD 226 3 Press Copy 4 Check the message then press Yes Selecting Cross Point Assign Tables You can select the cross point assign table to be used for the M E 1 or PGM PST bank It is not possible to assign cross point tables 5 to 14 to a bus of a switcher operated by an MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel 1 mnte Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign menu 7322 select the bank or bus 2 Select a table 3 Press Table Assign Set Exporting Source Names and Destination Names To send the source names and destination names to the S Bus use the following procedure 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt XPT Assign gt Name Export menu 7322 9 2 Set the destination station ID No Parameter 1 Station ID
411. lowing functions e Next transition selection e Transition type selection e Wipe direction selection e Auto transition cuts e Device control CUE PLAY STOP e Pattern limit On Off e Independent key transition type selection e Independent key transition auto transition cuts AUTO TRNS KEY ON P RUN REWIND NORM REV and NORM REV buttons Flexi Pad a Shotbox recall macro recall some utility commands Inhibit Set Inhibit All Clear K SS Store and macro operating commands cannot be set to assigned buttons b In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key with an independent key transition the state inserted or not inserted prior to event registration is also saved in the macro When the macro is executed the event is only replayed if the key state matches the saved state Example For a macro with an event that inserts deletes a key when the macro is executed if the key was inserted it is deleted but otherwise nothing occurs as concerns keying e After setting a macro attachment to a button for which you can perform function replacement or function assignment if you change the function assignment to the button the macro attachment setting may disappear e After setting a macro attachment to a cross point button in the cross point control block if you change the function assignment to the button the macro attachment setting disappears Enabling and disabling macro
412. lternatively you can select the reverse arrangement whereby when the REWIND button is pressed this executes the action set for the first keyframe and when the RUN button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed In this case the Rewind Action setting is still valid For details about the setting operation amp Setting the First Keyframe When a Rewind is Executed p 236 Disk Recorder Extended VTR File Operations Material held on a disk recorder Extended VTR is managed in units of files You can recall a file to play it back Recalling a file Before playback and similar operations on a disk recorder Extended VTR it is first necessary to display a list of the files In the recalled list of files select the file you want to play back and open the file File list sharing You can connect multiple switcher Remote to Remote 4 ports to a single disk recorder Extended VTR You can share the recalled list of files between serial ports connected to the same disk recorder Extended VTR For details about file name settings amp Sharing disk recorder extended VTR file lists p 232 Refreshing recalling the disk recorder Extended VTR file list 1 Open the Device gt DDR VTR gt File List menu 5333 Two lists appear in the status area The upper list shows the selected device name and the currently selected file name register number and set file name The lower list shows a li
413. lti Viewer 7333 9 No Source Output Assign 7333 10 No FC Output Select 7333 11 No HF4 Transition 7334 No Preset Color Mix 7334 1 No Transition Curve 7334 2 No HF5 Key Wipe FM CCR 7335 No Show Key 7335 1 No Key Auto Drop 7335 2 No CCR 7335 3 No HF6 Link 7336 No Internal Bus Link 7336 1 No Link Bus Select 7336 2 No Link Table Select 7336 3 No GPI Link 7336 4 No GPI Link Adjust 7336 5 No M E Link 7336 6 No Key Transition Link 7336 7 No Menu Tree Menu Page No Default Recall VF3 Switcher HF7 Device Interface 7337 No Remote Assign 7337 1 No GPI Input 7337 2 No H L Set 7337 3 No GPI Output 7337 4 No AUX Control 7337 5 No DME SDI I F 7337 7 No Editor I F 7337 8 No VF6 Router Tally HF 1 Router 7361 No External Box Assign 7361 1 No HF2 Group Tally 7362 No HF3 Wiring 7363 No New 7363 1 No Modify 7363 2 No HF4 Tally Enable 7364 No New 7364 1 No Modify 7364 2 No HF5 Tally Copy 7365 No New 7365 1 No Modify 7365 2 No HF6 Parallel Tally 7366 No Set 7366 1 No gt HF7 Serial Tally 7367 No Source Assign 7367 1 No a 3 Diagnostic Menu Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 Error Info HF1 Error Status 7411 No HF2 Error Log 7412 No VF3 System Info HF1 LAN Status
414. m file A to file B set variable speed KF1 action Operating KF2 action setting status of file A setting Start Playback Cueup Variable Speed Playback at Cueup set variable speed Cueup Cueup Cueup Partial operating limitation KF1 action Operating KF2 action setting status of fileA setting Start Playback Variable Speed set Variable Speed Playback at Variable Speed set Cueup Cueup Variable Speed set a Failure to operate when variable speed is set to minus value However operates when the file B action is set to Start and then variable speed is set to minus after file B starts playing Play does not switch from file A to file B KF1 action Operating KF2 action setting status of file A setting Variable Speed Playback at Start set variable speed Cueup Cueup Start If play continues to show video of file A without switching to file B a Stop action is required in file A in order to switch to file B A A KF1 KF2 Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders VTR disk recorder Extended VTR timeline editing This section describes how to set an action at a keyframe point and how to edit the timeline For details about keyframe creation and editing operations amp Creating and Editing Keyframes p 153 To set an action in the menu 1 Open the Device gt DDR VTR gt Timeline menu 5332
415. m from the list of macro editing candidates and repeat this process as required Macro editing candidate list Shows the list of editing candidates for the selection from the editing button group O Insert Before button Inserts immediately before the event selected in the macro listing Append button Adds an empty row at the end of the macro listing Delete button Deletes the event selected in the macro listing Set button Reflects the item selected in the macro editing candidate list in the macro listing and editing buttons Store button Saves the results of the macro register or macro file editing Exit button Closes the Off Line Edit menu without saving the results of the macro register or macro file editing and returns to the File Edit menu Carrying out offline editing of macro events To insert an event Inthe macro listing select the event at the position where you want to insert and select one of the following To insert before the event selected in the list Press Insert Before To insert at the end of the list Press Append A blank row is added at the end of the macro listing 2 Press Contents in the editing button group The following event types appear in the macro editing candidate list Editing Macros using Menus soley p saydeup 189 soley p Jeideyup 190 e Event Event e Continue Event continuation Comment For details about the it
416. macro being executed stops e During macro editing even if you operate a fader lever with a macro attachment set the macro is not executed Menu Macros To disable a macro attachment setting In the cross point control block for the fader lever on which you want to disable the macro press the MCRO ATTCH ENBL button assigned to the Ist row turning it off In this state operating a fader lever with a macro attachment set does not execute the macro Menu Macros The term menu macro refers to the function whereby a sequence of menu operations is saved as data in memory so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same sequence of operations Using any of the menus in the following table you can edit menu macro registers and menu macro events Menu Function Operations Menu Macro Carry out menu e Recalling a register Register macro register and executing a menu menu editing menu macro macro e Recall a menu e Locking a register register macro register and Copying a register editing f execute a menu e Deleting a register macro e Naming a register Menu Macro Edit events ina menu Inserting an event Edit menu macro register e Deleting an event editing of e Modifying an event menu macro events Menu macro registers The area of memory that holds a menu macro is termed a menu macro register For each control panel there are 99 menu macro registers nu
417. made in the Setup menu Overview sjoysdeus z Jajdeyo 167 For details amp Interfacing with External Devices p 254 Clip Event Recall a frame memory clip immediately after the snapshot is recalled Auto Play Play a frame memory clip immediately after the snapshot is recalled Table of available attributes The attributes that can be used depend on the region as follows Yes Can be used No Cannot be used Attribute Region M E 1 PGM PST User 1 to 8 Cross point hold Yes Yes Key disable Yes No Effect dissolve Yes Yes Auto transition Yes No GPI outputs Yes Yes Clip event No Yes Auto play No Yes sjoysdeus z sajdeu9 168 Attribute display You can view the attributes of a snapshot in the Snapshot menu p 171 Temporary attributes When recalling a snapshot you can temporarily apply attributes distinct from the attributes set for each register These are called temporary attributes You can set temporary attributes when recalling a snapshot Bus override If you recall a snapshot while holding down an A or B bus button the selection of the signal on the A or B bus does not change when the snapshot is recalled This function is called bus override This function is effective when cross point hold is off and you want to temporarily maintain the cross point setting When cross point hold is on the above operation is not necessary
418. mal reverse p 95 However a key transition can only be specified when the following patterns are selected Patterns 7204 7207 7221 to 7224 If pattern number 1201 1202 1203 1205 1206 1208 1251 1701 or 1702 is selected direction cannot be used Edge You can apply a border or soft border p 95 If pattern number 1701 or 1702 is selected edge cannot be used Positioner You can move the DME wipe pattern or center of the effect to an arbitrary position Using the position select function you can also instantaneously move the pattern e 1031 7031 When this pattern number is selected with the progress of the transition the pattern center automatically moves initially from the set position toward the center of the screen p 96 In other words the effect obtained is the same as in a normal wipe with the positioner set to Auto Center 1201 to 1208 1221 to 1224 1251 7201 to 7208 7221 to 7224 When these pattern numbers are selected you can set the pattern position when the first transition completes Overview Pattern limit You can restrict the range of the transition as desired However this is not available for an independent key DME wipe in the transition control block For details Pattern Limits p 53 Size You can set the size of the image This can only be used when one of the following pattern numbers is selected e 1201 to 1208 1221 to 1224 1251 7201 to 7208 7
419. may result in noise Playing back ancillary data You can play ancillary data recorded in a frame memory clip by normal playback or an auto transition of the clip transition To play the ancillary data you must use the following procedure to enable playback of the ancillary data For details about playback operations amp Clip Playback p 112 After recording a frame memory clip the ancillary data state is enabled for playback To play back the clip set the signal output to through mode For details about the through mode setting amp Making Vertical Blanking Interval Adjustment and Through Mode Settings p 247 When the reposition function is on ancillary data cannot be played back Switching the reposition function between on and off may cause noise Only the AUX bus and edit preview bus can output ancillary data Carrying out file operations on a frame memory clip may result in the ancillary data being discontinuous or in noise occurring However if the first or last frame of the clip is deleted noise will not occur The audio sampling frequency is always 48 kHz When you play back the recorded embedded audio depending on the device to be used noise may occur at the playback start point and end point For details about devices that are used for playback contact your Sony service or sales representative 1 Open the Frame Memory gt Clip gt Ancillary Enable menu 2525 2 Select the frame
420. mber of parameters using Num Example Selecting frame memory folders No Parameter 1 No Adjustment Select folder No Parameter 2 Num Adjustment Number to select If the No parameter is set to 2 and the Num parameter is set to 5 five folders are selected starting from folder number 2 Setting Parameters a oo a m mark a The above mark on a function button indicates that there are parameters which can be adjusted When you press such a button you can set the parameters using one of the following methods e Press the parameter setting button corresponding to the parameter This displays the numeric keypad window allowing you to enter the desired value e Operation using the mouse p 38 In this manual the parameter setting operation is described as shown below The No column indicates the parameter setting button position 1 to 5 from the top Example To set the key wipe pattern key parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Size Pattern size 2 Soft Edge softness Density Key density You adjust the Size parameter pattern size using the first parameter setting button In addition when the MENU button in the device control block is pressed and turned on you can use the trackball and Z ring to adjust the parameters e Move the trackball on the x axis to adjust the first parameter and on the y
421. mbered 1 to 99 You can edit these in the Menu Macro Register menu Menu macro events The events that can be recorded in a menu macro are operations carried out in a menu For menu operations which are not recorded in menu macros amp Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro p 296 Recalling a Menu Macro Register and Executing a Menu Macro Menu macro operation is carried out by recalling a menu macro register e Menu macros and macros recalled with a control panel button operate independently Therefore to synchronize these adjustment of the execution timing is required e Events saved in a menu macro are executed according to the settings in setup and therefore if you change the setup settings it may not be possible to replay an event e When two menu macros are recalled successively the later coming macro is ignored as far as the first macro is being executed Recalling a Menu Macro Register 1 Open the Macro gt Menu Macro Register gt Recall amp Run menu 5431 Interval between events currently set Selected event number total number of events Currently recalled register Register number and name L E indication L indicates the register is locked E indicates an empty register Interval between events Number of register selected on the menu macro register list Current Menu Macro Register Current Event Current Interval Time No Event Data 1
422. me Mem HF1 Frame Memory 7151 No File Edit 7151 1 No HF2 Frame Memory Folder 7152 No HF3 File Name Data 7153 No File Edit 7153 1 No VF6 All External File HF 1 All 7161 No HF2 Import Export 7162 No VF7 Configure HF 1 Directory 7171 No HF2 Unit ID Copy 7172 No HF3 Group ID Copy 7173 No User Setup Menu VF1 Source Patch HF 1 Menu Page No Default Recall User Source Name 7211 No Exp Usr Src Name 7116 No File Edit 7116 1 No HF2 Patch Table 7212 No Patch Table Assign 7212 1 No Imp Usr Src Name 7117 No File Edit 7117 1 No Effect 1 99 7121 No File Edit 7121 1 No Snapshot 7131 No File Edit 7131 1 No Key Snapshot 7134 No File Edit 7134 1 No All 7161 No Menu Tree xlpueddy 277 xlpueddy 278 Engineering Setup Menu Menu Page No Default Recall VF1 System HF1 Network Config 7311 No HF3 Format 7313 No Aspect 7313 1 No Switcher Aspect 7313 2 No DME Aspect 7313 3 No Format Converter 7313 4 No HF4 Start Up 7314 No HF5 Initialize 7315 No HF6 Install Unit Config 7316 No Detail Information 7316 1 No License 7316 6 No License Management 7316 7 No Unit Config 7316 8 No Texture Package 7316 9 No Install
423. me settings VTR disk recorder recording Loop recue setting Saving a start point stop point start delay time variable speed and so on in a data register then recalling the register to control automatically from the Flexi Pad Cueup amp Play and VTR disk recorder Extended VTR timeline To control a VTR Extended VTR or disk recorder in this system the following settings are required Button assignment For a VTR Extended VTR or disk recorder connected to the switcher Remote 1 to Remote 4 ports assign a button in the device control block e Timecode source When using a VTR specify a reference signal used for determining the tape position For details Associating a Port with a Device Selection Button p 232 Serial Port Settings p 232 and Making Detailed Settings on the External Device Connected to the Serial Port p 232 Controlling the Tape Disk Transport To switch to VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode To control a VTR Extended VTR disk recorder with the device control block press the DEV button in the device control block turning it on to switch the device control block to the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode The button assignment changes as follows the SHIFT button is disabled in VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode
424. memory recall button user preference UtilityButton No a button Recall of function assigned to a 2nd row cross point button Key Bus Utility Button No Frame memory clip loop on off FMLoop Yes Menu macro recall and execution MenuMacroRun No Recall of frame memory clip ClipRecall No Record with device DeviceRecord Yes a For details about pause events Macro Execution p 182 Symbols and Parameters Table legend x Indicates an alphanumeric character n Indicates a numeral 0 to 9 Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description MEXpt ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank MEBus A B Key1 to Key4 Applicable bus Key1Source to Key8Source Utility1 Xpt 1 to 300 Main table cross point button number set in the Xpt Assign menu VideoKey Video Key Signal type selected on the applicable bus video signal or key signal Macro File Editing Rules 291 Symbol Parameter name Arguments Description AuxXpt AuxBus EditPreview AUX1 to AUX24 Applicable AUX bus FrameMemory1 FrameMemory2 Xpt 1 to 300 Main table cross point button number set in the Xpt Assign menu VideoKey Video Key Signal type selected on the applicable bus video signal or key signal MEAutoTransition ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank Time Current a 0 to 999 Transition rate number of frames a Mode in which the current value set on the transition control bloc
425. menu an attempt was made to execute Create Key Frame but it failed because the frame memory output FMx is not assigned to a user region 7331 4 Make the assignment in the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config gt User1 8 Config menu and try again Create Key Frame cannot be executed Key Frame Register is locked UserX 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Create Key Frame using a locked register UserX region Unlock the register Create Key Frame cannot be executed Key Frame Register is busy UserX 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to Create Key Frame using a register UserX region into which files are being loaded Try again after file loading has finished Create Key Frame cannot be executed Key Frame Register is being edited UserX 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Create Key Frame using a register UserX region with which a keyframe creating or editing operation is proceeding Try again after the keyframe operation has finished Create Key Frame cannot be executed There is no free Key Frame UserX 2515 Frame Memory gt Still gt Create gt Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Create Key Frame for a UserX region with insufficient usable keyfram
426. menu selection buttons e Press the menu page number button at the upper left of the menu screen to display the top menu window then enter 7411 or 7412 and press Enter The Diagnostic menu appears 2 Press VF1 Error Info The error information menu appears 3 Press either of the following buttons HF1 Error Status Displays the Error Status menu HE2 Error Log Displays the Error Log menu Error Status menu The Error Status menu lists currently occurring error information listed with the most recent information at the top When an error has been cleared the error disappears from the list Q No Date Time Device Refresh Status button Error Popup button No This is a sequential number assigned to the error status Date Time This shows the date and time the error occurred Device This shows the device on which the error occurred Status This shows the details of the error Refresh Status button This refreshes the list display O Error Popup button This selects whether or not to display ERROR on the menu title button when an error occurs This button is linked to the Error Popup button in the error log menu On If a device error occurs displays ERROR on the menu title button Off If a device error occurs does not display ERROR on the menu title button Error Log menu The Error Log menu lists changes in the error status
427. minance Saturation Saturation Hue Hue Carrying out a color mix for the edge fill matte If you selected Matte for the border or soft border edge fill you can combine color 1 and color 2 For the combination you can use not only a normal wipe generator pattern but also the dedicated color mix pattern 1 Inthe lt Edge Fill gt group of the Edge Direction menu select Matte and press Matte Adjust The Matte Adjust menu 1154 1 appears 2 Inthe lt Edge Matte gt group press Mix Color turning it on 3 Inthe lt Mix Pattern gt group make one of the following selections Wipe Use the wipe pattern selected for the transition Pattern Use the dedicated pattern 4 Depending on the selection in step 3 set the following parameters When Wipe is selected No Parameter 1 Size Adjustment Pattern size 2 Soft Edge softness When Pattern is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 Size Pattern size 2 Soft Edge softness 3 Pattern Pattern number a Wipe Pattern List p 264 6 To adjust colors 1 and 2 turn on Color1 or Color2 respectively then adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Luminance Luminance Saturation Saturation Hue Hue You can also select the pattern in the Matte Adjust menu by pressing Mix Pattern Select and selecting the pattern in the Mix Ptn Select menu 1
428. mory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if there is no data between two marker frames Cannot find symbol file 8 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if a marker frame file was not found Clip frame error 10 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if a clip frame count is invalid internal processing error Clip not found 12 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if the specified clip does not exist Clip is playing or being edited 13 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if the specified clip is being played back or edited Error Messages xipueddy 303 Message Clip register error 14 Description 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if the specified register number data cannot be processed internal processing error Can t extract pair clip 15 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message
429. mp Creating and Editing Keyframes p 153 For the action setting or P Bus timeline editing use the Device menu You can save the data set in the Device menu in keyframe effect registers Recalling the register starts execution of the keyframe effect and when this reaches the keyframe point at which actions are set action commands are output to external devices through the 9 pin serial port assigned to P Bus Using the P Bus timeline function requires the P Bus control mode to be set to Timeline Make this setting in the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface menu 7325 p 232 Setting an action 1 Open the Device gt P Bus Timeline gt P Bus Timeline menu 5321 Control of P Bus Devices Two lists appear in the status area The left list displays the combinations of devices and actions The settings in this list will be saved as keyframe point data The right list is for selecting the action 2 Select the ID 0 to 23 of the device you want to set 3 Select the action You can select from 2 Store 3 Recall and 4 Trigger 4 Set the register number or trigger number The indication for the 3rd parameter changes to reflect the selection of Store Recall or Trigger No Parameter Adjustment Store No Register number for Store 3 Recall No Register number for Recall Trigger No Trigger number 5 Press Set Repeat steps 2 to 5 if setting other devices
430. n To specify the direction of rotation press X or Y To adjust perspective press Z Resizer s y yp Jajdeyo 77 shay y1 dey9 78 Hold the ASP LOC or ROT button down while carrying out the operation of step 5 to enable fine adjustment fine mode 5 Use the trackball for the operation Entering parameters 1 In the device control block press the X Y or Z button turning it on The Flexi Pad enters a mode in which you can enter parameters for the selected axis 2 Enter a parameter value with the numeric keypad in the memory recall section The number of significant digits after a decimal point is 4 3 Press the ENTER button To enter a difference from the current value You can enter difference values by pressing the button entering the difference from the current value and pressing the TRIM button to confirm The button toggles between plus and minus each time it is pressed Resetting parameters Pressing the CTR button in the device control block sets the current three dimensional parameter values to the closest detent points To reset three dimensional parameter values to the defaults for the current transformation operation mode press the CTR button twice in rapid succession Clearing resizer effects To clear two dimensional transform and rotation parameters only and set the initial state In the device control block press th
431. n in the range 0 to 100 This transition type is not available for an independent key transition d When operating from the M E 1 bank for example open the M E 1 gt Misc gt Transition menu 1171 2 Inthe lt Transition Type gt group select Super Mix 3 Adjust the output levels No Parameter A Gain B Gain Adjustment Background A output level Background B output level Color Matte Settings You can specify the color matte that is inserted during preset color mix by luminance saturation and hue values Also in place of a color matte you can use an image selected on the utility bus e This transition type is not available for an independent key transition e In the multi program mode you can use a preset color mix only when selecting the background for the next transition One stroke mode and one time mode e You can make a setting such that a preset color mix is carried out in a single transition This is called one stroke mode When the bus fixed mode is selected in the Setup menu a preset color mix is always carried out in the one stroke mode e You can also make a setting such that when a preset color mix is completed the next transition switches to the previous transition type automatically This is called one time mode When only the background is changed Current video Color matte New video When a key is inserted Key fades out
432. n control block Independ Trans Rate Independent transition rate 2 If you selected Independ Trans Rate in step 1 adjust the following parameter No Parameter Adjustment 1 Transition Rate Independent transition rate Executing an Auto Transition The following two modes can be used Cut A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video When the next transition is a key transition the key cuts in or out instantaneously Auto transition The transition from the current video to the new video is carried out automatically at a constant rate using the transition effect selected as the transition type You can set the transition rate in advance p 52 7 KEY3 KEY PRIOR PRIOR SET AEE MIX DME gogogo AUTO co Bi nora KEY4 WIPE NORM REV REV TRANS Pvw CUT button Fader lever AUTO TRANS button Transition control block To execute a transition on a switcher bank by a button operation use the following procedure in the transition control block To carry out an instantaneous cut transition Press the CUT button To carry out a gradual transition Press the AUTO TRANS
433. n number above 121 is selected execution of Delete is impossible If Delete execution attempts to change a signal assignment to a button number above 121 the move ends when the signal assigned to 120 moves to 119 and the signals assigned to numbers 121 and above are maintained Creating tables 1 to 14 When creating tables 1 to 14 in the same way as when creating the main table you can assign the same signal to more than one button number or delete currently assigned signals However assignment of video and key combinations is impossible 1 mnte Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign menu 7322 press Table Button Assign The Table Button Assign menu 7322 1 appears The table number appears on the upper left part of the status area The left part of the status area shows the cross point button numbers video and key pair numbers video signal source names and source numbers and key signal source names and source numbers When the shift button is pressed the number column is distinguished by color Cross Point Settings The right part shows the video and key pair numbers and the names of video signals and key signals set in the main table The Table Button Assign menu also allows you to access the Main V K Pair Assign menu and the Src Name Src Color menu 2 Select the table number No Parameter 1 Table No Adjustment Selection of the table to be set 3 Select the button number
434. n of color 1 and color 2 using a wipe pattern generated by the dedicated pattern generator 1 mnte lt Edge Fill gt group of the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Edge menu select Matte then press Matte Adjust 2 Inthe lt Edge Matte gt group select Mix Color turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters Key Adjustments Menus No Parameter Adjustment 1 Size Pattern size 2 Soft Edge softness of the pattern 3 Pattern Pattern number a The pattern is the same as the wipe For details Wipe Pattern List p 264 To select the pattern display the Mix Pattern Select menu by pressing Mix Pattern in the edge fill Matte Adjust menu After selecting one of the patterns patterns 1 to 24 displayed in the Mix Pattern Select menu you can adjust the following parameters No Parameter 1 Size Adjustment Pattern size 2 Soft Edge softness of the pattern Adjust color 1 and color 2 To adjust colors 1 and 2 turn on Color1 or Color2 respectively then adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Luminance Luminance Saturation Saturation Hue Hue If required set the pattern modifiers When turning Position on and setting the pattern position No Parameter Adjustment 1 Position H Horizontal position 2 Position V Vertical position a p 85 When turning Multi on and rep
435. n snapshot files but the procedure is similar in the other menus Viewing Detailed File Information As an example to view detailed snapshot file information carry out the following procedure 1 Open the File gt Snapshot gt Snapshot menu 7131 The status area shows the device status and a list of files present on the device File Edit buttons 2 Press File Edit The file details appear reference region file name creation date regions including data in table form Device selection area Region selection area USR DME Detail display area Selecting a particular file displays more detailed information about that file in the detail display area at the top right of the file list In the Frame Memory menu the following item is also shown Pair In the case of a pair file P is shown Selecting Regions You can carry out a file operation on a number of regions simultaneously However a region selection is not required for the following files Key memory Shotbox Macro Macro attachment Frame memory Setup Initial status User setup User source name In the above list for setup and initial status you can similarly separate the files to be operated on by device in a way similar to the region selection To make a region selection 1 Press the region selection area at the top right of the screen see previous figure The region selection window appears
436. n the corresponding pattern adjustment menu change the pattern To adjust the color press Zabton Color and adjust the following parameters No Parameter Luminance Adjustment Luminance Saturation Saturation Hue Hue AJO mM Density Density No Parameter Adjustment 1 Size Pattern size Soft Edge softness of the pattern Density Density Mask shey yp Jajdeyo The mask function can be used to mask off unneeded parts of a key or background or to remove defects Using a mask For example to perform settings for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 Open the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Main Mask menu 1113 2 Inthe lt Mask Type gt group select the mask type If in the pattern selection described below you select Mask Pattern and Box for the main mask the Size parameter here cannot be adjusted Set Size in the Main Mask menu To adjust the pattern and color press Zabton Adjust The Zabton Adjust menu appears In the lt Zabton Pattern gt group select the pattern Key Wipe Use a key wipe You can change this pattern by pressing Pattern Select to open the menu for key wipe pattern selection Pattern Select menu and make adjustments by pressing Pattern Adjust to open the menu for pattern adjustment Wipe Adjust menu Key Edge Pattern Use a color mixing pattern for key edge
437. n the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Macro menu 7326 6 2 Inthe lt Macro Execution Mode gt group select the macro execution mode Normal Normal execution mode Step Step execution mode 3 When making a macro attachment setting select whether or not to enable cross point button operations in the lt Attachment Setting Mode gt group With Btn Function Enables cross point button operations W o Btn Function Disables cross point button operations 4 Using the lt Macro 2nd Recall Mode gt group set the action to occur during macro execution or when a macro is stopped if the cross point button with the macro attachment set is pressed again Continue Resumes execution of a macro that has been stopped executing macros continue execution Cancel Terminates execution of a stopped or executing macro 5 Using the lt Macro Recall Override gt group buttons set the action to occur during macro execution or when a macro is stopped if another macro is recalled Disable Ignores macro recalls Screen Saver and Other Settings Enable Executes other macros To have a cross point button with a macro attachment set lit continuously Press Attchd Btn Indication turning it on When the MCRO ATTCH ENBL button in the cross point control block is on the cross point button with a macro attachment is constantly lit green Screen Saver and Other Settings Using the Menu Display Screen Saver
438. n the macro creation event list For details about the display Macro File Editing Rules p 289 3 In the macro register listing press lt Prev or gt Next to select the position where you want to insert the created event 4 Select any of the following To insert before the event selected in the list Press Insert Before To insert after the event selected in the list Press Insert After This inserts the created event either before or after the specified event In the following cases Insert Before and Insert After are disabled and it is not possible to insert the event If the memory or register is full e The size of the created macro event is larger than the memory or register space available e When multiple events are selected e When the number of events has reached 99 e When not in macro editing mode 1 While a macro is being executed on the control panel when macro saving has been executed or when the EXIT button in the Flexi Pad has been pressed 5 Operate the control panel to save the editing result To delete an event 1 In the macro register listing press lt Prev or gt Next to select the event you want to delete To select all events in the register press ALI Editing Macros using Menus 2 Press Delete If not in macro editing mode Delete is disabled and it is not possible to delete the selected event 1 While a macro is being executed on th
439. nal HDD is correctly connected Format operation failed 10 Format operation failed 11 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore When Restore was pressed in the above menu formatting of the HDD failed Cannot access the partition 12 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Restore but the logical drives of the external HDD could not be accessed Check that the external HDD is correctly formatted Cannot access the directory 20 Cannot access the directory 21 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Restore but the directory of the external HDD could not be accessed The external HDD is busy 22 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Restore but the external HDD was busy and could not be accessed Try again after you check that the access lamp of the HDD or the indicator of the menu is turned off No file was found 40 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Restore but the file to be written into the external HDD was not found Restore operation failed 42 Restore operation failed 43 Restore operation failed 46
440. napshot Attributes An individual snapshot may also have attached special conditions relating to switcher operation when the snapshot is recalled These conditions are called attributes of the snapshot and can be applied when the snapshot is saved or recalled Types of attribute There are seven snapshot attributes as follows Xpt Hold cross point hold When the snapshot is recalled the cross point button selection remains unchanged This can be set independently for each bus Key Disable When the snapshot is recalled the key settings remain unchanged This can be set independently for each keyer A Setup menu allows you to select whether or not the key on off state should also remain unchanged For details about the setting operation amp Setting the operation mode of the key bus XPT HOLD button p 251 Effect Dissolve The transition from the state before the snapshot recall to the snapshot settings is carried out smoothly by a dissolve The dissolve duration can be set in the Snapshot menu Auto Transition An auto transition starts the instant the snapshot is recalled The auto transition setting is valid only for M E 1 and PGM PST If both effect dissolve and auto transition are selected as attributes the auto transition takes precedence GPI Output A GPI output is sent to the allocated GPI port the instant the snapshot is recalled The trigger type depends on the switcher GPI output settings
441. nce region amp Reference region p 144 The alphanumeric display shows the name of the reference region and the number of the register previously recalled for that region Press the BANK SEL button and select the desired bank with the register you want to recall For details about the method of bank selection Banks and Registers p 168 To apply a temporary attribute p 167 press the EDIT ENBL button and then press the TEMP ATTR button you can now select the temporary attribute with the following buttons EFF DISS button Effect dissolve DUR xxx button Effect dissolve duration where xxx is the currently set value AUTO TRNS button Auto transition XHLD xxx button Bus cross point hold where xxx is the applicable bus To apply a temporary attribute with the cross point control block buttons press the following buttons turning them on Temporary Button to press attribute to be applied A B bus cross point XPT HOLD button in the hold background A B bus Key cross point hold XPT HOLD button in the key bus Key disable XPT HOLD button in the key bus a When Xpt Hold mode is selected in the Setup menu b When Key Disable mode is selected in the Setup menu For details about the operation mode of the XPT HOLD button Setting the operation mode of the key bus XPT HOLD button p 251 The cross point hold and key
442. nd For example when the start command only is set for a keyframe playback starts from the current position in the same way as with a VTR no automatic cue up e During file playback to play the next keyframe at variable speed for the next keyframe set variable speed only and do not set the start point see figure below Playback at set playback variable speed A A A KF1 KF2 KF3 a At keyframe 2 set variable speed only and do not set the start point e When using a disk recorder with the VTR disk recorder timeline if you carry out the following sequence of operations the system may freeze on the frame of the start point Press the RUN button to play to a point close to the end of a file stop playback then press the RUN button once more In such cases first recall a different register then carry out the following sequence Recall the original register again press the REWIND button then press the RUN button e Some operating limitations apply when the video disk communications protocol is used These are explained with reference to the following figure which illustrates creation of a timeline that plays from the video of file A to the video of file B Operation with no problems KF1 action setting Start Operating status of file A Playback KF2 action setting Start Black video or still image appears momentarily when play switches fro
443. nd key edge cannot be used on some keyers For details amp Keyers that support resizer key edge p 62 Wipes A wipe is a transition from the current video stream to a new video stream using a wipe pattern Changing the background by means of a wipe is referred to as a background wipe and inserting or deleting a key with a wipe is termed a key wipe There are two types of wipe those that can be selected in a common transition and those that can be selected in an independent key transition You can also specify the wipe direction or set the pattern position applying various changes and modifiers to the selected wipe pattern For details see Chapter 5 Wipes amp p 83 M IAJOAC Ja deyD DME Wipes A DME wipe is a wipe transition that uses an image transformation effect to change from one video image to the next The patterns that can be used for a DME wipe are as follows Slide Squeeze Door Flip tumble Frame in out Picture in picture Mosaic and Defocus You can also specify the wipe direction or set the pattern position applying various changes and modifiers to the selected DME wipe pattern Resizer DME wipes Using the resizer you can carry out key DME wipes For details see Chapter 6 DME Wipes p 93 Frame Memory Frame memory is a function for using a still image or video frame memory clip as material for editing You can create a still imag
444. nd recalling shotbox registers or macro registers You can execute the utility functions from the cross point control block Executing a Utility with Cross Point Buttons in the 2nd Row You can use the bank 2nd row for utility shotbox operations To use this function you must first assign the utility shotbox function switch button UTIL SBOX to the 1st row For details about the assignment Assigning a Bus or Function to Ist Row Buttons p 235 1st row m JOUUOU 2nd row JOO Background A row Background B row You can assign any action to the cross point buttons For details about the assignment amp Assigning a Function to 2nd Row Cross Point Buttons p 229 Utility Execution Shotbox Chapter To execute the assigned action When the action is executing a shotbox register follow the procedure in Executing a Shotbox Function with Cross Point Buttons in the 2nd Row p 179 1 Press the UTIL SBOX assigned to the Ist row turning it on 2 Press the cross point button to which the desired action is assigned Shotbox The term shotbox refers to a function whereby for each specified region any snapshot or keyframe effect can be recalled simultaneously The simultaneous recall setting data such as region names snapshot numbers and keyframe effect numbers are stored in registers There are 99 regis
445. nding on the selected item the menu indications change Depending on the function if any one is on the status is shown by an orange bar as in the following figure 31 Names and Functions of Parts of the Menu sled Jo suonouny pue seweNn zsaideyo Sued JO suoloun4 pue sowen Zz Jeldeup 32 Input Process Status area This shows the status of the settings items controlled by the selected menu An orange frame appears around the parameter area relating to the displayed menu For each of the twelve areas pressing the display jumps to the related menu Function button area This shows the functions that can be operated in the currently selected menu by means of buttons Each function button corresponds to a function which can be set in the currently selected menu Press a button to enable the function display a parameter group and adjust the parameters or execute the function These buttons are grouped by function In the screen example the Key Bus and Matte function buttons constitute the lt Key Fill gt group Pressing a button turns it on and lights it showing the state State The function is enabled and the parameters can currently be adjusted Color Pale blue The function is enabled Execution button Pressing the button immediately executes the function Example Auto Start button in the Chroma Adjust menu When you press a function button that is
446. nding region as the new reference region For details about the precedence order for becoming the reference region amp Reference region p 144 The alphanumeric display shows the name of the reference region and the number of the register last recalled for that region 4 Press the BANK SEL button and select the desired bank with the register you want to save For details about the method of bank selection Banks and Registers p 168 5 Hold down the SNAPSHOT button and press the button in the memory recall section corresponding to the register in which you want to save If you press a button which is lit orange or yellow this overwrites the contents of the corresponding register The button you pressed is lit yellow and this completes saving To enter the number of the register to save using the numeric keypad After step 3 in Saving a snapshot amp p 169 press the 10 KEY button in the memory recall section This switches the memory recall section to the numeric keypad input mode and after pressing the STOR button lighting it yellow you can enter the desired register number from the numeric keypad The number you entered appears in the alphanumeric display To find an empty register press the period button without entering a number and the number of an empty register appears in the alphanumeric display Confirm the displayed number by pressing the ENTR button This saves
447. ndo a copy or swap Press Undo to return to the state before the copy or swap was carried out Copying using button operations You can copy keyer data using the key delegation buttons in the transition control block Basic button operation The basic button operation is to hold down the copy source button then press the destination button You can undo the last operation using Undo in the menu p 125 To copy from M E 1 key 1 to PGM PST key 2 While holding down the KEY 1 transition control block button in the M E 1 bank press the DSK2 transition control block button in the PGM PST bank Misc Menu Operations In the Misc menu you can carry out the following operations Enabling or disabling control from an external device Enabling or disabling side flags for each background bus of each of the switcher banks For details about the side flag function Side Flags p 128 Switching the safe title function on or off for each switcher output Displaying the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate for each of the switcher banks and changing the settings Port Settings for Control from an External Device Enabling or disabling control from an external device 1 Open the Misc gt Enable gt Port Enable menu 3211 The status area shows the setting status of each of the following ports e Switcher Remote S1 to Remote S2 ports RS 422A D sub 9 pin
448. ne frame delay Overview s y y Jajdeyo 63 shay y1 dey9 64 This function uses the resizer and therefore the normal effect of the setting is not obtained while using DME wipe or other effect that uses the resizer Edge fill When a border drop border or shadow modifier is selected you can select a signal to fill these edge effects edge fill The signal from the dedicated color matte generator is used for the edge fill In the case of an outline there is no edge fill signal selection because the key fill signal fills the outline and the rest of the image remains as the background For the emboss effect in place of the edge fill signal the emboss fill matte 1 and emboss fill matte 2 signals are used Masks A mask uses the background or a key to hide a part of the image If unwanted holes occur in the background or if a key is not the desired shape you can correct the problem with a mask For details about masking operations amp Mask p 73 Key mask and background mask There are two types of mask a key mask and a background mask Key mask This masks out a part of the key which will result in the background appearing Background mask This masks out a part of the background which will result in the key fill appearing Key mask Masked area box Background mask Main mask This uses the signal from the dedicated box generator provided on each k
449. nel Orange Selected but not as the reference channel Black Not selected The following information appears on the button Status display For a pair shows the status of the reference Thumbnail File output in progress Black Black signal output in progress Through Input image output in progress Freeze Freeze in progress Record Continuous image capture i e recording in progress Pair button Press this button turning it on to enable pair mode Q File selection area You can select from the displayed still image files or clip files File information detail display Pi AT CUBE 4BOX_W 6BOX i a CGWB00 CGWBOO Selected file When a pair file is selected each press switches the front and the back Thumbnail indications Still image files and clip files Still image files are displayed as gray buttons and clip files are displayed as yellow buttons Single files and pair files Pair files are displayed with a shadow and single files are displayed with no shadow Selected file Pale blue border When more than one file is selected only the first is pale blue and the remainders are orange If a pair file is selected each press switches the front and the back File information detail display For the selected file this shows the file name P if a pair file A if an ancillary data attached clip and the duration Frame memory folder selection area Sele
450. nel setup data saves the updated setup data in RAM in the switcher e In Resume mode amp p 2 3 even if the switcher is reset or powered off the data is preserved in RAM and recalled when the power is turned back on e In Custom mode amp p 2 3 the user defined settings user setup data saved in non volatile memory or factory default setup data held in ROM are recalled when a reset is made or the power is turned back on amp p 214 Note that the setup data in RAM can also be saved to the control panel local disk or removable disk Selecting the State at Start up T In the status area of the Engineering Setup gt System gt Start Up menu 7314 select the device to which the settings are to apply 2 Inthe lt Start Up Mode gt group select one of the following modes Resume When this is on Resume mode is enabled p 213 Custom When this is on Custom mode is enabled p 213 Selecting the State After Power on Resume mode is only valid when a switcher or control panel is selected for the setting 3 When Custom mode is selected in each of the lt Setup gt group and lt Initial Status gt group select one of the following User When this is on user defined settings are used for the Setup or Initial Status settings For the method of saving the user defined settings see the next item Factory When this is on factory default settings are used for the Setup or Initial Status settings
451. ng showing the type of event Correspondence between Events and Symbols p 290 parameter Shows details of an event Consists of parameter names and arguments and these must appear in pairs The number and type of parameters depends on the event Symbols and Parameters p 291 If the same parameter appears twice or more the last occurrence is valid Macro File Editing Rules xipueddy 289 xlpueddy 290 How to use Continue statements When a single parameter has more than one argument use a Continue statement The following example is of a snapshot event An event to recall a snapshot in region M E 1 is written as Event Snapshot Region MEI Register 1 Attribute Off Time Current In the Event statement only one region can be specified To specify region M E 1 and PGM PST use a Continue statement thus Event Snapshot Region MEI Register 1 Attribute Off Time Current Continue Snapshot Region PP Register 1 Attribut e Off Time Current To specify more than one argument for a region parameter follow the Event statement by a Continue statement on the next line File Name Set the file name as follows Example nnnnnnnn PNL_rrrr PMR nnnnnnnn In a file created on the switcher this is a register name automatically set by the switcher The name is limited to eight characters The following characters may not be used space comma dot lt
452. ng the fader lever 6 In the lt Bus Select gt group select Linked Bus link destination bus 7 Select the bus to be the link destination and press Bus Set Only when Linked Bus is selected AUX 1 to AUX 24 as Key are available 8 Select the link table and press Link Table Set No Parameter 3 Link Table No Adjustment Link table selection For more information about link tables amp Making Link Table Settings p 253 To release a link With the link selected press Clear Making Link Table Settings 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link gt Internal Bus Link gt Link Table Select menu 7336 3 2 Select the link source and link destination files No Parameter Adjustment 1 Link No Link to which setting applies 3 Link Table Link table selection No 3 To confirm the selection press Link Src Set This links the link destination signal to the signal selected as Main No To initialize the set source address Press Init Link Table Check the message then press Yes Linking Cross Point Buttons and GPI Output Ports To link cross point buttons or the CUT and AUTO TRANS buttons in the cross point control block and GPI output ports use the following procedure 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link gt GPI Link menu 7336 4 2 Select the GPI output port 3 Press GPI Link Adjust The GPI Link Adj
453. nt Reflects the tally state of the switcher only 3 Press Execute Assigning a Bus or Function to 1st Row Buttons Assigns keys AUX bus and other functions that are selectable in the 1st row of the cross point control block 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Key AUX Function Assign menu 7326 13 2 In the list on the left select the button Operation Settings dnyas jaued joujuoD Z Ja deuD 235 3 Select the bus or function you want to assign from the list on the right 4 Press Set dnjes jeued joujuoy Z4 Ja deyD Setting the Transition Rate Display Mode To determine whether to display transition rate values in menus and on the control panel in frames or as timecode values select either of the following in the lt Trans Rate Display gt group Frame Displays in frames Timecode Display as timecode SS FF Making Settings Relating to Effects To make settings relating to the functions used when carrying out keyframe effect operations use the following procedure 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Effect Mode menu 7326 2 2 Make the following settings as required Effect recall mode To select the state of the first keyframe when an effect is recalled select Recall the first keyframe is not recalled or Recall amp Rewind the first keyframe is recalled in the lt Recall Mode gt group Automatic first keyframe insertion When
454. nt of regions to the numeric keypad buttons However in the Flexi Pad it is not possible to assign a region to the EXIT button 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt Region Button Assign menu 7321 7 No Assign No Assign No Assign t Region MJE2 P P USER1 USER2 USER3 USER4 USERS Flexi Pad Area Sel Mem Rel Bin Area No Assign No Assign No Assign 4 4 5 6 7 USER USER USER USER 1 2 3 5 No Region M E2 USER2 USER3 USER4 USERS 8 9 10 11 2 PIP USER USER USER McRO en USERI 12 13 14 15 Flexi Pad Area Sel Region Sel Btn Area The left side of the status area shows region selection buttons the upper part of the right side shows a list of regions assigned to region selection buttons and the lower part shows a list of assignable regions 2 Inthe lt Flexi Pad Area Sel gt group press one of the following Region Sel Btn Area button When assigning a region to the region selection buttons Mem Rcl Btn Area button When assigning a region to the numeric keypad buttons in the memory recall section 3 Press the indication of the button for the assignment 4 Select one of the four regions for the setting 5 Select the region to be assigned M E and DME1 to DME8 regions are disabled even if assigned 6 Press Set to confirm the selection Only regions assigned here can be used for keyframe or snapshot recall To return the
455. o 16 characters and press Enter Selecting the Input to which the Frame Delay Function Applies 1 inte Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input menu P P 7332 select the input signal to which the settings apply Signal Input Settings dnyes 1 yAMS 8 194de49 243 You can select the input signals for which the frame delay function is enabled in advance 2 Adjust the following parameter No Parameter Adjustment 2 Frame Delay Delay amount dnyes 1 yA MS 8 Ja deyo 244 Selecting the Format Converter Conversion You can select the conversion up conversion or down conversion when the format converter is applied to an input Adjustment is not required for cross conversion Selecting the format converter inputs to be set The same settings are applied to the two groups of FC1 to FC4 and FCS to FC8 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input gt FC Adjust menu 7332 2 The following figure illustrates the case when FC1 to FC4 are set to up conversion Display switching button Edge Crop Edge Crop Edge Crop Conversion Default Frame Letter Box Squeeze Edge Crop Position Letter Box Position Position Center Enhancer Copy a This button does not appear when the frame delay function is enabled 2 Press FC Input 1 4 or FC Input 5 8 as required The list corresponding to the pressed button
456. o attachment the operation depends on a setting in the Setup menu For details amp Setting the Macro Execution Mode p 238 Recalling using a button in the memory recall section The buttons in the memory recall section can operate registers 1 to 99 The 99 registers are grouped in banks 0 to 9 For details about the correspondence between banks and registers Banks and Registers p 168 1 Press the MCRO button and then press the DRCT MODE button in the memory recall section The memory recall section changes to direct recall mode enabling macros to be recalled using the buttons 2 Use one of the following operations to select the bank To select bank 0 Press the BANKO button To select bank 1 Press the BANK1 button To select any of banks 0 to 9 Press the BANK SEL button then press the desired bank button any of 0 to 9 This selects the bank and the buttons in the memory recall section show the macro register state as follows Lit yellow Last recalled register Lit orange Register containing macro data Off Register in which nothing is saved 3 Press the button in the memory recall section corresponding to the register to recall The button you pressed lights yellow and the macro held in the corresponding register is recalled and executed The button you presse
457. o connectors have a loop through configuration Signal input to one connector can be output from the other connector If you will not be using the loop through output be sure to terminate the unused connector with the supplied 75 ohm terminator TALLY GPI IN tally general purpose interface input 1 to 18 and TALLY GPI OUT tally general purpose interface output 1 to 48 connectors D sub 25 pin Output tally data created with the control panel of the MVS 3000 system open collector These connectors can also be used as GPI output ports You can also input trigger signals as GPI inputs Input and output settings are made on the control panel of the MVS 3000 system SERIAL TALLY connector D sub 9 pin RS 422A Output tally data created with the control panel of the MVS 3000 system OUTPUTS 1 to 16 connectors BNC type These connectors output serial digital signals You can assign them as program output preview output AUX output and so on Make output assignments on the MVS 3000 system control panel For details about assignable signals amp Signal Output Settings p 246 PRIMARY INPUTS 1 to 32 connectors BNC type These connectors allow you to input up to 32 serial digital video signals 1 For information about devices that can be connected contact your Sony representative Power Supply and Connectors 41 Sed JO suonouny pue seweN z 13 deyo Sued JO suoouny pue sowen Zz Jel
458. o move the events To insert the move target events after the edit point press the PSTE button To insert the move target events before the edit point hold down the SHFT button and press the PSTE button Copying events 1 2 Specify the edit point for the start of the range to be copied To copy a number of events in a single operation press the FROM TO button or the ALL button If you press the FROM TO button specify the event range For how to specify a range of events amp Modifying a particular range of events p 185 Macro Operations in the Flexi Pad soley p saydeup 185 soley p Jeideyp 186 3 Press the COPY button This copies the specified events and stores it in the paste buffer 4 Move to the edit point which is the destination within the macro to which you want to copy the events 5 To insert the copied events after the edit point press the PSTE button To insert the copied events before the edit point hold down the SHFT button and press the PSTE button Inserting a pause event 1 Press the PAUS button 2 If required press the AUTO INS button to toggle the auto insert mode on or off 3 Enter the pause duration 0 or 1 to 999 frames 4 Press the ENTR button If auto insert mode p 84 is on this sets the pause duration and inserts the pause event If auto insert mode is off continue to step 5 5 If auto insert mode is off
459. o set it on and adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Width Width 2 Position Position 3 Density Density a The Density adjustment only affects the key edge This can be adjusted separately from Key Density and if Key Density is set to 0 00 only the embossed edge effect can be applied To make edge fill adjustments carry out the settings in step 6 Press Edge Matte and adjust the color parameters for the edge fill signal Parameter group 1 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 Luminance Luminance 2 Saturation Saturation 3 Hue Hue No Parameter Adjustment 1 Top Key top edge position 2 Left Key left edge position 3 Right Key right edge position 4 Bottom Key bottom edge position Parameter group 2 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Phase Key horizontal position 2 V Phase Key vertical position e In the emboss function it is not possible to set Fine Key on e When the edge type is normal drop border or When the edge type is outline in place of the edge fill signal the selected key fill signal fills the outline and elsewhere remains as the background You can also press the Matte Adjust button to display the Matte Adjust menu and adjust the single color or two color combination color matte shadow enabling the Fine Key function keeps Key Drop on To set the key drop mode In the Edge
460. oBlack No Auto transition and take in independent key transitions KeyAutoTransition Yes Key insertion and deletion in independent key transitions KeyCut Yes Macro File Editing Rules Event Symbol Using Continue Selection of independent key transition type KeyTransitionType No VTR DDR clip start point setting StartTc Yes VTR DDR clip playback Play Yes VTR DDR clip stop Stop Yes VTR DDR clip cue up Cue Yes VTR DDR clip fast forward FF Yes VTR DDR clip rewind Rewind Yes Disk recorder Extended VTR file recall DiskFileLoad No Recall snapshot Snapshot Yes Recall key snapshot KeySnapshot Yes Recall wipe snapshot WipeSnapshot Yes Recall DME wipe snapshot DMEWipeSnapshot Yes Recall shotbox Shotbox No Recall master snapshot MasterSnapshot No Recall master timeline MasterTimelineRecall No Recall effect TimelineRecall Yes Execute effect TimelineRun Yes Rewind keyframe TimelineRewind Yes Fast forward effect TimelineFF Yes Effect execution direction selection normal TimelineDirectionNormal Yes Effect execution direction selection reverse TimelineDirectionReverse Yes a Effect execution direction selection normal reverse on TimelineNormalReverseOn Yes Effect execution direction selection normal reverse off TimelineNormalReverseOff Yes Pause Pause No Recall of function assigned to
461. ocessed Key menu 1115 press Resizer turning it on 2 Press Border Crop The Border Crop menu appears 3 Press Border turning it on 4 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left and right borders 2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top and bottom borders 3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all four borders 4 Density Border density To apply color to a border T In the lt Border Mode gt group of the Border Crop menu press Flat Color 2 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Luminance Luminance 2 Saturation Saturation Resizer s y y Jaydeyo 79 shay y1 dey9 80 No Parameter 3 Hue Adjustment Hue To soften the inner edge of a border 1 Inthe Border Crop menu press Border Soft 2 Set the following parameter No Parameter 1 Inner Soft Adjustment Border inner softness To apply a beveled light edge Inthe lt Border Mode gt group of the Border Crop menu press Beveled Light Edge 2 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Top Position of top side 2 Left Position of the left side 3 Right Position of the right side 4 Bottom Position of the bottom side 5 All Position of all four sides 3 Press Border Soft 4 Set the following parameters
462. ode of XPT HOLD button Key Disable The XPT HOLD button of the key bus functions not only as a cross point hold button but also as a key disable button When the XPT HOLD button is on recalling a snapshot or keyframe effect does not Settings Relating to Keys Wipes Frame Memory and Color Correction dnjes 1eyoms 8 4a deyD 251 dnyes 1 yA MS 8 Je deyo 252 reflect the key settings including the cross point selection information Key Disable with Status Same as Key Disable and further disables the reflection of the key on off status Xpt Hold The XPT HOLD button of the key bus functions as a cross point hold button When the XPT HOLD is on recalling a snapshot or keyframe effect does not reflect the cross point selection information To change the cross point hold attribute of a snapshot If you select Key Disable above this also applies key disable to the cross point hold attribute If you select Key Disable With Status the key disable function is applied including the key on off status This setting is only reflected in the operation of the XPT HOLD button when the XPT HOLD button operating mode is set to All Bus Note that the snapshot cross point hold attribute is also valid for settings other than All Bus Setting the operation mode when the pattern limit is released In the lt Pattern Limit Transition gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt K
463. of source signal 2 to CAM2 The name CAM3 is assigned automatically to source signal 3 and the name CAM4 is assigned automatically to source signal 4 Setting the Cross point Button Color for Each Signal You can set the color of cross point buttons for background A bus and background B bus on the M E and P P banks 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Src Name Src Color Select menu 7322 6 2 Select the target color Primary33 to Primary48 and signal names relating to DME and M E 2 are disabled even if selected 3 Inthe lt Source Color gt group press one of User Color 1 to User Color 3 To change the color assigned to User Color 1 to 3 1 Press the User Color Select button The User Color Select menu 7322 12 appears 2 Select the object to set in the Target field on the left 3 Select the desired color in the Color field on the right The selected color is displayed in the list on the left 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to change colors as required 5 Press Execute No Parameter Adjustment 1 Source No Source signal selection 2 Num Number of source signals to be selected 3 Press Source Name 4 Enter a name of not more than 16 characters then press Enter Sequential names for multiple signals When you specify a number at the end of a signal name all of the signals in the range selected are automatica
464. oint hold attribute in the lt Attribute Xpt Hold gt group select the appropriate bus A setting in the Setup menu determines whether key disable is applied to cross point hold or not For details amp Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings p 251 2 Select the following attributes in the lt Attribute gt group as required Effect Dissolve Apply effect dissolve Auto Transition Apply auto transition GPI Output Apply GPI output When selected set the GPI number Deleting a snapshot 1 2 3 Open the M E 1 gt Misc gt Snapshot menu 1177 and press Delete As required press Bank Sel to change the bank Press the button for the number or name you want to delete Renaming a snapshot register 1 2 Open the M E 1 gt Misc gt Snapshot menu 1177 and press Rename As required press Bank Sel to change the bank Press the number or name button for the name you want to change Enter the new name and press Enter Snapshot Operations in the Menus sjoysdeus z Jejdeup 175 xoqjoyS AUINN L Ja deuD 176 Utility Shotbox Utility Execution The utility function refers to a function whereby you can assign an arbitrary action or a shortcut for frequently used menu to a particular button then instantly recall the action or menu by pressing the button The functions you can assign include menu shortcuts enabling disabling functions recalling utility commands a
465. oint to the event immediately following the current macro event press the gt gt NEXT button To move the edit point to the event immediately preceding the current macro event press the lt lt PREV button To move to an edit point by specifying an event number the number showing the position of the event in the macro execution sequence press the GO TO EVNT button then enter the event number and confirm with the ENTR button Inserting an event 1 Specify the edit point p 184 If required press the AUTO INS button to toggle the auto insert mode on or off Create the event When auto insert mode amp p 184 is on the event is automatically added to the macro When auto insert mode is off proceed to step 4 When auto insert mode is off press the INS button Repeat steps 3 and 4 to insert the required events in the macro Modifying a single event 1 2 3 4 Specify the edit point p 184 If the AUTO INS button is lit press it to turn off the insert mode Create the event Press the MOD button Modifying a particular range of events 1 2 4 Carry out steps 1 to 3 of the procedure in Modifying a single event p 185 Press the FROM TO button This switches the memory recall section to numeric keypad entry mode The alphanumeric display shows the current event number and the indication TO Carry out the following operations e To set the
466. on 2 Stop the effect at the edit point you want to move 3 To move a number of keyframes in a single operation press the FROM TO button and specify the keyframe range For details about how to specify a range of keyframes Modifying more than one keyframe simultaneously p 155 4 Press the DEL button This deletes the specified keyframe and stores it in the paste buffer 5 Move the edit point to the position to which you want to move the keyframe 6 Press the PSTE button This inserts the keyframe you have moved after the current keyframe In constant duration mode the moved keyframe overwrites the edit point To insert the moved keyframe before a keyframe Hold down the SHFT button and press the PSTE button to insert the moved keyframe before the current keyframe Copying Copying keyframes 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect at the edit point you want to copy 3 To copy a number of keyframes in a single operation Py P press the FROM TO button or the ALL button If you press the FROM TO button specify the keyframe range For details about how to specify a range of keyframes Modifying more than one keyframe simultaneously p 155 4 Press the COPY button This copies the specified keyframe and stores it in the paste buffer 5 Move the edit point to the position where you want to insert the copied k
467. on and matrix source Link bus setting Links a switcher bus address and router destination Selecting a matrix number 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt External Bus Link menu 7321 3 2 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Link No Link number 2 Link Matrix Matrix number 3 Press Link Matrix Set To delete a link With the link selected press Clear Defining the position of a matrix Specify where in the 1024 x 1024 S Bus space the link matrix is to be provided by setting the source and destination start address For the matrix selected in the External Bus Link menu use the following procedure Overall Control Panel Settings dnyas jaued joujuoD Z Ja deuD 219 dnjes jeued joujuoy 7 Ja deyD 220 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt External Bus Link gt Link Matrix Adjust menu 7321 4 In this menu too you can use the Link Matrix parameter to select the matrix number 2 Define the position of the matrix to be linked 3 To confirm a source address selected in step 2 press Source Set to confirm a destination address press Destination Set and to confirm a level press Level Set Setting a link table For the link selected in the External Bus Link menu make the settings as follows 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt External Bus Link gt Link Matrix Adjust gt Link Table Adjust
468. on press the button 1 of the register to which the key snapshot you want to delete is saved To carry out an auto transition execution during key snapshot operation Press the AUTO TRNS button To instantly insert remove a key Press the KEY ON button To remove the key while the key is inserted press the KEY ON button Key Snapshots Wipes Overview A wipe is a transition from the current video stream to a new video stream using a wipe pattern Changing the background by means of a wipe is referred to as a background wipe and inserting or deleting a key with a wipe is termed a key wipe There are two types of wipe those that can be selected in a common transition and those that can be selected in an independent key transition p 87 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings You carry out wipe setting operations principally using the Wipe menu for each of the switcher banks This section describes an example on the M E 1 bank Wipe Pattern Selection Selecting a wipe pattern by a menu operation 1 Open the M E 1 gt Wipe gt Main Pattern menu 1151 For details about wipe patterns amp Wipe Pattern List p 264 2 Press the button to select the desired pattern The pattern appears on the screen Setting Wipe Modifiers You can apply various modifiers to the wipe pattern setting the wipe direction pattern position etc Chapter Note that the available modifie
469. on with a maximum of 16 characters e The source name displays in the cross point control block show the source names of the video signals assigned to numbers 1 to 23 e To display the source names for numbers 24 to 62 press the SHIFT button assigned to the 1st row Colors of lit cross point buttons In a particular row of cross point buttons only the last pressed button is effective and lights amber or red The amber indicates the low tally state and the red indicates the high tally state to indicate whether or not the selected signal appears in the final output video Meaning of colors of lit cross point buttons Color State Meaning Amber Low tally Does not appear in final output video Red High tally Appears in final output video Transitions Transition Types Type Description Independent See key page transition Mix The new video Selectable progressively fades in over the current video The sum of the two video outputs is maintained at a constant with the output of each at 50 at the mid point of the transition i e when the fader lever is in the center position Type NAM non additive mix Description The current video and new video signals are compared and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output The signals are compared at the mid point of the transition when both signals are at 100 at whic
470. on rate transition rate KEY ADJ key Press this to carry out key adjustments adjust and set modifiers By default this is not assigned to a mode selection button so you must assign it to a mode selection button in the Setup menu before use Name Description KEY SS key Press this to carry out key snapshot snapshot creation recall deletion EDIT ENBL edit enable button This enables the following operations e Effect creation editing e Snapshot attribute setting e Shotbox creation editing e Macro creation editing e Wipe adjustments e DME wipe adjustments Region selection buttons These select the functional block region of the control panel to which operations apply When the EFF SNAPSHOT SHOTBOX or MCRO mode selection button is selected you can select multiple region selection buttons simultaneously In this case the first button pressed lights green as the reference region and the other buttons pressed light amber the buttons for the regions shown in the memory recall section are yellow Name Description ALL e Selects all regions e If any region is selected press this button to unset the selection of all regions M E1 P P Select the M E 1 and PGM PST regions respectively USER4 Selects the USER4 region DEV1 Selects the device 1 region Name MORE Description section for regions not assigned to a region selection button
471. ons are lit yellow Shotbox Register Creation xoqious Aulin seideuo 177 xoqjoYS AUINN L Ja deuD 178 To recall an assigned effect and simultaneously execute it Press the AUTO RUN button lighting it green then save the shotbox register Creating a Shotbox Register using the Menus 1 Open the Shotbox gt Register gt Store Recall menu 6411 In the status area the settings for each register appear as follows Region settings Appear as Sxxx when a snapshot is allocated and as Exxx when an effect is allocated where xxx is the register number The register name also appears If nothing is allocated nothing appears in the display Register lock setting When the register is write protected an L for lock appears Empty status When the register is empty an E for empty appears Auto run setting When this is enabled so that an effect is executed simultaneously with recall AR appears Shotbox register name This shows the shotbox register name 2 if necessary press one of the following buttons in the status area to change the region display M E P P Indicates assignment of M E 1 ME1 P P P P User Shows the allocations for User 1 USR1 to User 8 USR8 DEV1 8 Shows the allocations for Device 1 DEV1
472. or the M E and PGM PST banks and then enable disable or inhibit operations for each of the M E and PGM PST banks 1 In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config menu 7321 select the Bank you want to set The Bank selection here indicates the physical position on the control panel Corresponds to the 2nd row and 3rd row from the top the 1st row cannot be used Select the bank that you want to assign to the selected Bank number in the lt M E Assign gt group The status area shows the interchanged state of the banks It is not possible to assign the same M E logical bank to more than one physical bank Be sure to make different M E assignments For the selected Bank number in the lt M E Operation gt group select one of the following Enable Enables panel display and operation of the bank Disable Enables only panel display and disables operation of the bank Inhibit Disables both the panel display and operation of the bank Chapter When this is set to Inhibit snapshots of the bank are not recalled Linking Switcher Bus and Router Destination To provide links between the switcher bus and router destination make the following settings as required Matrix selection Selects the target of link setting from the eight matrices 1 to 8 Matrix position definition Sets the start address and level for the source and destination on the S Bus Link table setting Links a switcher cross point butt
473. ory gt File gt Move 2545 Frame Memory gt File gt Delete 2546 Frame Memory gt File gt Rename 2551 Frame Memory gt Folder 2561 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD gt Format 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD gt Backup Restore 5333 Device gt DDR VTR gt File List 5412 to 5441 All menus under Macro Menu No 7111 to 7173 Menu path All menus under File 7311 to 7317 All menus under Engineering Setup gt System 7327 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Maintenance Data Saved by Setup Define and Initial Status Define This section lists the data saved in the Engineering Setup gt System gt Start Up menu 7314 by each of Setup Define and Initial Status Define Data Saved by Setup Define Included in Panel Setup Menu No Menu path Saved data 0022 Home gt Favorites gt Group Edit All data relating to Group Edit menu 0023 Home gt Favorites gt Button Edit All data relating to Button Edit menu 7321 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config All data relating to Config menu 7322 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign Data relating to Table assignments for each bus 7322 1 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Table Button All data relating to Table Button Assign menu Assign 7322 5 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Main V K Pair lt Xpt Shift Mode gt and lt Display Shift Mode gt group da
474. ou can disable this function in a Setup menu Effect Attributes An individual effect may also have attached special conditions relating to switcher operation when the effect is recalled These conditions are called attributes of the effect and can be added when the keyframe effect is saved or recalled Types of attribute Effect dissolve The transition from the state before the effect recall to the state at the effect start point is carried out smoothly by a dissolve The dissolve duration can be set in the Effect menu Temporary attributes When a keyframe is recalled independently of the attributes held in the register you temporarily enable or disable attributes These are called temporary attributes These temporary attributes are set when the keyframe effect is recalled Effect Editing For editing operations such as to insert delete or modify a keyframe it is necessary to stop the effect at the corresponding point on the time axis This is termed an edit point You can edit either on a keyframe within the effect or at any point between keyframes Insert Inserts the current image as a keyframe Inserting a keyframe in an existing effect may change the duration of the effect p 146 Modify Modifies a keyframe You can modify a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together Delete Deletes a keyframe You can delete a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the
475. output when the trigger type is Status Assigning a Parallel Output Port This sets the Tally GPI OUTPUT port on the rear panel of the switcher 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt Tally GPI Output Config menu 7325 12 2 Select the setting 3 Inthe lt Parallel Output Assign gt group select either of the following e Tally Output Assigns a tally output e Switcher Assigns a switcher GPI output e Panel Assigns a control panel GPI output 4 Select the output you want to assign from the list on the right 5 Press Action Set Setting the Control Mode for P Bus Devices This sets the control mode for external P Bus Peripheral II protocol devices In the lt P Bus Control gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface menu 7325 select the mode Trigger When a predetermined button is pressed the action command assigned to that button is output to control an external device Timeline Controls the external device as a keyframe effect controlled by the center control panel Associating a Port with a Device Selection Button 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt Device Assign menu 7325 4 2 Select the port to set 3 Inthe lt Assign gt group press one of the DEV 1 to DEV 12 buttons Interfacing with External Devices e It is not possible to assign more than one device selection button to the same port The l
476. owing procedure all macro attachment data relating to cross point buttons is lost 1 Open the Macro gt Attachment menu 5421 2 Inthe lt Xpt Attachment Mode gt group select one of the following Button Mode Button number mode Assign an attachment combination of bus and button numbers Pair Mode Pair number mode Assign an attachment combination of bus and pair numbers 3 Check the message then press Yes In pair number mode carry out operations as follows When a single pair number is assigned to multiple cross point buttons pressing any of them executes the macros of all cross point buttons to which the same pair number is assigned Further if you delete any of these assignments this deletes all assignments to the same pair number If you reassign a pair number to a different cross point button the attachment settings are also transferred to the new cross point button When macro attachment data is loaded to overwrite existing data this also changes the button number mode or pair number mode setting Displaying the Macro Attachment List In the Macro gt Attachment menu 5421 you can display the macro attachment list to check the macro attachment settings The macro attachment list includes the following columns e Block Shows the names of control panel blocks e Button Shows the names of macro attachment assigned buttons of up to 30 characters e Reg Shows the names of assigned registe
477. own If the REV button is lit the loop is played in the reverse order Canceling keyframe loop execution Press the REWIND button Changes to the loop range caused by keyframe insertion deletion When a keyframe is inserted or deleted within the loop range the loop range also changes The following are examples Example 1 If keyframe 3 is deleted the loop end point moves forward as follows Creating and Editing Keyframes 2 3 4 5 6 7 Before WLLL j deletion Deletion 2 3 4 5 6 gt After POOR O deletion Loop range Example 2 If keyframe 3 is added the end point keyframe number moves back 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Before Z j addition A Addition After 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 addition T CRGA Wiz Loop range Example 3 If the keyframe at the end of the loop range the end point is deleted the keyframe loop settings are all cleared as follows The same occurs if the first keyframe in the loop range the start point is deleted 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Before Z deletion T Deletion 2 3 4 5 6 r After deletion Loop range Undoing an Edit Operation To undo a keyframe insert modify delete or paste operation immediately after execution press the UNDO button Duration Mode Setting There are two keyframe duration modes variable duration mode and constant duration mode in whi
478. own in the list on the right 3 Press one of the buttons at the top left to select the type of data to display e To display still image files press Still e To display clip files press Clip All of the selected type of frame memory data appears in the list on the left 4 In the folder selection area on the left select the frame memory folder to which you want to import the file 5 Press the device selection area on the right to select Removable Disk 6 Select the directory to hold the imported files Files on a removable disk to be imported must always be in a directory immediately below root T Select the file to be imported 8 Press Import Exporting Frame Memory Data As an example to save image data from frame memory in a bitmap format on a removable disk use the following procedure 1 Open the File gt All External File gt Import Export menu 7162 2 Inthe Import Export menu press the file format selection area at the top of the screen to select Frame Memory BMP Files of the selected type are shown in the list on the right 3 Press one of the buttons at the top left to select the type of data to display e To display still image files press Still e To display clip files press Clip Directory Operations All of the selected type of frame memory data appears in the list on the left 4 Press the device selection area on the right to select Removable Disk 5 S
479. p gt Router Tally gt Wiring menu 7363 select the wiring 2 Press Delete Sorting Wiring Settings In the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Wiring menu 7363 press Sort The sorting of wiring settings are executed in the following order Destination level order ascending gt Destination address order ascending Source level order ascending Tally Generation Settings You specify the destination to be the reference for tally generation and make various settings The settings are common to the parallel and serial tallies Making New Tally Generation Settings 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Tally Enable gt New menu 7364 1 2 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Destination Destination address Address No Parameter Adjustment 2 Destination Destination level Level 3 Tally Type Tally type a 1 R1 2 G1 3 R2 4 G2 5 R3 6 G3 7 R4 8 G4 9 R5 10 G5 11 R6 12 G6 13 R7 14 G7 15 R8 and 16 G8 R is an abbreviation of Red Tally and G of Green Tally 3 Inthe lt Tally Enable gt group specify the tally generation mode Enable Always generate a tally Disable Never generates a tally Tally Input is disabled even if selected 4 Press Execute Modifying Tally Generation 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Tally Enable gt Modify menu 7364
480. p Creation You save a movie as a clip If the number of frame memory clips exceeds 100 single files 50 pair files an error appears Using the menu to record clips 1 Open the Frame Memory gt Clip gt Record menu 2523 Frame memory selection area Folder selection area Target selection buttons Pair selection buttons 00 00 08 00 Clip Duration 2 When Pair is off press a target FM selection button to select the target 3 Inthe folder selection area select the folder containing the clip to be recorded 4 Press Record Enable turning it on 5 To set the clip name press Name Input the clip name and press Enter 6 To start recording press Record Start T Toend recording press Record Stop To set the clip duration Press Clip Duration enter a timecode value or number of frames and press Enter Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders You can create rename and delete frame memory folders Frame Memory Clip Operations Creating a new folder 1 Open the Frame Memory gt Folder menu 2551 2 Select New 3 Enter a folder name and press Enter Changing the folder name Select the folder in the Frame Memory gt Folder menu 2551 2 Press Rename 3 Enter the new folder name and press Enter The following names cannot be used for folders Default Flash1 Flash2 CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 C
481. pe Pair Single File type of clip pair single Clip Clip Name Name of clip up to four characters DeviceRecord Device 1 to 12 Applicable device Example of File Contents Line Content Description 1 PNL 0001PNL_0000 PMRMACROREG File header 2 Sample Comment Current 3 Event Snapshot Region ME1 Register 1 Attribute Off Time Simultaneously recall snapshots from register number 1 in the M E 1 and PGM PST regions Current 4 Continue Snapshot Region PP Register 1 Attribute Off Time 5 Event MEXpt ME ME1 MEBus A Xpt 1 VideoKey Video Select button number 1 on the M E 1 A bus About the Macro Attachment List Display The Button column in the macro attachment list displayed in the status area of the Macro gt Attachment menu 5421 screen shows character strings which identify macro attachment assigned buttons Each of these character strings is in fact a combination of characters shown in the Button 1 Button 2 and Button 3 columns in the following tables For example if Block and Button 1 to Button 3 are Block P P XPT Button 1 UTIL1 Bus Button 2 V Button 3 XPT2 Then the display in the Button column is UTILI Bus V XPT2 which indicates P P row utilityl bus video signal cross point button 2 M E and PGM PST Banks The following table shows only the macro attachment assignable buttons in the PGM PST bank For t
482. perations to be inhibited Overall Control Panel Settings Assigning Functions to the Buttons in the Flexi Pad You can assign functions to the buttons in the various parts of the Flexi Pad in the following menus Mode selection buttons Multi Function Module menu Region selection buttons Region Button Assign menu Memory recall buttons Multi Function Module menu For details about assignment of regions to the region selection buttons Assigning Regions to Region Selection Buttons in the Flexi Pad p 220 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt Multi Function Module menu 7321 20 2 Press one of the following three buttons displayed in the button area Mode Sel Assign button Assigns a function to the mode selection buttons Eff Edit Assign button Assigns a function to a button in the memory recall section for effect editing when the EFF and EDIT ENBL buttons are pressed Macro Edit Assign button Assigns a function to a button in the memory recall section for macro editing when the MCRO and EDIT ENBL buttons are pressed 3 In the button indications on the left press the button for the assignment 4 Select the mode or action to be assigned The following modes and functions can be selected e Mode selection buttons Mode Button indication Effect EFF Snapshot SNAP SHOT Shotbox SHOTBOX Macro MCRO Wipe snapshot WIPE DME wipe snapshot DME WI
483. phanumeric display shows the register number last used for master timeline operation 6 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to effect editing mode T Press the STOR button 8 With the numeric keypad buttons enter the number of the register in which you want to save the master timeline and press the ENTR button This saves M E 1 register 15 and P P register 11 in the master timeline register Creating and Saving a Master Timeline with the Menu 1 Open the Effect gt Master Timeline gt Store menu 6211 The status area shows the master timeline register names register lock status register number for each region and so on 2 if necessary press one of the following buttons in the status area to change the region display M F P P Indicates assignment of M E 1 ME1 P P P P User Shows the allocations for User 1 USR1 to User 8 USR8 DEV1 8 Indicates assignments for Device 1 DEV 1 to Device 8 DEV8 DEV9 12 indicates assignments for Device9 DEV9 to Device12 DEV12 Misc Indicates assignment for P Bus PBUS GPI GPI and Macro MCRO 3 Select the register in which you want to save the master timeline 4 Press Edit The Edit menu 6211 1 appears You can also use the Master Reg parameter to select the master timeline register in this menu The status area shows the status of each region in this master timeline Creating and
484. ple Connection c eee 288 Macro File Editing Rules 0 289 Macro File Syntax cnn dcaaiastitnctun 289 Syntax of Event and Continue SlAtEMOENIS ses 2e eeeeseddieeseaeied 289 File Namie cco ni ieee wea 290 Saving and Recalling a File 290 ETTOFS ecni tees 290 Correspondence between Events and SYMBOLS iee aa an 290 Symbols and Parameters sseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 291 Example of File Contents cee 295 About the Macro Attachment List Display i s ieniiiniiosndanosshnanatinn nnman nnani 295 M E and PGM PST Banks eee 295 Other BIOCKS i iscccnusceenisisaccasceniebiatecate 296 Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu MACRO asses seetevta sad transnntiaeteadescsasiticensant 296 Data Saved by Setup Define and Initial Status Define ccccccceeeessseeeeees 297 Data Saved by Setup Define 00000 297 Data Saved by Initial Status Define 298 Error Messages cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 298 Error Messages Displayed in the Error Status Error Log Menu sereen 299 Error Messages Appearing in a Message l 510 cee ses ie eased 300 Error Messages Shown in the Error Information Menu 309 Maintenance sccsssseesecssesssccceessesecnees 309 Exchanging Button Labels 309 Care of the Control Panel ee 310 a E 311 Table of Contents 11 M Q Je deuD 12 Overview Introduction This manual is the User s Guide for the MVS 3000 Multi Format Switcher
485. plies to the other pairs When a pair of images are captured in pair mode the image frozen in FM1 3 5 or 7 is referred to as the main file and the other frozen in FM2 4 6 or 8 is referred to as the sub file Pair files and single files A file that can be recalled in pair mode is termed a pair file A pair file can be created by setting pair mode and capturing an image or by using the coupling function p 117 to combine two single files A file other than a pair file is termed a single file A single file can be created by switching off pair mode and capturing an image or by using the separation function p 117 to split a pair file Operation modes The frame memory has the following operation mode V K mode When the pair mode is active the key signal is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2 This is convenient for handling the video and key signals together in frame memory For example when you select a video signal on frame memory source bus 1 the key signal assigned to it is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2 You can also use the signal automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2 as a key signal when processing keyframe memory 1 To change the pair mode or operation mode use the Frame Memory menu Frame memory folders Still images and clips can be managed in a maximum of twelve groups Such a group is called a frame memory folder Folders can be
486. ppears 2 Inthe lt Target gt group press Fill 3 Select the fill signal from the list on the right 4 Press Set Xpt Carrying out a color mix for the key fill When Matte is selected for the key fill you can combine color 1 and color 2 using the independent key transition wipe pattern 1 Inthe lt Key Fill gt group of the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu 1111 select Matte and press Matte Adjust The Matte Adjust menu appears 2 Select Mix Color in the lt Fill Matte gt group 3 Adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Size Pattern size 2 Soft Edge softness of the pattern 4 Return to the Type menu and adjust color 1 and color 2 To adjust colors 1 and 2 turn on Color1 or Color2 respectively then adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Luminance Luminance Saturation Saturation Hue Hue 5 To interchange color 1 and color 2 press the Color Invert button turning it on Chroma Key Composition and Basic Settings A key signal based on a particular color is used to cut out the background and the key fill is then inserted The inserted signal is also referred to as the foreground and the composite image is called a chroma key image Background Chroma key image For details about adjusting chroma key images Chroma Key Adjustments p 68 In creating a
487. py This copies the selected file or files to the specified destination If there is already data in the specified location a confirmation message appears Select Yes to overwrite the data Copying frame memory files Between steps 3 and 4 of the procedure in Copying Files above do as follows 1 To select the frame memory folder press Default in the device selection in the list on the left 2 Press the required folder name in the pull down menu 3 Carry out the same operations as in steps 1 and 2 on the list on the right 4 Select the type of data to be displayed e To display still image files press Still e To display clip files press Clip e To display all types of file press AI Renaming Files You can rename a file or register on a local disk or removable disk As an example to rename a snapshot file use the following procedure 1 Open the File gt Snapshot gt Snapshot menu 7131 2 Press File Edit A detailed list appears Here too you can select a device or specify a directory 3 Select the file to be renamed 4 Press Rename 5 Enter a name of up to eight characters and press Enter e Within the switcher the names for Initial Status and Setup data are fixed You can change the file names on a local disk or removable disk but the next time they are reloaded they will revert to the default names The following names cannot be used CON PRN AUX CLOCK N
488. r This returns the pattern position to the center of the screen CLR WORK BUFR clear work buffer Press this twice in rapid succession to reset all parameters on the target M E or PGM PST to their initial values a You can configure settings in the Setup menu to allow simultaneous selection of multiple buttons When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled The buttons are used for VTR control or playback of frame memory clips For details amp Controlling the Tape Disk Transport p 135 When the resizer operation mode is enabled Name ASP aspect Description e Pressing this button and operating the trackball or Z ring changes the aspect ratio of a key to which the resizer function is applied e When this button is held down the trackball or Z ring operation is switched to a finer control fine mode work buffer Name Description LOC e Pressing this button and operating the location trackball or Z ring moves shrinks or magnifies a key to which the resizer function is applied e When this button is held down the trackball or Z ring operation is switched to a finer control fine mode RSZR Press this button turning it on to enable the resizer resizer ROT e Pressing this button after pressing the rotation RENB button and operating the trackball or Z ring rotates the key to which the resizer function is applie
489. r Key ST DME2 GPI Enbl DME Override DME Graphic e Menu Shortcut settings 7324 2 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Prefs Selection of following utility commands Utility gt Xpt Module Src Reg Btn DME Monitor Video ST DME Monitor Key ST DME2 GPI Enbl DME gt Assign Override DME Graphic E 7325 1 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device e Primary 33 to 48 selection when Action is set to Aux Bus Xpt Override g Interface gt GPI Input e M E 2 selection e Selection of the following items when Trigger Type is not set to Level in M E 1 x 5 to 8 Keyx Cut Keyx Auto Trans Keyx SS Recall e Selection of the following items when Trigger Type is not set to Level in P P x 5 to 8 DSKx Cut DSKx Auto Trans DSKx SS Recall 7325 3 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device e M E 2 selection Interface gt GPI Output e Selection of the following items when Trigger Type is not set to Status in M E 1 x 5 to 8 Keyx SS Recall e Selection of the following items when Trigger Type is set to Status in M E 1 x 5 to 8 Keyx SS Recall Keyx On e Selection of the following items when Trigger Type is not set to Status in P P x 5 to 8 DSKx SS Recall e Selection of the following items when Trigger Type is set to Status in P P x 5 to 8 DSKx SS Recall DSKx On 7326 11 Engineering Setup gt Panel Key5 to 8 selection gt Operation gt Custom Button gt Next Trans All 7326 13 Engineering Setup gt Panel e M E 2 settings gt Ope
490. r details about Flexi Pad operations amp Keyframe Creation and Editing in the Flexi Pad p 153 To move the edit point to the keyframe immediately after the current time the position at which the effect is currently stopped press the gt gt NEXT button To move the edit point to the keyframe immediately before the current time press the lt lt PREV button To move the edit point to a keyframe specified by number press the GOTO KF button then enter the keyframe number with the numeric keypad and press the ENTR button to confirm e To move the edit point to a specified timecode press the GOTO TC button then enter the timecode value and press the ENTR button to confirm To enter a difference value When moving to a point specified with the GOTO KF button or GOTO TC button you can also enter the difference from the current keyframe number or timecode value Press the button and enter the difference then press the TRIM button Each time you press the button it toggles between plus and minus Creating and Editing Keyframes Keyframe Creation and Editing in the Flexi Pad In the Flexi Pad press the EFF button to switch to effect operation mode then press the EDIT ENBL button The EDIT ENBL button lights up and the memory recall section switches to effect editing mode EFF button Alphanumeric display
491. r supplies When A or B power supply is connected unit operation can proceed 1 For information about devices that can be connected contact your Sony representative Power Supply and Connectors Sed JO suonouny pue sewenN z 19 deyo 43 suolisues pue uonoajas euis Je deyp 44 Signal Selection and Transitions Chapter lt Q D O D O O D a oO 5 Q TI o The switch from the current video stream appearing on The following illustration shows the flow of operations for the corresponding program monitor to a new video stream carrying out a transition on a switcher bank is referred to as a transition Select current background video Select next transition Background Keys 1 to 4 Select new background video Make key settings p 62 i j amp Select transition type Super mix Preset color mix Make wipe settings p 83 Make DME wipe settings p 93 Preview the effect of transition p 57 it e 4 Execute the transition p 51 Video Processing Flow Signal Selection You carry out signal selection in the cross point control block of each bank 2nd row 1st row HOO Jouy JOCOOOE JOOOCE 1 Background B row Background A row Source name display Cross point control block Basics of Signal Selection Each of the switcher b
492. r1 to User8 Applicable region PBus Device1 to Device12 GPI Register 1 to 399 Applicable register number TimelineRun Region ME1 PP User1 to User8 Applicable region PBus Device1 to Device12 a Mode in which operation takes place in the GPI Current a region currently specified in the Flexi Pad TimelineRewind Region ME1 PP User1 to User8 Applicable region PBus Device1 to Device12 a Mode in which operation takes place in the GPI Current a region currently specified in the Flexi Pad TimelineFF Region ME1 PP User1 to User8 Applicable region PBus Device1 to Device12 a Mode in which operation takes place in the GPI Current a region currently specified in the Flexi Pad Shotbox Register 1 to 99 Applicable register number Pause Time 0 to 999 Time for which macro is paused number of frames StartTc Device 1 to 12 FrameMemory1Clip to Applicable device FrameMemorys8Clip MasterSnapshot Register 1 to 99 Applicable register number MasterTimelineRecall Register 1 to 99 Applicable register number RouterXpt DestinationButton 1 to 128 Router cross point button Source 1 to 1024 Router source number Level 1to 8 Router level selection PatternLimit ME ME1 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank Status ToOn a Pattern limit status ToOff b a Pattern limit applies Any c b Pattern limit does not apply c The pattern limit status always changes Macro File Editing Rules xlpueddy
493. ransition and key on off for independent key transition e Pattern limit on off Device control e VTR disk recorder Extended VTR block frame memory clip playback stop fast forward rewind cue up start point setting e VTR disk recorder record e Frame memory clip loop setting Menu screen e Disk recorder Extended VTR file recalling e Execution of a menu macro e Frame memory clip recalling Control block Event Cross point e Cross point selection control block e Recalling a function assigned to a 2nd row key button Auto transition and cut for the transition execution section e Auto transition and key on off for independent key transition e Next transition setting e Transition type selection e Pattern limit on off e Key snapshot recall e VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clip playback stop cue Transition control block up Macros a In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key the key state at the time of event registration inserted or not inserted is also saved in the macro When the macro is executed the event is only replayed if the key state matches the saved state Example For a macro with an event that inserts deletes a key when the macro is executed if the key was inserted it is deleted but otherwise nothing occurs as concerns keying b Function valid only when PLAY STOP and CUE have been set in the Setup menu Ma
494. ration gt Effect Mode Setting of Default KF Duration for switcher keyframes 7331 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config All data relating to Config menu 7332 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input All data relating to Input menu 7333 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output All data relating to Output menu 7334 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Transition All data relating to Transition menu 7335 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Key Wipe FM CCR All data relating to Key Wipe FM CCR menu 7336 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link All data relating to Link menu 7337 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Device Interface All data relating to Device Interface menu Data Saved by Initial Status Define Included in Panel Menu No Menu path Saved data e Settings for the following cross point control block buttons Delegation buttons assigned to the ist row 1ST ROW DSPLY 2ND ROW DSPLY SHIFT MCRO ATTCH ENBL e Transition control block KF SHIFT and independent key transition KEY 1 to KEY4 buttons e Flexi Pad Settings for the WIPE DME WIPE SNAPSHOT EFF SHOTBOX MCRO TRNS RATE KEY ADJ KEY SS buttons 6351 Snapshot gt Key Snapshot gt Attribute Settings of lt Recall Mode gt group Included in Switcher Same as data saved in Snapshots Menu No Menu path Saved data 7 e For each M E setting data relating to the following cross points tr
495. ration gt Key AUX Function e Key5 to 8 EXT DME DME1 V K DME2 V K DME5 V K to DME8 V K Assign selection 7331 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config M E 2 settings 7331 1 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config M E 2 settings gt M E Output Assign 7331 2 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config M E 2 settings gt PGM Config e Key5 to Key8 selection 284 Menus of Disabled Operations and Settings Menu Disabled operation setting Number Path 7331 3 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config M E 2 settings gt K PVW Config e Key5 to Key8 selection 7331 6 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config All menu operations gt DME Config 7332 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input Primary 33 to 48 settings 7332 1 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input Primary 33 to 48 settings gt CCR 7332 3 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input Primary 33 to 48 selection gt FC Input Select 7333 1 Engineering Setup gt Switcher e Output 17 to 32 settings gt Output gt Output Assign e M E 2 Out1 to M E 2 Out4 selection 7333 2 Engineering Setup gt Switcher Output 13 to 32 settings gt Output gt Video Clip 7333 3 Engineering Setup gt Switcher Output 13 to 32 settings gt Output gt V Blank Through 7333 4 Engineering Setup gt Switcher Output 13 to 32 settings gt Output gt Safe Title 7333 5 Engineering Setup gt Switcher Output 13 to 32 settings g
496. re resizer is enabled Two Dimensional Transformations and Rotation of Keys When the screen aspect ratio is 4 3 in HD format when the resizer is used to shrink a video image this is applied to the 16 9 screen including the added video on the left and right sides Use the crop function as required to extract the 4 3 image Menu operations for key shrinking magnification rotation and movement As an example for key 1 of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 Inthe ME 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key menu 1115 press Resizer turning it on 2 Adjust the following parameters Parameter group 1 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 Location X Move key horizontally Location Y Move key vertically Size Magnify or shrink key Parameter group 2 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 Aspect X Change aspect ratio horizontally Aspect Y Change aspect ratio vertically 3 Aspect Change aspect ratio horizontally Ratio and vertically at the same time When Rotation Enable is turned on the parameters change as follows No Parameter Adjustment For example the upper limit of the movement range is here 4 wW Center of image gt Functions that cannot be used with key rotation When Rotation Enable is turned on aspect ratio parameters Aspect X Aspect Y Aspect Ratio cannot be adjusted In addition defocus cannot be
497. region assignment to the factory default state In the Region Button Assign menu 7321 7 press Default To delete a region assignment In step 3 of the procedure in Assigning Regions to Region Selection Buttons in the Flexi Pad p 220 make the selection to which the operation applies then press Clear Setting the region selection buttons selected when the ALL button is pressed 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt Region Button Assign menu 7321 7 press All Select in the button area or the Al Select button indication in the status area setting it to On The All Select button indication in the status area changes to orange and the system switches to a mode for assigning region selection buttons to the ALL button In the factory default state all buttons appear in reverse video and are assigned to the ALL button 2 if you do not want to assign any region selection button to the ALL button press the corresponding button indication setting it to Off The button you pressed returns to normal display Assignment to the ALL button is region by region Changing the assignment of a region selection button does not change the regions assigned to the ALL button Setting Transition Control Block Button Assignments 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt Transition Module menu 7321 9 2 Select the bank of the transition control block you want to set in the l
498. required To set video processes Turn on Video Process in the lt Video Process gt group To set primary color correction Turn on Primary CCR in the lt Primary CCR gt group and select the item to set in the lt Primary CCR Adjust gt group To set an RGB clip Turn on RGB Clip in the lt RGB Clip gt group and select the item to set in the lt RGB Clip Adjust gt group 4 Set the parameters For details about the parameters amp Configuring the Color Corrector p 242 To disable color correction In the lt CCR gt group press CCR turning it off To return the parameters to their default settings Press Unity Router Control Menu Operations You can control router switching in the Router Control menu Checking the List of Inputs for Each Destination Open the Router gt Router Control gt Router Control menu 5111 A list of destination assignments appears on the left side of the status area Dest Bin Protect Dest Name Src Name OUT 0010 teed OUT 0011 OUT 0012 OUT 0013 OUT 0014 OUT 0015 16 OUT 0016 ouor 18 OUT 0018 19 OUT 0019 20 OUT 0020 21 OUT 0021 22 OUT 0022 23 OUT 0023 24 OUT 0024 Level Assign Level Button No Change Level 2 Xpt If in the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Router Remote gt RTR Mode Setting menu 7323 1 Inhibit is set to On for a destination the corresponding line appears in gray Also if PROT protect is set to ON for a source u
499. ress M E Output Assign The M E Output Assign menu 7331 1 appears 2 On the list in the status area select the bank output to be assigned 3 Inthe lt ME Output Assign gt group select the output signal to be assigned Setting the output configuration for each bank When Multi Program is selected as the operation mode use the following procedure 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu 7331 press PGM Config The PGM Config menu 7331 2 appears The status area shows the background and key configuration assigned to the output of each bank 2 Select the output you want to set 3 Inthe lt Bkgd gt group select the background In Multi Program mode select Clean or Utility 1 then skip to step 4 4 In the lt Key Enable gt group select Enable or y p Disable for each of the keys Setting the key preview configuration You can make this setting at any time regardless of the operation mode 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu 7331 press K PVW Config The K PVW Config menu 7331 3 appears The status area shows the key preview configuration for each bank 2 Select the key preview to set 3 In the lt Mode gt group select Video mode or Key mode If you select Key mode skip to step 5 4 Inthe lt Bkgd gt group select the background In standard mode or Multi Program mode select Clean or Utility1 then skip to step 5 5 inthe lt
500. ric display If the number is followed by a letter e or E this indicates the following e Indicates the selected register is empty for the regions selected in step 2 E Indicates that the corresponding register is empty in all selectable regions 4 Press the ENTR button This recalls the specified register When the master timeline is recalled the region selection buttons light according to the saved region information To recall the master timeline 1 In the Flexi Pad press the EFF button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to effect operation mode 2 Press the MSTR RCLL button Recalling a Register soueAey sajdeyo 151 seweiyAoy 1 Ja deyo 152 This switches the memory recall section to the master timeline recall mode 3 Press the BANK SEL button This switches the memory recall section to the bank selection mode 4 Press the number of the desired bank This selects the bank and the buttons in the memory recall section show the register states as follows Lit yellow Las
501. ring Setup gt System gt lnstall Unit Config gt Install process In the above menu the menu software installation package does not match For more details see Page 9900 the model on which it is to be installed Not Found 7316 10 Engineering Setup gt System gt lnstall Unit Config gt Install The software package does not exist on the removable disk In the above menu the software package to be installed was not found Check that the removable disk is correctly inserted and try the installation once more Internal Error Local Disk is unknown Local disk is incorrect or not When starting up the menu system an error was found on the local disk EI formatted Execute format local disk in menu 7317 Engineering Setup gt System To format the local disk please gt Maintenance execute Format on Page 7317 Internal Error Local Disk System Data gt me The system data partition of local disk When starting up the menu system an error was found on the local disk E x is damaged The local disk needs to Execute format local disk in menu 7317 Engineering Setup gt System be reformatted Please execute local gt Maintenance disk format on Page 7317 Please make sure to save all data in the user data partition of local disk drive to any other device or media before reformatted Internal Error Local Disk User Data The user data partition of local disk is When s
502. rns Saving the edited wipe pattern as a snapshot Holding down the WIPE button press the button in the memory recall section for the register in which you want to save The button you pressed lights yellow Buttons for registers in which wipe snapshots are already saved light orange Canceling a saved wipe snapshot Immediately after saving hold down the STOR STAT button and press the UNDO button Buttons for registers in which wipe snapshots are already saved light orange Canceling the recall of a wipe snapshot Press the UNDO button Deleting the data of a saved wipe snapshot Holding down the DEL button press the button for the register in which the wipe snapshot you want to delete is saved The register button you pressed turns off Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi Pad DME Wipes Overview A DME wipe is a wipe transition that uses an image transformation effect to change from one video image to the next There are two types of DME wipe those that can be selected in a common transition and those that can be selected in an independent key transition p 97 You can use a resizer in a DME wipe called a resizer DME wipe in a transition on the key selected by a next transition button or in an independent key transition Chapter e Resizer DME wipes can only be set for keys that support resizet key edge e Resizer DME wipes cannot be used on keys where resizer is enabled e A set
503. ro event in the transition control block include the transition rate Macro AT with A B Bus Macro Auto Trans Event with without A B Bus When registering an auto transition macro event in the transition control block include the background A B bus cross point Macro TL with Region Macro Timeline with Region When registering an effect execution rewind or fast forward as a macro event save the affected region together in the macro Events requiring adjustment when creating a macro The following events require time for execution to complete and therefore when executed within a macro sequence a pause event must be inserted to adjust the timing e Rewinding effects involving external device control e VTR disk recorder Extended VTR cue up For example create a macro to cue up a VTR and then play back as follows C T Macro event execution order 1 2 3 Macro events CUE PAUSE PLAY 5 00 Auto insert mode on off setting You can switch on or off the mode auto insert mode in which at the same time that a control panel operation is carried out the event is automatically saved in a macro Editing a macro You can carry out the following macro editing operations Event insertion Insert the control panel operation as an event in a macro Event modification Modify any event You can modify all events within a macro or events within a specified range in a single operation Event deletion Delete
504. rogress is linear according to the fader lever position Factory default setting Adv Tally Mode When the fader lever is moved from the end of its travel the tally is output slightly before the transition starts Settings Relating to Keys Wipes Frame Memory and Color Correction Settings for the Show Key Function 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Key Wipe FM CCR gt Show Key menu 7335 1 2 Inthe lt Show Key Enable gt group press the signal for which show key is enabled turning it on 3 To set the time for which show key is held press Hold Time 4 Adjust the following parameter No Parameter 1 Hold Time Adjustment Show key hold time Settings for Key Auto Drop Function The key auto drop function automatically switches off a particular key when you press a cross point button in a bus that outputs the background on the particular switcher bank PGM PST or M E 1 When the background output bus is in flip flop mode this is always the A bus In bus fixed mode it is either the A bus or the B bus depending on the fader lever position Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode p 56 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Key Wipe FM CCR menu 7335 press Key Auto Drop The Key Auto Drop menu 7335 2 appears 2 Inthe lt Key Auto Drop gt group press the name of the keyer for which you want the key to be deleted automatically
505. rs e Name Shows the names of macro registers e Mode Shows the names of macro modes Pre Post Only Above the list is shown the names of the block and macro attachment assigned button currently selected in the list 1 When no macro mode is set For details about the macro modes amp Setting a macro attachment to a button p 190 For details about the macro attachment listing About the Macro Attachment List Display p 295 Moving within the list from one block to another You can move quickly from the current block to another block to check the settings for that block by pressing the following buttons in the lt Block Select gt group e P P Move to a block in the PGM PST bank e M E 1 Move to a block in the M E 1 bank e Other Move to a block in a location other than the PGM PST bank or M E 1 bank Executing a Macro by Macro Attachment For execution on the M E or PGM PST bank use the MCRO ATTCH ENBL button assigned to the 1st row in the cross point control block To execute a macro according to a macro attachment set elsewhere assign MCRO ATTCH ENBL to the 2nd row using the utility shotbox function of the cross point control block then use that button Executing a macro assigned to a button 1 Depending on the location of the button you want to use press the MCRO ATTCH ENBL button turning it on 2 Press the desired button for which a macro attachment has been set Th
506. rs may depend on the pattern you are using p 87 Specifying the wipe direction Direction Specify the direction of the wipe effect Normal _ 7 Wipe in the normal direction O N Reverse N Wipe in the opposite direction of the normal direction ZON Normal reverse The wipe direction alternates between normal and reverse after each transition To specify the wipe direction in a menu 1 Open the M E 1 gt Wipe gt Edge Direction menu 1154 2 Inthe lt Direction gt group select the wipe direction To specify the wipe direction with a button in the transition control block In the transition control block of each switcher bank press the following direction selection buttons NORM Normal NORM REV Normal reverse REV Reverse Modifying the wipe pattern edge Edge You can apply a border to the pattern or soften the edges Overview Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings s d M g Je deyp 83 sedi g JaydeyD 84 Border Applies a border to the pattern Soft Soft Border Softens the pattern edges Softens the border applied to the pattern When a border or soft border is selected the signal filling the border is called edge fill For the edge fill you can use a matte generated by the dedicated color matte generator or the signal selected on the utility bus A matte can include color 1 and color 2
507. rval Time until the next Status Sense command is issued Simple VDCP Setting menu only oo Set the disk recorder video port number or response speed When setting the video port number No Parameter 2 Setting Adjustment Video port number When setting the response speed No Parameter Adjustment 2 Setting Response speed 9 Press Set 10 Repeat steps 3 to 9 as required to make the settings for other items To enable or disable the loop and recue functions Press the Loop and Recue buttons respectively to enable disable the loop and recue functions Loop Replays the recalled file in a continuous loop Recue After playing the recalled file recues to the beginning and then stop Making detailed settings for an Extended VTR 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface gt Serial Port Assign menu 7325 5 select the serial port connected to the extended VTR for which you want to make the settings 2 Press Port Setting The Extend VTR Setting menu 7325 10 appears At the top of the status area the relevant serial port slot number protocol serial port name and SCU number appear In the lower part of the status area the response speed settings appear 3 Specify the command to which the response speed setting applies 1 Maximum Open Delay Maximum time required to open a file 2 Maximum Cueup Delay Maximum time required to cue up a file 3 Play Aft
508. s MVS 3000 Multi Format Switcher Processor Front panel POWER A B switches and status indicators e D D POWER A B switches and status indicators The POWER switches turn the unit on and off The unit is powered on when the POWER switches are on the 1 side and powered off when the POWER switches are on the O side The status indicators light in green when the unit is powered on Operation continues as long as power supply is normal on one unit Power Supply and Connectors Sed JO suonouny pue sewen z Jejdeyp 39 Sued JO suolouny pue sowen Zz Jeldeup Meaning of status indicator display The power supply unit status indicator shows the status if an error is detected when the unit is powered on and during operation e If a status indicator does not light when you turn a POWER switch on there may be a fault in the power circuits Turn the POWER switch off and contact your Indicator Status Description Steps to take Sony service representative goloi e When the unit is powered on the status indicators may Green Lit Operating light momentarily in red and a whining sound may be normally heard If POWER A or B only is turned OFF the power Red Lit Power supply unit Exchange the fan supply status indicator for that power supply lights in fan f
509. s The name of the file that is saved is fixed FM_Bkup For details amp Overview of File Operations p 200 Restoring backup data from DDR or VTR Before starting the restore operation it is necessary to select the DDR VTR output on the FM input bus 1 Open the Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR menu 2565 2 Press File gt File Name Data to read the file list from the File gt Frame Mem gt File Name Data menu 7153 For details amp Overview of File Operations p 200 3 To restore the ancillary data select any of FM1 FM3 and FMS 4 Press Restore Enable turning it on 5 In the lt Restore Type gt group select either of the following Replace Replace the existing frame memory data Append Add to the existing frame memory data 6 Press Restore Start T Start playback on the external device and immediately after that press Yes Make sure that the red or blue image inserted at the beginning when the backup was made is included If this image is not found the clip or still image will not be played back correctly This starts the restore operation and when completed a message appears Managing Images Using a DDR VTR 8 Stop the playback on the external device and press the OK button Extracting Images from a Video Tape By recording a clip or still image stored on a video tape as a single clip single file under certain rules you can
510. s p 245 Copying format converter input data 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input gt FC Adjust menu 7332 2 press Copy The Copy Swap gt Copy gt Format Converter menu 3121 appears 2 Select Input in the lt Data Select gt group 3 Select the data and press Copy Signal Output Settings Signal Output Settings e The numbers that can be configured as output signals are 1 to 16 Note that numbers up to 32 are also displayed but that only numbers 1 to 16 are enabled e The Video Clip V Blank Through Safe Title and 4 3 Crop cannot be set for the following outputs Output signals from connectors assigned to Out 1 to 12 Multi Viewer 1 and 2 FC Output 1 and 2 Assigning Output Signals 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output gt Output Assign menu 7333 1 2 Inthe lt Output Assign gt group select either of the following Re Entry Source It is possible to make duplicate assignments M E 1 Output 1 to 4 PGMIPST 1 to 4 Undefined Color Bkgd 2 Frame Memory to 8 1 M E output signals selected in the M E Output Assign menu Aux Bus It is not possible to make duplicate assignments Preset Edit Preview AUX 1 to 24 Output MV FC DME It is possible to make duplicate assignments Out 1 to 12 Multi Viewer 1 and 2 FC Output 1 and 2 1 Makes duplicate assignments if the signal that is assigned is the same signal as one already assigned to one of
511. s 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input gt CCR menu 7332 1 press RGB Clip turning it on 2 Inthe lt RGB Clip Adjust gt group select the item you want to adjust Dark Dark clip adjustment White White clip adjustment 3 Adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Red Red signal adjustment 2 Green Green signal adjustment 3 Blue Blue signal adjustment 4 All Simultaneous RGB adjustment To return the parameters to their default settings In the lt RGB Clip gt group press Unity Enabling the Illegal Color Limiter To enable the illegal color limiter for the signals generated by the switcher internal matte generator press Matte Ieg Col Limit in the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input menu 7332 turning it on Selecting the Primary Input to be Used in the Format Converter 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Input gt FC Input Select menu 7332 3 2 Select the number of the FC format converter that you want to set from the table on the left The format converter range is either FC1 to FC4 or FC1 to FC8 depending on the FC Config setting p 216 3 Select the primary number from the table on the right Primary33 to Primary48 are disabled even if selected 4 Press Set 5 To input the name of the input signal which has been converted in the format converter press FC Name 6 Enter a name of up t
512. s 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output gt Multi Viewer menu 7333 9 select the target sub screens 2 Press Name Enable to select either of the following Enable Shows the subs screen name Disable Hides the sub screen name To make the setting for all of 10 sub screens in a single operation turn All Name Enable on or off 3 To set the name display position adjust the following parameters If you change any of the following parameter values the name display position will change on all sub screens You cannot adjust the name display position for each sub screen No Parameter Adjustment 2 Name Horizontal position Position H 3 Name Vertical position Position V Assigning signals to the sub screens 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output gt Multi Viewer gt Source Output Assign menu 7333 10 2 Select the target sub screens in the list on the left 3 if assigning an input signal to a sub screen press Source in the lt Source Output Select gt group If assigning an output signal press Output Primary33 to Primary48 are disabled even if selected 4 Select the signal you want to assign from the list on the right If Output is selected in step 3 the following signals cannot be used e Signals output from connectors assigned to Out 1 to 12 e Multi Viewer 1 and 2 e FC Output 1 and 2 5 Press Set Signal Output Settings dn
513. s amp Saving and Recalling Setup Data p 214 Resetting SWR1 also resets PNL1 at the same time However resetting PNL1 does not reset SWR1 Inthe status area of the Engineering Setup gt System gt Initialize menu 7315 select the device 2 In the lt Initialize gt group select one of the following modes Reset Resets the target device causing it to restart in the start up state All Clear Initializes the target device causing it to restart in the factory default state 3 Press Execute 4 Check the message then press Yes Installation and Device Setup This installs the software and firmware in all devices connected to the LAN Displaying installation details In the Engineering Setup gt System gt Install Unit Config menu 7316 press Detail Information This accesses the Detail Information menu 7316 1 and displays the detailed information on the software and firmware installed in the currently selected device Installing Software T Insert the removable disk containing the software to the USB connector of the external monitor or control panel 2 Inthe Engineering Setup gt System gt Install Unit Config menu 7316 press Install The Install menu 7316 10 appears the status area shows the following information Upper list For each connected device this shows the device name current software version Current and the latest version that can be installed Insta
514. s e Input video processing e Primary color correction e RGB clip For details see Configuring the Color Corrector p 242 in chapter 18 Input source with 4 3 aspect ratio Image to fill the side flag areas selected from utility bus Turn on the side flag function Side flag area Side flag area Side Flags The term side flags refers to the areas to left and right of an image with aspect ratio 4 3 embedded within a 16 9 frame when these areas are filled with a separate image selected from the utility bus Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations For details see Side Flags amp p 128 in chapter 9 Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations This section introduces functions used for creation of special effects control of external devices or switcher operations and data management Controlling External Devices In this system you can operate while controlling the following types of external device e Devices supporting P Bus Peripheral II protocol e Devices supporting GPI e VTRs e Disk recorders video disk communications protocol e Extended VTRs Abekas A53 protocol For details about the devices that can be connected consult your Sony representative You can also control an external device by registering timeline keyframes beforehand For details see Chapter 10 External Devices amp p 13
515. s 118 Savin Filesi nne Ase a E 118 Recalling Piles cities cuncenmeteveeciaatatas 119 Managing Images Using a DDR VTR 119 Using a DDR VTR for High speed Backup and Restoring siccc scsaccacnsosctaesincedens 119 Extracting Images from a Video Tape 120 Chapter8 Color Backgrounds Copy and Swap and Other Settings Color Background ccccsssseeeeeeeeeeees 122 Basic Color Background Setting Operations eoin nh 122 Copy and Swap ssssssssssssssssssssereeeeseeeees 123 Overview of Copy and Swap ceee 123 Copy and Swap OperationS eeee 124 Misc Menu Operations ccccccccsssssesees 125 Port Settings for Control from an External DEVICE cenit anne dundee aged 125 Safe Title Set GS posse vctesaceysaszarevaewuaatens 125 Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings 126 AUX Menu Operations eeeeeees 126 AUX Bus Settings ee eeeeceeeeeceteeee 126 Router Control Menu Operations 127 Checking the List of Inputs for Each Destination 127 Switching the Source for Each Destination icion 127 Table of Contents 5 6 Chapter 9 Special Functions SIDE FLAGS sssscsateiiivinieceneacsaienbdetinceninenuedes 128 OVERVIEW eis Suse tates a aa gak 128 Side Flag Settings j 0oiay bata eas 128 Wipe Action on Images with Side Flag Sine ra R 129 DME Wipe Action for an Image with Side TASS hs aa A 129 Chapter 10 External Devices Control of
516. s from the video currently selected on the background A bus the current video to the video selected on the background B bus the new video eui Background A Background B Ore AEON RAR ASS In the default selection of flip flop mode p 56 the background always switches in the direction from the A bus to the B bus When the transition completes the cross point selections on the A and B buses are interchanged Inserting and deleting a key You can insert one or more of the four keys downstream keys on the PGM PST bank If you select a key which is already inserted the transition will delete the key A simultaneous combination of deleting and inserting keys is also possible Key 2 Inserting or deleting key 1 and key 2 Key 2 Deleting key 1 and inserting key 2 Basic Video Processing M IAJOAC Ja deyD 13 M Q Je deuD 14 Simultaneously changing the background and keys You can change one or more of the four keys downstream keys on the PGM PST bank and the background at the same time Changing the background and key 2 simultaneously Key 1 Key 3 Changing the background and keys 1 to 4 simultaneously Selecting the transition type determines the way in which the transition occurs The following transition types are available e Mix e NAM non additive mix e Super mix e Preset color mix color matte e Wipe
517. s the folder selected in step 4 of Freezing an image and writing it to memory p 106 If the entered folder name already exists a message to confirm overwriting appears When the system is powered off all the files saved in memory are lost To carry out a freeze and store simultaneously Freeze and Store Press Freeze amp Store turning it on In this state if you press Frame or Field this carries out a freeze and simultaneously stores a still image file Setting a mask To apply a mask to the signal selected on a frame memory source bus use the following procedure in the Frame Memory gt Still gt Freeze Store menu 2512 Masks can be set separately for frame memory source buses 1 and 2 However this section describes settings for frame memory source bus as an example 1 Press Box Mask turning it on 2 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Top Position of top side 2 Left Position of the left side 3 Right Position of the right side 4 Bottom Position of the bottom side 3 To link the masks on frame memory source buses 1 and 2 press Mask Link turning it on Recalling Still Images Recall You can recall an image file saved in memory and allocate it to any of the FM1 to FM8 outputs Still Image Operations Aiowey ewes zZ Ja deyo 107 oway ewes 7 Ja deyo 108 Recalling a still image To recall a still image file s
518. s the key number When Target is M E x Cut Auto Trans Keyx Cut Keyx Auto Trans SS Recall Keyx SS Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind KF Rev Run No Action When Target is P P Cut Auto Trans DSKx Cut DSKx Auto Trans FTB Cut FTB Auto Trans SS Recall DSKx SS Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind KF Rev Run No Action When Target is Common Setup FM Src1 Field Freeze FM Srcl Frame Freeze FM Src2 Field Freeze FM Src2 Frame Freeze FM Srcl Freeze Off FM Src2 Freeze Off FM Srcl Clip Record FM Src1 Clip Stop FM Src2 Clip Record FM Src2 Clip Stop FM1 to FM8 Clip Cueup FM1 to FM8 Clip Play FM1 to FM8 Clip Stop User1 to 8 SS Recall User1 to 8 EFF Recall Userl to 8 EFF Recall amp Run User to 8 KF Run User to 8 KF Stop Userl to 8 KF Rewind Userl to 8 KF Reverse Run No Action e When the trigger type is Level The x in M E x is the M E number When Target is M E x or P P Aspect Bkgd A Side Flags Bkgd B Side Flags No Action When Target is Common Setup Format Aspect Level Enable No Action for information about Level Enable see Notes in Making Control Panel GPI Input Settings amp p 230 If Format is selected for Action when the format converter is used on the switcher you can set the conversion format of the format converter for FC Input 1 4 FC Input 5
519. sccdteveocasteesnsccedteanss 47 Procedure for Basic Transition Opera ti n secieccvenccacececaccsvecsvecedososesssornns 48 Key Priority Setting cccessssseeerees 49 Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block scccte sicactancoteshciadete cis 49 Setting the Key Priority by a Menu OPEPAL OM sssri igst 50 Table of Contents 3 4 Displaying the Key Output Status and Key Priority snan 50 Super Mix Settings ssssseeeeeeeeseeeeees 50 Color Matte Settings eceeeeeeeeees 50 Executing a Transition s seseeeeeeeeees 51 Transition Indicator Function 52 Setting the Transition Rate ee 52 Pattern LIMIS eia as 53 Executing an Auto Transition 55 Executing a Transition with the Fader Lever Manual Transition cccccceeees 55 Combining Auto and Manual VaMSTAOMIS ss2c7scoee ies coc soezthalaacedstercd 56 Non Sync State siscsdeussvantasersacsasvaccastsevszanesy 56 Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mde neern 56 Transition Preview ssssseesesnnnunennnnnnnnnnnnn 57 Independent Key Transitions 00 57 Basic Independent Key Transition Operation S eeina e e 59 Setting the Independent Key Transition R te aiea 60 FadG l0 Bla CK i isscsenciessccsatasdceudcetsestnedduerdines 60 Chapter 4 Keys Overview iisciriniesssisisineneasuenduccteonsteisisicdcewanaed 62 Key ES ienie an 62 Key Modifiers siiscccssssscsstisensncvecstcouneasena
520. se Description The wipe proceeds in the opposite direction of NORM NORM REV normal reverse The wipe direction alternates between normal and reverse every time a transition is executed TRANS PVW transition preview button With the preview output of the M E bank and PGM PST bank you can check the effect of a transition in advance During the preview you can use the fader lever AUTO TRANS button and CUT button One of the following functions of this button can be selected in a Setup mode e When the transition completes the system returns to the normal mode e The transition preview mode is maintained while this button is pressed e Switching is made between the transition preview mode and normal mode every time this button is pressed PRIOR priority SET button While this button is held down you can set the key priority The setting mode when this button is pressed depends on whether or not the KEY PRIOR button is lit as follows e When the KEY PRIOR button is off the current key priority is set e When the KEY PRIOR button is lit the key priority after the next transition is set Press the KEY PRIOR button as required to switch between these two modes In either mode hold down the PRIOR SET button and press the KEY1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 button corresponding to the key you want to bring to the front For details Setting the Key Priority in
521. se direction as seen on a Vectorscope Short The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is shorter Long The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is longer Changing the path type for Xpt 1 Inthe Key Frame gt Path gt M E 1 6113 1 press the Xpt path type indicator for Key1 A path selection window appears 2 Press the indication for the desired path type to select it Xpt Hold off When replaying a keyframe change the inputs to the settings saved in memory Xpt Hold on When replaying a keyframe do not change the inputs Executing Effects By means of the RUN button in the Flexi Pad you can play an effect as a continuously varying image This is referred to as effect execution amp p 148 It is also possible to execute an effect from the device control block Executing an Effect in the Flexi Pad In the Flexi Pad press the EFF button to switch to effect operation mode The REWIND button and RUN button are displayed in the memory recall section In addition the alphanumeric display shows the number of the last recalled register EFF button Alphanumeric display Memory recall section Region selection buttons You use the REWIND button and RUN button in t
522. select the timecode source reference signal for determining the tape position from the following LTC Longitudinal Time Code Uses LTC When interpolation data is returned from a VTR use that interpolation data LTC VITC Vertical Interval Time Code Normally uses LTC but when the tape is moving at speeds at which LTC cannot be read use VITC When interpolation data is returned from a VTR use that interpolation data VITC Uses VITC CTL Control Uses CTL pulses or timer counter pulses Use this only for a tape on which no timecode is recorded The displayed tape position is based on the reference signal specified here Specify the VTR constants to set Press Set A numeric keypad window for hexadecimal input appears Set the VTR constants using values in the range 00 to FF Block Byte Setting item BLOCK 1 1 HI BYTE DEVICE TYPE 2 LO BYTE DEVICE TYPE 3 HI BYTE FRAME PREROLL TIME 4 LO BYTE FRAME PREROLL TIME EDIT DELAY FRAME EE DELAY FRAME OVER RUN FRAME TRAJECTORY BLOCK 2 TC READ DELAY FRAME START DELAY FRAME AFTER SYNC DELAY AFTER SYNC DELAY MODE1 MODE2 MAX PRRL SPEED INI OD oa AJOIN oI NIOJ a QUICK PVW PRRL TIME FRAME 7 Press Enter 8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 as required to set the constants for other VTRs Interfacing with External Devices dnyas jaued joujuoD
523. selected pattern When the color mix function is not used the result is a flat color and color 1 is always output You carry out color background settings in the Color Bkgd menu This section describes settings for color background as an example No Parameter Adjustment 3 Hue Hue Setting a color mix To combine color 1 and color 2 use the following procedure T nthe Color Bkgd gt Color Bkgd1 menu 2210 press Mix Color in the lt Matte gt group turning it on 2 Set the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 1 Size Pattern size 2 Soft Edge softness of the pattern 5 Pattern Pattern number Basic Color Background Setting Operations Setting a single color matte Flat Color If you are not using the color mix function to combine two colors use the following procedure Inthe Color Bkgd gt Color Bkgd1 menu 2210 press Flat Color in the lt Matte gt group turning it on 2 Set the following parameters a The patterns are the same as for a wipe Wipe Pattern List p 264 For the pattern selection you can also press Mix Pattern Select in the Color Bkgd1 menu then use the Mix Ptn Select menu 2210 1 Press the desired pattern 1 to 24 to select it and set the Size and Soft parameters 3 To adjust colors 1 and 2 turn on Color1 or Color2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 Luminance Luminance 2
524. sert This inserts the selected region before the specified precedence order If the inserted region is already present in a different precedence order it is deleted from that precedence order 3 To delete a region from the precedence order select the precedence assigned to the region 4 inthe lt Priority gt group press Delete This deletes the selected region from the precedence order list Recalling a Register Setting the display of regions in the Timeline menu on or off When Active Region is off to select which regions are displayed in the Timeline menu use the following procedure T Inthe Timeline Assign menu select the region 2 Forno display press Display turning it off To display press once more turning it on When Active Region is off regions with the Display Off setting are not displayed in the Timeline menu To return to the default precedence order and timeline menu display settings Press Default in the lt Priority gt group Recalling a Register Use the Flexi Pad to recall a register For each region there are 99 registers dedicated to keyframes numbered from 1 to 99 For details about regions and registers amp Regions p 144 and Registers p 144 Selecting regions in the Flexi Pad Press a region selection button or a button in the memory recall section to select a region If using buttons in the memory recall section press the MORE b
525. setting applies 2 Inthe lt Aspect gt group select one of the following Edge Crop Crops the left and right sides of a 16 9 image to convert it to a 4 3 image Letter Box 13 9 Crops the left and right sides of a 16 9 image to make a 13 9 image and add black bars at the top and bottom of the 13 9 image to make a 4 3 image Letter Box 14 9 Crops the left and right sides of a 16 9 image to make a 14 9 image and add black bars on the top and bottom of the 14 9 image to make a 4 3 image Letter Box 16 9 Adds black bars on the top and bottom of a 16 9 image to convert it to a 4 3 image Squeeze Compresses a 16 9 image horizontally to convert it to a 4 3 image For details about the image transformations see the following figure Signal Input Settings dnyes seyoMS 84 Je deyD 245 dnyas seyoms 8 Je deyo 246 Original image 16 9 Down converted image 4 3 OC O Edge Crop Di ic Letter Box 13 9 EPa Letter Box 14 9 DC a Letter Box 16 9 For down conversion the image position setting in edge crop mode is the same as for up conversion The value is from 30 to 30 inclusive For details amp Setting the image position in edge crop up conversion mode p 244 For down conversion the enhancer settings are the same as for up conversion For details amp Making enhancer setting
526. sible to carry out independent transitions on the keyers of the M E banks and PGM PST bank These are called independent key transitions By carrying out an independent key transition in combination with a common transition different transition types can be used for the background and keys It is also possible to use different transition types for key insertion and key deletion by means of a Setup menu setting p 59 Combining other transitions with independent key transitions When you set a common transition and a key independent transition for the same key you can apply two different effects such as a wipe and mix dissolve to the key simultaneously Transition Preview Independent Key Transitions 57 suolisues pue uonoajas euis Je deup 58 When carrying out such a combination of transitions on the same key as auto transitions p 55 the result varies depending on the timing at which the two respective AUTO TRANS buttons are pressed Simultaneous execution If the AUTO TRANS buttons for the two transitions are pressed simultaneously the following is the result Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent key transition is a mix dissolve Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions With the key inserted the key is gradually deleted using the two transition types simultaneously When the common transition completes even if the independent key transition is s
527. sign the multi viewer outputs to the output connectors in advance Assigning Output Signals p 246 Example of 4 split screen Sub screen name Sub screen Example of 10 split screen In the following description a split window is referred to as a sub screen 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output menu 7333 press Multi Viewer The Multi Viewer menu 7333 9 appears 2 In the lt Multi Viewer gt group press 1 or 2 to select the setting target The status area shows a list of outputs assigned to the sub screens 3 Inthe lt Split Mode gt group select the number of split windows Split 4 Splits the screen into 4 windows Split 10 Splits the screen into 10 windows 4 To add borders to the sub screens press Border Enable to turn it on Tally colors Tallies are shown on the multi viewer screen In this way you can see for example which input signals are used in the on air video Borders appear in the following two colors Red border Video with a red tally Green border Video with a green tally For details about tally settings Setting the On Air Tally p 235 and Making New Tally Generation Settings p 258 If Independent is set in the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Button Tally menu 7326 9 then tallies are not shown on the multi viewer Specifying whether to show or hide the sub screen name
528. siiucscticrviccnsncsviciseenaateniecnwanas 102 Still Image Operations ceeeee 103 Pre ParaulONS ides itech setae tad eee dhe tetas 103 Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu 103 Selecting an Input Image eee 105 Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory sis2 cased oeceshtcsoncadctartemasstermebess 106 Capturing and Saving an Input Image 106 Recalling Still Images Recall 107 mage soa cos cosceaini ns Sea revel ntsc cactantss 108 Continuously Capturing Still Images Record i 5 2 ssessdengueatearueunatabenysnteunayes 109 Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images Animation eee 110 Frame Memory Clip Function 111 Frame Memory Clip Operations 111 Preparations for Operation cee 111 Recalling Chpsrs gesuis ntg 112 Clp Playback cenceissnnsnissi 112 Clip Cr ation nn dees iS 114 Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders in Se ee en 114 AT OME Uy eonen eons he tide ees 114 Recording and Playback of Ancillary Dalian scwisiu A dne aed 115 Clip Transition Operations 115 Image Data Management sssseeee 117 Pair BilexProcessing 03 isi cssex isons andvaatss 117 Moving Files sce cats aicecagecvagte se Rsuclomtesins 117 Deleting Files czsisccsisssccesnssseortsacastisensncveese 117 Renaming Files ins anieecsssteasvaansntvaaan pees 118 Using an External HDD cccccceseeeeeeeees 118 HDD Formatting eee eeeeeeeeceesteeeteee
529. sing a BKS R3xxx or R1xxx series Router remote control a padlock icon appears The right side of the status area shows the level assignment status to the Level 1 to Level 4 buttons Selecting the level In the lt Level Button No gt group at the lower right in the above illustration press the level for switching Switching the Source for Each Destination You can switch the source for each destination with a menu operation For the assignment of destinations and sources to buttons use the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Router Remote gt RTR Mode Setting menu 7323 1 For details Router Remote Control Settings p 226 1 In the Router gt Router Control gt Router Control menu 5111 press Change Xpt The Change Xpt menu 5111 1 appears Destination Select buttons appear in groups of 16 Source Select buttons appear by group maximum 24 buttons 2 Press one of the Destination Select buttons to select the destination for which you want to switch the source To change the group Press one of the 1 16 17 32 33 48 and 49 64 buttons 3 Press one of the Source Select buttons to select the source you want to switch To change the group Press one of the 1 24 25 48 97 120 and 121 128 buttons Router Control Menu Operations sBumes 1410 pue dems pue Adog spunos6yoeg 10 09 g seydeyy 127 suonoun yeioeds 6 Ja deyo 128 Special Functions Side Fla
530. sition DME Wipe Key Fill Matte Select Default Main Mask Recall Default recall button VF buttons Main Mask On Trans ____ Vector Key Source O HF buttons Previous page button Parameter setting buttons Function button area Parameter group button Keyframe status Effect 0 Free KF 0 00 00 00 00 KF Luminance Off Trans Priority 1 K4 2 K3 Key Wipe Pattern Density 100 00 Key Signal Priority gorp Filter Processed Transition Key Menu title button This shows the title of the menu screen Menu page number button This shows the menu screen page number When you press this button the top menu window p 33 appears You can enter the page number for the desired menu or press one of the top menu selection buttons in the window to display that menu While the system is accessing the local disk or external HDD the indicator lights red Indicator for frame memory external HDD e Local disk indicator When the indicator is lit do not power off the switcher or disconnect the USB cable 1 When an external HDD is connected VF buttons These indicate the larger subdivisions 2nd level of the menu Depending on the selected item the menu screen contents change including the HF button indications HF buttons These indicate the smaller subdivisions 3rd level of the menu Depe
531. sition in the lt Position gt group turning it on 3 To move the position of the DME wipe pattern press the button where you want to move to turning it on The DME wipe pattern displayed on the screen moves to the position of the specified button Setting the DME wipe pattern size Size 1 Open the M E 1 gt DME Wipe gt Modify menu 1165 2 Press Size turning it on 3 Set the following parameter No Parameter 1 Size Adjustment Effect size a The effect size when Size is off is taken as 100 00 Adjusting the DME wipe pattern cropping When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected crop cannot be used 1 Open the M E 1 gt DME Wipe gt Modify menu 1165 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 2 Inthe lt Crop Mode gt group press Crop turning it on 3 Set the following parameters Parameter group 1 2 No Parameter 1 H Adjustment Crop the left and right of the image Left value is displayed Crop the top and bottom of the image Top value is displayed 3 All Crop the left right top and bottom of the image Left value is displayed Parameter group 2 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 Top Crop the top of the image 2 Left Crop the left of the image 3 Right Crop the right of the image 4 Bottom Crop the bottom of the image To crop to 4 3 aspect ratio in 16 9 mode In the lt Crop Mode gt
532. sition Control Block In the transition control block you can modify the output of the M E bank or PGM PST bank and perform transitions Both common transition and independent key transition operations are possible PRIOR SET button Next transition selection buttons Key priority display Transition type selection buttons Key delegation buttons K SS STORE button Key snapshot buttons KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 Sued JO suoouny pue sowen Zz Jeldeup KEY4 TRANS Nor NORM REV REV KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 TRANS TRANS TRANS Transition execution section Wipe direction selection buttons B Independent key transition execution section D Independent key transition type selection buttons TRANS PVW button Shown above is the right hand type transition control block with the right hand fader lever Next transition selection buttons These specify how the image will be changed as a result of the next transition Name Description BKGD The next transition will change the background background KEY1 to KEY4
533. sk 200 216 Reset initialization 215 Resizer 76 DME wipe pattern list 265 Right button 35 Rotation 86 89 Router destination 219 list display 127 source switching 127 Router interface tally setup 257 Router menu 127 257 Router remote control 226 Run mode 161 S Safe title 125 Saving recalling effect 145 setup data 214 Screen saver 238 Serial Tally menu 259 Serial tally settings 259 Setup 18 data saving recalling 214 locking 217 switcher system 240 whole system 211 Setup Define data saved by 297 Shadow 63 SHIFT button 23 Shift button 35 Shift operation 224 Shortcut menu 38 recalling 38 registering 38 Index x pu 313 x pul 314 Shotbox 176 execution 179 register creation 177 register editing 179 Show key 251 Shutdown button 33 Side flags assigning a cross point button 226 DME wipes 129 operations 128 overview 128 setup 241 wipes 129 Signal assignment and selection 45 Signal format 211 Signal input settings 242 Signal name display 47 Signal output settings 246 Signal selection 45 Snapshot 17 attributes 167 editing registers 174 operations 168 171 174 overview 167 status 173 types 167 Soft edge 63 88 Source name displays 23 Source patch 261 Space button 35 Start Up menu 213 214 Start up state 213 Status area 32 Super mix 47 setting 50 Swap 123 operations 124 Switcher configuration 240 Switcher processor connectors 40 power supply 39 System configuration examples 19 Sys
534. splay the Keyl Wipe Adjust menu 1116 1 For an overview of independent key transitions Independent Key Transitions p 57 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions sedim g Je deyuD 87 s d M g Jaydeyo 88 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings Selecting the independent key transition wipe pattern You select the independent key wipe pattern from the list of patterns displayed in the menu To select a wipe pattern for independent key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 Inthe Keyl Wipe Adjust menu select Pattern Select The Pattern Select menu 1116 2 appears 2 Press the button to select the desired pattern Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers Available modifiers You can use the following modifiers with an independent key transition wipe However the available modifiers may depend on the pattern you are using e Direction e Soft edge e Positioner e Rotation e Aspect ratio e Multiplication Setting the wipe direction Direction In the lt Direction gt group of the Keyl Wipe Adjust menu make one of the following selections Normal Regular direction Normal Reverse Alternate between regular and reverse for each transition Reverse Opposite direction of normal Softening the wipe pattern edge Soft edge 1 Inthe Key1 Wipe Adjust menu press Soft turning it on 2 Set the following parameter
535. ss OK Managing Images Using a DDR VTR Using a DDR VTR for High speed Backup and Restoring You can save all files currently held in frame memory as a single backup data set by high speed recording on video tape or other medium To restore the folder structure it is necessary to save the automatically generated file list of file name length of clip and so on in memory At the beginning of this backup data a red or blue image is automatically inserted when the data is created Do not delete this image as it is required for restoring the data High speed recording of backup data to DDR or VTR Before starting the backup it is necessary to select the FM output to record on an AUX bus for example and input the AUX output to the DDR VTR 1 Open the Frame Memory gt External Device gt Backup to DDR VTR menu 2564 2 Tosave with ancillary data output the frame memory output signal to the AUX bus 3 Press Backup Enable turning it on 4 Press Backup Start 5 Start recording on the external device and immediately after that press Yes Managing Images Using a DDR VTR Aiowey ewes4 zZ Ja deyo 119 oway ewes 7 Ja deyp 120 This starts the backup and when completed a message appears 6 Stop the recording on the external device and press the OK button T Tosave the file list in memory press File gt File Name Data The File gt Frame Mem gt File Name Data menu 7153 appear
536. ssign menu 7322 5 or Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Table Button Assign menu 7322 1 select one of the following for each cross point table Hold Acts as a shift button and the shifted version of the cross point buttons is enabled while the button is held down Lock Acts as a shift button and pressing the button toggles between the shifted version and the unshifted version Off Acts as cross point button 24 Setting the action of the SHIFT button in the cross point control block The function of the shift button is set in the lt Display Shift Mode gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Main V K Pair Assign menu 7322 5 or Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Table Button Assign menu 7322 1 Shift All Bus When this is On it functions as a shift button for all buses When this is Off it functions as a shift button for the source name display section It is not possible to make this setting separately for each of the M E and PGM PST banks Shift All Bus is only valid when the cross point button shift operation see previous item is set to Lock or Off Setting the source signal name 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Src Name gt Src Color menu 7322 6 2 Select the signal to be set Primary33 to Primary48 and signal names relating to DME and M E 2 are disabled even if selected 2 Set the name
537. st 264 Wipe patterns modifiers 83 possible modifiers 87 selection 83 Wipe snapshot 89 operation 89 90 Wipes independent key transition 87 operation 83 90 overview 83 Wiring menu 258 Wiring settings 258 X Xpt Assign menu 223 XPT HOLD button 251 Y Y balance adjustment 70 overview 68 Z Z ring 28 The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation Trademarks e Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Adobe and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries The products or system names appearing in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Further the or symbols are not used in the text
538. st of files for the selected device in the upper list In this list is shown the file name register number set when the material was recorded the length of the file data timecode value and the file update information Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders e File update information is not shown when using the video disk communications protocol e When using an Extended VTR the length of file data and file update information are not shown For Extended VTR the register number is shown as the file name 2 Select the device 3 Press the File List Update button File list sharing You can share the recalled file list across serial ports connected to the same disk recorder p 232 Sorting files in the list Select either File Name File No or Update in the lt Sort gt group after step 2 above File Name Sorts in alphabetical order of file name File No Sorts in ascending file number order Update Sorts in file update date order newest first e Files cannot be sorted by the file update date and time when using the video disk communications protocol e When using an Extended VTR it is not possible to sort files Loading Files Files cannot be recalled when the disk recorder is set to Recorder 1 Open the Device gt DDR VTR gt File List menu 5333 2 Select the device 3 Select the file you want to recall 4 Press Load Creating new files A file name must be specified to record to a
539. start point and end point and the clip start point are all reset Image Data Management You can carry out the following operations on the files that were created when images were saved e Pair File Processing p 117 e Moving Files p 117 e Deleting Files amp p 117 e Renaming Files p 118 During frame memory clip playback p 112 of the pair assigned to either of the target FM selection buttons frame memory operations may not be performed properly Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip playback Pair File Processing You can create a pair file from two single files In the reverse direction you can split a pair file into two single files Couple You can create a pair file from two single still image files or clip files Separate You can also separate a pair file into two single still image files or clip files Creating a pair file from two single files Carrying out the following operation automatically switches Pair to on This section describes FM1 and FM2 as an example 1 In the Frame Memory gt Still gt Recall menu 2511 or Frame Memory gt Clip gt Recall menu 2521 recall the two single files you want to convert to a pair file to FM1 and FM2 2 Open the Frame Memory gt File gt Pair Recombination menu 2541 3 Press Couple Splitting a pair file into two single files Carrying out the following operation automatically switches Pair to off Th
540. still image Frame memory clip A clip consists of a sequence of still images which appears as a movie on playback In this manual this is also referred to simply as a clip The files still files constituting clips are referred to as a clip file When the above distinctions are not being made an image is simply referred to as an image Frame memory output There are eight frame memory channels FM1 to FM8 and each channel independently allows a freeze image to be saved or recalled By allocating FM1 to FM8 to cross point buttons you can use the still image output or clip output from each channel as input material Correspondence between input and output There are two buses for capturing frame memory material the frame memory source bus 1 and the frame memory source bus 2 These input buses are used by allocation to one of the pairs of output FM 1 amp 2 FM3 amp 4 FM5 amp 6 or FM7 amp 8 You can freeze a frame in each channel separately or freeze in the two channels simultaneously The source buses allocated to FM1 to FM8 are as follows Input Frame memory Frame memory channel source bus 1 source bus 2 Output FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 FM5 FM6 FM7 FM8 Pair mode By enabling the pair mode you can link FM1 and FM2 FM3 and FM4 FMS5 and FM6 and FM7 and FM8 For example when a freeze or image processing is carried out on FM1 the same operation is carried out on FM2 The same ap
541. switcher A to a removable disk in advance In the User Setup gt Source Patch gt Patch Table menu 7212 press File gt Snapshot The File gt Snapshot gt Snapshot menu 7131 appears Local Disk _ SYSTEM File Edit pis Src Patch File Edit Link Src Patch Link In the list on the right select the file you want to recall to the register Press Src Patch Link to turn it on Press Load The snapshot with signal pairs replaced according to the patch table is recalled to Switcher B Diagnosis Checking the Communications Status In the Diagnosis menu you can check the LAN communications status within the system Communications Status Display Open the Diagnosis gt System Info gt LAN Status menu 7341 The following communications status screen appears Connected Connected Connected Connected Devices constituting the system only appear if they are connected On the screen devices that send information are listed under Device and those that receive information are listed under Target The following information appears in the Status column e Connected Ready for communication from Device to Target e Not Connected Not Ready for communication from Device to Target Chapter Checking the Communications Status sisoubeiq z 13 deyo 263 xlpueddy Appendix Wipe Pattern List Wipe Pattern List Interpreting the illustrations for pat
542. t 2 00 211 Setting the Signal Format eee 211 Switching the Input Reference Signal for HD PV SUCII E A EE 212 Setting Conversion Formats 08 212 Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio 213 Selecting the State After Power on 213 Saving and Recalling Setup Data 214 Selecting the State at Start up 214 Saving User Defined Settings 214 Setting Automatic Loading of Register Data at Power On Autoload Function 214 Reset and Initialization 0 c 215 Installation and Device Setup 215 Installing Software ss cvery c5 Sa esensonans ee Hees 215 Table of Contents Saving a Frame Memory Clip with Ancillary D t nnenie iaaa 216 Setting the Number of Format Converter Input Output s es eese 216 System Maintenance cccccceeceees 216 Setting the Date and Time ee 216 Using Removable Disks eee 216 Carrying Out the Primary Setting 216 Formatting a Local Disk 0 eee 217 Locking the Setup Menu Settings 217 Locking File Loading Operations 218 Chapter 17 Control Panel Setup Overall Control Panel Settings 219 Interchanging the Bank Order or Disabling Operation e ak eteechy sn R 219 Linking Switcher Bus and Router De stin tion spinanie 219 Linking Transitions between Keyerts 220 Linking the Next Transition Selection B tonS
543. t subject of the action m 2 Variable Variable speed x When not using an Extended VTR or disk recorder or Repeat steps 2 to 11 if setting other devices z when the file name has not been set for an Extended F VTR skip to step 4 To carry out start point and stop point settings 8 and cueing up operations in the device control 4 In the lt Action gt group select the action block With the following buttons in the device control block you can set the start point or stop point of a keyframe point on the timeline or carry out a cueing up operation Cueup Outputs a command to cue up to the currently displayed start point Start Outputs a Play command Check that the MENU button is lit amber If it i t lit When the stop point and variable speed are both set ash a I Toon Se ahe AEON a press it turning it on the variable speed setting takes priority START TC button Sets the start point of the keyframe point to the current time Stop Outputs a Stop command STOP TC button Sets the stop point of the keyframe point to the current time Kva CUE button Cues up to the start point set for the Before executing the Stop command if the timecode Keyitame pormi for the set stop point has been reached or on an Extended VTR or disk recorder if the end of the file has been reached then at that point the device stops To test an action command output Select the desired device from the upper list in the status area
544. t Bank Select gt group 3 Press the button whose assignment you wish to change Overall Control Panel Settings dnjas jeued joUu0D Z Ja deyD 221 dnjes jaued 04u00 Z4 Ja deyD 222 4 Select the function you want to assign from the list on the right 5 Press Set To cancel the assignment Press Clear To make the assignment the default Press Default Assigning Devices or Functions to the Region Selection Buttons of the Device Control Block Trackball 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt Trackball Module menu 7321 17 2 Inthe button indications on the left press the button for the assignment 3 Select the device or function to be assigned 4 Press Set To cancel an assignment Select the button then press Clear To return all button assignments to the factory default state Press Default Inhibiting Utility Bus and Key Operations You can inhibit operations on the utility bus and keys of the M E and PGM PST banks from the menu This inhibition applies to the following control blocks e Cross point control block e Transition control block 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt Util Bus Key Inhibit menu 7321 18 2 In the list in the status area select the switcher bank for which operations are to be inhibited 3 Inthe lt Util Bus Key Inhibit gt group press the utility bus or key button Util1 Bus or Key1 to Key4 for the o
545. t Output gt 4 3 Crop 7333 10 Engineering Setup gt Switcher e When setting the Src No parameter M E 2 signal Primary 33 to 48 gt Output gt Multi Viewer gt Source signal selection Output Assign e When setting the Output No parameter Output 13 to 32 selection 7333 11 Engineering Setup gt Switcher Output 13 to 32 selection gt Output gt FC Output Select 7334 Engineering Setup gt Switcher M E 2 settings gt Transition 7334 1 Engineering Setup gt Switcher e M E 2 settings gt Transition gt Preset Color Mix e Key5 to Key8 selection 7334 2 Engineering Setup gt Switcher M E 2 settings gt Transition gt Transition Curve 7335 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Key M E 2 settings Wipe FM CCR 7335 1 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Key M E2 PVW settings Wipe FM CCR gt Show Key 7336 2 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link Selection of items related to M E 2 gt Internal Bus Link gt Link Bus Select e Selection of items related to P P Key5 to 8 7336 5 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link e M E 2 Auto Trans M E 2 Cut selection on video button display gt GPI Link gt GPI Link Adjust e M E 2 bus settings on bus display 7336 6 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link M E 2 selection gt M E Link 7336 7 Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link e Selection of items related to M E 2 gt Key Transition Link e Selection of items related to P P Key5 to 8 7337 2 Engineering Setup gt Switcher e M E 2 selection gt Device Inter
546. t can be set Color Bkgd Overall path settings for color Color Bkad Packgrounds are made Color Bkgd 1 Paths for color background 1 Color Bkgd 2 Paths for color background 2 Types of path Path types for Curve OFF Executing the effect causes no change Step There is no interpolation between keyframes so that the effect parameters are updated each time a keyframe is passed Linear Linear interpolation between keyframes resulting in constant speed movement S Curve The rate of change accelerates and decelerates before and after a keyframe so that the rate of change is maximum midway between two keyframes Spline The effect follows a smooth curved path from each keyframe to the next Path types for Hue CW The hue changes in a clockwise direction as seen on a Vectorscope CCW The hue changes in a counterclockwise direction as seen on a Vectorscope Short The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is shorter Long The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is longer Path types for Xpt Xpt Hold off When replaying a keyframe change the inputs to the settings saved in memory Xpt Hold on When replaying a keyframe do not change the inputs Effect Execution By means of the RUN button in the Flexi Pad you can play an effect as a continuously varying image This is referred to as effect execution Range of execution Ea
547. t recalled register Lit orange Register containing data Off Register in which nothing is saved 5 Press the number of the desired register The button you pressed lights yellow and the master timeline is recalled The alphanumeric display shows the selected register number Specifying the Region and Edit Points Specifying the Region and Edit Points Selecting the Region in which Editing Applies Selecting by control panel Select the region in which the editing is applied by the effect consisting of keyframes using the region selection buttons in the Flexi Pad For details about the method of region selection Selecting regions in the Flexi Pad p 150 Selecting by menus This is convenient for selecting some of the regions assigned to the Flexi Pad or changing the reference region The function of region selection buttons in the Flexi Pad is linked to the menu If you carry out region selection by pressing a region selection button then all the regions assigned to that button are selected 1 Open the Key Frame gt Region Select menu 6117 On the left of the status area region selection buttons appear You can switch the display of regions between those assigned to the region selection buttons in the Flexi Pad or the memory recall buttons by pressing the Region Sel Btn Area or Mem Rcl Btn Area button respectively in the lt Flexi Pad Module gt group Selection screen for regions assigne
548. ta Assign 7322 10 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Side Flags All data relating to Side Flags Button Assign menu Button Assign 7324 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Prefs Utility All data relating to function assignment to user preference buttons and cross point control block 2nd row buttons 7325 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Device Interface All data relating to Device Interface menu 7326 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation All data relating to Operation menu 7327 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Maintenance e Setting data for the following buttons Screen Saver Panel Sleep Mode LCD Btn Brightness Display Brightness Switch Brightness Touch Beep e Setting data for Initial Menu 7361 to Engineering Setup gt Router Tally All data relating to router interface and tally interface 7367 Data of Color Palette window Data Saved by Setup Define and Initial Status Define xlpueddy 297 xlpueddy 298 Included in Switcher Setup Menu No Menu path Saved data 3221 Misc gt Safe Title All data relating to Safe Title menu 7322 5 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Main V K Pair Cross point assignment settings excluding lt Xpt Shift Assign Mode gt and lt Display Shift Mode gt groups 7322 6 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Xpt Assign gt Src Name Names of source signals Src Color 7326 2 Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Ope
549. ta between outputs The copy source and destination data must be in the same signal format Copy and Swap Operations Copy and Swap Using Menus Copy and swap operations are performed using the Copy Swap menu Select the following targets for operation in the Copy Swap gt Copy Swap menu For format converter operations use the Copy Swap gt Copy menu This section describes copy and swap operations for wipe data as an example e MIE Copying and swapping M E data e Key Copying and swapping key data e Wipe Copying and swapping wipe data e DME Wipe Copying and swapping DME wipe data e Matte Copying and swapping matte data e Color Copying and swapping color data e Format Converter Copying format converter data For an overview of copy and swap operations Overview of Copy and Swap p 123 Copy and swap menu operations To copy or swap wipe data use the following procedure 1 Open the Copy Swap gt Copy Swap gt Wipe menu 3113 The status area shows lists for the copy swap source on the left and the copy swap destination on the right 2 In the lt Data Select gt group select either of the following Wipe Applies operations to wipes in the transition control block Key Wipe Applies operations to wipes in the independent key transition control block 3 Select the copy swap source data and copy swap destination data p 123 4 Press Copy to copy or press Swap to swap To u
550. tachment is set as a percentage value Fader lever start position as 0 end position 100 Removing macro attachment settings To cancel a macro attachment to a button Hold down the PRE MCRO button or POST MCRO button assigned to the 1st row in the cross point control block and press the flashing button in the background A row The button for which the macro attachment is set stops flashing and goes off and this removes the setting To cancel a macro attachment to a fader lever Hold down the PRE MCRO button or POST MCRO button assigned to the 1st row in the cross point control block and press the PRIOR SET button in the control block containing the fader lever having the macro attachment set To delete individual macro attachment settings You can delete individual settings of a macro attachment assigned to a button 1 Open the Macro gt Attachment menu 5421 2 Select the macro attachment settings you want to delete 3 Press Delete 4 Check the message then press Yes To delete all macro attachment settings ina single operation 1 Open the Macro gt Attachment menu 5421 2 Press All Clear 3 Check the message then press Yes Switching the macro attachment assignment mode button number mode pair number mode When assigning a macro attachment to a cross point button you can select the mode as either by button number or by pair number video and key If you change the mode using the foll
551. tarting up the menu system an error was found on the local disk x damaged and all data is lost The Execute format local disk in menu 7317 Engineering Setup gt System local disk needs to be reformatted gt Maintenance Please execute local disk format on Page 7317 Invalid Name Empty 2512 Frame Memory gt Still gt Freeze Store x In the above menu a Store was carried out without specifying a name Alternatively 71XX File Menu 7171 File gt Configure gt Directory In the above menus when renaming a file or creating a directory the name was not entered Enter the name correctly The file exists already 2512 Frame Memory gt Still gt Freeze Store x In the above menu the file name specified when Store was executed already exists in the switcher Specify a different name Error Messages 305 Icon Message Local Disk Format Description Failure Local Disk device is busy In order to complete local disk format System needs to be restarted and formatted again System will be restarted then please execute local disk format again 7317 Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance In the above menu the local disk formatting procedure failed If the local disk is functioning correctly or in some cases when there is damage to the disk it may not be possible to format the disk correctly in a single attempt In such cases it is necessary to restart the system and then carry out formatting again Press
552. tation name e A value of 100 00 POS Toggle Position On Off corresponds to a rotation of one turn counterclockwise X Y Fix the operating direction e A value of 100 00 CTR Return the pattern position to the center of corresponds to a rotation of the screen one turn clockwise e A value of 0 00 corresponds to 2 Press the WIPE button turning it on no rotation 3 Press the POS button turning Position on When Speed is selected 4 No Parameter Adjustment Move the trackball to set the wipe position l 1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern e A value of 100 00 corresponds to one counterclockwise rotation per second e A value of 100 00 corresponds to one clockwise By pressing the X button turning it on you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction and by pressing the Y button turning it on you can restrict movement to the vertical direction s d M g saydeyo Rotating the wipe pattern Rotation rotation per second e A value of 0 00 corresponds to You can rotate the pattern pause Angle When Magnitude is selected No Parameter Adjustment 1 Angle Angle of pattern at start of transition e A value of 100 00 corresponds to a rotation of one turn counterclockwise e A value of 100 00 Angle Off Angle On corresponds to a rotation of one turn clockwise This carries out a wipe with the pattern in a fixed angle e A value of 0 00
553. tcher gt Device Interface menu 7337 press GPI Output The GPI Output menu 7337 4 appears 2 Select the setting to apply 3 Inthe lt Trigger Type gt group select the trigger type Rising Edge The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open circuit or drives the output high and holds this state for the specified pulse width Falling Edge The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted or drives the output low and holds this state for the specified pulse width _X_ Any Edge Each time the trigger occurs the relay contacts are alternately closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low Status Depending on the status the relay contacts are closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low No Operation The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level Interfacing with External Devices dnjes Jeyoms 8 4a deyo 255 dnyes seyoms 8 Ja deyo 256 4 Select the pulse width and timing to be set No Parameter Adjustment 3 Pulse Width Pulse width 4 Timing Output timing a 1 Field 1 2 Field 2 3 Any When gt C is selected as the trigger polarity there is no Pulse Width setting When Status is selected there is no Pulse Width or Timing setting 5 In the lt Source gt group select the action block M E 1 and P P Sets an action for the M E or PGM PST bank Common Sets an ac
554. te button cap with the button top puller so that the cap flexes slightly and remove the cap 4 Remove the old label and insert the new label 5 Replace the button cap 6 Replace the button in its original location Maintenance xipueddy 309 xlpueddy 310 Care of the Control Panel Clean the control panel unit switches and fader lever by gently wiping with a soft dry cloth In the event of excessive grime moisten the cloth with a little cold or lukewarm water and wipe gently Wring out all surplus water from the cloth before use to prevent any surplus water from penetrating the panel Moisture inside the panel can cause it to fail Never use organic solvents cleaners or other chemicals Do not wipe with excessive force as this may scratch the panel Maintenance Index Numerics Istrow 22 1ST ROW DSPLY button 23 2ndrow 22 2ND ROW DSPLY button 23 9 pin port 254 A Add Favorite button 33 Additive mix 67 Ancillary data 105 111 115 Angle 86 Animation 110 Aspect ratio setting 86 89 Attributes effect 145 key snapshot 173 keyframe 164 snapshot 171 temporary attributes 168 type 145 167 Auto chroma key 69 Auto transition 55 Autoload function 202 209 214 AUX bus control enable disable 256 AUX bus override 235 AUX bus remote panel 288 AUX bus settings 126 AUX menu 126 Background 13 Bank 168 Blink 74 Border 63 BS button 35 Bus fixed mode 56 Bus override
555. tem maintenance 216 T Tally 257 copy settings 259 generation settings 258 group settings 257 Tally Copy menu 259 Tally Enable menu 258 TC button 34 Temporary attributes 145 168 Through mode 242 247 Thumbnail displays 108 Index Timeline GPI 133 macro timeline 198 master timeline 148 P Bus 132 VTR Extended VTR diskrecorder 139 Timeline menu 149 Top menu list 30 Top menu selection buttons 33 Top menu window 33 Touch panel 239 Trackball 27 Trackball sensitivity 238 TRANS PVW button 25 Transition control block 24 Transition execution section 25 Transition menu 250 Transition preview mode 250 Transition rate list display and settings 126 Transition rate setting Flexi Pad 52 menu 53 Transition type selection buttons 24 48 Transitions 47 auto execution 55 basic operation procedure 48 manual execution 55 preview 57 Trim button 34 U User region setting 241 User setup 261 Utility 176 V Variable duration mode 146 Vertical blanking interval adjustment 247 VF buttons 31 Video clips 247 Video processing flow 44 Video signal adjustment 69 70 Video switching 250 VTR extracting images 120 recording 119 VTR Extended VTR disk recorder 134 cueup amp play 137 operations 135 timeline 139 W Window adjustment 70 overview 68 Wipe copy swap 124 Wipe direction menu 83 selection buttons 25 specification 88 Wipe modifiers operation 83 88 91 Wipe modify clear 87 92 Wipe pattern li
556. ter e Copy Copy the contents of one register to another register e Merge Merges the data of two registers It is not possible to merge master timeline registers e Move Move the contents of one register to another register e Swap Swap the contents of two registers e Delete Delete the contents of a register e Name Attach a name to a register Write protecting the contents of the effect register It is not possible to write protect an empty register 1 Open the Effect gt Effect 1 99 gt Lock menu 6222 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the list and in the selection window select the region You can select more than one region To select all regions press ALL 3 Press OK 4 select a register To select all registers press ALL 5 Press Lock turning it on To release the lock Select the register you want to unlock and press Lock turning it off Copying moving and swapping data between effect registers This section describes the procedure for copying as an example You can move or swap data using the similar procedure 1 Open the Effect gt Effect 1 99 gt Copy Merge menu 6223 The left side of the status area shows the register number of the copy source and the right side shows the register number of the copy destination 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the list and in the selection window select the region You can select more than one region
557. ter 19 Router Interface and Tally Setup Router Interface Settings 0000 257 Assigning Switcher Inputs and Outputs to S BUS SPp C enges sn ai 257 Tally Group Settings s eeeeeeeees 257 Wiring Settings ssceeesssseeeeeeeeees 258 Making New Wiring Settings 4 258 Changing Wiring Settings eee 258 Deleting Wiring Settings eee 258 Sorting Wiring Settings eeen 258 Tally Generation SettingS ss0 258 Making New Tally Generation SETI IS e Besa n creas 258 Modifying Tally Generation ee 259 Deleting Tally Generation Settings 259 Tally Copy Settings cccsssseeeeeeeeeeeee 259 Making New Tally Copy Settings 259 Modifying Tally Copy Settings 259 Deleting Tally Copy Settings 259 Serial Tally Settings ccccceseseeeees 259 Setting or Changing the Serial Tally SSCS oe a enavdevactavacsvaceuouveacts 259 Making the Serial Tally Source Address DC UIMON sinea aiii diate 260 Chapter 20 User Setup Source Patch sssssssnnnssennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 261 Sequence of Source Patch Operations 261 Exporting a User Source Name File to a Removable Disk 0 cee eeeeeeeeeees 261 Creating a Patch Table Conversion Table i S 261 Replacing Signal Pairs Using the Patch Table nenneunpsinnisinnnununn 262 Chapter 21 Diagnosis Checking the Communications Stat Si rea ae aA aA aaea
558. ternal Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup is pressed this message appears if the specified frame memory output channel is locked Not enough free register area for Backup or Restore process 10 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup is pressed this message appears if there is not enough space to carry out the backup Prepare failed not any file was found on this board 11 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup is pressed this message appears if no image is present Backup failed not prepared yet 12 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup is pressed this message appears if not yet ready Backup failed Clip recall failed 13 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup is pressed this message appears if All One Clip ID Recall failed internal processing error Prepare failed Clip create failed 14 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup is pressed this message appears if All One Clip creation failed internal processing error Prepare failed insufficient Clip id 15 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu when Backup
559. terns The black part of the pattern represents the old video and the white part the new video with the wipe taking place in the direction of the arrow Ce EL el GN Bl Pr Cal EA BA PA EA Ee Bs AARD DME Wipe Pattern List DME wipe patterns available in one channel mode 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 Squeeze 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 264 Wipe Pattern List Door 1041 1042 1043 1044 Flip tumble 1101 1102 Frame in out kas A mood 1201 1202 1203 1204 Picture in picture a ak 1251 Mosaic 1701 Defocus Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List Slide 7001 7002 7003 7004 Squeeze E oni 7031 7005 al 7006 7007 m 7008 m F Wipe Pattern List x pu ddy 265 xlpueddy 266 Frame in out Nh 7201 7202 7203 7204 7205 7206 7207 FADE FADE P 7223 7224 Menu Tree This section shows the structure of each menu Menus with Yes in the Default Recall column can be reset to their initial values by pressing the Default Recall button Some menus display items and functions not supported by the MVS 3000 system For details amp Menus of Disabled Operations and Settings p 281 Menu Tree M E 1 Menu Menu Page No Default Recall
560. ters for each control panel m Register 1 M E 1 Snapshot 1 User2 Effect 5 Register 3 M E 1 Effect 1 P P Effect 90 User1 Effect 1 Auto Run Off Register 99 _ P P Effect 2 Auto Run On Auto Run On Shotbox registers The previous figure shows schematically the settings in the 99 shotbox registers Each register may contain any combination of the regions to which the register applies with the snapshots or effects to be recalled The Auto Run function is an attribute which can be set for each register When this is set to On an effect recalled by a shotbox operation is automatically run e When register 1 is executed this recalls M E 1 snapshot 1 and User2 effect 5 For register 1 auto run is On and therefore the User2 effect is run as soon as it has been recalled e When register 3 is executed M E 1 effect 1 P P effect 90 and User effect 1 are recalled For register 3 auto run is OFF and therefore to run the recalled effects press the RUN button in the Flexi Pad Shotbox Register Creation You can create save shotbox registers using the Flexi Pad or from the menu Creating a Shotbox Register in the Flexi Pad 1 In the Flexi Pad press the SNAPSHOT button turning it on This switches the memory recall section to snapshot operation mode Specify the register number of the snapshot you want to save in a shotbox register and
561. terval a Depending on the signal format the adjustment range varies as follows 480i 10 to 19 576i 6 to 22 1080i 1080PsF 7 to 20 720P 7 to 25 5 To enable through mode press Through Mode setting it to Enable The following outputs can be enabled e Aux 1 to 24 outputs e Program outputs of the M E and PGM PST rows e Clean outputs of the M E and PGM PST rows Making Safe Title Settings 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output gt Safe Title menu 7333 4 The status area shows the output ports and the assigned signals with the box 1 box 2 cross and grid states 2 Select the output you want to set 3 To enable the safe title on off setting made in the Misc menu press Safe Title turning it on 4 Carry out one of the following operations To display a box Press Box1 or Box2 turning it on In this case carry out the following steps 5 and 6 To display a cross Press Cross turning it on To display a grid Press Grid turning it on In this case carry out the following steps 5 and 6 5 If you selected Box1 or Box2 in step 4 adjust the following parameters No Parameter Adjustment 2 Box Size Box size 3 Luminance Display brightness a Adjustable for Box2 If Grid is selected in step 4 in the lt Grid Size gt group select one of the following 80 00 Sets the grid size to 80 of the screen frame 85 00 Sets the grid size to 85 o
562. th the adjustment knobs Parameter group 1 2 No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Crop the left and right of the image No Parameter Adjustment V Crop the top and bottom of the image 1 W Border width A Crop the left right top and bottom of 2 L Luminance tneimage 3 S Saturation Parameter group 2 2 4 H Hue No Parameter Adjustment When soft border is selected 1 T Crop the top of the image Parameter group 1 2 2 L Crop the left of the image No Parameter Adjustment 2 ope Noa Nig ee 1 W Border width 4 B Crop the bottom of the image 2 Border inner softness gi Button for specifying effect size DME Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi Pad SIZE Specifies the effect size When the SIZE button is lit green you can specify the effect size with the adjustment knobs No Parameter Adjustment 1 S Effect size a The effect size when SIZE is off is taken as 100 DME wipe modify clear With the DME WIPE button held down pressing and holding down the region selection button for the selected region returns the DME wipe settings to their initial status For details about initial status amp Saving User Defined Settings p 214 Saving Canceling and Deleting DME Wipe Snapshots The operations of saving canceling and deleting a DME wipe pattern snapshot you have created are the same as the oper
563. the Transition Control Block p 49 Key priority display The current key priority status is displayed on the left while the key priority status after the transition is displayed on the right Independent key transition execution section This is used to insert or delete keys 1 to 4 and carry out auto transitions Key source name display TRANS KEY2 TRANS KEY3 TRANS KEY4 TRANS Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel seq Jo suonouny pue seweN z 13 deyo 25 Name KEY1 ON to KEY4 ON DSK1 ON to DSK4 ON forthe PGM PST bank Description e Press the corresponding one of these buttons to cut key 1 to key 4 in or out instantaneously e The button lights red when the corresponding key appears in the final program output and lights amber when the key does not Sued JO suoljounj pue sowen Zz Jeldeup 26 KEY1 TRANS to KEY4 TRANS DSK1 TRANS to DSK4 TRANS for PGM PST banks Press these buttons to carry out an auto transition Key source name display This displays the source name selected on the corresponding keyer Key delegation buttons Assign the desired keyer by pressing KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 and turning them on While these buttons are held down you can select a key source with the cross
564. the data in the specified register To cancel a snapshot save operation Hold down the STOR STAT button and press the UNDO button The color of the STOR STAT button changes to yellow Applying attributes 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on The button display in the memory recall section changes as shown below To cancel applying attributes press the EDIT ENBL button once more or press the EXIT button Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad sjoysdeus z Jajdeyo 169 sjoysdeus gz sajdeu9 170 e When the reference region is M E 1 or P P e When the reference region is other than M E 1 or P P and effect dissolve settings are possible 2 Apply attributes p 167 with the following buttons TEMP ATTR button Set a temporary attribute Set this to Off when setting an attribute EFF DISS button Apply the effect dissolve attribute DUR xxx button Set the effect dissolve duration where xxx is the currently set value When you press this button the memory recall section switches to numeric keypad input mode and you can enter the setting value AUTO TRNS button Apply t
565. the existing data press Append When you execute Replace all of the saved files in the logical drive are erased immediately before the saving operations 4 Check the message then press Yes This starts the file saving operation If there is no directory a directory is automatically created and the files are saved within it 5 Check the message then press OK To rename a directory Select a directory in the list and press Rename In the keyboard window enter the new directory name and press Enter The name of a directory is limited to eight characters The following names cannot be used CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 Recalling Files You can recall all of the saved files on the HDD into frame memory 1 Carry out steps 1 and 2 of Saving Files p 118 It is not possible to select a partition FMHDD1 to FMHDD15 of an HDD in which no file is saved 2 Inthe lt Restore gt group perform one of the following e To replace the existing data with the recalled data press Replace e To add the recalled data to the existing data press Append When you execute Replace any existing data in frame memory is lost immediately before the recalling operations 3 Check the message then press Yes This starts the file recall operation 4 Check the message then pre
566. the format converter e Signals output from connectors assigned to Out 1 to 12 e Multi Viewer 1 and 2 e FC Output 1 and 2 2 Select the number of the FC format converter that you want to set from the table on the left However the setting is not possible when FC Config p 2 6 is set to 8 In 3 Use any of the following methods to select the target outputs in the list on the left 4 Press Set Setting the Format Converter Outputs Setting the format converter Display the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output gt FC Adjust menu 7333 6 The subsequent operations are the same as for the format converter input settings Signal Output Settings For details about operations amp Selecting the Format Converter Conversion p 244 Copying format converter output data 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output gt FC Adjust menu 7333 6 press Copy The Copy Swap gt Copy gt Format Converter menu 3121 appears 2 Select the output you want to set 3 Select Output in the lt Data Select gt group 4 Select the data and press Copy Making Settings for the Multi Viewer The multi viewer is a function for splitting the screen into some windows and simultaneously displaying multiple images in those windows The screen can be split into 4 or 10 windows which can be individually set for each of 2 channel multi viewers To output the multi viewer signals it is necessary to as
567. the key image p 70 Key edge functions can only be used for keys 1 and 2 DSK1 and DSK2 for the PGM PST bank Type Normal Description This is the state with no key edge modifiers applied Image Border This applies a uniform width border to the edge of the key You can adjust the border width and density You can also enable the separate edge function and adjust the top bottom left and right border widths separately Drop border This applies a border below and to the right of the key for example You can adjust the border width position and density Shadow This applies a shadow below and to the right of the key for example You can adjust the shadow width position and density Outline This uses the outline of the original key as the key You can adjust the width and density of the outline You can also enable the separate edge function and adjust the top bottom left and right outline widths separately Type Description Image Emboss This applies an embossing effect to the outline of the key You can adjust the width and position of the embossing and the density You can adjust the density separately for key fill and key edge When embossing is on the Fine Key and zabton functions turn off Soft edge This softens the edge of the key This inserts a translucent pattern behind a key You can adjust the p
568. the region names register numbers and status and attribute settings 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the list and in the selection window select the region Snapshot Operations in the Menus sjoysdeus z Jajdeyo 171 sjoysdeus z sejdeu9 172 You can select more than one region To select all regions press ALL 3 Press OK 4 Selecta register To select all levels press ALL 5 In the lt Attribute gt group press the buttons for the attributes you want to apply turning them on Carry out the following procedures for each of the attributes For details about attributes and available attributes Snapshot Attributes p 167 To apply cross point hold attributes Applying the key disable attribute so the key state is not reflected to cross point hold requires a setting in the Setup menu For details amp Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings p 251 1 Press Xpt Hold The Xpt Hold 6321 1 menu appears The status area shows a list of the currently selected regions and bus names 2 Select a bus When the region is set to RTR Router select a destination To select one or more buses destinations press Plural and then select To select all buses destinations press ALL 3 If the region is set to RTR Router press RTR Level Select If RTR Router is not selected skip to step 5 A window appears for selecting the router level 4
569. till not completed the two end simultaneously The key is deleted even if the independent key transition has not completed Wipe and mix dissolve are carried out simultaneously Example When the independent key transition AUTO TRANS button is pressed later mx Common transition wipe 4 pe gt Independent key transition mix The key is deleted even if the independent key transition has not completed Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions With the key not inserted the key is gradually inserted using the two transition types simultaneously If the common transition or independent key transition ends first the other continues to completion gt The transitions continue until both are completed Wipe and mix dissolve are carried out simultaneously Time offset execution If the AUTO TRANS buttons for the two transitions are pressed with a time offset the following is the result Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent key transition is a mix dissolve Time offset execution with the key inserted With the key inserted the key is gradually deleted using two transition types with a time offset Whichever button is pressed first when the common transition completes even if the independent key transition is still not completed the two end simultaneously Independent Key Transitions Time offs
570. ting in the Setup menu is required in order to use DME wipes with a background selected for a next transition In this case Keyl cannot be used on the corresponding bank The setting is configured in the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu 7331 amp p 241 e When the screen aspect ratio is 4 3 in HD format the video shrinks to fit on a 16 9 screen including added video on the left and right sides Use the crop function as required to extract the 4 3 image Types of DME Wipe Pattern You can use DME wipe patterns that execute in one channel mode DME wipe patterns fall into the following groups For schematic patterns and numbers of each group DME Wipe Pattern List p 264 and Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List p 265 Pattern group Effect Pattern numbers Used in backgrounds Used in keys Slide The new video slides in over the old video 1001 to 1008 7001 to 7008 Squeeze The new video appears squeezed over the old video 1021 to 1031 7021 to 7031 and progressively expands to cover it Door The new video moves like a door closing and 1041 to 1044 progressively covers the old video Flip tumble The old video rotates about an axis and is replaced 1101 1102 by the new video During the transition the signal from the utility bus of the M E bank appears as the background Frame in out Completed in two transitions In the first transition 1201 to 1208 1221 7201 to 7208
571. ting operation for the selected device timeline setting mode Flexi Pad The Flexi Pad is used for creating and recalling snapshots wipe snapshots DME wipe snapshots key snapshots effects shotboxes and macros for setting the transition rate and for adjusting keys Alphanumeric display Mode selection buttons EDIT ENBL button W Adjustment knobs Region selection buttons Memory recall section Adjustment knob displays Mode selection buttons These select the mode Name EFF effect Description Press this to carry out effect creation recall editing execution deletion SNAPSHOT Press this to carry out snapshot creation recall editing deletion SHOTBOX Press this to carry out shotbox creation recall editing execution deletion MCRO macro Press this to carry out macro creation editing execution deletion Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Name Description WIPE wipe Press this to carry out wipe snapshot snapshot creation recall deletion and wipe adjustments DME WIPE Press this to carry out DME wipe DME wipe snapshot creation recall deletion and snapshot DME wipe adjustments TRANS RATE Press this to set the transiti
572. tion angle of the Z ring SHTL shuttle Press this button and turn the Z ring to play or rewind the tape disk or frame memory clip at a variable speed and direction proportional to the rotation angle of the Z ring JOG Press this button and turn the Z ring to frame advance the tape disk or frame memory clip at a speed and direction proportional to the rotation of the Z ring CUE Press this button to cue up the start point of the tape disk or frame memory clip REW rewind Press this button to rewind the tape disk or frame memory clip PLAY Press this button to play the tape disk or frame memory clip FF fast forward Press this button to fast forward the tape disk or frame memory clip ALL STOP Press this button to stop all tape disk or frame memory clip operations Selecting a VTR Extended VTR disk recorder To select the VTR Extended VTR disk recorder press the corresponding device buttons turning them on in the device control block You can turn on more than one button at the same time For details about frame memory clip operations Frame Memory Clip Operations p 111 Controlling the tape disk transport Using the buttons in the device control block you can control the tape transport or the disk transport You can operate a VTR Extended VTR or disk recorder from the transition control block when configured in the Setup menu For details
573. tion for error status 6 Select the action to be set T Press Action Set to confirm the action selection Selectable actions for various trigger types e When the trigger type is other than Status The x in M E x is the M E bank number the x in DSKx is the DSK number and the x in Keyx is the key number When Source is M E x Cut Auto Trans Keyx Cut Keyx Auto Trans Keyx SS Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind No Action When Source is P P Cut Auto Trans DSKx Cut DSKx Auto Trans FTB Cut FTB Auto Trans DSKx SS Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall amp Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind No Action When Source is Common No Action When the trigger type is Status The x in M E x is the M E bank number the x in DSKx is the DSK number and the x in Keyx is the key number When Source is M E x Keyx On No Action When Source is P P DSKx On No Action When Source is Common Error Make Error Break No Action Test firing the trigger Press Test Fire This outputs a trigger from the selected output port This is no output when the trigger type is Status The AUX Control menu 7337 5 appears 2 Select the 9 pin port for the setting from the lt Control gt group Remote S1 Makes the settings for the Remote S1 port Remote S2 Makes the settings for the Remote S2 port 3 Select the AUX bus 4 Select whether to enable or disable AUX b
574. tion of the wipe pattern with the adjustment knobs No Parameter Adjustment 1 H Horizontal position 2 V Vertical position Buttons for setting the wipe direction NORM normal Sets wipe to normal forward direction NORM REV normal reverse Sets the wipe direction to alternate between normal and reverse for each transition REV reverse Sets wipe to the opposite direction of normal Buttons for setting the wipe pattern limit PTN LIMT pattern limit Enables setting of the pattern limit using the adjustment knobs LIMT SET limit set If you change the pattern size with the fader lever then press this button this sets the current size as the pattern limit No Parameter 1 P Adjustment Pattern limit range Other buttons EXIT Exits the editing mode and returns the memory recall section to wipe snapshot mode KNOB 1 2 When the knob adjustments are on two pages this switches between parameter group 1 2 and parameter group 2 2 Wipe Pattern Operations in the Flexi Pad sedim g Je deyup 91 sedi g JaydeyD 92 Wipe modify clear When the WIPE button is held down holding down the region selection button for the selected region together returns all the wipe settings of the region to the initial status settings For details about initial status Saving User Defined Settings p 214 Saving Canceling and Deleting Edited Wipe Patte
575. tions Aiowey ewes zZ Ja deyo 111 oway ewes 7 Ja deyo 112 Recalling Clips Recalling a clip You can recall a clip from each of frame memories 1 to 8 1 Open the Frame Memory gt Clip gt Recall menu 2521 When Pair is on only pair files each consisting of a main file and a sub file are displayed When Pair is set to off both single files and pair files are shown Frame memory Pair selection buttons selection area Frame memory folder Target selection buttons selection area CGWB ah ed Clip file selection area Direct Recall button Find button 2 Inthe frame memory selection area select the frame memory to be assigned p 106 3 If Direct Recall is on press it to turn it off 4 inthe frame memory folder selection area select the desired folder By pressing More to switch the display you can select from a maximum of 12 folders 5 Press the thumbnail of the clip you want to recall 6 Press Recall This recalls the clip file which is assigned to the FM you selected in step 2 In pair mode if a clip is selected the main file is output to FM1 and the sub file to FM2 In single mode when only one of FM1 and FM2 is selected the front file on the thumbnail is output Frame Memory Clip Operations To recall in direct recall mode Direct recall means that pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file In this mode only the front thum
576. ts are as follows Switcher signal Format converter signal format setting format setting EC inputito8 FC Output 1 2 480i 59 94 720P 59 94 720P 59 94 1080i 59 94 1080i 59 94 576i 50 720P 50 720P 50 1080i 50 1080i 50 720P 50 576i 50 576i 50 1080i 50 1080i 50 720P 59 94 480i 59 94 480i 59 94 1080i 59 94 1080i 59 94 1080i 50 576i 50 576i 50 720P 50 720P 50 1080i 59 94 480i 59 94 480i 59 94 720P 59 94 720P 59 94 Setting the conversion format 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt System gt Format menu 7313 Current settings of format converter SWRi FC Input SWR1 FC Output Inputt 4 Input5 8 Format Format 2 Press Format Converter The Format Converter menu 7313 4 appears 3 To select the conversion format for format converter inputs 1 to 4 press Input 1 4 Format in the lt SWR1 FC Input gt group 4 Press the button for the desired signal format in the pop up window 5 Set one of the following as determined by the setting in FC Config p 216 e If 8 in is selected press Input 5 8 Format and then set the desired signal format in the same way as in step 4 e If 4 in 2 out is selected press Output 1 2 Format in the lt SWR1 FC Output gt group and then press the the button for the desired format To delay unconverted input signals frame delay function When the signal format is 1080i 59 94 or 1080i 50 you can press Frame Delay
577. ttachment Pre macro Mode in which the button function is executed after macro execution has completed Post macro Mode in which the macro is executed after carrying out the button function Macro only Mode in which the button function is not executed and the macro only is executed The linking mode selection is performed in the cross point control block of the PGM PST bank or M E bank For pre macro mode and post macro mode assign the function to the Ist row and make the selection by pressing the button For macro only mode press the pre macro and post macro selection buttons simultaneously to make a selection You can assign any one of the 250 macro registers to a button For a button whose function is switched by delegation you can make a separate macro attachment for each function For each control panel you can make up to 1000 macro attachment settings The macro attachment setting is possible for the following bus buttons Block Button Cross point Background A row cross point buttons control block e Background B row cross point buttons e Cross point buttons of the bus assigned to the 2nd row e 2nd row buttons assigned by the utility shotbox function e Buttons set to Inhibit Device control block Buttons assigned the function of the VTR disk recorder frame memory operating mode PLAY CUE STOP and START TC buttons Transition control block Fader and buttons assigned the fol
578. ues for the particular key type Clip Gain Density Filter etc In the case of chroma keying all adjustment values return to their default values e Key position e Key inversion e Clean mode For details about the method of operation amp Returning Parameters to Default Values p 38 Key Setting Operations Using Menus There are two ways of making key settings either using menus or using the Flexi Pad This section describes basic procedures for making key settings using the menus taking the M E 1 gt Key1 menu as an example Operations in the Key menus are the same for each switcher bank Key Setting Menus The key setting menus for each bank are as follows No Parameter Adjustment Density Key density 4 Filter Filter coefficient a Setting this value to 1 produces the through state in which no filter is applied The larger the value the more strongly the filter is applied When a chroma key is selected Bank Keys set Menu M E 1 Keys 1 to 4 M E 1 gt Key1 to 4 PGM Downstream keys 1 to PGM PST gt DSK1 to 4 PST 4 Key Type Setting Setting the key type in a menu 1 Open the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu 1111 2 Inthe lt Key Type gt group select the key type Luminance Luminance key Linear Linear key Chroma Chroma key Color Vector Color vector key Key Wipe Pattern Key wipe pattern key 3 Carry out the following sett
579. umber of folders was reached and therefore files were restored to the default folder Alternatively the file name was changed because a file of the same name already exists Success But the number of folder exceeds the max limit 12 and the files expected for the folders were restored in the default folder 50 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu recalling a file from the external device was correctly done However the limit on the number of folders was reached and therefore files were restored to the default folder Success But some still files had been renamed because the same file name already existed 51 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu recalling a file from the external device was correctly done However some files were renamed because of still image file name conflicts Success But some Clip files had been renamed because the same Clip name already existed 52 2565 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Restore from DDR VTR In the above menu recalling a file from the external device was correctly done However some clips were renamed because of clip name conflicts No external HDD was found 2 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Restore but the external HDD could not be recognized Check that the exter
580. uration value e When an auto transition is set Displayed Attributes set character string T Auto transition is set e When a GPI output is set Displayed Attributes set character string Port number GPI output is set for the port of the displayed number e When a clip event is set Displayed Attributes set character string On Clip event is set Displayed Attributes set 5 Inthe lt Recall Mode gt group set the state for save and character string recall operations A B Cross point hold is set for the A or B background bus XPT ee the key material selection data is saved or recalled 128 4 Cross point hold is set for one of the Modifier Only the key modifier settings are saved or key 1 to 4 buses recalled U1 eset hold is set for the utility Transition Only the independent key transition al settings are saved or recalled Aux Cross point hold is set for one of the AUX buses Fm1 Fm2 Cross point hold is set for one of the i i ean ene Creating and Saving a Master RTR Cross point hold is set for the Router Snapshot region To save a master snapshot recall the Snapshot gt Master Snapshot gt Store menu 6311 and refer to the operation in Creating and Saving a Master Timeline with the Menu amp p 163 Recalling the Store menu 1 Open the Snapshot gt Master Snapshot gt Store menu 6311 The status area shows the master snapshot register names
581. us control from the lt Control Mode gt group Enable Enables control of the port selected in step 2 Disable Disables control of the port selected in step 2 Manual Sets whether control of the port selected in step 2 is possible or not depend on the setting in the Misc menu 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 as required to make the settings for other ports Enabling or Disabling AUX Bus Control 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Device Interface menu 7337 press AUX Control Interfacing with External Devices Selecting the Mode for Turning Off Keys upon Receiving the Editor Command Selects the mode for turning off keys when an All Stop command is received from the editor 1 Inthe Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Device Interface menu 7337 press Editor I F The Editor I F menu 7337 8 appears 2 Select one of the following modes All When an All Stop command is received all keys for the selected regions are turned off Specified When an All Stop command is received among all the keys for the selected regions only the keys specified by the editor are turned off When an All Stop command is received in the process of a transition the keys selected for the next transition are also turned off Router Interface and Tally Setup Router Interface Settings In this system the interface with a router routing switcher uses the S Bus protocol It is therefore necess
582. used Device control block operations for key shrinking magnification rotation and movement RSZR CTRL button Delegation buttons Trackball Hoe a RENB ROT RSZR button Z ring button button LOC button ASP button 1 Location X Move key horizontally 2 Location Y Move key vertically 3 Size Magnify or shrink key 4 Rotation X Rotate key horizontally 4P Rotation Y Rotate key vertically 5 Perspective Perspective a X is turned on in the lt Rotation gt group of the Rotation menu b Y is turned on in the lt Rotation gt group of the Rotation menu When Rotation Enable is turned on the movement range of the center of the image is limited to the top and bottom edges of the image frame Press the RSZR CTRL button turning it on 2 Use the delegation buttons to select the key to which you want to apply a resizer function 3 Press the RSZR button turning it on 4 e To change the aspect ratio turn on the ASP button e To shrink magnify or move the key turn on the LOC button e To rotate the key turn on the RENB button and then the ROT butto
583. ust menu 7336 5 appears 4 Select the setting to apply For each GPI port there can be up to eight links 5 In the lt Video Button gt group press Select The selected video or button name is reflected in the status area To clear a video button name link Make the selection to which the setting applies then press Clear in the lt Video Button gt group 6 To select for each bus whether the GPI link setting is enabled or disabled select the bus to which the setting applies T Inthe lt Bus gt group select any of the following Enable Enables the GPI link setting for the selected bus Disable Disables the GPI link setting for the selected bus All Enable Enables the GPI link setting for all buses Setting the delay value 1 mnte Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Link gt GPI Link Adjust menu 7336 5 select the output port for which you want to set the delay value and the corresponding delay value No Parameter Adjustment 1 GPI Port GPI output port to be configured 5 Delay Delay value for the output port 2 Press Delay Set Setting the operation mode when selecting M E reentry inputs When you select a re entry signal in the cross point control block of an M E block upstream M E block the output of the upstream M E block is read in You can set the system so that when a GPI link is set for the cross point selected on the A bus of the upstream M E block this triggers the G
584. ut the installation and when it completes normally the Install box shows OK Saving a Frame Memory Clip with Ancillary Data 1 mnte Engineering Setup gt System gt Install Unit Config menu 7316 select SWR1 and press Unit Config The Unit Config menu 7316 8 appears 2 Press FM Ancillary turning it on On Save with ancillary data Off Save without ancillary data Enabling this selection by pressing Execute in the following step reinitializes all frame memory data Make backups of required data beforehand 3 Press Execute 4 Check the message then press Yes Setting the Number of Format Converter Input Outputs 1 mnte Engineering Setup gt System gt Install Unit Config menu 7316 select SWR1 and press Unit Config The Unit Config menu 7316 8 appears 2 Inthe FC Config group press one of the following 8 in 8 inputs no outputs 4 in 2 out 4 inputs and 2 outputs 3 Press Execute 4 Check the message then press Yes System Maintenance Setting the Date and Time 1 mnte Engineering Setup gt System gt Maintenance menu 7317 set the following parameters System Maintenance Parameter group 1 2 No Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Hour Hour 0 to 23 2 Min Minute 0 to 59 Sec Second 0 to 59 Parameter group 2 2 No Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Month Month 1 to 12 2 Day Day 1 to 31 3 Year Year
585. utton turning it on 2 Press the EFF DUR button turning it on The alphanumeric display shows DUR followed by the effect duration minutes seconds frames 3 Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired timecode value as a maximum of six digits For example to set 3 minutes 7 seconds and 15 frames enter 30715 You can also use the TRIM button to enter a difference value p 153 4 Press the ENTR button In addition to the above operation the effect duration may also be changed as a result of inserting or deleting keyframes For details amp Time Settings p 146 Delay Setting 1 Press the EFF button then press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Press the DLY button turning it on The alphanumeric display shows DELAY followed by the current delay minutes seconds frames 3 Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired timecode value as a maximum of four digits You can also use the TRIM button to enter a difference value p 153 4 Press the ENTR button to confirm the entry Path Setting The term path p 147 refers to the specification of how interpolation is carried out from one keyframe to the next You set keyframe paths in the Key Frame gt Path menu 6113 Basic Procedure for Path Settings Selecting the category From the buttons in the function button area select the category for which you want to make the setting 1st row
586. utton in the M E 1 turning it on 2 Press one of the key snapshot buttons 1 to 4 while holding down the K SS STORE or KEY SS button The color of the key snapshot button indicates the following Off Nothing is saved in the register Lit Settings are saved in the register For a register holding a snapshot the register name is shown as up to eight characters If you save a key snapshot to a button to which settings are already saved the existing contents of the register will be overwritten The button you pressed lights yellow Recalling a key snapshot For example the following procedure recalls the state of the M E 1 key 1 settings 1 Press the KEY 1 key delegation button in the M E 1 turning it on 2 Press the key snapshot button 1 to 4 of the register you want to recall Key snapshot operations in the Flexi Pad By default the KEY SS key snapshot mode selection button does not appear in the Flexi Pad To carry out key snapshot saving and recall in this control block it is first necessary in the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt Multi Function Module gt Mode Sel Assign menu 7321 21 to assign the Key Snapshot mode to a mode selection button To save a key snapshot For example to save a key snapshot to register 1 of KEY1 of M E 1 select the M E1 region and KEY 1 then use the following procedure T Press the KEY SS button The button displays in the memory recall section change as
587. utton to display the region selection buttons in the memory recall section For details about assigning region selection buttons in the Flexi Pad amp Assigning Regions to Region Selection Buttons in the Flexi Pad p 220 Memory recall section Region selection buttons Pressing the MORE button or the EXIT button in the memory recall section restores the memory recall section to the previous screen Recalling a register from the Flexi Pad EFF button Alphanumeric display Memory recall section Region selection buttons T In the Flexi Pad press the EFF button turning it on 2 Press the button corresponding to the region you want to select turning it on You can select more than one button M E1 P P Selects the M E 1 and PGM PST regions respectively USER 1 to USER 8 Selects the User regions PBUS Selects P Bus GPI Selects GPI MCRO Selects Macro DEV 1 to DEV 12 Selects devices ALL Selects all regions MSTR Selects the master timeline Creating and Saving a Master Timeline in the Flexi Pad p 162 For details about the method of region selection Selecting regions
588. window 35 Keyer copy swap 123 Keyframe 17 145 148 copying 157 creating 154 deleting 156 duration 146 159 inserting 154 modifying 154 moving 156 path 147 159 time setting 146 159 Keyframe loop 157 Keyframe pause 157 Keys 62 inserting and deleting 13 modifiers 63 output status 50 priority 49 K SS STORE button 26 L Left button 35 Line feed button 35 Linear key 62 Link cross point buttons 252 253 key transition 254 M E 253 Link menu 252 Local disk 200 formatting 217 Locking 217 Loop 139 Luminance key 62 M M E copy swap 123 Macro auto insert mode 184 creating 181 183 186 editing 181 183 186 execution 182 execution mode 183 238 file editing rules 289 menu macro 194 offline editing 188 online editing 186 operations 182 overview 180 registers 180 182 186 Macro attachment 190 listing 193 macro execution 193 setting and canceling 191 Macro register editing 186 recalling 182 Macro timeline 198 creating editing 199 Magnitude 86 Main mask operation 73 overview 64 Maintenance menu 216 238 Mask processing order 251 Masks operation 73 overview 64 Master region 144 Master snapshot 167 171 173 Master timeline 145 148 162 Matte copy swap 124 Max min value indication 34 Memory recall section 29 Menu basic operations 36 overview 30 recalling 36 screen 30 selecting 37 selecting list items 37 setting parameters 37 shortcut menus 38 top menu list 30 MENU button 28 Menu macro cre
589. with independent key transitions p 57 To cut the key in or out instantaneously Press one of the KEY 1 ON to KEY4 ON buttons for each keyer In an independent key transition the pattern limit function is not available Copying keys To copy keys within the same block Press the KEY3 button while holding down the KEY 1 button Information for key 1 is copied to key 3 Independent Key Transitions suolisued pue uonoajas jeubis Je deyp 59 suolisues pue uonoajas jeubls Je deuD 60 To copy keys between blocks Press the DSK3 button in the PGM PST bank while holding down the KEY 1 button in the M E 1 bank Information for key 1 of M E 1 is copied to key 3 of PGM PST Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate There are two ways of setting the independent key transition rate using the Flexi Pad to enter a numeric value or using the Misc menu to access the Transition menu for each switcher bank You can also display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate for each bank and change the settings p 126 If in the Setup menus you set insertion deletion as independent modes you can set the transition rates for key insertion and deletion independently For example with the system in the state with the key not inserted the transition rate setting applies to key insertion Setting the independent key transition rate in the Flexi
590. x Macro gt File Edit gt Off Line Edit In the above menu when storing the file could not be written Store once more Failed 7162 File gt All External File gt Import Export In the above menu importing a file failed Check the format of the original file and try again e The Source and the target are the same directory Please change the source or the target directory 7172 File gt Configure gt Unit ID Copy In the above menu the same directory and ID were selected for source and target Select a different directory and ID Extraction ERROR 1 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if an internal processing error occurs Create thumbnail failed 2 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if thumbnail creation failed internal processing error Red Symbol file not match 3 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if a red marker frame file is invalid Blue Symbol file not match 4 2542 Frame Memory gt File gt Auto Extraction In the above menu when Extraction Start is pressed this message appears if a blue marker frame file is invalid No data between two symbol files 5 2542 Frame Me
591. xternal HDD could not be accessed Check that the external HDD is correctly formatted Cannot access the directory 20 Cannot access the directory 21 2561 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Format 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menus an attempt was made to execute Refresh Status but the directory of the external HDD could not be accessed The external HDD is busy 22 2561 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Format 2562 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD Backup Restore In the above menus an attempt was made to execute Refresh Status but the external HDD was busy and could not be accessed Try again after you check that the access lamp of the HDD or the indicator of the menu is turned off Rename This operation is inhibited because of the illegal combination in the selected files 7151 1 File gt Frame Memory gt Frame Memory gt File Edit In the above menu this message appears if you select files of different types and press Rename Check that the selected files are all of the same type Files currently used for playback cannot be renamed 2546 Frame Memory gt File gt Rename In the above menu this message appears if Rename is pressed when the selected files include a movie clip currently being played back No external HDD was found 2 2546 Frame Memory gt External Device gt Ext HDD B
592. y If the UTIL SBOX button is selected in the 1st row the function name is displayed Name SHIFT Description Performs one of the following functions according to the setting made in the Setup menu e Source name display shift button Displays the name of the signal in shift mode in the source name display e Bus shift button Functions as the shift button for all busses in the M E PGM PST bank Source name displays These show the names of the signals sources or registers which can be selected on the cross point buttons in four character mode or auto mode While the SHIFT button assigned to the Ist row or the SHIFT button assigned to the cross point button row is enabled the source name of the signal assigned to the cross point button in shift mode appears You can set the source name display mode in the Setup menu The following displays may also appear depending on the status of the IST ROW DSPLY 2ND ROW DSPLY and KEY buttons Button name Display 1ST ROW 2ND ROW DSPLY DSPLY Off Off A B bus signal names On Off Bus names or function names Off On Key AUX bus signal names a or function names a Key signal names are displayed when the KEY button is pressed and video signal names are displayed when the KEY button is not pressed Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel seq Jo suonouny pue seweN zsaideyo 23 Tran
593. y appears p 103 N From the pair selection buttons press the buttons corresponding to FM1 and FM2 This assigns the signals to FM1 and FM2 The FM1 and FM2 output status appears on the target FM selection buttons p 104 3 if required press Pair to select the FM operation mode pair mode On Operate on FM1 3 5 7 and FM2 4 6 8 as a pair Off Operate on FM1 3 5 7 and FM2 4 6 8 individually For details Pair mode p 103 In the Pair Recombination menu the Pair operation is not possible 4 Press the target FM selection button FM1 or FM2 p 104 to select the FM to which operations apply Still Image Operations When Pair is On Regardless of whether you press FM1 or FM2 the pair is selected When Pair is Off One of the targets must be selected However in the Clip gt Play menu you can select both FM1 and FM2 Selecting a frame memory folder Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area amp p 105 By pressing More to switch the display you can select from a maximum of 12 folders Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear Capturing and Saving an Input Image As the input material for the frame memory you can use the signal selected on the frame memory source bus You can use a mask for this signal Allocating a frame memory source bus signal to one of FM1 to FM8 then carrying out a freeze captures a still im
594. y or swap involving independent key transition DME wipe settings DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap in the independent key transition control block You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the following keyers Target bank Target keyer Target data M E 1 Keys 1 to 2 DME wipe settings in the independent key PGM PST Downstream transition control keys 1 to 2 block Matte data copy and swap You can copy or swap the matte data among the following color generators Target bank Target keyer and data M E 1 Keys 1to4and e Matte data for key fill PGM PST downstream e Matte data for key keys 1 to 4 edge fill in each bank Matte data for wipe border edge Color e Matte data for color background 1 background e Matte data for color background 2 a Only among keyers that support resizer and key edge Copy and Swap Target bank Target keyer and data M E 1 Keys 1to4and Colors 1 and 2 for PGM PST downstream key fill keys 1 to 4 e Colors 1 and 2 for in each block key edge fia Zabton color data Colors 1 and 2 for wipe border Color data for preset color mix Color e Colors 1 and 2 for color background 1 background e Colors 1 and 2 for color background 2 a Only among keyers that support resizer and key edge Copying format converter data You can copy data between format converter inputs Similarly you can copy format converter da
595. y out the transition in the transition control block For a gradual transition such as a mix dissolve or wipe Press the AUTO TRANS button or operate the fader lever To execute a transition by pressing the AUTO TRANS button first set the transition rate specified as the duration of the transition p 52 When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type you can also set the transition range amp p 53 For an instantaneous transition Press the CUT button For details Executing a Transition p 51 Key Priority Setting If a number of keys are already inserted in the current video you can check or change the key priority that is to say the order in which the keys are overlaid When a key priority KEY PRIOR is selected as the next transition you can also change the key priority in the new video The key priority values go from 1 to 4 with a higher priority key being in front as seen on the screen Priority sequence 1 to 4 on the screen You can set the key priority for keys inserted in the current screen and for keys after the transition There are two ways of setting the priority either using the PRIOR SET button in the transition control block or using the Misc menu to access the Key Priority menu for each switcher bank When the operating mode is set to multi program the key priority setting cannot be made Setting the Key Priority in the
596. y you can assign an arbitrary action or a shortcut for a frequently used menu to a particular button then instantly recall the action or menu by pressing the button For details see Utility Execution p 176 in chapter is M IAJOAC Ja deyD Shotboxes The term shotbox refers to a function whereby for each specified region see Regions p 144 in chapter 11 any snapshot or keyframe effect can be recalled simultaneously For details see Shotbox p 176 in chapter 13 Macros The term macro refers to the function whereby a sequence of signal selections and other operations on the control panel is saved as data in memory macro register so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same sequence of operations The individual control panel operations constituting a macro are termed events Macros also provide the following functions Menu macros The term menu macro refers to the function whereby a sequence of menu operations is saved as an event so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same sequence of operations Macro timelines By recording macro recalls and execute actions on a timeline in the same way as for keyframes in an effect you can automatically execute them in a sequence Macro attachments Macro attachment is a function whereby a macro register is assigned to a control panel button or a particular
597. you set a macro attachment to a cross point button you can make the setting without changing the bus cross points Carry out this selection in the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Operation gt Macro menu 7326 6 p 238 To make a macro attachment setting in macro only mode To make a macro attachment in macro only mode use the following procedure Macro Attachment Assigning soe p seideup 191 soley p seideyp 192 T Recall the macro register 1 to 250 that you want to assign to the button p 182 2 Press and hold the PRE MCRO button and the POST MCRO button assigned in the 1st row of the cross point control block simultaneously and then press the desired button in background A row The cross point button you pressed flashes green and the register you recalled in step 1 is assigned to the button To check macro attachment settings Hold down the PRE MCRO button or POST MCRO button assigned to the Ist row in the cross point control block While it is held down buttons for which macro attachments are set flash as follows While the PRE MCRO button is held down e Buttons set in pre macro mode flash amber e Buttons set in macro only mode flash green While the POST MCRO button is held down e Buttons set in post macro mode flash amber e Buttons set in macro only mode flash green Setting a macro attachment to a fader lever You can set a macro attachment to any particular position
598. ype and No values appear 3 In the lt Alias Name Gp gt group press Set Transmit the description name selected here from the router Tally Group Settings With the S Bus protocol tally control is possible for groups to 8 but in this system you can use either groups 1 to 4 or groups 5 to 8 You can also select whether or not to transfer the tally information over the S Bus Setting the tally groups 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Group Tally menu 7362 2 To select a consecutive sequence of groups from each of groups 1 to 4 and groups 5 to 8 set Al Group Enable to On 3 Inthe lt Tally Group gt group select the desired groups 4 set SBus Tally Enable to On to enable the tally information on the S Bus Router Interface Settings Tally Group Settings dmes lleL pue eoepeju 4einN0Y 64 Je deyD 257 dnjas Aye pue soepaju JojnoY 6 Ja deuD 258 Wiring Settings When configuring a system in which the switcher inputs and outputs are connected to a router setting this connection configuration referred to as wiring in the S Bus space or inputting the information which specifies the physical wiring is necessary The settings are common to the parallel and serial tallies Making New Wiring Settings 1 Open the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Wiring gt New menu 7363 1 2 Set the destination When switcher inputs and outputs are conne

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

DICE interface for iPod  Road-book quécé ??? mode d`emploi :  取扱説明書等 - アイ・オー・データ機器  特集 地球温暖化対策 環境対策・環境対策工  Makita HR2811FX Use and Care Manual    Universal Remote Control UR5L-8520L User's Manual    Morso 7110 Operating instructions  ERYTHROFORTE®  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file